JP2023174994A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To execute a process corresponding to each kind of state when power is shut down in a process when power starts to be supplied to a game machine or when power is shut down.SOLUTION: While a movable accessory member is disposed in a standby position if a power switch is off when power is shut down, the movable accessory member is disposed in a standby position if power switch is on when power is shut down. When power is restored, an error process is executed if a state of the power switch when power is shut down does not match the state of the power switch obtained when power is restored. When power is restored, a power-on time process when it is normal is executed and an RTC performance is executed at a lapse of predetermined time and a variation game can be started when a predetermined condition is satisfied if the state of the power switch is off when power is shut down. When power is restored, a power-failure restoration time process in nonemergency is executed if the state of the power switch is on when power is shut down.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 78

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines.

In game machines such as pachinko and slot machines, power outage monitoring processing (power supply monitoring processing) monitors whether the drive voltage supplied to the main control device (board) that controls the progress of the game is below a predetermined value. is executed. In this power outage monitoring process, if the drive voltage is below a predetermined value, it is determined that a power outage has occurred, and various information is backed up. After the power is restored, the game proceeds in the state before the power was cut off based on the backup of various information.

JP2019-072132A Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2000-024234

Here, in the process when power supply to the gaming machine is started and the process when the power is cut off, it is desirable to execute processes according to various states at the time of the power cut.

The gaming machine according to the present invention includes:
a displacement means (91) capable of displacing between a first state (off state of the power switch 91) and a second state different from the first state (on state of the power switch 91);
detection means (91a) capable of detecting the state of the displacement means;
Equipped with
When it is determined that the displacement means (91) is in the first state based on the detection content by the detection means (91a), the state is determined to be normal (for example, power is restored by turning on the power switch 91, power switch 91 is turned on, The first process (e.g., power-on process) is executed by determining that the power is cut off by turning off the
When it is determined that the displacement means (91) is in the second state (for example, the power switch 91 is on) based on the detection content by the detection means (91a), the displacement means (91) is in an abnormal state (the power switch 91 is on). It is characterized in that a second process different from the first process (for example, a process at the time of recovery from a power outage) is executed upon determining that the power is restored without turning on the power supply or shutting down the power without turning off the power switch 91.

1 is a perspective view showing an example of the configuration of a gaming machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention. 2 is an exploded view showing an example of the configuration of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is an exploded view showing an example of the configuration of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a front view showing an example of a game board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 5 is a perspective view showing an example of an opening/closing door provided on the game board shown in FIG. 4. FIG. The figure which shows an example of the opening/closing door provided in the game board shown in FIG. 4, the clown device, and a game ball retention part. A perspective view of the Cloon device. 7 is a sectional view taken along the X1-X1 cutting line in FIG. 6. FIG. A 7-segment display section displays specific information indicating a specific period for retaining game balls in the game ball retention section, a predetermined period for accumulating the number of game balls that have entered the special out ball opening of the croon device, and a non-set value. A diagram for explaining a prescribed period. 10(A) is a sectional view taken along the line X2-X2 in FIG. 8, and FIGS. 10(B) and 10(C) are sectional views taken along the line X3-X3 in FIG. 8. 11(A) is a diagram showing an example of a 7-segment display section provided on the game board shown in FIG. 4, FIG. 11(B) is a diagram showing an example of displaying numbers on the 7-segment display section, and FIG. 11(C) 1 is a diagram illustrating an example of how alphabets are displayed on a 7-segment display section. 2 is a block diagram showing an example of the system configuration of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an example of a storage area of a main control device of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. FIG. The figure which shows an example of the table used by a main control device. The figure which shows an example of the table used by a main control device. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an example of a storage area of the main controller. FIG. 2 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a performance information display device of a main controller. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of display on a performance display monitor of a performance information display device. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of display on a setting value display section of the performance information display device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of main timer interrupt processing executed by the main control device. 21 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the start-up winning process executed in the main timer interrupt process of FIG. 20. 22 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the first pending command setting process executed in the start winning process of FIG. 21. 5 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a main processing procedure executed by the main controller. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the variable game control process executed in the main process of FIG. 23. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the data setting process executed in the variable game control process of FIG. 24. A flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the fluctuation start process executed in the fluctuation game control process of FIG. 24. 24 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure for setting value changing processing executed in the main processing of FIG. 23. FIG. 24 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of specific performance information update processing executed in the main processing of FIG. 23. FIG. FIG. 29 is a diagram showing an example of base information updated in the specific performance information update process of FIG. 28; 24 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure for display control processing of a performance display monitor executed in the main processing of FIG. 23. FIG. 24 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure for display control processing of a performance display monitor executed in the main processing of FIG. 23. FIG. 24 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure for display control processing of a performance display monitor executed in the main processing of FIG. 23. FIG. 24 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure for display control processing of a performance display monitor executed in the main processing of FIG. 23. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of sub-timer interrupt processing executed by the audio lamp control device of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1; 35 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of display order setting processing executed in the sub-timer interrupt processing of FIG. 34. FIG. 36 is a diagram showing an example of a number display order determination table referred to in the display order setting process of FIG. 35. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of command determination processing executed in the sub-timer interrupt processing of FIG. 34. FIG. 38 is a diagram showing an example of a first stop symbol selection table and a variation type table used when a variation pattern command is received in the command determination process of FIG. 37. FIG. FIG. 38 is a diagram showing an example of an effect pattern type selection table used when a variable pattern command is received in the command determination process of FIG. 37; 35 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of setting value suggestion processing executed in the sub-timer interrupt processing of FIG. 34. FIG. 41 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of a 7-segment display unit control process executed in the setting value suggestion process of FIG. 40; FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a 7-segment display unit control information storage area set in the audio lamp control device. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of controlling a segment display section and an example of updating a 7-segment display section control information storage area. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining an example of control of a 7-segment display section. FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining an example of updating a 7-segment display unit control information storage area. 41 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the ending added image control process executed in the setting value suggestion process of FIG. 40; A diagram showing an example of screen transition in the ending performance of a jackpot game. 12 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of a setting value suggestion process executed by the audio lamp control device of the gaming machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention. 49 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of a 7-segment display unit control process executed in the setting value suggestion process of FIG. 48. FIG. 49 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the ending added image control process executed in the setting value suggestion process of FIG. 48. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a display order setting process executed by the audio lamp control device of the gaming machine according to the third embodiment of the present invention. 52 is a diagram showing an example of a table referred to in the display order setting process of FIG. 51; FIG. FIG. 7 is a perspective view showing an example of the configuration of a gaming machine according to a fourth embodiment of the present invention. 54 is a block diagram showing an example of the system configuration of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 53. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of sub-timer interrupt processing executed by the audio lamp control device of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 53. 56 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of operation detection processing executed in the sub-timer interrupt processing of FIG. 55; 57 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the operation button operation detection process executed in the operation detection process of FIG. 56. 57 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of operation detection pattern determination processing executed in the operation detection processing of FIG. 56; A table showing the relationship between detection patterns and operation status. The figure which shows the screen transition example in the pattern display part in a standby state. 56 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of standby state screen transition processing executed in the sub-timer interrupt processing of FIG. 55; 56 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of standby state screen transition processing executed in the sub-timer interrupt processing of FIG. 55; 63 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the 7-segment history selection screen process executed in the standby state screen transition process of FIG. 62; FIG. FIG. 7 is a front view showing an example of a game board of a game machine according to a fifth embodiment of the present invention. 65 is a block diagram showing an example of the system configuration of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 64. FIG. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing an example of turning on and off a lamp display section. 35 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of setting value suggestion processing executed in the sub-timer interrupt processing of FIG. 34. FIG. FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining an example of updating a 7-segment display unit control information storage area set in the audio lamp control device. The figure which shows the screen transition example in a round game when a lamp display part is controlled in a jackpot game. The figure which shows the example of a display screen in the ending production of a jackpot game. The figure which shows the other example of a lamp display part. FIG. 7 is a front view showing an example of a game board when the movable accessory member of the game machine according to the sixth embodiment of the present invention is in a standby position. The front view showing an example of the game board when the movable accessory member is in the operating position. A block diagram showing an example of a part of the system configuration of a gaming machine. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating an example of a power switch and a power switch state detection unit of the power supply control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of normal main processing executed by the main control device. 77 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of power-off processing executed in the normal main processing of FIG. 76; FIG. 5 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of main processing at power restoration executed by the main control device. 79 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of power-on processing executed in the power-return main processing of FIG. 78; 79 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of a power failure recovery process executed in the power recovery main process of FIG. 78; 35 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of command determination processing executed by the audio lamp control device in the sub-timer interrupt processing of FIG. 34. FIG. 82 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of a power outage type verification process executed in the command determination process of FIG. 81;

DESCRIPTION OF THE PREFERRED EMBODIMENTS First to fifth embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings to provide an understanding of the present invention. Furthermore, the following embodiments are examples of embodying the present invention, and do not limit the technical scope of the present invention.

[First embodiment]
First, a gaming machine 10 according to a first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 47.

[Schematic configuration of gaming machine 10]
Here, FIG. 1 is an external perspective view of the gaming machine 10, FIGS. 2 and 3 are developed views of the gaming machine 10, and FIG. 4 is a front view of the gaming board 31 of the gaming machine 10. Hereinafter, the expressions front, back, left, right, and up and down used in this embodiment are defined by the front and back direction D1, the up and down direction D2, and the left and right direction D3 shown in FIGS. 1 to 3.

As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the gaming machine 10 is a pachinko gaming machine that includes a front frame 11, an inner frame 12, a back pack unit 13, and an outer frame 14, and is installed in an island facility (not shown) of a gaming hall. By fixing the outer frame 14, it is installed in the game hall. In this embodiment, a pachinko game machine will be described as an example of a game machine, but other games such as a reel-type game machine (slot machine), an arrangement ball game machine, and a play ball game machine can also be used. The present invention is also applicable to gaming machines.

[Configuration of front frame 11]
The front frame 11 can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 14 by having its left end rotatably supported by the outer frame 14 . Moreover, the left end portion of the inner frame 12 is rotatably supported by the front frame 11, so that the inner frame 12 can be opened and closed with respect to the front frame 11. Further, the back pack unit 13 can be opened and closed relative to the inner frame 12 by having its left end rotatably supported by the inner frame 12.

The front frame 11 includes an operation button 20, a firing handle 22, an upper plate 23, a lower plate 24, a panel 25, a speaker 26, an illumination section 27, and the like.

The operation button 20 is provided in front of the upper plate 23. The operation button 20 includes an operation switch 20a (see FIG. 12) that switches an input signal to the audio lamp control device 5, which will be described later, depending on whether or not it is pressed. Thereby, the audio lamp control device 5 can determine the operation state (operated or not operated) of the operation button 20. This operation button 20 is triggered by an operation on the operation button 20 by a player during a predetermined operation reception period in a variable game performance that is executed in a variable game that clearly shows the lottery result of a jackpot lottery to the player. These buttons are operated to perform operations such as presentations.

Note that the installation position of the operation button 20 is not limited to the front of the upper tray 23, but may be any position on the front frame 11 as long as it can be operated by the player. Further, the number of operation buttons 20 is not limited to one, but may be two or more.

Furthermore, instead of the operation buttons 20, a touch panel may be provided that displays touch keys and accepts operations of the touch keys by the player. Further, the operation button 20 may include a jog dial. In these cases, the player's operation on the touch panel or panel 25 in the variable game presentation will be reflected in the operation button presentation and the like.

The firing handle 22 is a rotary handle operated by a player to fire a game ball. In the game machine 10, a basic game is played by firing a game ball from a game ball firing mechanism 32, which will be described later, with a force corresponding to the amount of rotational operation of the firing handle 22 by the player. In the game machine 10, when the player operates the firing handle 22, the game ball firing mechanism 32 is drive-controlled so that one game ball is fired toward the gaming area every 0.6 seconds.

The upper tray 23 is disposed below the panel 25, stores game balls put out from a payout device 132 of a payout mechanism 130, which will be described later, and arranges the stored game balls in a line. It is used to guide the game ball to the game ball firing mechanism 32. Further, the lower tray 24 is provided further below the upper tray 23 and is used to store surplus game balls in the upper tray 23.

The panel 25 is made of colorless transparent or colored transparent glass or synthetic resin that allows the player to visually recognize the game board 31 of the inner frame 12 from the front of the game machine 10. The speakers 26 are a pair of speakers provided on the left and right sides of the upper end of the front frame 11, and perform an audio output effect that outputs audio. Note that the installation position of the speaker 26 is not limited to the upper end of the front frame 11. Further, the illumination section 27 has a built-in light source such as a display lamp or an LED, and performs a lamp effect depending on the lighting color and blinking mode such as lighting or turning off.

[Configuration of inner frame 12]
As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the inner frame 12 includes a game board 31, a game ball firing mechanism 32, and a control unit 33. The inner frame 12 can be opened and closed with respect to the front frame 11 by having its left end rotatably supported by the front frame 11 as described above. Therefore, the game board 31, the game ball firing mechanism 32, and the control unit 33 can be opened and closed with respect to the front frame 11. Note that, in FIG. 2, the description on the surface of the game board 31 is omitted for simplification of illustration.

The control unit 33 is provided on the back side of the game board 31 and includes a main control unit 331 and a sub-control unit 332. In addition, in the gaming machine 10, a command (control signal) for instructing control content is transmitted from the main control unit 331 to the sub control unit 332 in one direction. Details of the main control unit 331 and the sub control unit 332 will be described in detail later.

As shown in FIG. 4, the game board 31 includes an inner rail 311, an outer rail 312, a general winning opening 313, a first winning opening 314, a second winning opening 315, a variable winning opening 316, a through gate 317, and an out opening 318. , a variable display unit 34, a main display section 36, a clone device 37, a game ball retention section 38, and a 7-segment display section 39 are provided.

The inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312 are conveyance paths for sending the game balls fired from the game ball firing mechanism 32 toward the game area on the board surface of the game board 31. Then, after being launched from the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312, game balls that do not enter the general winning hole 313, the first winning hole 314, the second winning hole 315, or the variable winning hole 316 are discharged from the out hole 318. be done.

Here, the game ball firing mechanism 32 includes a firing rail 321, a ball feeding device 322, and a solenoid 323, as shown in FIG. The firing rail 321 is formed from the game ball firing mechanism 32 toward the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312 of the game board 31, and directs the game balls fired from the game ball firing mechanism 32 to the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312. It is something that guides. The ball feeding device 322 has a driving means such as a solenoid, and feeds the game balls stored in the upper tray 23 onto the firing rail 321 one ball at a time. The solenoid 323 is a driving means for firing the game ball supplied onto the firing rail 321 toward the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312. In the game machine 10, the solenoid 323 is driven and controlled in response to the player's operation of the firing handle 22, and game balls are fired from the game ball firing mechanism 32 onto the game board 31. In addition, the game ball firing mechanism 32 may be a mechanism that fires the game balls using other drive means such as a motor instead of the solenoid 323.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 4, the general winning opening 313, the first winning opening 314, the second winning opening 315, the variable winning opening 316, and the out opening 318 have openings that penetrate the game board 31 in the front and back direction. ing. And, on the back side of the game board 31, it is possible to individually detect the entry of game balls corresponding to the general winning hole 313, the first winning hole 314, the second winning hole 315, and the variable winning hole 316. Ball entry sensors 313a, 314a, 315a, and 316a (see FIG. 12) are provided. In addition, the game balls that have passed through the openings of the general winning opening 313, the first winning opening 314, the second winning opening 315, and the out opening 318 are collected on the back side of the gaming board 31, so that the out ball sensor 318a (described later) (See FIG. 12). Further, the variable prize opening 316 is provided at the center right side of the game board 31, into which a game ball launched to the right side area of the game board 31 can enter. The game ball that has passed through the penetration part 316b of the variable prize opening 316 is guided to the croon device 37 by a guide path 316c (see FIG. 6), which will be described later. The through gate 317 is a gate through which game balls can pass, and has an entrance sensor 317a (see FIG. 12) that can individually detect game balls passing through the through gate 317. On the game board 31, there is a possibility that a game ball launched to the right side area of the game board 31 will pass through the through gate 317, and when the passage of the game ball through the through gate 317 is detected, the second winning hole is opened. A normal winning lottery is executed to determine whether or not to release 315.

The ball entry sensors 313a to 317a, the out ball sensor 318a, and the special out ball sensor 384 (see FIG. 12) are electrically connected to the main control unit 331. The detection results of the ball sensor 384 are input to the main control unit 331. The main control unit 331 (MPU41) transmits a command to make the payout control device 7 pay out game balls according to the detection results from the ball entry sensors 313a to 317a. Hereinafter, the detection of the ball entering the game ball by the ball entering sensors 313a to 316a may be referred to as winning. Moreover, the main control unit 331 (MPU41) counts the number of out balls based on the detection result by the out ball sensor 318a. The number of out balls counted here matches the number of fired game balls fired onto the game board 31 by the game ball firing mechanism 32.

Furthermore, the main control unit 331 (MPU41) recognizes that the game ball detected based on the detection result of the special out ball sensor 384 is a special out ball that has entered the special out ball opening 373 of the croon device 37, which will be described later. The special out ball detection command shown in FIG. As a result, the audio lamp control device 5 counts the number of special out balls.

Note that the ball entry sensors 313a to 317a, the out ball sensor 318a, and the special out ball sensor 384 are, for example, electromagnetic induction type proximity sensors, but it is possible to individually detect the entry of game balls using other detection methods. Any sensor may be used.

Further, the second winning hole 315 is provided with an electric accessory (electric role) 315b that switches whether or not to restrict the entry of game balls into the second winning hole 315. The electric accessory 315b is opened and closed by a driving means such as a solenoid provided on the back side of the game board 31. In the game board 31, when the electric accessory 315b opens, the game ball can enter the second prize opening 315, and when the electric accessory 315b closes, the game ball can enter the second prize opening 315. Balls are limited.

Further, the variable winning hole 316 is provided with an opening/closing door 319 that switches whether or not to restrict the entry of game balls into the variable winning hole 316. The opening/closing door 319 is opened/closed by driving means such as a solenoid provided on the back side of the game board 31. In the game board 31, when the opening/closing door 319 opens, it becomes possible for a game ball to enter the variable winning opening 316, and when the opening/closing door 319 closes, the entry of a game ball into the variable winning opening 316 is restricted. Ru. The opening/closing door 319 is moved to a position where the variable prize opening 316 is opened in the round game in the opening/closing execution mode in the jackpot game, and otherwise stands by at a position where the variable prize opening 316 is closed. As a result, the game ball 99 that is launched to the right side area of the game board 31 in the round game of the jackpot game can enter the variable winning hole 316.

As shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, the opening/closing door 319 includes a base 319a, a pair of guard walls 319b, and a pair of guides 319c. The base 319a has a pair of attachment parts 319d for rotatably attaching the opening/closing door 319 to the game board 31, and protrudes slightly above the horizontal from the game board 31 when the opening/closing door 319 is in the operating position. . Thereby, the opening/closing door 319 can receive the game ball 99 launched to the right side area of the game board 31 when it is in the operating position. A pair of guard walls 319b extend at the left and right edges of the base 319a, and prevent the game balls 99 received by the base 319a from falling off the left and right sides of the base 319a. Further, the pair of guides 319c guide the game balls 99 received by the base 319a to the variable prize opening 316. The pair of guides 319c extend from the guard wall 319b to the vicinity of the variable prize opening 316, and form a gap through which the game ball 99 can pass. Further, the variable prize opening 316 has a penetration part 316b that discharges the game ball 99 received by the opening/closing door 319 to the back side of the game board 31. This penetrating portion 316b communicates with a guide path 316c provided on the back side of the game board 31. The guide path 316c extends in the vertical direction D2 and has a lower opening. Then, the game ball 99 received by the opening/closing door 319 enters the variable prize opening 316 and is guided to the croon device 37 via the penetration part 316b and the guide path 316c. Note that the guideway 316c is provided with a ball entry sensor 316a. As a result, the game ball 99 that has entered the variable prize opening 316 is detected when it passes through the penetration portion 316b and is introduced into the guide path 316c. This ball entry sensor 316a is electrically connected to the main control unit 331. As a result, the detection result of the ball entry sensor 316a is input to the main control unit 331, and the main control unit 331 can detect that the game ball 99 has entered the variable winning hole 316.

In the gaming machine 10, when the entry of a game ball into the first winning hole 314 or the second winning hole 315 is detected by the ball entering sensor 314a or the ball entering sensor 315a, the main control unit 331 performs a jackpot lottery. The main control unit 331 then controls the display on the main display section 36 according to the lottery result in the jackpot lottery. Further, the lottery results from the main control unit 331 are transmitted to the sub-control unit 332, and the sub-control unit 332 controls the display on the variable display unit 34, etc. according to the lottery results.

In addition, in the gaming machine 10, when the entry of the game ball into the general winning hole 313, the first winning hole 314, the second winning hole 315, and the variable winning hole 316 is detected by the ball entering sensors 313a to 316a, A preset number of prize balls are paid out. For example, if the ball enters the general winning hole 313, the number of prize balls is 10, if the ball enters the first prize hole 314 or the second prize hole 315, the number of prize balls is three, and if the ball enters the variable prize hole 316, the number of prize balls is 3. In this case, the number of prize balls is 10. In particular, in the gaming machine 10, when the lottery result conducted by the main control unit 331 is a jackpot, the game enters a jackpot gaming state (special gaming state), and the variable prize opening 316 is opened for round gaming (unit gaming). ) is repeated a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 or 16 times), a large amount of prize balls can be expected to be paid out.

Further, when a game ball enters the first winning hole 314 or the second winning hole 315, a jackpot lottery is executed. If the lottery result is a win, the game shifts to a predetermined jackpot game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state. In this embodiment, the jackpot gaming state includes a 5R jackpot gaming state (5R normal jackpot gaming state and a 5R probability variable jackpot gaming state) and a 16R probability variable jackpot gaming state. The 5R jackpot game state is a round game (unit game) in which the variable winning hole 316 is opened until a predetermined time elapses or until the upper limit number (for example, 9) or more game balls enter the variable winning hole 316. This is a gaming state including an opening/closing execution mode. The 16R guaranteed variable jackpot gaming state is a gaming state that includes an opening/closing execution mode in which round games (unit games) are played 16 times, and a larger amount of prize balls can be expected to be paid out than in the 5R jackpot gaming state. This is a gaming state advantageous to the player.

As shown in FIG. 4, the variable display unit 34 has a symbol display section 341, such as a liquid crystal display, arranged so as to be visible through an opening 31A formed in the approximate center of the game board 31. The symbol display section 341 displays still images or moving images, and the display contents of the symbol display section 341 are controlled by the sub-control unit 332. Specifically, the symbol display section 341 displays a variable display of decorative symbols according to the lottery result of the jackpot lottery performed by the main control unit 331 in response to a ball entering the first prize hole 314 or the second prize hole 315. , and various image effects such as a variable game effect executed in conjunction with the variable display effect. Further, the symbol display section 341 may be a dot matrix display, a plasma display, an organic EL display, or the like, or may be a combination of a liquid crystal display or a plasma display, and an organic EL display.

For example, the fluctuating display effect of the decorative patterns in the pattern display section 341 is performed by scrolling a plurality of types of decorative patterns numbered "1" to "9" in order in the vertical direction, horizontal direction, diagonal direction, etc. It will be done. Note that sub-designs such as other characters or designs may be displayed between the decorative designs. Furthermore, in this embodiment, there are no sub-symbols, and there are nine types of decorative patterns from "1" to "9".

In the gaming machine 10, in the variable game, the variable display of decorative symbols is executed so that the variation of all decorative symbols stops after a preset variable display time has elapsed from the start of the variable display of the symbols in the symbol display section 341. be done. More specifically, in the fluctuating display of decorative symbols, all the decorative symbols first fluctuate along a preset fluctuation direction (for example, horizontal direction, vertical direction, etc.), and then the fluctuations of the plural decorative symbols stop in order. Then, when the variation of the decorative symbols on all the lines stops and a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the variable display of the decorative symbols ends.

When the variable display of the decorative symbols on the symbol display section 341 ends, the symbol display section 341 displays a state in which the decorative symbols are lined up on one or more active lines. At this time, the stopped state of the decorative pattern clearly indicates or suggests the lottery result of the jackpot lottery by the main control unit 331. For example, if the lottery result is "5R guaranteed strange jackpot", "16R sure strange jackpot", or "5R normal jackpot", decorative symbols of the same type will be displayed lined up on the active line, clearly indicating that it is a jackpot. be done. Further, the type of jackpot may be clearly indicated by a combination of decorative symbols on the active line, but it is not necessarily clearly indicated. Specifically, for example, when the lottery result is a "16R guaranteed variable jackpot", the symbol combination of, for example, "777", which is set as a symbol combination indicating a 16R guaranteed variable jackpot among the decorative symbols, is lined up on the active line. is displayed, or a state in which combinations of the same decorative symbols other than "777" are lined up on the active line is displayed. In addition, if the lottery result is a "5R guaranteed strange jackpot", a state in which the symbol combinations such as "333", which have been set in advance as a symbol combination indicating a 5R guaranteed strange jackpot among the decorative symbols, are lined up on the active line is displayed. Or, a state in which combinations of the same decorative symbols other than symbol combinations indicating a 16R probability variable jackpot or a 5R probability variable jackpot such as "777" or "333" are lined up on the active line is displayed. In addition, when the lottery result is "5R normal jackpot", among the decorative symbols, combinations of decorative symbols that are set in advance as symbol combinations indicating normal jackpots, such as "222" and "444", indicating variable probability jackpots are selected. A state in which combinations of the same decorative symbols are lined up on the active line is displayed. Further, if the lottery result is "lost", a state in which different combinations of decorative symbols are lined up on the active line (for example, "323" or "723", etc.) is displayed.

In addition, the symbol display section 341 displays a variable display of decorative symbols in the variable game, as well as a variable game performance that indicates the degree of expectation that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery will be a jackpot. In addition, if the lottery result is "16R sure-change jackpot" and a jackpot symbol combination other than the decorative pattern combination indicating a 16R probability-change jackpot is displayed lined up on the active line, a 5R probability-change jackpot will be issued as a variable game effect. Or, a suggestion effect suggesting a 5R normal jackpot is executed. In this case, in the jackpot game performance, a promotion performance is executed that clearly indicates that the lottery result for the variable game is a 16R probability variable jackpot. Similarly, if the lottery result is "5R regular jackpot" and a jackpot symbol combination other than the combination of decorative symbols indicating a probability jackpot is displayed on the active line, a 5R regular jackpot is displayed as a variable game effect. A suggestive effect suggesting that is the case is executed. In this case, in the jackpot game performance, a promotion performance etc. that clearly indicates that the lottery result for the variable game is a 5R probability variable jackpot is executed.

Further, in the symbol display section 341, when the gaming state shifts to a jackpot gaming state, jackpot game performances including an opening performance, an opening/closing execution mode performance, and an ending performance are displayed.

It is also conceivable that the game board 31 is provided with a magnetic sensor and a radio wave sensor (both not shown). The magnet sensor is provided, for example, around the first winning hole 314 and the variable winning hole 316. The magnet sensor is electrically connected to the main control unit, and the detection result of the magnet sensor is input to the main control unit 331. As a result, if an attempt is made to fraudulently guide game balls to the first prize opening 314 or the variable prize opening 316 using a magnet, it is possible to detect the fraudulent act. On the other hand, the radio wave sensor is provided, for example, around the first winning hole 314 and the second winning hole 315. The radio wave sensor is electrically connected to the main control unit 331, and the detection results of the radio wave sensor are input to the main control unit 331. This makes it possible to detect the fraudulent act in the event that an act of illegally inputting radio waves to the ball entering sensors 314a, 315a causes false detection of the entering of a game ball. Note that the radio wave sensor is capable of detecting radio waves of, for example, 50 MHz to 3 GHz.

As shown in FIG. 4, the clone device 37 sends the game ball entered into the variable winning hole 316 to either a normal out ball hole 378 or a special out ball hole 373 (see FIGS. 7 and 8), which will be described later. It is something to be sorted out. Here, FIG. 6 is a diagram showing an example of the opening/closing door 319, the clown device 37, and the game ball retention section 38 provided on the game board 31 shown in FIG. 4, FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the clown device 37, and FIG. 8 is a diagram of FIG. FIG. 2 is a sectional view taken along the X1-X1 cutting line.

As shown in FIGS. 6 to 8, the croon device 37 is dish-shaped and has a bottom wall 371 and an annular peripheral wall 372 surrounding the bottom wall 371. As shown in FIGS. The bottom wall 371 is circular in plan view, and includes a high bottom portion 371a, a low bottom portion 371b, and a left-down inclined portion 371c provided between the high bottom portion 371a and the low bottom portion 371b.

The high bottom portion 371a constitutes the right side portion of the bottom wall 371, and is inclined downward to the right. A special out ball passage 374 having a special out ball opening 373 (special discharge port) is provided in the high bottom portion 371a. This special out ball passage 374 is provided adjacent to the right edge of the inclined portion 371c and extends in the vertical direction D2 at the center of the high bottom portion 371a in the front-rear direction D1. This special out ball passage 374 is formed into a cylindrical shape having an inner diameter larger than the diameter of the game ball 99. Further, a first guide member 375 is connected to the lower end of the special out ball passage 374. This first guide member 375 is for guiding the game ball 99 passing through the special out ball passage 374 to the game ball retention section 38. The first guiding member 375 has an upper opening 375a and a lower opening 375b connected to the lower end of the special out ball passage 374. The lower opening 375b is provided on the right side of the upper opening 375a, and releases the game balls 99 of the special out ball passage 374 from the right side of the special out ball passage 374 toward the game ball retention part 38.

Note that the first guiding member 375 may have a function of retaining game balls 99 that cannot be retained in the game ball retaining portion 38. By the way, in this embodiment, the number (specific information) corresponding to the non-setting value, which is the gaming setting value other than the setting value, which is the gaming setting value set in the gaming machine 10, is changed in a predetermined period (see FIG. 9). Based on the number of game balls 99 that entered the special out ball opening 373 of the croon device 37 (the number of specific conditions satisfied in a predetermined period), it is presented on the 7-segment display section 39. In this embodiment, since the number of segments in the 7-segment display section 39 is 7 (excluding the dot point DP), one non-setting value can be reliably identified using 7 pieces of information. Furthermore, since the game setting values are in six levels from 1 to 6, there are 5 non-setting values, and therefore all the non-setting values can be identified using 35 pieces of information. That is, the gaming machine 10 is required to be able to present at least 35 pieces of information (a specified number). Therefore, it is preferable that the game ball retention section 38 is configured to be able to retain more than a specified number of game balls 99 during a specific period (see FIG. 9), which will be described later. However, depending on the arrangement of various components of the gaming machine 10, it may be difficult to configure the game ball retention section 38 to retain more than a specified number of game balls 99. In this case, by providing the first guiding member 375 with a function of storing game balls 99, the first guiding member 375 can be used to retain a number of game balls 99 that would be difficult to use with the game ball retaining section 38 alone. be able to. This makes it possible to retain more than a specified number of game balls 99 in a specific period, and information necessary to identify all non-set values is presented. Similarly, the game balls 99 may be retained in the special out ball passage 374 to which the first guide member 375 is connected. As a result, due to the arrangement of various members, it is difficult to retain more than the specified number of game balls 99 not only in the game ball retention section 38 but also in the first guide member 375, which has the function of retaining game balls 99. In such a case, by using the special out ball passage 374, it becomes possible to retain more than the specified number of game balls 99. As a result, it becomes possible to have more than the specified number of game balls 99 stay in a specific period, and there is a possibility that information necessary for specifying all non-set values may be presented.

On the other hand, it is also conceivable to set a limit on the number of game balls 99 that are allowed to stay in a specific period. For example, it is possible to set the limit number to the specified number (make the limit number match the specified number). In this case, for example, if the number of information (individual information of specific information) corresponding to the number of game balls 99 entering the special out ball opening 373 is presented, all non-set values are displayed in one specific period. Information to identify the person may be presented. In addition, when information is presented about the number of game balls 99 that meet a predetermined condition among the game balls 99 to the special out ball opening 373, for example, the number corresponding to the number of winnings in the lottery, Since the expected number of information is presented according to the probability, and this expected number of information is basically smaller than the specified number, there is a possibility that not all of the information necessary to identify all non-set values will be presented. There is. As a result, it is possible to prevent the set value from being specified by the entry of the game ball 99 into the special out ball opening 373 in one specific period, and as a result, when the set value is low (when the jackpot probability is low) Therefore, it is possible to prevent a player from prematurely ending a game on the gaming machine 10 during a game.

In addition, as a means for setting a limit on the number of game balls 99 to be retained in a specific period, for example, a configuration in which game balls 99 are retained in the game ball retention part 38, the first guiding member 375, and the special out ball passage 374 is adopted. However, when a limited number of game balls 99 enter the special out ball passage 374, by positioning the game balls 99 near the special out ball opening 373 (by causing a ball jam), a special It is conceivable to restrict entry of the game balls 99 into the out ball passage 374. According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to limit the number of game balls 99 to be retained in a specific period with a simple mechanical configuration without requiring any complicated configuration or control.

On the other hand, the game ball retention section 38 has a retention lane 381 that is inclined downward to the left as described later. That is, the first guide member 375 guides the game ball 99 to the right side (upstream side) of the retention lane 381 in the game ball retention section 38. The game ball 99 that enters the special out ball opening 373 does not enter the various winning openings 313 to 316 and does not pass through the through gate 317. Therefore, the game ball 99 that entered the special out ball opening 373 is no longer expected to enter the various winning openings 313 to 316 or pass through the through gate 317, for example, when it is introduced into the special out ball passage 374 (special The ball is handled as an out ball at the time when it is detected by the out ball sensor 384).

The low bottom portion 371b constitutes the left side portion of the bottom wall 371, and is inclined toward the center. A normal passage 376 having a normal out ball opening 378 is provided in the lower bottom portion 371b. This normal passage 376 is provided at a position adjacent to the left edge of the inclined portion 371c so as to extend in the vertical direction D2 except for a portion along the peripheral wall 372 in the low bottom portion 371b. This normal passage 376 is for guiding the game ball 99 that entered through the normal out ball opening 378 to the back side of the game board 31, and has a semi-cylindrical shape with a larger opening area than the special out ball opening 373. is formed. Further, a second guide member 377 is connected to the lower end of the normal passage 376. This second guide member 377 collects the game balls 99 passing through the normal passage 376 on the back side of the game board 31, as well as the game balls passing through the opening of the out port 318. The game balls 99 collected by the second guide member 377 are detected by the out ball sensor 318a (see FIG. 12) and counted as out balls.

The game ball 99 launched to the right side area of the game board 31 and received by the opening/closing door 319 as described above is guided to such a clown device 37 by a guide path 316c. Then, the game ball 99 guided by the croon device 37 moves on the bottom wall 371 along the peripheral wall 372. As a result, the flow of the game ball 99 in the clone device 37 is delayed. Most of the game balls 99 moving on the bottom wall 371 are usually out of the ball mouth due to, for example, a decrease in kinetic energy or colliding with the peripheral wall 372 of the croon device 37 or other game balls 99. Enter the pitch at 378. The game ball 99 that has entered the normal out ball opening 378 moves through the normal passage 376 and the second guide member 377 and is guided to a position where it can be detected by the out ball sensor 318a (see FIG. 12).

On the other hand, a part of the game ball moving on the bottom wall 371 changes its moving direction due to collision with the periphery of the normal out ball opening 378 or with another game ball, and enters the special out ball opening 373. do. The game ball 99 that has entered the special out ball opening 373 is released toward the game ball retention section 38 via the special out ball passage 374 and the first guide member 375.

Here, the probability of the game ball 99 moving on the bottom wall 371 entering the special out ball opening 373 is set to, for example, 0.5% or more and 5% or less, preferably 1% or more and 3% or less. . In other words, the expected number of balls entering the special out ball opening 373 per 10R round game is set to, for example, 0.5 or more and 5 or less, preferably 1 or more and 3 or less. By setting the probability of ball landing or the expected number of balls hitting in such a range, it is possible to prevent the player from identifying the set value early, but it is also possible to realistically specify the set value. It becomes possible. This prevents the game on the gaming machine 10 from being terminated when the setting value is specified early, such as when the setting value is low, and prevents the gaming machine from feeling bored due to the inability to specify the setting value. It becomes possible to prevent the game at No. 10 from being ended.

In addition, in this embodiment, the special out ball opening 373 is provided at the high bottom part 371a of the bottom wall 371, and since the normal out ball opening 378 has a larger opening area than the special out ball opening 373, the special out ball opening 373 The game ball 99 is made much more difficult to enter than the normal out ball opening 378, but instead of or in addition to all or part of these, the game ball 99 can be inserted into the special out ball opening 373 by other means. It is also possible to make it difficult for 99 to enter the ball. For example, it is conceivable to provide an inhibiting means around the special out ball opening 373 to prevent the game ball 99 from entering the special out ball opening 373. Examples of the obstructing means include obstacles that prevent the ball from entering the special out ball opening 373, such as a wall surrounding the special out ball opening 373, magnetic force or electromagnetic force that repels the game ball 99 in the periphery of the special out ball opening 373, etc. Possible means include means for generating force, and means for forming an air curtain by jetting air around the special out ball opening 373.

Further, an opening/closing part for opening and closing the special out ball opening 373 may be provided, and this opening/closing part may make it difficult for the game ball to enter the special out ball opening 373. In this case, the special out ball opening 373 may be provided on the same plane as the normal out ball opening 378, and the normal out ball opening 378 may be formed to have the same or approximately the same opening area as the special out ball opening 373. Good too.

In addition, the distribution means for distributing the game balls 99 entered into the variable winning hole 316 into the normal out ball hole 378 and the special out ball hole 373 is not limited to the croon device 37, but may be other means. For example, by adjusting the arrangement of a rotating member such as a switching valve or a rotating member, or a nail driven into the game board 31, the normal out ball opening 378 and the special out ball opening 373 may be distributed. .

As shown in FIGS. 4 and 8, the game ball retention section 38 receives the game balls 99 that have entered the special out ball opening 373 of the clown device 37, and retains the game balls 99 until a specific period has elapsed. It is. Then, after a specific period has elapsed, segments A to G of the 7-segment display section 39, which will be described later, are controlled, and 7 segments are displayed according to the cumulative number of game balls 99 that have entered the special out ball opening 373 until the predetermined period has elapsed. A number is displayed on the segment display section 39. Here, FIG. 9 shows specific information indicating a specific period for retaining game balls in the game ball retention section, a predetermined period for accumulating the number of game balls that have entered the special out ball opening of the Cloon device, and a non-set value. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining a prescribed period displayed on a 7-segment display section.

In the following, with reference to FIG. 9, the specific period is assumed to be the period in which the game balls 99 are retained in the game ball retention section 38, and the predetermined period is defined as the period in which the game balls 99 that have entered the special out ball opening 373 of the croon device 37 are stored. As a period for cumulatively counting the number, the "specified period" is defined as all or all of the numbers (specific information) indicating a non-set value based on the number of game balls 99 that entered the special out ball opening 373 of the croon device 37 during a specific period. Although a part will be explained as a period for displaying on the 7-segment display section 39, the "specific period" is not limited to the period during which the game balls 99 are retained in the game ball retention section 38, and the "predetermined period" is referred to as the period for which the game balls 99 are retained in the game ball retention section 38. It is not limited to the period in which the number of game balls 99 that have entered the 37 special out ball openings 373 is cumulatively counted. That is, the "specific period", "predetermined period", and "regular period" include at least the period described below.

As shown in FIGS. 9(A) and 9(B), during the specific period during which the game balls 99 are retained in the game ball retaining section 38, the opening/closing execution mode in the jackpot game starts after the jackpot game (opening) is started. This is the period until the end (the ending starts), and a specific period is set for each jackpot game that starts in a predetermined period. That is, the beginning of the specific period is the time when the jackpot game starts, and the end of the specific period is the time when the opening/closing execution mode of the jackpot game ends (the ending starts). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9(A), if you win a regular jackpot in the low probability mode (if your first win is a regular jackpot or a one-shot jackpot), during a specific period, when the jackpot game has started, This is the period from when the opening/closing execution mode of the jackpot game ends. In addition, as shown in Figure 9 (B), if you win a regular jackpot in low probability mode (when the first hit is a probability variable jackpot and a series of jackpots starts), if you win a normal jackpot in high probability mode. For all jackpot games that are executed until the jackpot series ends due to the normal jackpot game, the period from the start of each jackpot game until the opening/closing execution mode of the jackpot game ends is specified. Set as a period. That is, in a jackpot series, a plurality of specific periods are set corresponding to the number of jackpot games to be executed during the jackpot series.

In other words, regardless of the type of jackpot or winning timing, the number of game balls 99 that have entered the special out ball opening 373 of the Cloon device 37 during the specific period of one jackpot game, as described below, is 7. Segments A to G of the segment display section 39 are subject to lighting/extinguishing control during the ending of the jackpot game, which is a specified period. In other words, the prescribed period is based on the number of game balls 99 that enter the special out ball opening 373 of the croon device 37 during the specified period, and the probability that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery set in the gaming machine 10 will be a jackpot. This is set as the period during which the 7-segment display section 39 displays a number indicating a game setting value (a plurality of non-setting values) other than the game setting value (setting value) that defines the game setting value (setting value).

If the number of game balls 99 that enter the special out ball opening 373 during the specific period of one jackpot game is 7 or more and less than 14, the jackpot lottery set for the gaming machine 10 will be The display order in which the numbers specifying the game setting values (multiple non-setting values) other than the game setting value (setting value) that defines the probability that the lottery result will be a jackpot is set in the display order setting process of FIG. 36, which will be described later. Accordingly, one segment is displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 at the ending (regular period) after a specific period has elapsed in the jackpot game. In addition, at the ending after a specific period (regular period) in a jackpot game, the number of game balls 99 that entered the special out ball opening 373 during the specific period of one jackpot game is 14 on the 7-segment display section 39. If the number is 21 or more and less than 20, two numbers identifying multiple non-set values are displayed in the order according to the display order, and if the number is 21 or more and less than 28, multiple non-set values are identified. three numbers are displayed in an order according to the display order, and if the number is 28 or more and less than 35, four numbers specifying a plurality of non-setting values are displayed in an order according to the display order, If the number is 35 or more, five numbers (all numbers) specifying a plurality of non-setting values are displayed in an order according to the display order. In addition, if the number of game balls 99 that entered the special out ball opening 373 during the specified period of one jackpot game is less than 7, then 7 at the ending (specified period) after the specified period in the jackpot game. The segment display section 39 does not display any numbers identifying the plurality of non-setting values.

In this way, in the gaming machine 10, each time a jackpot game is executed, the 7-segment display section 39, which will be described later, 1 to 5 numbers specifying a plurality of non-setting values may be displayed, and the setting value can be specified by displaying the numbers specifying the five non-setting values. For example, when the number 1 is displayed on the 7-segment display section 39, it can be specified that the game setting value 1 is a non-set value, and when the number 2 is displayed on the 7-segment display section 39, it can be specified that the game setting value 1 is a non-set value. It can be specified that 2 is a non-set value, and the number 3 is displayed on the 7-segment display section 39, so it can be specified that the game setting value 3 is a non-set value, and the number 3 is displayed on the 7-segment display section 39. When the number 4 is displayed, it can be specified that the game setting value 4 is a non-setting value, and when the number 5 is displayed on the 7-segment display section 39, it can be specified that the game setting value 5 is a non-setting value. By displaying the number 6 on the 7-segment display section 39, it can be specified that the game setting value 6 is a non-setting value. In addition, since five numbers 2 to 6 are displayed on the 7-segment display section 39, it can be identified that the non-set value is the game setting value 2 to 6, so it is understood that the set value is the game setting value 1. can. Similarly, by displaying five numbers 1, 3 to 6 on the 7 segment display section 39, it can be understood that the setting value is game setting value 2, and 1, 2, 4 to 6 are displayed on the 7 segment display section 39. You can understand that the setting value is game setting value 3 by displaying the five numbers , and when five numbers 1 to 3, 5, and 6 are displayed on the 7-segment display section 39, the setting value is game setting value 3. It can be understood that the setting value is 4, and five numbers 1 to 4 and 6 are displayed on the 7-segment display section 39, so it can be understood that the setting value is the game setting value 5, and the 7-segment display section 39 shows 1. By displaying five numbers from 5 to 5, it can be understood that the setting value is game setting value 6.

Furthermore, it is also possible to grasp the numbers to be displayed on the seven segment display section 39 before all segments A to G become the control targets. For example, when segments A to G are controlled in the order of segment A → segment B → segment C → segment D → segment E → segment F → segment G, segment A, which is the first target to be controlled, is turned off. The number candidates displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 are "1" and "4". When segment F, which is the sixth control target, is turned on, it can be recognized as "4", and when segment F is turned off, it can be recognized as "1". That is, the number "1" or "4" can be recognized at the stage when segment F, which is the sixth control target, becomes the control target before all segments A to G become the control target. Furthermore, when segment A, which is the first control target, is turned on, the number candidates displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 are "2," "3," "5," and "6." Then, when segment B, which is the second control target, is turned on, it can be determined that it is either "2" or "3", and when segment B is turned off, it can be determined that it is "5" or "3". 6". Further, when the third control target, segment C, is turned on, it can be recognized as "3", and when segment C is turned off, it can be recognized as "2". That is, the number "2" or "3" can be recognized at the stage when segment C, which is the third control object, becomes the control object before all segments A to G become the control object. Further, when the fifth control target, segment E, is turned on, it can be recognized as "6", and when segment E is turned off, it can be recognized as "5". That is, the number "5" or "6" can be recognized at the stage when segment E, which is the fifth control object, becomes the control object before all segments A to G become the control object. In other words, the numbers "2" and "3" can be recognized when segment C, which is the third controlled object, is turned on or off, and the numbers "5" and "6" can be recognized when the segment C, which is the third controlled object, is turned on or off. It can be recognized when E is turned on or off, and the numbers "1" and "4" can be recognized when segment F, which is the sixth controlled object, is turned on or off. In this embodiment, even if a number indicating a non-set value is grasped before all segments A to G on the 7-segment display section 39 become control targets, all segments A to G are controlled. Control for displaying the next priority number will not start unless it becomes a target. As a result, in order to identify all non-set values, it is easier to identify all non-set values than when control to display the next priority number is started at the stage when the numbers corresponding to the non-set values can be grasped. A number of specific conditions must be met. As a result, it is possible to increase the degree of difficulty until all non-set values are identified, and by extension, the difficulty in recognizing the set values, thereby preventing the set values from being recognized in a short gaming time. Therefore, even if the set value is low, it is possible to prevent the set value from being grasped by the player in a short time, so it is possible to prevent a decrease in the playing time on the gaming machine 10, It is possible to suppress the decline in the operating rate.

In addition, if a number indicating a non-set value is recognized before all segments A to G of the 7-segment display section 39 become control targets, control for displaying the next priority number is started. You may also do so. For example, when the priority order of numbers is "1" → "2" → "3" →..., segment F, which is the sixth in the control order for the number "1", is set as the control target. When it is recognized that the number displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 is "1", the number "1", which is the next priority, is not set as the control target for segment G, which is the seventh in the control order. 2" may be started. By the way, when segments A to G are controlled to display the next number to be displayed after all segments A to G become control targets, before all segments A to G become control targets, Even if the numbers displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 can be recognized, the control of segments A to G to display the next number to be displayed is only possible after all segments A to G have become control targets. is not started. Therefore, even if the player recognizes the number displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 before all segments A to G become control targets, the display of the next number to be displayed will start. Information is displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 to identify the numbers already recognized by the player. In other words, when segments A to G are controlled to display the next number to be displayed after all segments A to G have been controlled, information unnecessary for the player may be displayed on the seven segment display section 39. There is a concern that interest in the game may decrease during a period in which such unnecessary information is displayed on the 7-segment display section 39. On the other hand, if a number indicating a non-set value is grasped before all segments A to G of the 7-segment display section 39 become control targets, control for displaying the next priority number is not possible. If this is started, segments A to G, which do not contribute to estimation of one non-set value, will not become control targets after one non-set value has been made specifiable. This prevents the player from losing interest in the game due to unnecessary control of segments A to G.

On the other hand, the predetermined period for cumulatively counting the number of game balls 99 that have entered the special out ball opening 373 of the Cloon device 37 starts from the start of the jackpot game for the jackpot in the low probability mode, and the opening/closing execution mode for the normal jackpot. This is until the end. That is, the start of the predetermined period is the time when the jackpot game for the jackpot in the low probability mode starts, and the end of the predetermined period is the time when the opening/closing execution mode of the normal jackpot game ends (the ending of the normal jackpot game starts). (the point in time). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9(A), when a normal jackpot is won in the low probability mode (when the first win is a normal jackpot and a one-shot jackpot), the jackpot game is started for a predetermined period. This is the period from when the opening/closing execution mode of the jackpot game ends. That is, in the case of a single jackpot, the predetermined period corresponds to the specific period during which the game balls 99 are retained in the game ball retention section 38. In addition, as shown in FIG. 9(B), if you win a certain variable jackpot in the low probability mode (when the first win is a certain variable jackpot and the jackpot series starts), the jackpot series will start for a predetermined period. This is the period from the start of the probability-variable jackpot game for the first win, which is the trigger, until the opening/closing execution mode of the jackpot game for the normal jackpot, which is the trigger for ending the series of jackpots, is ended. That is, in the case of consecutive jackpot games, the predetermined period does not coincide with the specific period for retaining the game balls 99 in the game ball retention section 38, but is set in plurality depending on the number of jackpot games to be started within the predetermined period.

By the way, when a jackpot game is started, unless there are special circumstances, the game will not be ended in the middle of the jackpot game or in the middle of a jackpot series. Therefore, by setting a specific period for retaining the game balls 99 in the game ball retention section 38 for each jackpot game, the player is prevented from ending the game before the end of the specific period. In addition, the predetermined period for cumulatively counting the number of game balls 99 that have entered the special out ball opening 373 of the croon device 37 is from the start of the jackpot game for a jackpot in the low probability mode to the end of the opening/closing execution mode of the jackpot game for a normal jackpot. By setting up to 100, the player is prevented from finishing the game before the predetermined period ends. In the jackpot game, at the ending (specified period) after a specific period has passed, the number of game balls 99 staying in the game ball retention section 38 during the specific period (the number of balls entering the special out ball opening 373 of the croon device 37) By controlling the 7-segment display section 39 based on the number of game balls 99, information that allows the non-set value to be specified or estimated (all or part of the numbers corresponding to the non-set value) is displayed, and normally At the ending after the opening/closing execution mode of the jackpot game for the jackpot has elapsed, a non-set value can be specified or estimated corresponding to the cumulative number of game balls 99 that entered the special out ball opening 373 of the croon device 37 during a predetermined period. Information (all or part of the numbers corresponding to non-set values) is displayed. As a result, even if a player who does not know the timing when a non-set value other than the set value can be specified or guessed plays the game, the player will end the game before the timing when the non-set value can be specified or guessed. It is prevented from doing so. Therefore, even a player who does not know the timing at which a non-set value can be identified or estimated can identify or guess a non-set value, and by identifying all non-set values, the set value can be specified. It also becomes possible. In addition, it is possible to eliminate the so-called hyena behavior of other players who play games at a timing when a non-set value can be specified or estimated.

In addition, by setting the specific period for each jackpot game that starts in a predetermined period, in consecutive jackpots, the predetermined period is set from the first jackpot to the last jackpot game of the jackpot series. Therefore, in a consecutive game jackpot, the predetermined period is longer than in a single shot win, and the more times the jackpot game is executed, the longer the predetermined period becomes. As a result, it is more likely that the number of game balls 99 entering the special out ball opening 373 of the croon device 37 will be greater in a consecutive jackpot than in a single hit, and in a consecutive jackpot, the greater the number of consecutive hits. There is a high possibility that the number of game balls 99 entering the special out ball opening 373 will increase. As a result, the player not only has a higher expected value of the gaming value that can be acquired as the number of successive jackpots increases, but also obtains more information for identifying or estimating the non-set value, and the non-set value and even the set value. The benefit is that the value is easier to guess or identify.

The start of the specific period for retaining the game balls 99 in the game ball retention section 38 may be set during the jackpot game, and is not limited to the start of the jackpot game, when the opening/closing execution mode starts (the opening of the first win ends). It may be the point in time when the Further, the end of the specific period may be set during the jackpot game, or may be set during the ending that normally occurs after the jackpot. Preferably, the specific period is set as one section including the opening/closing execution mode for one jackpot game. As a result, based on the number of specific conditions that are satisfied when a game ball 99 enters the variable prize opening 316 in the opening/closing execution mode (game balls 99 that have passed through the special out ball opening 373 of the croon device 37 (based on the number of non-set values), information for identifying the non-set value can be displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 after a specific period has elapsed. As a result, in the opening/closing execution mode, you can enjoy the game by focusing on whether or not the game ball 99 enters the special out ball opening 373, and after the opening/closing execution mode ends, that is, after a specific period has passed. It is possible to enjoy the game by paying attention to the content displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 and specifying or estimating the non-set value based on the displayed content.

In addition, the start of the predetermined period for cumulatively counting the number of game balls 99 that have entered the special out ball opening 373 of the croon device 37 is limited to the time when the jackpot game for the first hit (jackpot in low probability mode) is started. All you have to do is set it as a jackpot game. Preferably, at the time when the opening/closing execution mode of a jackpot game for a first win (a jackpot in a low probability mode), for example, a jackpot game for a first win (a jackpot in a low probability mode) is started (the opening of the first win ends). You can. In this way, by setting the start of the predetermined period to the jackpot game for the first win, the predetermined period is always set for one first win, regardless of whether it is a single jackpot or a consecutive jackpot, so one At least one opportunity to guess or identify a non-set value is guaranteed for the first hit.

On the other hand, the end of the predetermined period is not limited to the point at which the opening/closing execution mode of the normal jackpot game ends, but may be set during the jackpot game, for example, the ending of the jackpot game, typically the ending of the normal jackpot game. It is possible that Further, the end of the predetermined period may be the time when the normal jackpot game ends (the ending with the jackpot ends), or the time when the time saving mode that is normally transitioned to after the jackpot ends. In addition, although this embodiment is explained on the premise of a loop variable machine, other types of gaming machines such as ST machines, V-ST machines, and mixed machines can be used for a predetermined period depending on the mode. It is also possible to set For example, with a V-ST machine, if there is no V prize on the first hit (normal jackpot), the predetermined period is set in the same way as in the case of a regular jackpot on a loop variable machine, and if there is a V prize on the first win (probable variable jackpot) ), the start of the first jackpot game or the opening/closing execution mode is the start of a predetermined period, and the end of the opening/closing execution mode in a jackpot with no V winnings, or the end of a specified number of jackpot drawings in the high probability mode, etc. It is conceivable to set it as the end of a predetermined period.

Further, the predetermined period may be set to a period during which a variable game is executed (a period from the end of the jackpot game to the start of the jackpot game), regardless of the jackpot game. For example, the predetermined period can be set depending on the type of condition (specific condition) under which all or part of the specific information (numbers) indicating a non-set value is displayed, (low frequency support mode) (period from the end of the time saving mode until the next jackpot starts), period of staying in the time saving mode (from the end of the normal jackpot until the transition to the normal gaming state) period), the period of staying in the low probability mode (the period from the end of the normal jackpot until the start of the next jackpot game), until a predetermined number of jackpot draws are received in one or both of the high probability mode and low probability mode. A predetermined number of game balls 99 are placed in the general prize opening 313 in one or both of the high probability mode and low probability mode until a predetermined number of normal winning drawings are received in one or both of the high probability mode and the low probability mode. A period until a predetermined number of game balls 99 are won in the first prize opening 314 in one or both of the high probability mode and low probability mode, one or both of the high probability mode and the low probability mode. A period until a predetermined number of game balls 99 are won in the second prize opening 315 in both, a period until a predetermined number of game balls 99 pass through the through gate 317 in one or both of the high probability mode and low probability mode. , a period until a predetermined number of game balls 99 are launched onto the game board 31 in one or both of the high probability mode and the low probability mode. Further, the predetermined period may be set for each variable game. That is, the predetermined period may be set to a period from the start of the variable game (the start of the variable display of the decorative symbols) to the end of the variable game (the end of the variable display of the decorative symbols). In this case, the entire period of one variable game may be the predetermined period, or a part of the period of one variable game may be the predetermined period. When a part of one fluctuating game is set as a predetermined period, the predetermined period is the period from the start of the fluctuating display of the decorative symbols until the decorative symbols reach the reach state, and the period from the start of the fluctuating display of the decorative symbols. The period until a development effect such as a special reach effect starts, the period after the decorative symbol becomes a reach state until the development effect starts, the period from the time the decorative symbol becomes a reach state until the end of the development effect. The period during which the development performance is executed, etc. can be considered.

In this way, by setting a predetermined period in the period in which the variable game is executed, it is possible to identify or infer the non-set value and recognize or infer the set value even outside the period in which the jackpot game is executed. It becomes possible. This makes it possible to enjoy the progress of the game while specifying or estimating the non-set value (set value) during the period in which the variable game is executed.

When the predetermined period is set as a period in which a variable game is executed, the distribution means such as the croon device 37 determines whether the game ball 99 hit to the left side area of the game board 31 is normally hit to the left or not. The position where 99 is allocated to the normal out ball opening 378 and the special out ball opening 373 (for example, the left side area of the game board 31 (above or below the general winning opening 313) or the central area (above or to the side of the first winning opening 314) ) may also be provided. In this case, the non-set value (set value) can be specified or estimated without performing a special launch (right-handed strike of the game ball 99 to the right side area of the game board 31). As a result, you can enjoy specifying or guessing the non-set value (set value) while proceeding with the game as usual without reducing the probability of the game ball 99 entering the general winning hole 313 or the first winning hole 314. I can do it.

Furthermore, depending on the type of specific conditions, the start of the predetermined period may be set when the main power to the gaming machine 10 is turned on. Furthermore, depending on the type of specific conditions, the end of the predetermined period may be set when the main power to the gaming machine 10 is turned off.

In addition, as a specific condition, instead of the game ball 99 distributed by the distribution means such as the croon device 37 entering the special out ball opening 373 during a predetermined period, it is placed in a specific area other than the special out ball opening 373. For example, the game ball 99 may pass through the through gate 317 or the game ball 99 may enter the various prize openings 313 to 316.

In addition, the game ball 99 that enters the general winning hole 313 or the first winning hole 314 or passes through the through gate 317 is guided to a sorting means such as a croon device 37, and the game that is sorted by the sorting means A specific condition may be that the ball 99 enters the special out ball opening 373. In this case as well, the player can enjoy specifying or guessing the non-set value (set value) while proceeding with the game as usual without making any special moves.

Further, the specific condition may be the occurrence of a specific event that may occur during the progress of the game. The specific event in this case may be either an advantageous situation or a disadvantageous event for the player. If a specific event is advantageous to the player, in addition to the benefits obtained by the occurrence of the specific event, the player may receive all or part of the specific information indicating a non-set value (set value). You can get more. On the other hand, if the specific event is disadvantageous to the player, the player may take all or part of the specific information indicating the non-set value (set value) as a remedy for the disadvantage caused by the occurrence of the specific event. You can get more. Specific events include, for example, winning a jackpot a predetermined number of times (including one time) or more (a jackpot game being executed a predetermined number of times (including one time) or more), winning a guaranteed variable or normal jackpot a predetermined number of times (one time or more) (including 1) or more (including a guaranteed variable or normal jackpot game being played more than a predetermined number of times (including once)), the number of successive jackpots reaching a predetermined number or more (usually a guaranteed variable or normal jackpot game by the time you win the jackpot) winning a jackpot consecutively for a predetermined number of times or more), reaching a predetermined number of jackpot drawings before winning a jackpot, or winning a game ball 99 that exceeds the upper limit in a round game in the opening/closing execution mode of a jackpot game. (Over-winning) may occur.

Further, the specific event may be the execution of a specific performance set in advance in a variable game or a jackpot game. The specific performance in this case is not particularly limited, and may be set to either a non-reach performance or a reach performance, or may be set to any of an opening performance, a round game performance, and an ending performance. Typically, a specific performance is a premium performance in which a jackpot or a variable jackpot is confirmed in a variable game performance, or a held consecutive game is executed after the end of the jackpot game in a jackpot game (at the start of the jackpot game, At a specific point in the jackpot game, such as at the start of the opening/closing execution mode, at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, or at the end of the jackpot game, there is an effect that clearly indicates that the lottery result that is a jackpot is included among the pending lottery results. . Further, as a specific event, it is also conceivable that the decorative symbols are displayed in a specific combination in the symbol display section 341 in a stopped state or a temporary stopped state (intermediate stopped state). For example, when a decorative symbol is stopped and displayed at "777" in the symbol display section 341, when it is stopped and displayed at a specific out-of-reach mark such as "767", when it is stopped and displayed at a specific out-of-reach mark such as "367" In addition to cases where the display is stopped at the (break-up) mark, when a development performance such as a super reach performance or special reach performance is executed as a reach performance, a temporary stop display (intermediate stop) that clearly indicates that the development performance will be executed. ) may be considered. As a temporary stop display (intermediate stop display) that clearly indicates that the development effect will be executed, for example, "7 development 7", the left and right decorative symbols are displayed temporarily in a reach state (intermediate stop display), It is conceivable that a symbol indicating that a development effect such as "development" will be executed may be temporarily stopped and displayed. Further, the specific condition may be that a plurality of specific events of a specific combination occur.

Further, the specific condition may be established in relation to a set value. In other words, the specific condition may include a set value, and for example, the specific condition may be satisfied when a specific event occurs at a specific set value. In this case, while the type of specific condition depends on the set value, the display order of numbers indicating non-set values on the 7-segment display section 39 is defined by the set value, as will be described later. Therefore, numbers indicating non-setting values are displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 in different orders depending on the type of specific condition. With this, it is possible to set the display order for each set value based on, for example, whether the jackpot lottery probability is high or low, and it is also possible to characterize the display of numbers indicating multiple non-set values for each set value. become.

In addition, the specified period for displaying specific information or a part of it (special information) that indicates a non-set value when specific conditions are met is not limited to the case where it is set for each ending of a jackpot game, and other It may be a timing, and may be set depending on the relationship with a predetermined period, the relationship with a specific period, or the relationship with a specific condition. For example, the prescribed period may be only the ending of a 5R normal jackpot game in which the end of the predetermined period is typically set after a predetermined period has elapsed, as will be explained in the second embodiment below. For example, it may be after the end of a jackpot game. In addition, when the predetermined period is set as the execution period of a variable game, for example, when the decorative pattern starts to fluctuate in a variable game, the temporary stop display timing when the decorative pattern is in the reach state, the super reach effect, the special reach effect, etc. Possible timings include the timing at which the development performance is started, the development performance being executed, etc. In other words, the prescribed period may be set to a period in which a variable game is executed. When the specified period is set to the period in which the variable game is executed, it becomes possible to display specific information indicating a non-set value together with the result of the jackpot lottery. For example, when the lottery result of a jackpot lottery is displayed on the symbol display section 341 by a variable display of decorative symbols, it is also possible to display specific information on the symbol display section 341 at the same time. This makes it possible to improve the player's interest in the variable game by displaying specific information.

Here, FIG. 10(A) is a cross-sectional view taken along the X2-X2 cutting line in FIG. 8, and FIG. 10(B) is a cross-sectional view taken along the X3-X3 cutting line in FIG. 8 when the stopper portion 383 described later is at the upper limit position. The cross-sectional view, FIG. 10(C) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line X3-X3 in FIG. 8 when the stopper portion 383 is at the lower limit position. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game ball retention section 38 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 6 and 8 in addition to FIG. 10.

As shown in FIGS. 6, 8, and 10, the game ball retention section 38 retains the game balls 99, which are entered into the special out ball opening 373, for a specific period. , a discharge lane 382 and a stopper part 383.

The retention lane 381 receives the game ball 99 that has entered the special out ball opening 373 of the croon device 37, and allows the game ball 99 to stay there. The retention lane 381 is open at the top and slopes downward to the left. The retention lane 381 has a depth smaller than the diameter of the game ball, and at least a portion of the game ball 99 retained in the retention lane 381 is visible (see FIG. 4). As a result, it is possible to visually confirm that the game balls 99 have been retained in the retention lane 381, and also to determine the number of retained game balls 99, that is, the number of balls that have entered the special out ball opening 373 of the croon device 37 within a specific period. The number of game balls 99 can be visually confirmed. Further, it is preferable that the retention lane 381 is formed transparently from resin or the like. By doing so, it becomes easy to grasp the number of game balls 99 retained in the retention lane 381. In addition, instead of or in addition to making the game balls 99 retained in the retention lane 381 visible, the number of game balls 99 retained in the retention lane 381 may be displayed. The number of game balls 99 retained in the retention lane 381 may be displayed by, for example, the number of lit lamps or an image displayed on the symbol display section 341.

The discharge lane 382 is continuous with the left end of the retention lane 381, and guides the game balls 99 retained in the retention lane 381 to a predetermined location, such as a position where it can be detected by the out ball sensor 318a (see FIG. 12).

Further, a special out ball sensor 384 is provided in the discharge lane 382. This special out ball sensor 384 detects when the game ball 99 staying in the staying lane 381 moves in the ejection lane 382. In other words, the special out ball sensor 384 is used to count the number of game balls 99 retained in the retention lane 381, that is, the number of special out balls that have entered the special out ball opening 373 of the croon device 37 within a specific period. used. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 12, the special out ball sensor 384 is connected to the MPU 41 of the main control device 4, and the MPU 41 monitors the output from the special out ball sensor 384. It is determined whether the game ball 99 has moved on the discharge lane 382. In addition, the MPU 41 sets a special out ball detection command when the game ball 99 is detected by the special out ball sensor 384, and outputs this special out ball detection command to the outside in step S1301 in the main process of FIG. 23, which will be described later. In the process, it is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5. On the other hand, when the audio lamp control device 5 receives the special out ball detection command, the MPU 51 counts the number of special out balls, and displays the number on the 7-segment display unit 39 based on the number of special out balls and the set value. The content is controlled (see the command determination process in FIG. 37 and the setting value suggestion process in FIG. 40).

Although an electromagnetic induction type proximity sensor is used as the special out ball sensor 384, for example, the game ball 99 may be detected by other detection methods (for example, an optical sensor). Further, the special out ball sensor 384 may be connected to the audio lamp control device 5. In this case, the special out ball detection command is not set in the MPU 41 of the main control device 4, but the number of special out balls is counted in the audio lamp control device 5 based on the output from the special out ball sensor 384.

The stopper part 383 is provided between the retention lane 381 and the discharge lane 382, and is moved up and down between an upper limit position and a lower limit position by a driving means such as a solenoid provided on the back side of the game board 31. . The upper limit position is a position where the tip protrudes upward, and with the stopper portion 383 at the upper limit position, it becomes possible to retain the game balls 99 in the retention lane 381 (see FIG. 10(B)). On the other hand, the lower limit position is a position where the tip part does not protrude upward, and when the stopper part 383 is at the lower limit position, the game balls 99 in the retention lane 381 can be ejected via the ejection lane 382 (Fig. 10(C)). Then, the game ball 99 guided to the ejection lane 382 is guided to a position where it can be detected by the out ball sensor 318a (see FIG. 12).

Note that the means for allowing the game balls 99 to stay in the retention lane 381 and allowing the game balls 99 in the retention lane 381 to be discharged to the discharge lane 382 is not limited to the stopper portion 383 that can move up and down, but may also be a stopper that can move back and forth, for example. Other means such as a stopper part that can be rotated between a standing state and a prone state may also be used. Alternatively, the game ball 99 may be retained by preventing the game ball 99 from moving due to the action of magnetic force or electromagnetic force, and the game ball 99 may be ejected by canceling the action of the magnetic force or electromagnetic force. . Furthermore, by making the retention lane 381 movable up and down, it is possible to realize a state in which the game balls 99 are retained and a state in which they are discharged. For example, by making the retention lane 381 wait at a lower position than the discharge lane 382, the game balls 99 are retained, and by moving the retention lane 381 to a higher position than the discharge lane 382, the game balls 99 are stored in the discharge lane 382. It may be configured to shift to . In addition, the game board 31 is provided with an opening through which the game balls 99 can be discharged to the back side of the game board 31, a position where the game balls 99 can be stored in the retention lane 381, and a position where the game balls 99 can be discharged from the opening to the game board 31. The retention lane 381 may be configured to be movable up and down between a position where it can be discharged to the rear side of the storage lane 381. Furthermore, by moving a box-shaped movable body instead of the retention lane 381, the game balls 99 can be retained in the movable body and the game balls 99 can be discharged to the back side of the game board 31. It is also possible.

Here, FIG. 11(A) is a diagram showing an example of the 7-segment display section 39 provided on the game board 31 shown in FIG. 4, and FIG. 11(B) is a diagram showing an example of displaying numbers on the 7-segment display section. FIG. 11(C) is a diagram showing an example of alphabet display on the 7-segment display section.

As shown in FIG. 11(A), the 7-segment display section 39 consists of seven segments A to G and a dot point DP. Each segment A to G and dot point DP can be turned on and off individually, and as shown in FIG. 11(B), at least the numbers 1 to 6, and as shown in FIG. It is possible to display the alphabet of F. In the present embodiment, the 7-segment display section 39 includes a plurality of (six) game settings corresponding to the jackpot probability (see FIGS. 14(A) and 14(B)) in which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot. From the value (numeric information), multiple (5) game setting values (non-setting values) other than the game setting value (setting value (predetermined numerical information)) set to define the jackpot probability in the gaming machine 10 The numbers (specific information) indicating each of the (specific numerical information)) are displayed as numbers by lighting or extinguishing each segment A to G. Specifically, in the 7-segment display section 39, when the non-set value is the game setting value 1, segments B and C are lit to display the number 1, and the non-set value is the game setting value. 2, segments A, B, D, E, and G are lit to display the number 2, and if the non-set value is game setting value 3, segments A to D and G are lit. If the non-setting value is the game setting value 4, the number 4 will be displayed by lighting segments B, C, F, and G, and the non-setting value will be the gaming setting value. If the value is 5, segments A, C, D, F, and G will be lit to display the number 5, and if the non-set value is game setting value 6, segments A, C to G will be displayed. When lit, the number 6 is displayed. Further, in this embodiment, the dot point DP is lit at the stage when the number corresponding to the non-set value is displayed, clearly indicating that the number corresponding to the non-set value is displayed.

Further, in the 7-segment display section 39, the numbers corresponding to the non-set values are displayed in the order determined when the main power is turned on (when the power is turned on) or when the set value is changed, as will be described later (FIGS. 35 and 35). 36). Furthermore, as will be described later, the control order for turning on or off each segment A to G of the 7-segment display section 39 is set to segment A, segment B, segment C, segment D, segment E, segment F, and segment G ( fixed).

Then, in the 7-segment display section 39, as described later, a segment corresponding to the number of game balls 99 that entered the special out ball opening 373 of the croon device 37 in a predetermined period (the number of specific conditions satisfied in a predetermined period) is controlled to turn on and off, and a number or a part of the number is displayed on the 7-segment display section 39. Here, the numbers displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 indicate non-set values other than the set values after the game set values. Therefore, some of the numbers displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 do not indicate game setting values, but indicate a part of specific information indicating non-setting values, and fall under the category of special information. . In other words, the special information is displayed using a portion of the plurality of segments A to G of the 7-segment display section 39. In this way, not only the numbers indicating non-set values but also part of the numbers (special information) are displayed on the 7-segment display section 39, so that the player can understand that the numbers are displayed on the 7-segment display section 39. Not only can the non-set value be specified in the case of the 7-segment display section 39, but also the non-set value can be estimated based on a portion of the numbers displayed on the 7-segment display section 39. Therefore, even if no numbers are displayed on the 7-segment display section 39, the player can enjoy guessing the non-set value based on part of the numbers, thereby improving the interest of the game.

It should be noted that whether or not each of the segments A to G is a control target on the 7-segment display section 39 may or may not be clearly shown to the player. When it is clearly indicated that each of the segments A to G is to be controlled, it is easier to estimate the set value than when it is not clearly indicated. In this embodiment, since the control order of each segment A to G is fixed, it is not clearly indicated that each segment A to G is a control target, and a method is adopted that makes it difficult to estimate the set value. has been done. In addition, when making it clear to the player that each segment A to G is the control target, for example, by blinking the segment to be controlled, it is made clear to the player that the segment is the control target, and It is conceivable to make it clear to the player that the segment is to be controlled by lighting it in a different color from the case where the segment is lit.

Further, in the 7-segment display section 39, information for specifying non-setting values may be displayed in alphabetical order corresponding to the non-setting values. For example, the letter A is displayed when the non-setting value is game setting value 1, the letter B is displayed when the non-setting value is game setting value 2, and the letter B is displayed when the non-setting value is game setting value 3. The alphabet C is displayed when the non-setting value is the game setting value 4, the alphabet D is displayed when the non-setting value is the gaming setting value 5, and the alphabet E is displayed when the non-setting value is the gaming setting value 5. It is conceivable that the alphabet F is displayed when the game setting value is 6 (see FIG. 11(C)).

The main display section 36 includes a normal symbol display section 361, a first special symbol display section 362, a second special symbol display section 363, a first reserved number display section 364, and a second reserved number display section 361, which are arranged at the upper right of the game board 31. A display section 365 is provided.

The normal symbol display section 361 includes a pair of LEDs as a normal symbol (common symbol), and is used to draw a lottery for a common symbol to determine whether or not to release the electric accessory 315b triggered by winning the through gate 317. The results are displayed by a combination of LED pairs turning on and off. The main control unit 331 (MPU 41) triggers the winning of the through gate 317 by flashing the LED pair (variably displaying the normal symbols), and after the variable display time has elapsed, turns each LED on or off, thereby drawing a lottery for the common symbol. Display the results.

The first special symbol display section 362 includes a 7-segment display device as a first special symbol (first special symbol), and determines whether or not to execute a jackpot game triggered by winning in the first prize opening 314. The lottery result in the first special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery, jackpot lottery) is displayed by a combination of lighting and extinguishing of seven segments on the seven segment display device. The main control unit 331 (MPU41) blinks the seven segments of the seven-segment display device (displays the first special symbol in a variable manner) when a prize is won in the first winning hole 314, and displays each segment after the variable display time has elapsed. The result of the jackpot lottery is displayed by lighting or extinguishing the light.

The second special symbol display section 363 includes a 7-segment display device as a second special symbol (second special symbol), and determines whether or not to execute a jackpot game triggered by winning the second prize opening 315. The lottery result in the second special symbol lottery (second special symbol lottery, jackpot lottery) is displayed by a combination of turning on and off the seven segments on the seven segment display device. The main control unit 331 (MPU41) blinks the seven segments of the seven-segment display device (displays the second special symbol in a variable manner) in response to a winning in the second winning hole 315, and displays each segment after the variable display time has elapsed. The result of the jackpot lottery is displayed by lighting or extinguishing the light.

The first reservation number display section 364 includes an LED group consisting of four LEDs, and displays the number of reservations N of the first special symbol of the variable display caused by winning in the first winning hole 314 based on the number of lit four LEDs. indicate.

The second reservation number display section 365 includes an LED group consisting of four LEDs, and displays the reservation number M of the second special symbol of the variable display caused by winning the second prize opening 315 according to the number of lit four LEDs. indicate.

[Back pack unit 13]
As shown in FIG. 3, the back pack unit 13 includes a dispensing mechanism 130 and a peripheral control unit 140.

The payout mechanism 130 includes a tank 131 that stores game balls supplied from the island equipment (not shown) of the game hall, and a payout device 132 that pays out the game balls from the tank 131 toward the upper tray 23. Note that when the game balls in the upper tray 23 are saturated, the game balls paid out from the payout device 132 are paid out to the lower tray 24.

As shown in FIG. 12, the peripheral control unit 140 includes a payout control device 7, a firing control device 8, and a power supply control device 9. The payout control device 7 controls the number of game balls paid out by the payout device 132 and the like. The firing control device 8 controls the game ball firing mechanism 32 according to the operation of the firing handle 22. The power supply control device 9 converts electric power supplied from an island facility (not shown) to which the gaming machine 10 is connected to a predetermined voltage level, and supplies the voltage level to a control device and a driving means provided within the gaming machine 10.

[System configuration of gaming machine 10]
Next, the system configuration of the gaming machine 10 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 12 to 19.

[Main control unit 331]
As shown in FIG. 12, the main control unit 331 includes a main control device 4 that performs main control of games in the gaming machine 10. The main control device 4 executes a jackpot lottery as a lottery for transition to a preset jackpot gaming state. The main control device 4 includes an MPU 41, an input/output I/F 42, and a performance information display device 4A.

The MPU 41 is an arithmetic unit configured as a one-chip microcomputer. Furthermore, the MPU 41 includes a ROM 411 and a RAM 412. The MPU 41 executes processing according to a control program stored in the ROM 411 or the like. Further, part or all of the processing executed by the main control device 4 may be executed by an electronic circuit.

The input/output I/F 42 is an input/output interface that inputs signals to the main controller 4 and outputs control signals from the main controller 4. Further, the input/output I/F 42 is connected to incoming ball sensors 313a to 317a, out ball sensor 318a, special out ball sensor 384, and the like. Then, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the ball has entered the general winning hole 313, the first winning hole 314, the second winning hole 315, and the variable winning hole 316, and the through gate 317 based on the detection signals from the ball entering sensors 313a to 317a. It is determined whether or not the game ball 99 has passed through. Furthermore, the MPU 41 counts the number of out balls (the number of fired balls) based on the detection signal from the out ball sensor 318a. Furthermore, the audio lamp control device 5, the payout control device 7, the firing control device 8, the power supply control device 9, etc. are connected to the input/output I/F 42.

Then, the MPU 41 sends a variable pattern command, a first hold command, a second hold command, a shift command, a jackpot game start command, a round game start command, a round game end command, an ending start command, a jackpot game start command, to the audio lamp control device 5. Outputs commands such as end command, special out ball detection command, and setting value change command.

The variable pattern command is a command for notifying the audio lamp control device 5 of the variable display time and the lottery result in the jackpot lottery, and includes information regarding the jackpot type if the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot. The fluctuation pattern command is set in step S1605 in the fluctuation start process of FIG. 26, which will be described later, based on information stored in the pending storage area 412b, which will be described later, when starting the symbol fluctuation display on the main display section 36. Ru. Note that the variation pattern command may be a command that notifies the audio lamp control device 5 only of the variation display time. In this case, a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 of the lottery result and jackpot type in the jackpot lottery is set as a command different from the fluctuation pattern command.

When the number of reservations N or the number of reservations M stored in the reservation storage area 412b (described later) increases, the first reservation command and the second reservation command are used to generate a lottery result in a jackpot lottery for the increased reservation, a fluctuation pattern, and a change pattern. This is a command to notify the voice lamp control device 5 of the number of reservations N or M. The first hold command and the second hold command are set based on information stored in the hold storage area 412b (described later in FIG. 22) when there is an increase in the hold count N or the hold count M. Step S1207 or Step S1209 of the first pending command setting process).

The shift command indicates the lottery result of the jackpot lottery in the first reservation area REA1 to the fourth reservation area REA4 or the first reservation area REB1 to the fourth reservation area REB4 when the reservation number N or the reservation number M decreases. This is a command to notify the audio lamp control device 5 that the validity information has shifted. The shift command is set in step S1508 in the data setting process of FIG. 25, which will be described later.

The jackpot game start command is a command that notifies the audio lamp control device 5 that the jackpot game will start, that is, the gaming state will shift to the jackpot gaming state. It is set in the game state transition process in the main process. In addition, since the jackpot game start command is a command that notifies the audio lamp control device 5 that the jackpot game will start, the audio lamp control device 5 starts the jackpot game by receiving the jackpot game start command. Not only that, but also that the opening will begin. However, an opening start command may be set separately from the jackpot start command, and the opening start command may cause the audio lamp control device 5 to recognize that the opening has started.

The round game start command is a command that notifies the audio lamp control device 5 of starting each round game in the opening/closing execution mode in the jackpot game, and of round number information indicating what round the round game is. , is set in the jackpot game control process in the main process of FIG. 23, which will be described later. Note that the audio lamp control device 5 can grasp that the opening ends and the opening/closing execution mode is started by the round game start command, but apart from the round game start command, an opening end command is set at the end of the opening, Alternatively, an opening/closing execution mode start command may be set when the opening/closing execution mode is started. Further, apart from the round game start command, a command indicating the number of rounds of the round game to be started may be set at the time of starting the round game, and the command may be sent to the audio lamp control device 5.

The round game end command is a command that notifies the audio lamp control device 5 to end the corresponding round game in the opening/closing execution mode in the jackpot game, and is set in the jackpot game control process in the main process of FIG. 23, which will be described later. Ru.

The jackpot game end command is a command that notifies the audio lamp control device 5 that the jackpot game ends, and is set in the jackpot game control process in the main process of FIG. 23, which will be described later.

The special out ball detection command is a command that indicates that the game ball detected by the special out ball sensor 384 is a special out ball that entered the special out ball opening 373 of the croon device 37, and is a command shown in FIG. 20 described later. It is set in the sensor detection process in step S1001 in the main timer interrupt process. Note that the audio lamp control device 5 counts the number of special out balls in a predetermined period based on the special out ball detection command, and determines the control content on the 7-segment display section 39.

The setting value change command is a command that notifies the audio lamp control device 5 that the setting value has been changed and the setting value after the change, and is set in step S1710 in the setting value change process of FIG. 27, which will be described later. .

Note that commands other than the above-mentioned commands may be output from the main control device 4 to the audio lamp control device 5, but their explanation will be omitted.

The main control device 4 is also equipped with an oscillation circuit, a frequency dividing circuit, and the like as means for supplying an operating clock to the MPU 41. The oscillation circuit outputs a clock signal of a predetermined frequency, and the frequency dividing circuit changes the frequency of the clock signal output from the oscillation circuit and inputs the changed clock signal to the MPU 41. Specifically, the execution cycle of the main timer interrupt process, which will be described later, executed by the MPU 41 is determined by the clock signal output from the frequency dividing circuit.

In this embodiment, a clock signal is supplied from the frequency dividing circuit to the MPU 41 at preset intervals (for example, 4 msec), and the MPU 41 performs the main timer assignment described below every time the clock signal rises (or falls). Assume that the process is started and executed. Note that the oscillation circuit and the frequency dividing circuit are also installed in the sub-control unit 332 and the peripheral control unit 140 as necessary, and supply the operation clock for the control main body in the sub-control unit 332 and the peripheral control unit 140. Further, a clock signal may be supplied from the main control unit 331 to the sub control unit 332 and the peripheral control unit 140.

The ROM 411 is a nonvolatile storage section in which control programs and parameter information are stored in advance. The RAM 412 is a volatile storage unit that can read and write various information, and is used as a primary storage area (work area) for processing executed by the MPU 41. For example, the RAM 412 is used for setting commands to be sent to the audio lamp control device 5 and the like. Note that the RAM 412 may be a nonvolatile storage unit.

Here, with reference to FIG. 13, a storage area for the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 of the gaming machine 10 to perform a jackpot lottery and the like will be described. Specifically, the MPU 41 uses the counter information stored in the lottery counter 412a, the hold storage area 412b, and the power hold area 412c of the RAM 412 to execute the jackpot lottery and setting of the variable display time.

The lottery counter 412a includes a jackpot random number counter C1 used in the jackpot winning lottery, a jackpot type counter C2 used when determining the type of jackpot, and a reach random number counter C3 used when determining the type of loss. included. The lottery counter 412a also includes a random number initial value counter CIN1 used to set the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and a variation type counter CS1 that determines the variation display time in the main display section 36 and the symbol display section 341. It will be done. Furthermore, the lottery counter 412a includes a normal winning random number counter C4 used for drawing whether or not to make the electric accessory 315b of the second winning opening 315 into an electric winning state, and an initial value setting of the normal winning random number counter C4. A normal hit initial value counter CIN2 used for this purpose is included. Hereinafter, when these multiple types of counters are collectively described, they will simply be abbreviated as counters.

The counters C1 to C4, CIN1, CIN2, and CS1 are used as loop counters in which 1 is added to the previous value at short intervals by the MPU 41, and the counters return to 0 after reaching a preset maximum value. Updated values are recorded in the counters C1 to C4, CIN1, CIN2, and CS1, and are referenced by the MPU 41 when setting the jackpot lottery and variable display time.

The reservation storage area 412b includes a first reservation storage area REA, a second reservation storage area REB, and an execution area AE. The first reservation storage area REA includes a first reservation area REA1, a second reservation area REA2, a third reservation area REA3, a fourth reservation area REA4, and a reservation number storage area NAA. Hereinafter, the type of variable game in which a jackpot lottery is performed based on each value stored in the first reservation storage area REA, and the first special symbol display section 362 displays a variable display and a static display will be referred to as a first special symbol game. Sometimes. The second reservation storage area REB includes a first reservation area REB1, a second reservation area REB2, a third reservation area REB3, a fourth reservation area REB4, and a reservation number storage area NAB. Hereinafter, the type of variable game in which a jackpot lottery is performed based on each value stored in the second reservation storage area REB, and the second special symbol display section 363 displays a variable display and a static display will be referred to as a second special symbol game. Sometimes.

When a game ball enters the first winning hole 314, the information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the RAM 412 is the jackpot. This information is acquired as win/fail information used in the lottery, and is stored in one of the first reservation area REA1 to fourth reservation area REA4 of the first reservation storage area REA. In addition, when a game ball enters the second winning hole 315, the information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the RAM 412 is This information is acquired as the winning/failure information used in the lottery, and is stored in one of the first reservation area REB1 to fourth reservation area REB4 of the second reservation storage area REB. The acquisition process of the validity information is executed by the MPU 41, which functions as the determining means of the present invention, by executing the process according to the control program. Note that the lottery counters 412a (jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, fluctuation type counter CS1, etc.) are individually set for each of the first reservation storage area REA and the second reservation storage area REB. may be provided.

In this way, in the gaming machine 10, in addition to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3, the variable type counter CS1 is stored in the first holding area REA1 to the fourth holding area of the first holding storage area REA. It is stored in any one of the first reservation area REB1 to fourth reservation area REB4 of the REA4 and the second reservation storage area REB.

Therefore, for the variable game executed based on the win/fail information stored in the first reservation area REA1 to fourth reservation area REA4 and the first reservation area REB1 to fourth reservation area REB4 of the second reservation storage area REB. In addition to the lottery result of the jackpot lottery, it is possible to determine in advance the variation pattern (variation display time) of the symbol variation display displayed on the symbol display section 341.

Specifically, when a game ball enters the first winning hole 314, the win/fail information is vacant in the priority order of the first holding area REA1, second holding area REA2, third holding area REA3, and fourth holding area REA4. It is stored in the area where the data is stored. In the reservation number storage area NAA, the number of the first reservation area REA1 to fourth reservation area REA4 for which validity information is stored is stored as the reservation number N.

In addition, when a game ball enters the second winning hole 315, the win/fail information shows that the first holding area REB1, the second holding area REB2, the third holding area REB3, and the fourth holding area REB4 are vacant in priority order. stored in the area. In the reservation number storage area NAB, the number of the first reservation area REB1 to the fourth reservation area REB4 for which validity information is stored is stored as the reservation number M.

That is, in the gaming machine 10, a total of eight storage areas corresponding to the maximum number of reservations of the first reservation area REA1 to the fourth reservation area REA4 and the first reservation area REB1 to the fourth reservation area REB4 are used to store the first prize opening 314. It is possible to hold up to four pieces of winning/failure information as winning history in the second winning opening 315 and second winning opening 315, respectively.

In addition, it is also possible as another embodiment that the first winning hole 314 and the second winning hole 315 are provided with a holding area where the maximum number of holdings is 8, and even in this case, the total number of holding areas is up to 8. It is possible to hold the winning/failure information as the winning history. The storage process of the validity information is executed by the MPU 41 by executing the process according to the control program.

The execution area AE is the first reservation area REA1 of the first reservation storage area REA or the first reservation area REB1 of the second reservation storage area REB when the symbol variation display on the main display section 36 and the symbol display section 341 is started. This is a storage area used to move the validity information stored in the . Specifically, the validity information of the first reservation area REB1 of the second reservation storage area REB is prioritized and moved to the execution area AE, and the validity information does not exist in the first reservation area REB1 of the second reservation storage area REB. When the pending number storage area NAB is 0, the validity information of the first pending area REA1 in the first pending storage area REA is moved to the execution area AE.

Note that the difference between the number of reservations M stored in the number of reservations storage area NAA of the first reservation storage area REA and the number of reservations N stored in the number of reservations storage area NAB of the second reservation storage area REB is 2 or more. In this case, it is also conceivable as another embodiment that the value of the reservation area with a larger number is given priority and moved to the execution area AE. In another embodiment, the validity information of the first reservation area REA1 of the first reservation storage area REA and the first reservation area REB1 of the second reservation storage area REB may be alternately moved to the execution area AE.

Then, at the start of one variable game, the MPU 41 performs a jackpot lottery based on numerical information stored as win/fail information in the execution area AE. At this time, if the first reservation area REA1 of the first reservation storage area REA is moved to the execution area AE, the validity information stored in the second reservation area REA2 is shifted to the first reservation area REA1, and the The validity information stored in the reservation area REA3 is shifted to the second reservation area REA2, and the validity information stored in the fourth reservation area REA4 is shifted to the third reservation area REA3.

Similarly, when the first reservation area REB1 of the second reservation storage area REB is moved to the execution area AE, the validity information stored in the second reservation area REB2 is shifted to the first reservation area REB1, and the validity information stored in the second reservation area REB2 is shifted to the third reservation area REB1. The validity information stored in area REB3 is shifted to the second reservation area REB2, and the validity information stored in the fourth reservation area REB4 is shifted to the third reservation area REB3.

The jackpot random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 637, for example, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 completes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CIN1 at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. Note that the random number initial value counter CIN1 is a loop counter that is updated within the same range (0 to 738) as the jackpot random number counter C1. The jackpot random number counter C1 is updated regularly and stored in the pending storage area 412b at the timing when a game ball enters the first winning hole 314 or the second winning hole 315.

Two types of random number values for winning the jackpot are set according to a win/fail table stored in a win/fail table storage area in the ROM 411, corresponding to a low probability mode and a high probability mode which is a variable probability gaming state. Here, FIG. 14A is a diagram showing an example of a low probability mode validity table corresponding to the low probability mode, and FIG. 14B is a diagram showing an example of a high probability mode validity table corresponding to the high probability mode.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 14(A) and 14(B), the probability that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery will be a jackpot (jackpot probability) is set to the game setting value as a low probability mode win/fail table and a high probability mode win/fail table, respectively. A plurality of different validity tables are provided depending on the situation. The low probability mode success/failure table and the high probability mode success/failure table each include six success/failure tables corresponding to six levels of game setting values 1 to 6. In the order of game setting value 6, game setting value 5, game setting value 3, game setting value 2, and game setting value 1, the jackpot probability that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery becomes a jackpot is high, which is advantageous to the player.

With game setting value 1, among the 65536 random numbers from 0 to 65535, the number of random numbers for which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot is 206 (0 to 205) for the low probability mode win/fail table, and 206 (0 to 205) for the high probability mode win/fail table. There are 821 (0 to 820) probability mode validity tables. That is, with the game setting value 1, the jackpot probability in the low probability mode is about 1/318.1 (206/65536), and the jackpot probability in the high probability mode is about 1/79.1, which is about four times that of the low probability mode. 9 (820/65536).

With game setting value 2, out of 65536 random numbers from 0 to 65535, the number of random numbers for which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot is 212 (0 to 211) for the low probability mode win/fail table, and 212 (0 to 211) for the high probability mode win/fail table. There are 845 (0 to 844) probability mode validity tables. That is, at game setting value 2, the jackpot probability in the low probability mode is about 1/309.1 (212/65536), and the jackpot probability in the high probability mode is about 1/77.1, which is about four times that of the low probability mode. 6 (845/65536).

With game setting value 3, out of 65536 random numbers from 0 to 65535, the number of random numbers for which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot is 218 (0 to 217) for the low probability mode win/fail table, and 218 (0 to 217) for the high probability mode win/fail table. There are 869 (0 to 868) probability mode validity tables. That is, at game setting value 3, the jackpot probability in the low probability mode is about 1/300.6 (218/65536), and the jackpot probability in the high probability mode is about 1/75. 4 (869/65536).

With game setting value 4, among the 65536 random numbers from 0 to 65535, the number of random numbers for which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot is 224 (0 to 223) for the low probability mode win/fail table, and 224 (0 to 223) for the high probability mode win/fail table. There are 893 (0 to 892) probability mode validity tables. That is, with the game setting value 4, the jackpot probability in the low probability mode is about 1/292.6 (224/65536), and the jackpot probability in the high probability mode is about 1/73. 4 (893/65536).

With game setting value 5, out of 65536 random numbers from 0 to 65535, the number of random numbers for which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot is 230 (0 to 229) for the low probability mode win/fail table, and 230 (0 to 229) for the high probability mode win/fail table. There are 917 (0 to 916) probability mode validity tables. In other words, at game setting value 5, the jackpot probability in the low probability mode is about 1/284.9 (230/65536), and the jackpot probability in the high probability mode is about 1/71. 5 (917/65536).

With game setting value 6, out of 65536 random numbers from 0 to 65535, the number of random numbers for which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot is 236 (0 to 235) for the low probability mode win/fail table, and 236 (0 to 235) for the high probability mode win/fail table. There are 941 (0 to 940) probability mode validity tables. That is, at game setting value 6, the jackpot probability in the low probability mode is about 1/277.7 (236/65536), and the jackpot probability in the high probability mode is about 1/69. 6 (941/65536).

It should be noted that if the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is other than these random numbers that result in a jackpot win, the lottery result in the jackpot lottery will be a loss.

Here, in the low-probability mode win/fail table and the high-probability mode win/fail table, the random numbers that result in a jackpot are common in jackpot drawings between the same game setting values, but it is also possible that the random numbers that become a jackpot are not common. It will be done. Furthermore, the random numbers that result in a jackpot win may not be continuous values, but may be partially or entirely discrete values.

Further, although six low probability mode success/failure tables and six high probability mode success/failure tables are provided according to six levels of game setting values, it is sufficient that there is at least one success/failure table for each mode. In other words, the game setting values are not limited to six levels. It is also conceivable to provide a plurality of low probability mode success/failure tables corresponding to game setting values of multiple stages, while providing one high probability mode success/failure table. That is, it is conceivable to provide a plurality of levels of game setting values for the low probability mode, and to make the jackpot probability uniform without providing any level of game setting values for the high probability mode. Of course, the jackpot probability in the low probability mode may be made uniform, and a plurality of levels of game setting values may be provided for the high probability mode.

The jackpot type counter C2 is sequentially incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 19, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The jackpot type counter C2 is updated regularly and stored in the pending storage area 412b at the timing when the game ball enters the first winning hole 314 or the second winning hole 315. In the gaming machine 10, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 corresponding to each of the two types of jackpots, variable jackpot and normal jackpot, is set according to the allocation table stored in the allocation table storage area in the ROM 411.

Here, FIG. 14(C) is a diagram showing an example of a distribution table. In the example shown in FIG. 14(C), when the type of variable game is the first special symbol game triggered by winning in the first winning hole 314, the number of random numbers that result in a 5R probability variable jackpot is 10 of 0 to 9. The number of random numbers that result in a 16R probability variable jackpot is 5 from 10 to 14, and the number of random numbers that result in a 5R normal jackpot is 5 from 15 to 19. On the other hand, if the type of variable game is a second special symbol game triggered by winning in the second winning hole 315, the number of random numbers that will result in a 5R variable jackpot is 5 from 0 to 4, and it will be a 16R variable jackpot. The number of fourth random numbers that result in a jackpot is 10 from 5 to 14, and the number of random numbers that normally result in a jackpot in 5R is 5 from 15 to 19. That is, the gaming machine 10 is a so-called loop variable machine in which the probability of a variable jackpot in the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game is the same. Furthermore, in the gaming machine 10, the probability of a 16R probability variable jackpot in the second special symbol game is set higher than that in the first special symbol. That is, in the variable probability game state (high probability mode and high frequency support mode with a high probability of opening the electric accessory 315b), the time saving game state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode) and the normal game state (low probability mode and electric accessory 315b). Compared to the low frequency support mode (in which the probability of opening the object 315b is low), the expected value of acquiring game balls when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot is set higher.

In addition, in this embodiment, individual winnings are made for each of the first winning hole 314, which becomes an opportunity to execute the first special symbol game upon winning, and the second winning hole 315, which becomes an opportunity to execute the second special symbol game upon winning. A minute table is set, and the distribution probability of the jackpot type is different depending on whether the game ball enters the first winning hole 314 or the second winning hole 315, but the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game It is also conceivable that the distribution probability of the jackpot type is the same for games. Furthermore, the gaming machine 10 is not limited to a loop-probability machine, but may be configured as a so-called ST machine, a V-ST machine, a type-two type mixed machine, and the like.

Then, based on the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE, the MPU 41 determines whether the lottery results in the jackpot lottery are "5R probability variable jackpot", "16R probability variable jackpot", or "5R normal jackpot". It is determined whether it is a "jackpot" or a "miss".

Here, if the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a 5R definite variable jackpot or a 5R regular jackpot, an opening/closing execution mode is executed in which a round game in which the variable prize opening 316 is opened is repeated five times in the jackpot game. Further, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a 16R probability variable jackpot, an opening/closing execution mode in which a round game is repeated 16 times in the jackpot game is executed.

In the case of a 5R probability variable jackpot or a 16R probability variable jackpot, after the end of the jackpot game, a transition is made to a probability variable game state which is a high probability mode in which the probability of winning the jackpot is high and a high frequency support mode in which the probability of opening the electric accessory 315b is high. In this embodiment, the probability variable gaming state continues until the MPU 41 determines that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a "5R probability variable jackpot", "16R probability variable jackpot", or "5R normal jackpot".

On the other hand, in the case of 5R normal jackpot, after the end of the jackpot game, the game shifts to a time-saving game state which is a low probability mode in which the probability of winning the jackpot is low and a high frequency support mode in which the probability of opening the electric accessory 315b is high. In the present embodiment, the time-saving gaming state (low probability mode and high-frequency support mode) notifies the player of the lottery results of the jackpot lottery a preset number of times, such as 50 or 100 times. The game continues until the specified number of times passes, or ends when the player is informed that the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot before the specified number of times has elapsed.

By the way, when the gaming machine 10 is configured as an ST machine or a V-ST machine instead of a loop probability changing machine, after the end of the jackpot game at the time of the probability variable jackpot, a preset number of jackpots (for example, 50 times, 100 times) is generated. If the lottery is executed in a variable probability gaming state (high probability mode and high frequency support mode) and the lottery result in the jackpot lottery does not become a jackpot by the time the specified number of times has elapsed, the lottery is executed in a normal gaming state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode). mode), and high-frequency support mode ends. In addition, it is also possible as another embodiment to perform a falling lottery from the variable probability gaming state to the time saving gaming state or the normal gaming state in the variable gaming. In addition, if the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a loss, the transition to the jackpot game state and the time-saving game state is not made. In this embodiment, a case where the gaming machine 10 has three types of jackpots: 5R probability variable jackpot, 16R probability variable jackpot, and 5R normal jackpot will be described as an example, but the invention is not limited to this, for example, 2 round probability variable jackpot, 2 round probability variable jackpot, It is also possible to have other jackpot types such as round normal jackpot and 16R normal jackpot.

Further, the reach random number counter C3 is sequentially incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 238, for example, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The reach random number counter C3 is updated regularly and is stored in the hold storage area 412b at the timing when the game ball wins in the first winning hole 314 or the second winning hole 315.

In the gaming machine 10, the type of stop result of the variable display displayed on the symbol display section 341 when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a loss is selected by the reach random number counter C3. Specifically, according to the out-of-reach type table stored in the out-of-reach type table storage area in the ROM 411, after a reach occurs, the final stop symbol shifts by one position before and after the reach symbol and stops before and after the out-of-reach pattern, and a reach also occurs. The value of the reach random number counter C3 corresponding to each of three types of out-of-reach is set, including a reach other than before and after out-of-reach where the final stop symbol stops at a place other than before and after the reach-to-reach symbol, and a complete out-of-reach where no reach occurs.

Here, FIG. 14(D) is a diagram showing an example of a deviation type table. In the example shown in FIG. 14(D), the value of the random number that results in a reach that is out of the order is 0 to 8, the value of the random number that results in a reach other than the end or end is 9 to 38, and the value of the random number that causes a reach that is completely out of the order is 39. ~238. The MPU 41 determines that in a variable game in which a 5R probability variable jackpot, a 16R probability variable jackpot, or a 5R normal jackpot is won, that is, in a variable game that shifts to the opening/closing execution mode, a reach occurs regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

Here, reach refers to a state in which a symbol combination of decorative symbols indicating winning a jackpot is likely to occur during the period from when the fluctuating display of symbols on the symbol display section 341 starts until when the symbols are stopped and displayed. It is a fluctuating state. In one example, the same symbol is stopped and displayed at two of the three stop positions on the active line in the symbol display section 341, and the displayed symbol corresponding to the remaining one stop position is fluctuating. In addition, while the reach in the symbol display section 341 is in a fluctuating state, a moving image of a predetermined character or the like is displayed to suggest the level of expectation, or a story production process in which the player's operation on the operation button 20 is reflected in the production. Participatory operation performance processing and the like are executed. Note that during execution of these production processes, the variable display in the symbol display section 341 may be hidden, or may be displayed in a reduced or enlarged manner.

For example, the electric accessory release counter C4 is incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 250, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The electric accessory opening counter C4 is updated regularly and is stored in the electric role holding area 412c in the RAM 412 at the timing when a game ball enters the through gate 317. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is held to determine whether or not to open the electric accessory 315b for a predetermined time based on the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 stored in the electric accessory holding area 412c. For example, if the electric accessory opening counter C4 is between 0 and 199, it is possible that you have won, and when the electric accessory opening counter C4 is between 200 and 250, you are considered to have lost.

The variation type counter CS1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 199, for example, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 determines the variation pattern type (variation display time) of the symbol variation display displayed on the symbol display section 341 according to the lottery result in the jackpot lottery. By determining the variation pattern type in this way, the audio lamp control device 5 can perform rough variation game productions such as high-speed variation production (basic production, non-reach production), normal reach production, super reach production, special reach production, etc. The type is determined according to the variation pattern type (variation display time). The variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the MPU 41 executes a main process to be described later, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time within the main process. Further, the value of the variable type counter CS1 is stored in the holding storage area 412b at the timing when the game ball enters the first winning hole 314 or the second winning hole 315.

Then, the MPU 41 determines a variation pattern indicating a variation display time based on the variation type counter CS1 and a preset variation table. Specifically, the MPU 41 identifies the type of variation pattern while referring to a normal jackpot variation table, a probability variable jackpot variation table, or a miss variation table stored in advance in the variation table storage area of the ROM 411. Note that these fluctuation tables may be provided separately for each low probability mode and high probability mode. Further, the probability variation jackpot fluctuation table may be provided individually for each of the 5R probability variation jackpot and the 16R probability variation jackpot.

Here, FIGS. 15(A), 15(B), and 15(C) are diagrams showing examples of a normal jackpot variation table, a probability variable jackpot variation table, and a loss variation table. As shown in FIGS. 15(A), 15(B), and 15(C), in the normal jackpot variation table, the probability variable jackpot variation table, and the loss variation table, the variation pattern is set in advance according to the value of the variation type counter CS1. are associated. Then, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a "5R regular jackpot", the MPU 41 uses a regular jackpot variation table, and when the lottery result is a "5R probability variable jackpot" or "16R probability variable jackpot", a probability variable jackpot variation table, lottery. If the result is "missing", refer to each missing variation table and identify the type of variation pattern.

More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 15(A) and 15(B), in the normal jackpot variation table and the probability variable jackpot variation table, the variation patterns "01" to "03" are set according to the value of the variation type counter CS1. One of them is selected. Here, when the variation pattern "01" is selected, the audio lamp control device 5 determines the normal reach performance pattern with a variation display time of 30 seconds as the variation type (performance pattern type), and the symbol display section 341 selects the normal reach performance pattern. is executed. The normal reach performance pattern is a performance pattern in which the final individual performance type in the variable game performance is the normal reach performance. In addition, when the variation pattern "02" is selected, the sound lamp control device 5 determines a super reach effect pattern with a variation display time of 60 seconds as the variation type (effect pattern type), and the symbol display section 341 displays the super reach effect. The pattern is executed. The super reach performance pattern is a performance pattern in which the final individual performance type in the variable game performance is the super reach performance. Furthermore, when the variation pattern "03" is selected, the audio lamp control device 5 determines the special reach effect pattern with the longest variation display time of 90 seconds as the variation type (effect pattern), and the special reach effect pattern is displayed in the symbol display section 341. The production pattern is executed. The special reach performance pattern is a performance pattern in which the final individual performance type in the variable game performance is the special reach performance.

As shown in FIG. 15(C), in the deviation variation table, a variation type counter CS1 is set for each stop type at the time of deviation (front/back deviation reach, reach other than front/back deviation, complete deviation) determined by the value of the reach random number counter C3. The correspondence relationship between the change pattern and the fluctuation pattern is determined. More specifically, if the stop type at the time of deviation is front/back off reach or front/back off reach, one of the fluctuation patterns "01" to "03" is selected according to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. . On the other hand, if the stop type at the time of failure is complete failure, either the fluctuation pattern "04" or "05" is selected according to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. In addition, when the variation pattern "04" is selected, the voice lamp control device 5 determines a non-reach production pattern (non-reach production pattern) with a variation display time of 7 seconds as the variation type (production pattern type), and displays the symbol. In section 341, a non-reach performance pattern is executed. In addition, when the variation pattern "05" is selected, the audio lamp control device 5 determines a non-reach production pattern (non-reach production pattern) with a variation display time of 10 seconds as the variation type (production pattern type), and displays the symbol. In section 341, a non-reach performance pattern is executed.

For example, in the gaming machine 10, as a variable display at the time of a miss corresponding to the variation pattern "04", a variable display of a miss pattern in which the fluctuating display stops at the missed symbol without accompanying a preview effect in which characters, messages, etc. are displayed. is executed. In addition, in the gaming machine 10, as a fluctuating display at the time of a miss corresponding to the fluctuating pattern "05", a fluctuating display of a miss pattern in which the fluctuating display stops at the missed symbol is accompanied by a preview effect in which characters, messages, etc. are displayed. executed. Furthermore, when the fluctuation display is displayed when the game is out corresponding to the fluctuation pattern "05", a player participation type operation performance that reflects the operation of the operation button 20 by the player may be executed as a preview performance.

Note that the type of variation pattern is not limited to the examples shown in FIGS. 15(A), 15(B), and 15(C). Further, the probability variation jackpot fluctuation table may be provided individually for each of the 5R probability variation jackpot and the 16R probability variation jackpot.

For example, in the gaming machine 10, multiple types of normal reach performances with different characters, stories, etc. are prepared as the normal reach performance executed in the normal reach performance pattern corresponding to the variation pattern "01", and any one selected from among them is prepared. The normal reach effect is executed.

Similarly, in the gaming machine 10, multiple types of super reach performances with different characters, stories, etc. are prepared as the super reach performance executed in the super reach performance pattern corresponding to the variation pattern "02", and the player can select from among them. One of the Super Reach effects performed will be executed. The super reach performance is a reach performance with a longer fluctuation time than the normal reach performance, and the probability (expectation level) of the jackpot lottery result being a jackpot is higher than the normal reach performance, and the probability of winning the jackpot is higher than the special reach performance. This is executed when suggesting to the player that the probability (expectation level) is low.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine 10, multiple types of special reach performances with different characters, stories, etc. are prepared as the special reach performance executed in the special reach performance pattern corresponding to the variable pattern "03", and it is possible to select from among them. One of the specified special reach effects will be executed. The special reach performance is a reach performance that has a longer fluctuation time than the normal reach performance, and is, for example, a performance that develops from the normal reach performance or the super reach performance. The special reach performance is executed to suggest to the player that the probability (expectation level) of winning the jackpot is higher than the normal reach performance or the special reach performance.

Note that the performance patterns corresponding to the fluctuation patterns include an operation performance in which the operation status of the operation button 20 by the player is reflected in the performance, for example, a single-shot operation performance in which a single operation is reflected in the performance, and a performance in which the operation status of the operation button 20 by the player is reflected in the performance. It may include operation performances in which the player participates, such as a continuous hit operation performance in which a repeated tap operation is reflected in the performance, and a long press operation performance in which a long press operation of the operation button 20 by the player is reflected in the performance.

Then, when the MPU 41 specifies a variation pattern indicating a variation display time by the first special symbol display section 362 or the second special symbol display section 363 and symbol display section 341 of the main display section 36, the MPU 41 identifies the variation pattern and the variation pattern in the jackpot lottery. A variable pattern command indicating the lottery result is input to the audio lamp control device 5. Specifically, when the lottery result is "5R normal jackpot", the MPU 41 issues a variable pattern command "A" indicating that it is a 5R normal jackpot before the variable patterns "01" to "03". Outputs one of "A01" to "A03". In addition, when the lottery result is a "5R definite strange jackpot", the MPU 41 generates a fluctuation pattern command "B01" with "B" indicating that it is a 5R definite strange jackpot in front of the fluctuation patterns "01" to "03". ~Output one of "B03". Furthermore, if the lottery result is a "16R probability variable jackpot", the MPU 41 generates a variation pattern command "C01" with "C" indicating a 16R probability variation jackpot in front of the variation patterns "01" to "03". ~Output one of "C03". In addition, if the lottery result is a "loser", the MPU 41 sends variable pattern commands "D01" to "D05" with "D" added to the front of the variation patterns "01" to "05" to indicate a "loser". Output one of the following. Thereby, the audio lamp control device 5 can determine the fluctuation pattern (fluctuating display time) and the lottery result based on the fluctuation pattern command, and the symbol display section 341 can determine the fluctuation pattern (variable display time) and the lottery result based on the fluctuation pattern and the lottery result. Determine the details of the variation mode, such as the variation type and performance type displayed in . Then, the audio lamp control device 5 causes the symbol display section 341 to execute a variable display based on the details of the determined variation mode, plays audio from the speaker 26 in accordance with the variable display, and lights up or blinks the illumination section 27. Or turn off the lights.

In this way, in the gaming machine 10, the MPU 41 of the main controller 4 performs a simple process of determining a variation pattern (variation display time) based on the variation type counter CS1 and the variation table regarding the variation display in the symbol display section 341. will be executed. Therefore, even if the MPU 41 of the gaming machine 10 is composed of an 8-bit microcomputer, the MPU 41 can stably execute the jackpot lottery. Further, since the details of the variation mode actually displayed on the symbol display section 341 are determined by the audio lamp control device 5, it is possible to selectively execute a wide variety of variation modes.

Here, FIG. 16 is a block diagram showing an example of the game information storage area 412d set in the RAM 412 of the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 of the gaming machine shown in FIG. The game information storage area 412d stores game information regarding game history, ball payout performance, and the like. In the present embodiment, the game information storage area 412d includes "Number of out balls", "Number of balls paid out from the general winning hole", "Number of balls paid out from the first winning hole", and "Number of balls paid out from the second winning hole" as the game information. ”, “Variable winning slot payout number of balls”, “Setting value”, “Base information”, “Continuous accessory ratio information”, “Role ratio information”, “Cumulative number of jackpot drawings”, “Number of unit jackpot drawings”, The "number of jackpot hits" and "number of consecutive losses" are stored. Among these game information, "set value", "base information", "continuous accessory ratio information", "accessory ratio information", and "unit jackpot lottery number" are game information (performance information) related to ball payout performance. Applies to.

“Number of out balls” is an integrated value of the number of game balls fired onto the game board 31 in the normal gaming state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode). This "number of out balls" is stored as a value obtained by counting out balls detected by the out ball sensor 318a in the sensor detection process of step S1001 in the main timer interrupt process of FIG. 20, which will be described later.

The "number of balls paid out from the general winning hole" is the cumulative value of game balls paid out in response to winnings to the general winning hole 313 in the normal gaming state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode). This "number of balls paid out from the general winning hole" is set by the prize ball command in step S1303 in the main process of FIG. When setting the prize ball command for causing the payout control device 7 to pay out the number of prize balls according to the winnings to the general winning opening 313 in the process, it is updated to a value that adds the number of balls paid out due to the current winning. .

“Number of balls paid out from the first winning hole” is an integrated value of game balls paid out in response to winnings to the first winning hole 314 in the normal gaming state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode). This "number of balls paid out from the first winning hole" is determined by the number of winning balls in step S1303 in the main process of FIG. When setting a prize ball command for causing the payout control device 7 to pay out the number of prize balls according to the winning into the first winning opening 314 in the command setting process, the value obtained by adding the number of balls paid out due to the current winning. Update to.

"Number of balls paid out from the second winning hole" is an integrated value of game balls paid out in response to winnings to the second winning hole 315 in the time-saving gaming state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode). This "number of balls paid out from the second winning hole" is determined by the number of winning balls in step S1303 in the main process of FIG. When setting a prize ball command for causing the payout control device 7 to pay out the number of prize balls according to the winnings to the second winning opening 315 in the command setting process, the value obtained by adding the number of balls paid out due to the current winning. Update to.

The "variable winning hole payout ball number" is the cumulative value of game balls paid out in response to winnings in the variable winning hole 316 in the jackpot game state. This "variable winning hole payout number of balls" is the prize ball command setting in step S1303 in the main process of FIG. When setting the prize ball command for causing the payout control device 7 to pay out the number of prize balls according to the winning to the variable winning opening 316 in the process, it is updated to a value that adds the number of paid balls due to the current winning. .

The "setting value" is for selecting the low probability mode success/failure table (see FIG. 14(A)) and the high probability mode success/failure table (see FIG. 14(B)) used in the jackpot lottery (win/fail determination). In other words, the "set value" defines the jackpot probability in the low probability mode and the high probability mode. In this embodiment, as described later, there are six levels of setting values (six types of low probability mode success/failure tables with different jackpot probabilities (see Figure 14(A)) and high probability mode success/failure tables (see Figure 14(B))). is being prepared. The "setting value" is updated in the setting value changing process shown in FIG. 27, which will be described later.

"Base information" is information about the "base" which is the payout rate (ball output rate) in the normal gaming state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode), and this "base" is the "number of out balls" in the normal gaming state. ” is the ratio of the total number of balls paid out of the “general winning hole number of paid out balls” and “first winning hole number of paid out balls”. When the "base" is expressed in a mathematical formula, "base" = 100 x ("number of balls paid out from the general winning hole" + "number of balls paid out from the first winning hole") / "number of out balls". The "base information" includes information regarding the current base BL, the previous 60,000 ball base B1, and the previous 60,000 ball base B2. Here, the previous 60,000 ball base B1 and the previous 60,000 ball base B2 are updated every time the number of out balls reaches 60,000 balls in the specific performance information update process of FIG. 28, which will be described later (steps S1805 and S1806). Specifically, the "base" when the most recent number of out balls reached 60,000 balls is the previous 60,000 ball base B1, and the "base" when the previous number of out balls reached 60,000 balls is The 60,000-ball base B2 from the previous game is stored as "base information" in the game information storage area of the RAM 412, respectively. Further, until the counter value of the number of out balls reaches 60,000 balls, it is calculated as the current base BL (step S1804), and the current base BL is stored as "base information" in the game information storage area of the RAM 412. In addition, if the current base BL is calculated until the counter value of the number of out balls reaches 60,000 balls, the "base information" includes the "number of balls paid out from the general winning opening" and "the number of balls paid out from the first winning opening." Apart from the "Number of balls paid out" and "Number of out balls", "Number of balls paid out from the general winning opening", "Number of balls paid out from the first winning opening", and "Number of out balls" for base calculation are stored.

In this embodiment, the "base information" includes "current base BL", "previous 60,000 ball base B1", and "previous 60,000 ball base B2", and the past two 60,000 ball bases are included in the history. However, the past three or more 60,000-ball bases may be kept as a history. Furthermore, the "base information" may include the cumulative base from when the gaming machine 10 was installed in the gaming hall to the present.

"Continuous role object ratio information" is the total number of balls paid out by winning in all the winning holes (general winning hole 313, 1st winning hole 314, 2nd winning hole 315, and variable winning hole 316) from which prize balls are paid out. This is information regarding the "continuous role ratio" which is the ratio occupied by the number of balls paid out from the variable winning opening. When the "continuous accessory ratio" is expressed in a mathematical formula, "continuous accessory ratio" = 100 x "number of variable winning holes paid out balls" / "total number of paid balls". The "continuous accessory ratio information" is updated, for example, in the specific performance information update process shown in FIG. 28, which will be described later. In this embodiment, the "continuous accessory ratio information" is stored as the cumulative continuous accessory ratio from the time when the gaming machine 10 was installed in the game hall until the present. The "continuous role ratio information" is for a certain period of time (for example, for a certain number of jackpots (for example, 100 times), or for a period until a certain number of jackpot drawings (for example, 1000 times) are executed in the normal gaming state. It may be a continuous accessory ratio for a period until the number of out balls reaches a certain number (for example, 60,000 balls). Of course, the "continuous accessory ratio information" may include both the cumulative consecutive accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio over a certain number of periods.

"Accessory ratio information" is based on the total number of balls paid out by winning in all winning holes (general winning hole 313, 1st winning hole 314, 2nd winning hole 315, and variable winning hole 316) from which prize balls are paid out. , is information regarding the "accessory ratio" which is the ratio of the total number of balls paid out from the second winning hole and the variable number of balls paid out from the variable winning hole. When the "accessory ratio" is expressed in a mathematical formula, it is "accessory ratio" = 100 x ("number of balls paid out from the second winning opening" + "number of balls paid out from the variable winning opening")/"total number of balls paid out". The "accessory ratio information" is updated, for example, in the specific performance information update process shown in FIG. 28, which will be described later. In the present embodiment, the "accessory object ratio information" is stored as the cumulative accessory ratio from when the gaming machine 10 was installed in the game hall to the present. In addition, the "accessory ratio information" is for a certain period of time (for example, for a certain number of jackpots (for example, 100 times), a period until a certain number of jackpot drawings (for example, 1000 times) are executed in the normal gaming state, It may also be a ratio of accessories to a period until the number of out balls reaches a certain number (for example, 60,000 balls). Of course, the "continuous accessory ratio information" may include both the cumulative accessory ratio and the accessory ratio over a certain number of periods.

The "cumulative number of jackpot drawings" refers to the number of jackpot drawings held in the normal gaming state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode) from the time the gaming machine 10 was started before the game hall opened for business until now. It is the number of times. In other words, the "cumulative jackpot lottery number" is the cumulative variation display in which the symbol variation display in the first special symbol display section 362 of the main display section 36 is executed in response to a winning in the first winning hole 314 in the normal gaming state. It is also the number of times. The "cumulative jackpot lottery number" is incremented by 1 each time the symbol variation display on the main display section 36 is started in step S1606 in the variation start process of FIG. 26, which will be described later. Further, the "cumulative jackpot lottery number" is cleared from the gaming information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 when the main power of the gaming machine 10 is turned off.

"Number of unit jackpot drawings" is the number of jackpot drawings triggered by a winning of a certain number of minus difference balls in the first prize opening 314 in the normal gaming state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode) (main (number of times the symbol variation display on the first special symbol display section of the display section 36 has been executed). In this embodiment, the fixed number is "250 balls", and the difference ball is the number of balls obtained by subtracting "the number of balls paid out from the general winning hole" and "the number of balls paid out from the first winning hole" from the "number of out balls". In other words, when receiving 250 balls for 1,000 yen at a game hall, the "unit jackpot lottery number" is the number of fluctuating displays of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display section 362 for an average of 1,000 yen (jackpot lottery number). number of times received). Note that the "number of unit jackpot drawings" may be the number of jackpot drawings for a certain number of "out balls" in the normal gaming state. The "unit jackpot lottery number" is updated in the specific performance information update process of FIG. 28, which will be described later. In this embodiment, the "number of unit jackpot drawings" is stored as the cumulative number of unit jackpot drawings from the time the gaming machine 10 was installed in the game hall until the present. Note that the "number of unit jackpot drawings" refers to a certain period (for example, for a certain number of jackpot drawings (for example, 100 times), a period until a certain number of jackpot drawings (for example, 1000 times) are executed in the normal gaming state, It may be for a period until the number of out balls reaches a certain number (for example, 60,000 balls). Of course, both the cumulative number of unit jackpot drawings and the number of unit jackpot drawings in a certain number of periods may be stored as game information as the "number of unit jackpot drawings."

The "number of jackpots" is the number of times that the jackpot lottery result was a jackpot after the game machine 10 was activated before the gaming hall started operating until now. The "number of jackpots" is incremented by 1 each time the gaming state is shifted to the jackpot gaming state in the gaming state transition process executed in step S1306 in the main processing of FIG. 23, which will be described later. Furthermore, the "number of jackpots" is cleared from the gaming information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 when the main power of the gaming machine 10 is turned off.

"Number of consecutive losses" is the number of times that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is consecutively unsuccessful in the normal gaming state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode), and if the lottery result is a jackpot, it is 0 times. cleared. The "number of consecutive misses" indicates the result of the validity determination based on the low probability mode validity table in step S1603 when starting the symbol variation display on the main display section 36 in step S1606 in the variation start process of FIG. 26, which will be described later. If it is a miss, it is added by 1, and if the result of the judgment is a jackpot, it is cleared to 0 times. In this embodiment, the "number of consecutive losses" is cleared from the gaming information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 when the main power of the gaming machine 10 is turned off. Of course, the "number of consecutive losses" may not be cleared from the game information storage area 412d when the main power of the gaming machine 10 is turned off.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 12, the performance information display device 4A displays "base information" and "setting values" stored as gaming information (performance information) in a gaming information storage area 412d set in the RAM 412. . The performance information display device 4A includes a performance display monitor 43, a performance display switch 44, a set value display section 45, a set value change operation section 46, and a ROM47. Here, FIG. 17 is a diagram schematically showing an example of the performance information display device 4A.

As shown in FIG. 17, the performance display monitor 43 displays the "base information" of the gaming machine 10, and is provided at a position where it can be viewed when the inner frame 12 is expanded (FIG. reference). The performance display monitor 43 is composed of a plurality (four in this embodiment) of 7-segment displays 431 to 434, and is referred to as a 4-digit 7-seg display. Although the performance display monitor 43 is preferably provided in the main control device 4, it may be provided in a device other than the main control device 4 in the main control unit 331, and may be provided in other components of the game other than the main control unit 331. may be provided. It is also possible to display the "base information" using the first special symbol display section 362 and/or the second special symbol display section 363 of the main display section 36.

The 7-segment displays 431 to 434 can display numbers "0" to "9" and alphabets "A" to "F". In addition, in the 7-segment displays 431 to 434, when displaying the alphabet "B", a dot is lit to distinguish it from the number "8" and "8." is displayed, and the alphabet "D" is displayed. When displayed, a dot is lit to distinguish it from the number "0" and "0." is displayed. Furthermore, when displaying any of the alphabets from "A" to "F", it is conceivable to light up dots to clearly indicate the alphabet.

In the performance display monitor 43, among the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434, the left two 7-segment displays 431 and 432 are identification segments in which "base type" is displayed as an abbreviation, and the right two 7-segment displays 431 and 432 are identification segments in which "base type" is displayed as an abbreviation. Displays 433 and 434 are ratio segments in which base values (%) calculated by the MPU 41 are displayed. For example, in a case where the current base BL is 31%, "BL", which is an abbreviation for the current base BL, is "8." and "L" on the left two 7-segment displays 431 and 432, which are identification segments. The base value "31" is displayed as "3" and "1" on the right two 7-segment displays 433 and 434, which are ratio segments. That is, the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 display "8.", "L", "3", and "1" in order from the left.

The performance display switch 44 is used to turn on and off the power of the performance display monitor 43 (four 7-segment displays 431 to 434) at once when pressed, and is located in an easily operable position when the inner frame 12 is unfolded. (See Figure 3). In the illustrated example, the power is turned on when the upper half of the performance display switch 44 is pressed, and the power is turned off when the lower half is pressed. When the performance display switch 44 is operated to turn on the power, the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 are energized, allowing the performance display monitor 43 to display base information. On the other hand, when the performance display switch 44 is operated to turn off the power, the power to the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 is cut off, and the base information on the performance display monitor 43 is hidden. . Note that the performance display switch 44 may be provided at a location other than the main controller 4.

Here, FIG. 18(A) is a display example on the performance display monitor 43. As shown in FIG. 18A, when the performance display switch 44 is off, the 7-segment displays 431 to 434 are off, so the base information is not displayed. As shown in FIGS. 18(B) to 18(D), when the performance display switch 44 is turned on, unless the performance display switch 44 is turned off, the current base BL → the previous 60,000 yen is displayed as "base information". The process loops in the order of ball base B1 -> previous 60,000 ball base B2 -> current base BL, and each base is repeatedly displayed at regular intervals. The example shown in FIG. 18(B) shows that the current base BL is 28%, and the example shown in FIG. 18(C) shows that the previous 60,000 ball base B1 is 34%. In the example shown in , it shows that the 60,000-ball base B2 from the time before last was 32%. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 18A, when the performance display switch 44 is turned off, the 7-segment displays 431 to 434 are turned off and the base information on the performance display monitor 43 is hidden.

In addition, programs necessary to display "base information" on the performance display monitor 43, such as a program that calculates the current base BL, the previous 60,000 ball base B1, and the previous 60,000 ball base B2, and the current base information on the performance display monitor 43. A program for sequentially displaying the BL, the previous 60,000-ball base B1, and the two-previous 60,000-ball base B2 at regular intervals is stored in a ROM 47 provided in the main controller 4 separately from the ROM 412 of the MPU 41. Thereby, the load on the ROM 411 of the MPU 41 can be reduced. However, if the ROM 411 of the MPU 41 has sufficient capacity, a program necessary for displaying the "base information" on the performance display monitor 43 may be stored in the ROM 411. Further, a program necessary for displaying the "base information" on the performance display monitor 43 may be stored in a storage means such as a ROM provided separately from the main controller 4.

In addition, in the performance display monitor 43, instead of or in addition to the "base information", "continuous accessory ratio information" and "accessory ratio information" are stored in the game information storage area 412d. Other performance information may also be displayed.

Furthermore, the performance display monitor 43 is not limited to a 7-segment display, and may be configured with other forms of display such as a dot matrix display, a liquid crystal display, or an organic EL display.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 17, the setting value display section 45 is used to select the low probability mode success/failure table (see FIG. 14(A)) and the high probability mode success/failure table (see FIG. 14(B)) to be referred to in the jackpot lottery. It displays the above-mentioned setting values, and is composed of a 7-segment display. Note that the setting value display section 45 is not limited to the 7-segment display, and may be configured with other forms of display such as a dot matrix display, liquid crystal display, or organic EL display, and may be configured using the performance display monitor 43. The setting value may also be displayed.

The setting value change operation unit 46 turns on and off the power of the 7-segment display by pressing the unit, and allows changing the setting value by rotating the 7-segment display when the power is turned on. The set value change operation section 46 has a function as a contact type switch that is turned on and off by a pressing operation, for example, and a function as a rotary switch whose contacts are switched by a rotation operation (rotation by a predetermined angle). Here, FIG. 19 is a diagram showing an example of display on the set value display section 45 of the main controller.

As shown in FIG. 19(A), when the set value display section 45 is in the off state and a press operation is performed on the set value change operation section 46, the 7 segment display is energized and the set value display section A number is displayed at 45. The numbers displayed at this time are the setting values stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412, and indicate the current setting values. In the illustrated example, the set value is "1". On the other hand, if the set value change operation section 46 is pressed while the set value display section 45 is lit, the power to the 7-segment display is cut off, causing the set value display section 45 to turn off. Become.

As shown in FIG. 19(B), when the set value display section 45 is in a lit state and a rotation operation is performed on the set value change operation section 46, the number displayed on the set value display section 45 is changed. . In the illustrated example, when the set value display section 45 is rotated clockwise, the number displayed on the set value display section 45 increases, and when the set value display section 45 is rotated counterclockwise, the number displayed on the set value display section 45 becomes larger. The number displayed will be smaller. When the number displayed on the setting value display section 45 is changed by rotating the setting value display section 45, the changed number is stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 as a setting value. Therefore, if the power to the 7-segment display is turned off by pressing the set value change operation part 46 while the number corresponding to the desired set value is displayed on the set value display part 45, the power will not be turned off. The number that was displayed immediately before is determined as the setting value. Thereby, the MPU 41 selects a low probability mode validity table (see FIG. 14(A)) or a high probability mode validity table (see FIG. 14(B)) selected according to the setting values stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412. A jackpot lottery can be held based on the following.

Note that the method of changing the set value is not limited to the method of rotating the set value changing operation section 46 and then turning off the power of the set value display section 45. For example, the setting value can be determined by rotating the setting value change operation unit 46 and then pressing the operation button 20 (see Figure 1), or by repeatedly pressing or holding down the operation button 20 (see Figure 1). A method of changing the number displayed on the value display section 45 and then turning off the power of the set value display section 45. A method of displaying the set value by inserting a key into a keyhole provided in the main control device 4, etc. and rotating the key. It is also possible to change the number displayed on the section 45 and then remove the key.

Here, the performance information display device 4A including the set value display section 45 is provided in the main control device 4 of the main control unit 331 in the control unit 33. Further, the control unit 33 is provided on the back side of the game board 31 and can be opened and closed with respect to the front frame 11. Therefore, the setting value display section 45 is provided on the back side of the game board 31, and by opening and closing the control unit 33 together with the game board 31 with respect to the front frame 11, the setting value display section 45 can be set to the outside of the game machine 10 (on the front side of the front frame 11). ), it is possible to select a visible state or an invisible state. That is, by closing the game board 31 (control unit 33) with respect to the front frame 11, the setting value display section 45 cannot be visually recognized, while opening the game board 31 (control unit 33) with respect to the front frame 11. The setting value display section 45 can be visually recognized. As a result, when a player plays a game on the gaming machine 10, the setting value display section 45 is not visible unless the game board 31 is opened. The value is prevented from being grasped by the player. Then, when the setting value display section 45 is in the lit state, the setting value changing operation section 46 is turned off by pressing the setting value changing operation section 46 . Therefore, by keeping the set value display section 45 in an off state during business hours of the game hall, the set value display section 45 can be visually recognized when the game board 31 is opened due to balls jamming in the game machine 10, etc. Even if the player is in the state, the setting value display section 45 can prevent the player from grasping the setting value.

On the other hand, when the set value display section 45 is in the off state, when the set value change operation section 46 is pressed, the set value display section 45 is turned on, and the numbers corresponding to the set values are hidden. Therefore, when the game board 31 is opened to the front frame 11 and the set value change operation section 46 is pressed during non-business hours of the game hall, the set value display section 45 is turned on. The set value can be checked based on the numbers displayed on the set value display section 45, and furthermore, the set value can be changed by rotating the set value changing operation section 46. This makes it possible to change the setting value outside of business hours with a simple operation while ensuring the confidentiality of the setting value during business hours.

[Sub control unit 332]
As shown in FIG. 12, the sub-control unit 332 is equipped with a sound lamp control device 5 and a display control device 6, and based on the control signal input from the main control unit 331, the symbol fluctuation display and the Execute the performance display.

[Audio lamp control device 5]
The audio lamp control device 5 includes an MPU 51, an input/output I/F 52, and the like. The MPU 51 is an arithmetic unit configured as a one-chip microcomputer. Furthermore, the MPU 51 includes a ROM 511 and a RAM 512.

The ROM 511 is a nonvolatile storage section in which control programs and parameter information are stored in advance. The ROM 511 also stores information such as sounds and lamp blinking patterns used in variable game effects, jackpot game effects, and the like. The RAM 512 is a volatile storage unit that can read and write various information, and is used as a primary storage area (work area) for processing executed by the MPU 51. Note that the RAM 512 may be a nonvolatile storage unit.

The audio lamp control device 5 sends commands to the display control device 6 based on commands (control signals) input from the main control device 4 by having the MPU 51 execute processing according to a control program stored in the ROM 511. (control signal) to control the display on the symbol display section 341. The audio lamp control device 5 also controls the playback audio output from the speaker 26 and the blinking mode of the illumination section 27 in accordance with the display on the symbol display section 341. For example, the MPU 51 controls image display on the symbol display section 341, playback audio output from the speaker 26, and blinking mode of the illumination section 27 when executing a variable game performance and a jackpot game performance that will be described later.

The input/output I/F 52 is an input/output interface that inputs a signal to the audio lamp control device 5 and outputs a control signal from the audio lamp control device 5. Specifically, the main control device 4 and the display control device 6 are connected to the input/output I/F 52. Commands such as a fluctuation pattern command, a first hold command, a second hold command, and a shift command are input from the main controller 4 to the audio lamp control device 5. Further, the audio lamp control device 5 outputs display variation pattern commands and the like to the display control device 6. Note that another embodiment may include a configuration in which the display control device 6 receives a command from the main control device 4 and inputs the command to the audio lamp control device 5. Moreover, a configuration in which the sub-control unit 332 includes one control device having the functions of both the audio lamp control device 5 and the display control device 6 is also considered as another embodiment.

Further, the input/output I/F 52 is connected to the speaker 26 and the illumination section 27 . In the audio lamp control device 5, the MPU 51 controls the audio output from the speaker 26, the blinking mode of the illumination section 27, and the stopper section 383 of the game ball retention section 38 based on the command input from the main control device 4. It is possible to control the vertical movement of the 7-segment display section 39, etc. By controlling the vertical movement of the stopper section 383 of the game ball retention section 38 by the MPU 51, the game ball (special out A state in which the game balls (balls) are retained and a state in which the game balls (special out balls) retained in the retention lane 381 are discharged via the discharge lane 382 are selected. Further, each segment A to G of the seven segment display section 39 is controlled to be turned on or off by the MPU 51. Further, an operation switch 20a is connected to the input/output I/F 52. Thereby, the MPU 51 detects that the operation button 20 has been operated, and based on the detection result, the image game performance is executed on the symbol display section 341 and the sound is output from the speaker 26. It is also possible to control audio output effects, lamp effects based on the blinking mode of the illumination section 27, and the like.

The MPU 51 executes predetermined arithmetic processing based on commands input from the main controller 4 such as a variation pattern command, a first hold command, a second hold command, and a shift command.

Specifically, when a variation pattern command is input, the MPU 51 creates a variation pattern (stop symbol combination of decorative symbols (see FIG. 38(A)), variation display time, variation type (see FIG. 38(A)) based on the variation pattern command. (B))) and the production pattern type (see FIGS. 39(A) to 37(C)), and sends a display variation pattern command corresponding to the variation pattern to the display control device 6 (see FIG. 37(A) to 37(C)). (see step S2105 in the command determination process), the symbol variation display on the symbol display section 341 is started. At this time, in the symbol display section 341, when the variable pattern command indicates a miss, a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the miss is displayed.

[Display control device 6]
The display control device 6 controls the display of the symbol display section 341 based on commands (control signals) input from the audio lamp control device 5. Specifically, the display control device 6 executes the symbol variation display and the effect display by controlling the display of the symbol display section 341 based on the display variation pattern command etc. inputted from the audio lamp control device 5.

The display control device 6 includes an MPU 61, an input/output I/F 62, etc., and the audio lamp control device 5 and the symbol display section 341 are connected to the input/output I/F 62. Note that bidirectional communication may be possible between the audio lamp control device 5 and the display control device 6.

The MPU 61 is an arithmetic unit configured as a 1-chip microcomputer, and has a built-in ROM 611 and a RAM 612. The display control device 6 also includes other circuits such as a timer circuit for measuring time and an interrupt circuit for accepting interrupts. The MPU 61 executes processing according to a control program stored in the ROM 611 or the like. Further, part or all of the processing executed by the display control device 6 may be executed by an electronic circuit.

In addition to the control program, the ROM 611 stores a plurality of types of variable symbols such as decorative symbols used in the variable symbol display of the symbol display section 341, advance notice effects images, reach effect images, jackpot effect images, and miss effect images. ing. Note that the images displayed on the symbol display section 341 include still images and moving images. Further, the ROM 611 stores a display schedule corresponding to each variable display pattern command. Specifically, the display schedule includes the type of image to be used and the display timing, as well as the variable display time of the variable symbol. In the display control device 6, the MPU 61 causes the symbol display section 341 to display an image according to the display schedule corresponding to the variable display pattern command, thereby realizing the symbol variable display and the effect display.

The RAM 612 is a volatile storage unit that can read and write various information, and is used as a primary storage area (work area) for processing executed by the MPU 61. Note that the RAM 612 may be a nonvolatile storage unit.

[Payout control device 7]
The payout control device 7 is equipped with an MPU 71, an input/output I/F 72, and the like. The MPU 71 is an arithmetic unit configured as a one-chip microcomputer. Further, the MPU 71 includes a ROM 711 and a RAM 712.

The ROM 711 is a nonvolatile storage section in which control programs and parameter information are stored in advance. Further, the RAM 712 is a volatile storage unit that can read and write various information, and is used as a primary storage area (work area) for processing executed by the MPU 71. Note that the RAM 712 may be a nonvolatile storage unit.

The input/output I/F 72 is an input/output interface that inputs a signal to the payout control device 7 and outputs a control signal from the payout control device 7. Specifically, the input/output I/F 72 is connected to the payout device 132 and the ball lending device 100.

As described above, the payout device 132 pays out game balls from the tank 131 toward the upper tray 23, and includes a drive unit 132a such as a motor that drives a ball stopper that switches whether or not to pay out game balls. It also includes a payout sensor 132b that individually detects the game balls being paid out. The payout control device 7 pays out an arbitrary number of game balls by controlling the drive unit 132a based on the detection result by the payout sensor 132b. Further, the payout control device 7 is provided with a state return switch 73. The state return switch 73 is operated, for example, when a dispensing error such as a ball jam in the dispensing device 132 occurs to eliminate the ball jam (return to normal state).

The ball lending device 100 is installed in an island facility together with the gaming machine 10. The ball lending device 100 stores data in a recording medium such as a card inserted into the ball lending device 100 in response to an operation of a ball lending operation device (not shown) provided on the front frame 11 of the gaming machine 10. It is possible to pay out a number of game balls corresponding to a preset amount within the range of the amount set in advance and lend them to the player. Specifically, when a control signal to pay out a predetermined number of game balls is input from the ball lending device 100 to the payout control device 7, the payout device 132 is controlled by the MPU 71 and a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. paid out. Note that the recording medium is not limited to a card, but may be a coin-shaped or stick-shaped storage medium that includes an IC chip, for example. Further, the ball lending device 100 may be capable of lending out a predetermined number of game balls according to the amount of cash by inserting cash.

[Launching control device 8]
The launch control device 8 includes a launch control IC 81 that controls the drive of the game ball launch mechanism 32. Specifically, the launch control IC 81 moves the game balls stored in the upper tray 23 to the launch rail 321 by driving the ball feeding device 322 of the game ball launch mechanism 32 while the launch handle 22 is being rotated. Let it feed on top. Then, the launch control IC 81 detects the amount of operation of the launch handle 22 and directs the game ball on the launch rail 321 toward the game board 31 by driving the solenoid 323 of the game ball launch mechanism 32 according to the amount of operation. and fire it. At this time, the firing control IC 81 drives the ball feeding device 322 and the solenoid 323 using a clock signal that switches ON/OFF at a preset period (for example, 0.6 seconds) as a drive signal. As a result, in the game machine 10, one game ball is fired toward the game area every 0.6 seconds.

Further, the firing handle 22 is provided with a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotational operation by the player, and a voltage is input to the firing control IC 81 according to the amount of rotational operation of the firing handle 22. Thereby, the firing control IC 81 determines, based on the voltage value input according to the rotational operation amount of the firing handle 22, that the greater the rotational operation amount of the firing handle 22, the higher the firing intensity of the game ball from the game ball firing mechanism 32. Adjust the voltage applied to the solenoid 323 so that it becomes stronger.

Further, the firing handle 22 includes a touch sensor 21a for detecting that the player is touching the firing handle 22, and a ball stop switch 21b for the player to arbitrarily operate to stop the firing of the game ball. is provided. The firing control IC 81 uses the touch sensor 21a and the ball stop switch 21b to detect when the touch sensor 21a detects that the player is not touching the firing handle 22, or when the ball stop switch 21b is operated by the player. When this is detected, the game ball firing mechanism 32 stops firing the game balls. As a result, for example, the firing handle 22 is fixed in a rotated state, and gaming in a situation where the player is not touching the firing handle 22 is prevented. Furthermore, the player can stop the firing of the game ball by operating the ball stop switch 21b with his/her thumb or the like at any timing while rotating the firing handle 22.

[Power control device 9]
The power supply control device 9 generates +12V voltage for driving various sensors, drive units, etc., +5V voltage for logic used in the control device, and the like. Then, the power supply control device 9 supplies the generated voltage of +12V or +5V to the main control device 4, the audio lamp control device 5, the display control device 6, the payout control device 7, the firing control device 8, etc.

The power supply control device 9 is provided with a power switch 91 for turning on/off the power of the gaming machine 10, and a RAM erasure switch 92 that is operated when returning the gaming machine 10 to its initial state. The gaming machine 10 is initialized when the power switch 91 is operated and the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 92 is in the ON state.

Further, the power supply control device 9 is provided with a capacitor and a secondary battery as a charging means that is charged with electric power supplied from the power supply equipment. Thereby, in the gaming machine 10, even if the power supply from the power supply equipment is cut off, the information in the RAM provided in the control device is retained for a predetermined period of time by the power discharged from the capacitor. Furthermore, in the gaming machine 10, even if the power supply from the power supply equipment is cut off, the control device can be driven for a predetermined period of time by the power discharged from the secondary battery.

Furthermore, when the power supply control device 9 determines that the power supply is cut off, it inputs a power outage signal to the main control device 4, the audio lamp control device 5, the payout control device 7, and the like. For example, when the power supply control device 9 outputs a preset DC voltage of 24V based on the power supplied from the power supply equipment, the power supply control device 9 is in a power outage state when the DC voltage reaches less than the preset 22V. I judge that. In addition, when the main control device 4, the audio lamp control device 5, the payout control device 7, etc. receive a power outage signal from the power supply control device 9, they interrupt the control being executed and execute a predetermined NMI interrupt process.

[Processing of main controller 4]
Next, the processing executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. 20 to 33. Specifically, in the gaming machine 10, the MPU 41 performs a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the startup process, a main timer interrupt process that is periodically started, and a main timer interrupt process that is executed during a power outage. Executes NMI interrupt processing, etc. Note that in this embodiment, descriptions of startup processing, NMI interrupt processing, etc. will be omitted, and main timer interrupt processing and main processing will be described. Furthermore, in the start-up process, it is checked whether the RAM 412 is operating normally, and execution of the main timer interrupt process is permitted on the condition that the RAM 412 is operating normally.

[Main timer interrupt processing of main controller 4]
Here, FIG. 20 is a flowchart for explaining an example of the procedure of the main timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4. As shown in FIG. The main timer interrupt process is executed, for example, every 2 msec. The main timer interrupt processing will be explained below with reference to FIG.

<Step S1001>
As shown in FIG. 20, in step S1001, the MPU 41 executes sensor detection processing to determine the detection state of a sensor connected to the main control device 4. For example, the detection states of the incoming ball sensors 313a to 317a, out ball sensor 318a, special out ball sensor 384, etc. are determined. At this time, if the entry of a game ball into any of the entry sensors 313a to 317a is detected, the MPU 41 stores this information in the RAM 412 as winning detection information. Further, when an out ball is detected by the out ball sensor 318a, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the number of out balls stored in the gaming information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 and updates the number of out balls in the gaming information storage area 412d. do. Further, when a special out ball is detected by the special out ball sensor 384, the MPU 41 sets a special out ball detection command and stores this special out ball detection command in the RAM 412.

<Step S1002>
Next, in step S1002, the MPU 41 updates the random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter values of the random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2, and clears the counter values to 0 when the counter values reach the maximum value.

<Step S1003>
Subsequently, in step S1003, the MPU 41 updates the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the normal win random number counter C4. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the normal win random number counter C4, and when these counter values reach the maximum value. If so, clear the corresponding counter value to 0.

<Steps S1004 and S1005>
After that, the MPU 41 executes a start-up winning process associated with a winning to the first winning opening 314 or the second winning opening 315 (step S1004), and executes a firing control process (step S1005). The details of the starting winning process will be described later with reference to FIG. 21.

On the other hand, the firing control process is performed on the game ball on the condition that the touch sensor 21a detects that the player is touching the firing handle 22, and the ball stop switch 21b for stopping the firing is not operated. This is the process that enables the firing of . In addition, the launch control process disables the launch of the game ball when the touch sensor 21a detects that the player is not touching the launch handle 22, or when the ball stop switch 21b is operated. This is the process of The MPU 41 instructs the launch control device 8 to launch the game ball when the launch of the game ball is valid.

<Step S1006>
In step S1006, the MPU 41 performs a normal winning lottery to determine whether or not to put the electric accessory 315b of the second winning opening 315 in an electric role open state based on the ordinary winning random number counter C4 stored in the electric role holding area 412c. Execute through-gate processing to be performed. Specifically, in the through gate process, the MPU 41 first determines whether the current gaming mode is the high frequency support mode based on the high frequency support mode flag. When the MPU 41 is not in the high-frequency support mode, the MPU 41 determines that it is a normal win when the normal win random number counter C4 is between 0 and 29, and it is determined that it is a loss when the normal win random number counter C4 is between 30 and 249. I judge that there is. In addition, in the high frequency support mode, the MPU 41 determines that it is a normal win when the normal win random number counter C4 is between 0 and 199, and it is determined that it is a loss when the normal win random number counter C4 is between 200 and 249. I judge that there is. Then, when the MPU 41 determines that it is a normal win in the through gate process, the electric accessory 315b is kept open for a predetermined period of time. This makes it possible to win a prize in the second prize opening 315 on the upper right side of the game board 31 on which the electric accessories 315b are arranged side by side.

[Start winning process]
Here, FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the start winning process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1004 in the main timer interrupt process of FIG. Hereinafter, the starting prize winning process will be explained with reference to FIG. 21.

<Step S1101>
As shown in FIG. 21, in step S1101, the MPU 41 determines whether or not there is a win in the first winning hole 314. Here, if the MPU 41 determines that there is a winning in the first winning opening 314 (step S1101: Yes), the process moves to step S1102, and if it determines that there is no winning in the first winning opening 314 (step S1101: No). ), the process moves to step S1106.

<Steps S1102 and S1103>
In step S1102, the MPU 41 determines whether the pending number N stored in the pending number storage area NAA of the RAM 412 is the maximum pending number (4 in this embodiment). Here, if the number of reservations N is the maximum number of reservations (step S1102: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1106. On the other hand, if the number of reservations N is not the maximum number of reservations (step S1102: No), the MPU 41 adds 1 to the number of reservations N (step S1103).

<Step S1104>
In step S1104, the MPU 41 updates the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 that are updated in step S1003 of FIG. 20, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 (step S1302 of FIG. and S1312), and stores the counter value in the first vacant reservation area among the first reservation area REA1 to fourth reservation area REA4 of the first reservation storage area REA of the reservation storage area 412b in the RAM 412. .

<Step S1105>
In step S1105, the MPU 41 checks the content of the validity information before the validity information for the first reservation acquired in step S1104 becomes a target for determination of the validity of the jackpot in the fluctuation start process (S1408 in FIG. 24, FIG. 26), which will be described later. This is confirmed, and a first pending command setting process is executed to set the first pending command in the RAM 412 based on the confirmation result. Note that details of the first pending command setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 22.

<Step S1106>
In step S1106, the MPU 41 determines whether or not there is a win in the second winning hole 315. Here, if the MPU 41 determines that there has been a winning in the second winning opening 315 (step S1106: Yes), the process moves to step S1107, and if it determines that there has been no winning in the second winning opening 315 (step S1106: No). ), the start winning process is ended, and the process moves to step S1005 in FIG. 20.

<Steps S1107 and S1108>
In step S1107, the MPU 41 determines whether the pending number M stored in the pending number storage area NAB of the RAM 412 is the maximum pending number (4 in this embodiment). Here, if the number of reservations M is the maximum number of reservations (step S1107: Yes), the MPU 41 ends the start winning process and moves the process to step S1005 in FIG. 20. On the other hand, if the number of reservations M is not the maximum number of reservations (step S1107: No), the MPU 41 adds 1 to the number of reservations M (step S1108).

<Step S1109>
In step S1109, the MPU 41 updates the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 that are updated in step S1003 of FIG. 20, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 (step S1302 of FIG. and S1312), and stores the counter value in the first vacant reservation area among the first reservation area REB1 to fourth reservation area REB4 of the second reservation storage area REB of the reservation storage area 412b in the RAM 412. .

<Step S1110>
In step S1110, the MPU 41 determines whether the validity information for the second hold acquired in step S1109 is applicable to the determination of the validity of the jackpot in the fluctuation start process (S1408 in FIG. 24, FIG. 26), which will be described later. The contents are confirmed, and a second pending command setting process is executed to set the second pending command in the RAM 412 based on the confirmation result. Here, the second pending command setting process is similar to the first pending command setting process described later with reference to FIG. 22, so a detailed explanation will be omitted. Note that the second pending command setting process can be performed by replacing "first pending command" with "second pending command" and "number of pending commands N" with "number of pending commands M" in the first pending command setting process of FIG. good.

[First pending command setting process]
Here, FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first pending command setting process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1105 in the start winning process of FIG. The first pending command includes information indicating that the command is the first pending command, and information such as the type of the first pending command (jackpot type or loss), fluctuation pattern, and number of pending commands N. . The first pending command setting process will be described below with reference to FIG. 22.

<Step S1201>
As shown in FIG. 22, the MPU 41 reads the pending number N from the pending number storage area NAA of the first pending storage area REA, and reads the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to each first pending from the RAM 412 (step S1201).

<Step S1202>
In step S1202, the MPU 41 determines whether the mode is high probability mode or not. If it is the high probability mode (step S1202: Yes), the process moves to step S1203, and if it is not the high probability mode (step S1202 :No), the process moves to step S1204. For example, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the high probability mode is set to ON at the time of transition to the high probability mode in the gaming state transition process (step S1306 in FIG. 23) in the main process (described later), and the jackpot game is changed from the high probability mode to the high probability mode. The judgment is made based on a high probability mode flag that is set to off when transitioning to another gaming state such as a game state.

<Steps S1203 and S1204>
In step S1203, the MPU 41 reads the high probability mode validity table (see FIG. 14(B)) that is saved according to the setting value in step S1712 in the setting value change process of FIG. Based on this, a determination is made as to whether or not the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read in step S1201 is a value corresponding to a jackpot win. On the other hand, in step S1204, the MPU 41 reads the low probability mode validity table (see FIG. 14(A)) saved according to the setting value in step S1712 in the setting value change process of FIG. 27, which will be described later, and selects the low probability mode. Based on the win/fail table, a win/fail determination is performed to determine whether the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read in step S1201 is a value corresponding to a jackpot win.

Note that in steps S1203 and S1204, the validity determination is performed based on the high probability mode validity table or the low probability mode validity table that is saved according to the setting value in step S1712 in the setting value change process of FIG. 27, which will be described later. , in step S1203 or S1204, after reading out the setting values saved in step S1710 in the setting value change process of FIG. It is also possible to make a selection and judge whether it is correct or not.

<Step S1205>
In step S1205, the MPU 41 determines whether the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to a jackpot win. Here, if the MPU 41 determines that the counter value read from the jackpot random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to a jackpot win (step S1205: Yes), the process moves to step S1206, and the counter value read from the jackpot random number counter C1 If it is determined that the counter value read from is not a value corresponding to a jackpot win (step S1205: No), the process moves to step S1208.

<Step S1206>
In step S1206, the MPU 41 reads the counter values of the jackpot type counter C2 and the fluctuation type counter CS1 from the RAM 412. For example, when the win/fail information is stored in the third holding area REA3 in step S1104 in the starting winning process in FIG. 21, the jackpot type counter C2 and the fluctuation type included in the win/fail information stored in the third holding area REA3 The counter value of counter CS1 is read. It should be noted that among the first holding area REA1 to the fourth holding area REA4, the holding area in which the win/fail information is stored in step S1104 in the starting winning process in FIG. 21 is based on the value of the holding number N stored in the holding number storage area NA. It can be determined by

<Step S1207>
In step S1207, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot type counter C2, the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the number of reservations N to the first reservation command. In this way, since the first hold command includes the hold number N read out in step S1201, the MPU 51 of the audio lamp control device 5 that receives the first hold command By referring to N, it is possible to recognize which of the validity information stored in the first reservation area REA1 to the fourth reservation area REA4 the first reservation command corresponds to.

<Steps S1208 and S1209>
In step S1208, the MPU 41 reads the counter value of the variation type counter CS1 from the RAM 412. Next, the MPU 41 sets information indicating that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a loss, the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the pending number N to the first pending command (step S1209).

Note that the first pending command that is set to ON in the first pending command setting process is stored in the RAM 412, and is executed by the MPU 41 of the main controller 4 in step S1301 of the main process in FIG. 23, which will be described later. It is deleted after being sent to the audio lamp control device 5 along with the command. Further, the content of the first hold command described here is only an example, and the contents are not limited to those described here as long as the audio lamp control device 5 can grasp the same content as the hold command. For example, it is conceivable that part or all of the information of the first pending command is included in another command.

[Main processing of main controller 4]
Next, the main processing executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 will be described with reference to FIG. 23. In the main process, main control processes for the progress of variable games and jackpot games are executed. In the main processing, the processing in steps S1301 to S1309 is executed as a periodic processing at a cycle of, for example, 4 msec, and the counter updating processing in steps S1310 to S1312 is executed in the remaining time from the end of the processing in steps S1301 to S1309 to the next cycle. Ru.

<Step S1301>
As shown in FIG. 23, in step S1301, the MPU 41 transmits output data such as commands set in the main timer interrupt process in FIG. Execute external output processing to send to. For example, commands such as a fluctuation pattern command, a first hold command, a second hold command, a shift command, a jackpot start command, a round game start command, an ending start command, a setting value change command, and a unit jackpot drawing number update command are set in the RAM 412. If so, the command is sent to the audio lamp control device 5. Further, if a prize ball command is set in the RAM 412 in the prize ball command setting process of step S1303 described later in the main process, the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 7.

<Step S1302>
In step S1302, the MPU 41 updates the value of the variation type counter CS1. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter value of the variation type counter CS1, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value.

<Step S1303>
In step S1303, the MPU 41 sets a prize ball command to be output to the payout control device 7 and the sub-control unit 332 in the RAM 412. Specifically, the MPU 41 determines whether a winning has occurred in the general winning hole 313, the variable winning hole 316, etc. based on the winning detection information stored in the RAM 412. If a prize has been won, a prize ball command indicating the number of prize balls to be paid out in accordance with the winning is set in the RAM 412. At this time, in the normal gaming state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode), if a winning occurs in the general winning opening 313 or the first winning opening 314, the MPU 41 stores the winning information in the gaming information storage area 412d of the RAM 412. The number of balls paid out from the general winning hole or the number of balls paid out from the first winning hole is updated to the value obtained by adding the number of balls paid out due to the current winning. In addition, in the time saving gaming state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode) or the variable probability gaming state (high probability mode and high frequency support mode), when a winning occurs in the second winning hole 315, the MPU 41 stores the RAM 412 The number of balls paid out from the second winning hole stored in the game information storage area 412d is updated to the value obtained by adding the number of balls paid out due to the current winning. Furthermore, in the jackpot game state, when a winning occurs in the variable winning opening 316, the MPU 41 changes the number of balls paid out from the variable winning opening stored in the gaming information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 to the number of balls paid out due to the current winning. Update to the added value.

<Step S1304>
In step S1304, the MPU 41 executes a variable game control process for controlling the game in the variable game. The details of the variable game control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 24, but in the variable game control process, the above-mentioned jackpot lottery is executed, and a variable pattern command necessary for the symbol display unit 341 to display a variable pattern is set. be done. At this time, the MPU 41 updates the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, which are updated in step S1003 of the main timer interrupt process in FIG. 20, and the fluctuations updated in step S1302 and step S1312 of this process. Based on each value of the type counter CS1, a variable pattern command indicating the lottery result of the jackpot lottery and the variable display time is set in the RAM 412.

<Step S1305>
In step S1305, the MPU 41 executes a jackpot game control process for controlling the progress of the jackpot game. In the jackpot game control process, control processing for a jackpot game consisting of an opening, an opening/closing execution mode, and an ending is executed. In the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 41 controls the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing door 319 in a round game in which the variable prize opening 316 is opened, thereby determining the result of the jackpot lottery (jackpot type) that triggered the transition to the jackpot game. ) is executed as many times as necessary. For example, the MPU 41 executes the round game 5 times when the jackpot type is 5R normal jackpot and 5R probability variable jackpot, and executes the round game 16 times when the jackpot type is 16R probability variable jackpot. In addition, in the jackpot game control process, a round game start command is set in the RAM 412 when starting each round game in the opening/closing execution mode, and an ending start command is set in the RAM 412 when starting an ending.

<Step S1306>
In step S1306, the MPU 41 executes a game state transition process for transitioning the game state based on the lottery result of the jackpot lottery in step S1602 or S1603 in the fluctuation start process of FIG. 26, which will be described later. In the gaming state transition process, the MPU 41 changes the gaming state to a jackpot gaming state in which the opening/closing execution mode is executed, a variable gaming state which is a high probability mode and a high frequency support mode, a low probability mode and a high frequency support mode, and a low probability mode and a high frequency support mode. A transition is made to a short-time gaming state, which is a frequent support mode, and a normal gaming state, which is a low probability mode and a low frequency support mode.

For example, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the MPU 41 shifts the gaming state to the jackpot gaming state after the variable game that informs the lottery result ends. At this time, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot game state flag stored in the RAM 412 to ON. Furthermore, when the jackpot game ends, the MPU 41 shifts the gaming state from the jackpot gaming state to a predetermined gaming state according to the lottery result of the jackpot lottery that triggered the execution of the jackpot game. In this embodiment, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a 5R probability variable jackpot or a 16R probability variable jackpot, the MPU 41 shifts to the probability variable gaming state after the end of the jackpot game, and when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a 5R regular jackpot. In some cases, the state is shifted to a time-saving game state after the end of a jackpot game. Furthermore, when the notification of lottery results for the specified number of jackpot lots is finished in the time-saving game state, the game state is shifted to the normal game state after the variable game ends.

Moreover, when the MPU 41 shifts the gaming state, it sets the flag for the gaming state before the shift to OFF, while setting the flag for the gaming state after the shift to ON. For example, when there is a transition of the gaming state from the jackpot gaming state to the variable probability gaming state, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot gaming flag to OFF while setting the high probability mode flag to ON. On the other hand, when there is a transition of the gaming state from the variable probability gaming state to the jackpot gaming state, the high probability mode flag is set to OFF while the jackpot gaming flag is set to ON.

Furthermore, when shifting the gaming state to the jackpot gaming state, the MPU 41 sets a jackpot game start command in the RAM 412 and adds 1 to the "number of jackpots" stored in the gaming information storage area 412d set in the RAM 412.

<Step S1307>
In step S1307, the MPU 41 executes a setting value change process. In this setting value changing process, a process is executed that controls displaying or non-displaying of setting values or changing setting values stored in the game information storage area 412d in accordance with the operation on the setting value changing operation section 46. Note that details of the setting value changing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 27.

In addition, in this embodiment, the setting value changing process is executed in the main process, but it is limited to the start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, or during the start-up process after the start-up process until the launching of the game ball starts. It is also possible that it is executed by As a result, after the player starts playing the game, the set values cannot be changed until the next power is turned on, so it is possible to prevent the set values from being changed during business hours of the game hall. .

<Step S1308>
In step S1308, the MPU 41 executes specific performance information update processing of the game information. In this embodiment, the base information, the number of unit jackpot lottery, the continuous accessory ratio, and the accessory ratio are updated as specific performance information. Note that details of the specific performance information update process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 28 and 29.

<Step S1309>
In step S1309, the MPU 41 executes display control processing for the performance display monitor 43. In this display control process of the performance display monitor 43, a process of displaying the base information updated in step S1308 on the performance display monitor 43 is executed. Note that details of the display control process of the performance display monitor 43 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 30 to 33.

<Step S1310>
In step S1310, the MPU 41 determines whether the execution timing for the next main process has arrived, that is, whether a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current main process. Here, when the MPU 41 determines that the timing to execute the next main process has arrived (step S1310: Yes), the process moves to step S1301, and executes each process from S1301 described above. On the other hand, if the MPU 41 determines that the execution timing of the next main process has not arrived (step S1310: No), the MPU 41 determines that the execution timing of the next main process has not arrived, that is, until the execution timing of the next main process arrives. During the remaining time, steps S1310, S1311, and S1312 are repeatedly executed until it is determined that the timing for executing the next main process has arrived (step S1310: Yes).

<Step S1311>
In step S1311, the MPU 41 updates random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter values of the random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2, and clears the counter values to 0 when the counter values reach the maximum value.

<Step S1312>
In step S1312, the MPU 41 updates the variation type counter CS1. Specifically, 1 is added to the counter values of the variation type counter CS1, and when these counter values reach the maximum value, the counter values are cleared to 0. Then, after updating the variation type counter CS1, the MPU 41 returns the process to step S1310.

[Variable game control processing]
Here, FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the variable game control process executed in step S1304 in the main process of FIG. Hereinafter, the variable game control process will be explained with reference to FIG. 24.

<Step S1401>
As shown in FIG. 24, in step S1401, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the gaming machine 10 is playing a jackpot game, and if it is playing a jackpot game (step S1401: Yes), the MPU 41 executes the variable game control process. If the game ends and the jackpot game is not in progress (step S1401: No), the process moves to step S1402. Whether or not a jackpot game is to be executed is set to ON at the time of transition to the jackpot game state, for example, in the game state transition process of step S1306 in the main process of FIG. 23, and turned off at the time of transition from the jackpot game state to another game state. Judgment is made based on the jackpot game flag set in .

<Step S1402>
In step S1402, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the symbol variation display is in progress. If the symbol variation display is in progress (step S1402: Yes), the process moves to step S1403, and if the symbol variation display is not in progress, the process proceeds to step S1403. (Step S1402: No), the process moves to step S1406. For example, whether or not the symbol fluctuation display is in progress is set to ON at the start of the fluctuation display in step S1606 in the fluctuation start process of FIG. 26, which will be described later, and when the fluctuation display time has elapsed (step S1403: Yes), This is determined based on the variable display flag that is set to OFF in step S1405 of the variable game control process.

<Step S1403>
In step S1403, the MPU 41 determines whether the variable display time has elapsed since the start of the symbol variable display, and if it is determined that the variable display time has elapsed (step S1403: Yes), the process moves to step S1404. However, if it is determined that the variable display time has not elapsed (step S1403: No), the variable game control process is ended.

<Steps S1404 and S1405>
If the variable display time has elapsed (step S1403: Yes), the MPU 41 displays the result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the variable game on the first special symbol display section 362 or the second special symbol display section 363 of the main display section 36. The corresponding symbol is stopped and displayed (step S1404), and the fluctuating display flag is set to off (step S1405).

<Step S1406>
If the symbol variation is not being displayed (step S1402: No), the MPU 41 stores the number of reservations N stored in the number of reservations storage area NAA of the reservation storage area 412b and the number of reservations M stored in the number of reservations storage area NAB. It is determined whether both are 0 (step S1406). Here, when both the number of reservations N and the number of reservations M are 0 (step S1406: Yes), the MPU 41 ends the variable game control process. On the other hand, if either the number of reservations N or the number of reservations M is not 0 (step S1406: No), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1407.

<Step S1407>
In step S1407, the MPU 41 executes data setting processing for the validity information data stored in the pending storage area 412b. When the MPU 41 finishes the process of step S1407, the process moves to step S1408. Note that details of the data setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 25.

<Step S1408>
In step S1408, the MPU 41 executes a variation start process for causing the symbol display section 341 to execute a variable display based on the win/fail information, and ends the variable game control process. Note that details of the fluctuation start process will be described later with reference to FIG. 26.

[Data setting processing]
Here, FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the data setting process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1407 of FIG. The data setting process will be described below with reference to FIG. 25.

<Step S1501>
As shown in FIG. 25, in step S1501, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the number of reservations M corresponding to the second special symbol game is 0, and if the number of reservations M is 0 (step S1501: Yes). , the process moves to step S1502. On the other hand, if the number of reservations M is not 0 (step S1501: No), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1505.

<Steps S1502 to S1504>
If the number of reservations M is 0 (step S1501: Yes), the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the number of reservations N stored in the reservation number storage area NAA (step S1502), and transfers the data from the first reservation area REA1 to the execution area AE. The validity information is moved (step S1503). Subsequently, the MPU 41 shifts the validity information of the second reservation area REA2 to the fourth reservation area REA4 one by one (step S1504). Specifically, in step S1504, the validity information of the second reservation area REA2 is moved to the first reservation area REA1, the validity information of the third reservation area REA3 is moved to the second reservation area REA2, and the validity information of the fourth reservation area REA4 is moved. The validity information is moved to the third holding area REA3. When the process of step S1504 is completed, the MPU 41 moves the process to step S1508.

<Steps S1505 to S1507>
Step S1505 moves on when the number of reservations M is 0 (step S1501: No), but step S1501 moves on when both or one of the number of reservations M and the number of reservations N is not 0 in step S1406 of FIG. (Step S1406: No). Therefore, when the number of reservations M is 0 (step S1501: No), the MPU 41 can determine that the number of reservations N is not 0, and therefore executes the processing of steps S1505 to S1507.

Specifically, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the pending number M stored in the pending number storage area NAB (step S1505), and moves the validity information from the first pending area REB1 to the execution area AE (step S1506). Subsequently, the MPU 41 shifts the validity information of the second reservation area REB2 to the fourth reservation area REB4 one by one (step S1507). Specifically, in step S1507, the validity information of the second reservation area REB2 is moved to the first reservation area REB1, the validity information of the third reservation area REB3 is moved to the second reservation area REB2, and the validity information of the fourth reservation area REB4 is moved. The validity information is moved to the third reservation area REB3. When the process of step S1507 is completed, the MPU 41 moves the process to step S1508.

<Step S1508>
In step S1508, the MPU 41 sets in the RAM 412 a shift command indicating that the validity information of the first reservation area REA1 to fourth reservation area REA4 or the first reservation area REB1 to fourth reservation area REB4 has been shifted. The shift command set in step S1508 is then transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process in step S1301 of the next main process (see FIG. 23) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, the number of pending symbols displayed on the symbol display section 341 is changed. When the process in step S1508 is completed, the MPU 41 ends the data setting process and moves the process to step S1408 in FIG. 24.

[Variation start processing]
Here, FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the fluctuation start process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1408 of FIG. 24. The fluctuation start process will be described below with reference to FIG. 26.

<Step S1601>
As shown in FIG. 26, in step S1601, the MPU 41 determines whether the gaming state is the high probability mode. Whether or not it is the high probability mode is determined based on whether or not the high probability mode flag, which is set to on in the gaming state transition process of step S1306 in the main process of FIG. 23, is set to on, for example. . If the gaming state is the high probability mode (step S1601: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S1602, and if the gaming state is not the high probability mode (step S1601: No), that is, the gaming state is the low probability mode. If there is, the process moves to step S1603.

<Steps S1602 and S1603>
In step S1602, the MPU 41 selects the pending storage area 412b based on the high probability mode validity table (see FIG. 14(B)) that is saved according to the setting value in step S1712 in the setting value change process of FIG. 27, which will be described later. It is determined whether the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 included as numerical information in the jackpot information stored in the execution area AE is a value corresponding to a jackpot win. On the other hand, in step S1603, the MPU 41 determines whether the pending storage area It is determined whether the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1, which is included as numerical information in the jackpot information stored in the execution area AE of 412b, is a value corresponding to a jackpot win.

Note that in steps S1602 and S1603, the validity determination is performed based on the high probability mode validity table or the low probability mode validity table that is saved according to the setting value in step S1712 in the setting value change process of FIG. 27, which will be described later. , in steps S1602 and S1603, after reading out the setting values saved in step S1710 in the setting value change process of FIG. It is also possible to make a selection and judge whether it is correct or not.

<Step S1604>
In step S1604, the MPU 41 sets the variable display time of the first special symbol display section 362 or the second special symbol display section 363 of the main display section 36 corresponding to the variable pattern of the variable game in the variable display time counter. Specifically, when the result of the judgment in step S1602 or S1603 is a normal jackpot, the MPU 41 creates a variation pattern based on the variation type counter CS1 and the normal jackpot variation table (see FIG. 15(A)). Identify. Furthermore, when the result of the judgment in step S1602 or S1603 is a probability variable jackpot, the MPU 41 specifies a variation pattern based on the variation type counter CS1 and the probability variation jackpot variation table (see FIG. 15(B)). . Furthermore, when the result of the validity determination in step S1602 or S1603 is a failure, the MPU 41 specifies a fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the failure fluctuation table (see FIG. 15(C)).

<Step S1605>
In step S1605, the MPU 41 sets in the RAM 412 a variation pattern command including the lottery result of the jackpot lottery for the variable game and the variation pattern specified in step S1604. As a result, in step S1301 of the next main process (see FIG. 23) executed by the MPU 41, the fluctuation pattern command is sent to the audio lamp control device 5, and the audio lamp control device 5 displays the symbol based on the fluctuation pattern command. The unit 341 executes symbol variation display and the like.

As mentioned above, when the lottery result is a "normal jackpot", the MPU 41 selects variable patterns "01" to "03" with an "A" indicating a 5R normal jackpot, "A01" to "A01" to "03". A03'' is set in the RAM 412 as a variable pattern command. In addition, when the lottery result is a "5R certain strange jackpot", the MPU 41 selects one of the fluctuation patterns "01" to "03" with "B" attached to indicate a 5R certain strange jackpot, "B01" to "B03". is set in the RAM 412 as a variable pattern command. Furthermore, when the lottery result is a "16R definite strange jackpot", the MPU 41 selects one of the fluctuation patterns "01" to "03" with a "C" indicating a 16R sure strange jackpot, "C01" to "C03". is set in the RAM 412 as a variable pattern command. In addition, when the lottery result is "lost", the MPU 41 selects one of "D01" to "D08" as a variation pattern with "D" attached to the variation patterns "01" to "08" to indicate a "lost" lottery result. It is set in the RAM 412 as a command. In addition, when the lottery result is "lost", the MPU 41 includes information on whether the lottery result is "out of reach", "out of reach", or "out of reach" in the variation pattern command.

<Step S1606>
In step S1606, the MPU 41 starts symbol variation display on the main display section 36, and ends the variation start process. In addition, when the MPU 41 starts the fluctuating symbol display on the main display section 36, it sets the fluctuating display flag to ON. This fluctuating display flag is referred to in step S1402 in the fluctuating game control process in FIG. 24 to determine whether or not the symbols on the main display section 36 are being fluctuated. In addition, when the MPU 41 starts the symbol variation display on the main display section 36, it adds 1 to the "cumulative jackpot lottery number" stored in the game information storage area 412d set in the RAM 412. Furthermore, if the result of the win/fail determination based on the low probability mode win/fail table in step S1603 is a win, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the "number of consecutive wins" stored in the game information storage area 412d, and determines whether the win/fail result is a jackpot. Clear the "number of consecutive misses" to 0 in certain cases.

[Setting value change processing]
Here, FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the setting value changing process executed in step S1307 of the main process in FIG. The setting value changing process will be described below with reference to FIG. 27.

<Step S1701>
As shown in FIG. 27, in step S1701, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the symbol variation display is in progress. If the symbol variation display is in progress (step S1701: Yes), the MPU 41 ends the set value change process. If the symbol variation display is not in progress (step S1701: No), the process moves to step S1702. For example, whether or not the symbol is being displayed in a variable manner is determined based on the variable display flag that is set to ON in step S1606 in the variation start process in FIG.

<Step S1702>
If the symbol fluctuation display is not in progress (step S1701: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the jackpot game state is in effect (step S1702), and if it is in the jackpot play state (step S1702: Yes), the corresponding set value If the changing process is finished and the jackpot game state is not in effect (step S1702: No), the process moves to step S1703. For example, whether or not it is a jackpot game is determined based on the jackpot gaming state flag that is set to ON in the gaming state transition process of step S1306 in the main processing of FIG.

<Step S1703>
If the symbol fluctuation display is not in progress or the jackpot game state is not in effect (No in both steps S1701 and S1702), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the power of the set value display section 45 has been switched from off to on (step S1703), that is, the setting It is determined whether or not the value change operation section 46 is operated to turn on the power of the set value display section 45. That is, in this embodiment, when the symbol variation is being displayed (step S1701: Yes) or when the jackpot game is in the state (step S1702: Yes), the set value is not displayed and the set value cannot be changed. Here, when the power of the set value display section 45 is switched from off to on (step S1703: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S1704, and the power of the set value display section 45 is switched from off to on. If not (step S1703: No), the process moves to step S1707.

<Steps S1704 to S1706>
When the power of the setting value display section 45 is switched from off to on (step S1703: Yes), the MPU 41 reads out the setting value stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 in step S1710 (described later) (step S1704). , a number indicating the read setting value is displayed on the setting value display section 45 (step S1705). This allows you to check the current settings. Then, the MPU 41 turns on the setting value displaying flag indicating that the setting value is displayed on the setting value display section 45 (step S1706), and ends the setting value changing process.

<Step S1707>
If the power of the setting value display unit 45 has not been switched from off to on (step S1703: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the setting value displaying flag is set to on (step S1707). The setting value displaying flag indicates that the setting value is being displayed on the setting value display section 45 as described above, and is set to on in step S1706. If the setting value displaying flag is set to ON (step S1707: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S1708, and if the setting value displaying flag is set to OFF (step S1707: No). In other words, if the set value display section 45 is off and the power is not turned on, the set value changing process is ended.

<Step S1708>
If the set value displaying flag is set to on (step S1707: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether the set value change operation section 46 has been rotated by a predetermined angle (step S1708). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a rotation operation to change the set value has been performed. The MPU 41 moves the process to step S1709 when the set value change operation section 46 is rotated by a predetermined angle (step S1708: Yes), and when the set value change operation section 46 is not rotated (step S1708: No), The process moves to step S1711.

<Step S1709>
When the set value change operation unit 46 is rotated by a predetermined angle (step S1708: Yes), the MPU 41 executes a process of changing the display on the set value display unit 45 (step S1709). For example, when the set value change operation unit 46 is rotated to the right by a predetermined angle, the MPU 41 displays a number that is one larger than the number displayed on the set value display unit 45 before rotation, and vice versa. When the set value change operation section 46 is rotated to the left by a predetermined angle, a number one smaller than the number displayed on the set value display section 45 before rotation is displayed.

Note that if the number displayed on the set value display section 45 before rotation is "6" and the set value change operation section 46 is rotated to the right by a predetermined angle, the number displayed on the set value display section 45 will not be displayed. If the number displayed on the set value display section 45 is changed to "1" and the number displayed on the set value display section 45 is "1" before rotation, and the set value change operation section 46 is rotated to the left by a predetermined angle, the setting value is changed to "1". The number displayed on the value display section 45 is changed to "6". Also, when the number displayed on the set value display section 45 is "6", it is prevented from rotating further to the right, and when the number displayed on the set value display section 45 is "1" In addition, it may be possible to prevent further rotation to the left.

<Step S1710>
In step S1710, the MPU 41 overwrites and saves the number displayed on the setting value display section 45 as a setting value over the setting value in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412, and ends the setting value changing process. As a result, when the power of the setting value change operation section 46 is switched from on to off, the setting values stored in the RAM 412 immediately before the power is turned off are finally stored in the gaming information of the RAM 412 as valid setting values. It is saved in the storage area 412d. Therefore, by changing the number displayed on the setting value display section 45 by rotating the setting value change operation section 46, the setting value stored in the RAM 412 is changed. Then, the set value can be determined by turning off the power of the set value display section 45 while the number corresponding to the desired set value is displayed on the set value display section 45.

<Step S1711>
If the set value change operation unit 46 has not been rotated by the predetermined angle (step S1708: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the power of the set value display unit 45 has been switched from on to off (step S1711), that is, whether or not the set value has been changed. It is determined whether or not an operation has been performed on the operation unit 46 to turn off the power of the set value display unit 45. If the power of the set value display unit 45 has been switched from on to off (step S1711: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S1712, and determines that the power of the set value display unit 45 has not been switched from on to off. If so (step S1711: No), the setting value change process is ended. Note that when the power of the set value display unit 45 is switched from on to off (step S1711: Yes), the set value display unit 45 displays a number indicating the set value by cutting off power to the 7-segment display. is turned off, and the set value is confirmed as described above.

<Steps S1712 and S1713>
When the power of the setting value display unit 45 is switched from on to off (step S1711: Yes), the MPU 41 generates a low probability mode propriety table according to the setting values stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 in step S1710. (see FIG. 14(A)) and the high probability mode validity table (see FIG. 14(B)) are selected and stored in the RAM 412 (step S1712). Then, the MPU 41 sets the setting value displaying flag to OFF, and ends the setting value changing process.

Here, in step S1712, a low probability mode propriety table (see FIG. 14(A)) and a high probability mode propriety table (see FIG. 14(B)) according to the setting values stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is selected. In other words, since the low probability mode validity table and the high probability mode validity table have the same set values, it is easy to change the set values. However, the set value in the low probability mode and the set value in the high probability mode may be individually changeable. In this case, the setting value of the low probability mode and the high probability mode may be set at different stages (numerical values), for example, the setting value of the low probability mode is "1" and the setting value of the high probability mode is "6". It becomes possible to do so.

[Performance information update processing]
Here, FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the specific performance information update process executed in step S1308 in the main process of FIG. FIG. 29 is a diagram illustrating an example of base information updated in the specific performance information update process of FIG. 28. The specific performance information update process will be described below with reference to FIGS. 28 and 29.

<Steps S1801 and S1802>
As shown in FIG. 28, the MPU 41 reads out the number of out balls for base calculation of the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 (step S1801), and the read out number of out balls reaches 60,000 balls. It is determined whether or not (step S1802). When the number of out balls has reached 60,000 balls (step S1802: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S1805, and when the number of out balls has not reached 60,000 balls (step S1802: No), the process moves to step S1805. The process moves to S1803.

<Steps S1803 and S1804>
If the number of out balls has not reached 60,000 balls (step S1802: No), the MPU 51 reads the general winning hole payout ball number and the first winning hole payout ball number for base calculation of the base information (step S1808). Then, the MPU 51 calculates the number of out balls for the base calculation of the base information read out in step S1801, the number of general winning hole payout balls and the number of first winning hole payout balls for the base calculation of the base information read out in step S1803. Based on this, the current base BL is calculated, and the current base BL of the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is overwritten and updated (step S1804) (see FIG. 29(A)). Note that the current base BL (%) is calculated as 100 x (number of balls paid out from the general winning hole + number of balls paid out from the first winning hole)/number of out balls.

<Steps S1805 to S1808>
If the number of out balls has reached 60,000 balls (step S1802: Yes), the MPU 41 updates the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 (steps S1805 to S1807). Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 29(A) and 29(B), the MPU 41 shifts the previous 60,000-ball base B1 to the two-previous 60,000-ball base in the base information (step S1805), and changes the current base The BL is shifted to the previous 60,000 ball base B1 (step S1806), and the current base BL is cleared to 0 (step S1807). Then, the MPU 41 clears the general winning hole payout ball number, the first winning hole payout ball number, and the out ball number for base calculation stored as base information in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 to 0 balls (step S1808 ).

<Step S1809>
When the processing in step S1804 or S1808 is completed, the MPU 51 reads out various information in the gaming information storage area 412d of the RAM 412, calculates other specific performance, and updates the other specific performance information to the calculated value (step S1809 ), the specific performance information update process ends. In this case, the specific performance is, for example, the number of unit jackpot drawings, the continuous accessory ratio, the accessory ratio, etc.

[Performance display monitor display control processing]
Here, FIGS. 30 to 33 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the display control process of the performance display monitor 43 executed in step S1309 of the main process in FIG. The display control process of the performance display monitor 43 will be described below with reference to FIGS. 30 to 33.

<Step S1901>
As shown in FIG. 30, in step S1901, the MPU 41 determines whether the BL displaying flag is set to on. Here, the BL displaying flag is a flag indicating that the current base BL is being displayed on the performance display monitor 43, and is set to on in step S1906 or step S1930 in FIG. 33, which will be described later. If the BL display flag is set to ON (step S1901: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1908 in FIG. 31, and if the BL display flag is set to OFF (step S1901: No). ), the process moves to step S1902.

<Step S1902>
If the BL display flag is set to OFF (step S1901: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the B1 display flag is set to ON (step S1902). Here, the B1 displaying flag is a flag indicating that the 60,000-ball base B1 was previously displayed on the performance display monitor 43, and is set to ON in step S1912 of FIG. 31, which will be described later. If the B1 display flag is set to ON (step S1902: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1917 in FIG. 32, and if the B1 display flag is set to OFF (step S1902: No). ), the process moves to step S1903.

<Step S1903>
If the B1 display flag is set to OFF (step S1902: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the B2 display flag is set to ON (step S1903). Here, the B2 displaying flag is a flag indicating that the 60,000-ball base B2 was displayed on the performance display monitor 43 two times before, and is set to ON in step S1921 of FIG. 32, which will be described later. If the B2 displaying flag is set to ON (step S1903: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1926 in FIG. 33, and if the B2 displaying flag is set to OFF (step S1903: No). ), the process moves to step S1904.

<Step S1904>
If the B2 displaying flag is set to off (step S1903: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the performance display switch 44 has been switched from off to on (step S1904). If the performance display switch 44 has been switched from off to on (step S1904: Yes), the process moves to step S1905, and if the performance display switch 44 has not been switched from off to on (step S1904: No), the corresponding End display control processing.

<Steps S1905 to S1907>
When the performance display switch 44 is switched from off to on (step S1904: Yes), the MPU 41 causes the performance display monitor 43 to display the current base BL included in the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412. (Step S1905). For example, if the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is the example shown in FIG. 29(A), "8.", "L", "2" and "9" are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43, and when the base information is the example shown in FIG. 29(B), the current base BL is 0%. ``8.'', ``L'', ``0'', and ``0'' are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43, indicating that the performance is present. Then, the MPU 41 sets the BL displaying flag to ON (step S1906), sets a BL display time counter for displaying the current base BL on the performance display monitor 43 for a certain period of time (step S1907), and performs the display control process. end.

<Steps S1908 and S1909>
If the BL displaying flag is set to ON (step S1901: Yes), as shown in FIG. 31, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the BL display time counter set in step S1907 of FIG. S1908), it is determined whether the value of the BL display time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S1909). If the value of the BL display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S1909: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S1910, and if the value of the BL display time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S1909: No), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S1910. ), the process moves to step S1913.

<Steps S1910 to S1913>
If the value of the BL display time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S1909: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the BL displaying flag to OFF (step S1910), and saves the base value stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412. The previous 60,000 ball base B1 included in the information is displayed on the performance display monitor 43 (step S1911). For example, if the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is the example shown in FIG. ”, “3”, and “3” are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 that make up the performance display monitor 43, and when the base information is the example shown in FIG. 29(B), the previous 60,000 balls are displayed. “8.”, “1”, “2”, and “9” indicating that the base B1 is 29% are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43. Then, the MPU 41 sets the B1 displaying flag to ON (step S1912), sets the B1 display time counter for displaying the previous 60,000-ball base B1 on the performance display monitor 43 for a certain period of time (step S1913), and End display control processing.

<Step S1914>
If the value of the BL display time counter after the subtraction is not 0 (step S1909: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S1914). If the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S1914: Yes), the process moves to step S1915, and if the performance display switch 44 has not been switched from on to off (step S1914: No), the corresponding End display control processing. Note that when the performance display switch 44 is switched from on to off (step S1914: Yes), the performance display monitor 43 cuts off power to the 7-segment displays 431 to 434, thereby displaying the alphabet indicating the current base BL. and the numbers are turned off.

<Steps S1915 and S1916>
When the performance display switch 44 is switched from on to off (step S1914: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the BL displaying flag to off (step S1915), and clears the value of the BL display time counter to 0 (step S1915). S1916), the display control process ends.

<Steps S1917 and S1918>
If the B1 display flag is set to on (step S1902: Yes), as shown in FIG. 32, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the B1 display time counter set in step S1913 of FIG. S1917), it is determined whether the value of the B1 display time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S1918). If the value of the B1 display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S1918: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S1919, and if the value of the B1 display time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S1918: No), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S1919. ), the process moves to step S1923.

<Steps S1919 to S1922>
If the value of the B1 display time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S1918: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the B1 displaying flag to OFF (step S1919), and displays the base stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412. The previous 60,000 ball base B2 included in the information is displayed on the performance display monitor 43 (step S1920). For example, if the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is the example shown in FIG. ”, “3”, and “2” are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 that make up the performance display monitor 43, and if the base information is the example shown in FIG. “8.”, “2”, “3”, and “3” indicating that the base B2 is 33% are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43. Then, the MPU 41 sets the B2 displaying flag to ON (step S1921), and sets the B2 display time counter corresponding to the fixed time for displaying the 60,000-ball base B2 on the performance display monitor 43 the day before last (step S1922). , the display control process ends.

<Step S1923>
If the value of the B1 display time counter after the subtraction is not 0 (step S1918: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S1923). If the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S1923: Yes), the process moves to step S1924, and if the performance display switch 44 has not been switched from on to off (step S1923: No), the corresponding End display control processing. Note that when the performance display switch 44 is switched from on to off (step S1923: Yes), the performance display monitor 43 cuts off the power to the 7-segment displays 431 to 434, so that the previous 60,000 ball base B1 The alphabets and numbers indicating the are turned off.

<Steps S1924 and S1925>
When the performance display switch 44 is switched from on to off (step S1923: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the B1 display flag to off (step S1924), and clears the value of the B1 display time counter to 0 (step S1923: Yes). S1925), the display control process ends.

<Steps S1926 and S1927>
If the B2 display flag is set to on (step S1903: Yes), as shown in FIG. 33, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the B2 display time counter set in step S1922 of FIG. S1926), it is determined whether the value of the B2 display time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S1927). If the value of the B2 display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S1927: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S1928, and if the value of the B2 display time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S1927: No), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S1928. ), the process moves to step S1932.

<Steps S1928 to S1931>
If the value of the B2 display time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S1927: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the B2 display flag to OFF (step S1928), and the base stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 The current base BL included in the information is displayed on the performance display monitor 43 (step S1929). For example, if the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is the example shown in FIG. 29(A), "8.", "L", "2" and "9" are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43, and when the base information is the example shown in FIG. 29(B), the current base BL is 0%. ``8.'', ``L'', ``0'', and ``0'' are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43, indicating that the performance is present. Then, the MPU 41 sets the BL displaying flag to ON (step S1930), sets a BL display time counter for displaying the current base BL on the performance display monitor 43 for a certain period of time (step S1931), and performs the display control process. end.

<Step S1932>
If the value of the B2 display time counter after the subtraction is not 0 (step S1927: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S1932). If the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S1932: Yes), the process moves to step S1933, and if the performance display switch 44 has not been switched from on to off (step S1932: No), the corresponding End display control processing. Note that when the performance display switch 44 is switched from on to off (step S1932: Yes), the performance display monitor 43 cuts off the power to the 7-segment displays 431 to 434, so that the 60,000-ball base B2 from the previous time The alphabets and numbers indicating the are turned off.

<Steps S1933 and S1934>
When the performance display switch 44 is switched from on to off (step S1932: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the B2 display flag to off (step S1933), and clears the value of the B2 display time counter to 0 (step S1932). S1934), the display control process ends.

[Processing of audio lamp control device 5]
Next, the processing executed by the MPU 51 in the audio lamp control device 5 will be described with reference to FIGS. 34 to 47.

Note that in another embodiment, part or all of the processing executed by the MPU 51 of the audio lamp control device 5 in this embodiment may be executed by the MPU 61 of the display control device 6. In addition, in the audio lamp control device 5, the MPU 51 also executes control processing for the speaker 26 and the illumination section 27, startup processing at the time of startup of the audio lamp control device 5, NMI interrupt processing at the time of power outage, etc. Descriptions of those processes will be omitted.

[Sub-timer interrupt processing of audio lamp control device 5]
Here, FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the sub-timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 51 of the audio lamp control device 5. The MPU 51 executes, for example, a sub-timer interrupt process as a regular process with a cycle of 1 msec.

As shown in FIG. 34, in the sub-timer interrupt process, the MPU 51 performs display order setting process (step S2000), counter update process (step S2001), command determination process (step S2002), and variable game presentation process (step S2003). , a jackpot game presentation process (step S2004), and a setting value suggestion process (step S2005).

[Display order setting process]
In the display order setting process (step S2000), the MPU 51 refers to the game setting value (set value) that is set to define the jackpot probability in the gaming machine 10, and displays the 7-segment display section 39 for a predetermined period. The order of numbers to be displayed is determined and stored (set). In addition, in this embodiment, by executing the setting value suggestion process in a jackpot game for a predetermined period, five numbers are used to specify multiple (five) game setting values (non-setting values) other than the setting value. are displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 in a predetermined order. Therefore, in the display order setting process, the order in which five numbers specifying a plurality of non-set values are displayed on the seven-segment display section 39 is set. Here, FIG. 35 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the display order setting process executed in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. 34, and FIG. It is a figure showing an example. Details of the display order setting process will be described below with reference to FIGS. 35 and 36.

<Step S2011>
As shown in FIG. 35, in the display order setting process, the MPU 51 determines whether the display order setting flag is set to on (step S2011). The display order setting flag is a flag indicating that setting of the display order of numbers that specify non-set values in the jackpot game for a predetermined period has been completed, and is set to ON in step S2016 of the display order setting process. . Further, the display order setting flag is initially set to OFF when the gaming machine 10 is powered on. Therefore, when the sub-timer interrupt process is executed by being permitted by the start-up process of the audio lamp control device, the segments A to G of the 7-segment display section 39 are displayed in a predetermined period. The order of the numbers is set (steps S2014 to S2016, which will be described later). That is, in the gaming machine 10, when the power is turned on, the order of numbers to be displayed by the segments A to G of the seven segment display section 39 during a predetermined period is set.

By the way, the power to the gaming machine 10 is often turned on before the opening of the gaming hall. Therefore, by setting the display order of numbers on the 7-segment display section 39 when the gaming machine 10 is powered on, the display order of the numbers on the 7-segment display section 39 is set for each business day. This prevents the display order of numbers on the 7-segment display section 39 from being fixed, thereby preventing the same information from being repeatedly presented on the 7-segment display section 39, and preventing the display order of numbers on the 7-segment display section 39 from being displayed repeatedly. It is possible to prevent the display from becoming monotonous.

Here, when the display order setting flag is on (step S2011: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S2012, and when the display order setting flag is off (step S2011: No), the process moves to step S2014. to move to.

<Steps S2012 and S2013>
If the display order setting flag is on (step S2011: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether the setting value change flag is set on (step S2012). The setting value change flag is a flag indicating that the game setting value (setting value) set to define the jackpot probability in the gaming machine 10 has been changed, and is used in the command determination process of FIG. 37, which will be described later. It is set to on in step S2121. If the set value change flag is on (step S2012: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the set value change flag off (step S2013), and then moves the process to step S2014. That is, in the gaming machine 10, when a set value is changed, the order of numbers to be displayed is set by the segments A to G of the 7-segment display section 39 during a predetermined period. By setting the display order of numbers on the 7-segment display section 39 when a setting value is changed in this way, it becomes possible to determine the display order of numbers according to the setting value. It is possible to prevent the presentation of information on the display unit 39 from becoming monotonous.

On the other hand, if the setting value change flag is off (step S2012: No), the MPU 51 ends the display order setting process.

<Steps S2014 to S2016>
In step S2014, the MPU 51 acquires the set value from the RAM 512, and further sets the order of numbers displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 by referring to the set value and the number display order determination table (see FIG. 36). Step S2015). Here, FIG. 36(A) is a diagram showing an example of a number display order determination table, and FIG. 36(B) is a diagram showing the display order described in the number display order determination table shown in FIG. 36(A) and the 7-segment display section 39. It is a diagram showing the correspondence relationship with the display order of numbers in .

As shown in FIG. 36(A), in the number display order determination table, the lottery The display order of numbers is determined by random values. There are 120 lottery random numbers ranging from 0 to 119, each lottery random number is associated with one display order, and each display order has the same selection probability. The display order is A1 to A120 selected for setting value 1, display order B1 to B120 selected for setting value 2, display order C1 to C120 selected for setting value 3, and setting. The display order D1 to D120 is selected when the value is 4, the display order E1 to E120 is selected when the setting value is 5, and the display order F1 to F120 is selected when the setting value is 6. 6, 120 display orders corresponding to all combinations of numbers indicating non-set values are set.

The display order A1 to A120 selected when the setting value is 1 is the five digits ``2'' that specify the game setting values (non-setting values) 2 to 6 other than the digit ``1'' that specifies the setting value 1. - Specify the order in which "6" is displayed (see FIG. 36(B)). In other words, if the setting value is 1 and one of the display orders A1 to A120 is selected according to the lottery random number, the number "1" that specifies that the setting value is 1 will be displayed in 7 segments. It is not displayed on the display section 39.

The display order B1 to B120 selected when setting value 2 is set is the setting values ``1'' and ``3'' to ``6'' other than the number ``2'' that specifies setting value 2. Specifying setting values 2 to 6. The order in which the five numbers "2" to "6" are displayed is defined (see FIG. 36(B)). In other words, if the setting value is 2 and one of the display orders B1 to B120 is selected according to the lottery random number, the number "2" that specifies that the setting value is 2 will be displayed in 7 segments. It is not displayed on the display section 39.

The display order C1 to C120 that is selected when the setting value is 3 is the five digits ``1'' and ``1'' that specify the setting values 1, 2, and 4 to 6, except the digit ``3'' that specifies the setting value 1. The order in which ``2'' and ``4'' to ``6'' are displayed is defined (see FIG. 36(B)). In other words, if any of the display orders C1 to C120 is selected because the setting value is 3, the number "3" specifying that the setting value is 3 is displayed on the 7-segment display section 39. Never.

The display order D1 to D120 that is selected when the setting value is 4 is the five digits “1” to “1” that specify the setting values 1 to 3, 5, and 6 other than the number “4” that specifies the setting value 4. The order in which ``3'', ``5'', and ``6'' are displayed is defined (see FIG. 36(B)). In other words, when one of the display orders D1 to D120 is selected because the set value is 4, the number "4" that specifies that the set value is 4 is displayed on the 7-segment display section 39. Never.

The display order E1 to E120 selected when the setting value is 5 is the five digits “1” to “4” that specify the setting values 1 to 4 and 6 other than the number “5” that specifies the setting value 5. , "6" is displayed (see FIG. 36(B)). In other words, when one of the display orders E1 to E120 is selected because the set value is 5, the number "5" that specifies that the set value is 5 is displayed on the 7-segment display section 39. Never.

The display order F1 to F120 selected when the setting value is 6 displays the five numbers “1” to “5” that specify the setting values 1 to 5, other than the number “6” that specifies the setting value 6. (See FIG. 36(B)). In other words, if any of the display orders F1 to F120 is selected because the set value is 6, the number "6" that specifies that the set value is 6 is displayed on the 7-segment display section 39. Never.

When the order of numbers to be displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 is set (step S2015), the MPU 51 sets the display order setting flag to OFF (step S2016), and ends the display order setting process. That is, the MPU 51 is set to define the jackpot probability in the gaming machine 10 when the power is turned on (step S2011: No) and when the set value is changed (step S2013: Yes). The order of numbers displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 is set according to game setting values 1 to 6 (setting values 1 to 6).

In this way, in the gaming machine 10, when the power is turned on, the display order of numbers on the 7-segment display section 39 is determined based on the number display order determination table, and after the power is turned on, the number display order determination table is determined by changing the setting value. Based on this, the display order of numbers on the 7-segment display section 39 is determined. This makes it possible to display numbers (non-set values) in a predetermined order on the 7-segment display section 39 during a predetermined period when a predetermined condition (for example, turning on the power or changing settings) is satisfied. In gaming halls, since the gaming machines 10 are often powered on before opening, the display order of numbers on the 7-segment display section 39 is set when the gaming machines 10 are powered on. The display order of numbers on the 7-segment display section 39 is set for each business day. This prevents the display order of numbers on the 7-segment display section 39 from being fixed, thereby preventing the same information from being repeatedly presented on the 7-segment display section 39, and preventing the display order of numbers on the 7-segment display section 39 from being displayed repeatedly. It is possible to prevent the display from becoming monotonous.

Note that in the display order setting process of the present embodiment, the display order of numbers displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 is set when the gaming machine 10 is powered on and when setting values are changed. , the display order of numbers displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 may be set when other conditions (predetermined conditions) are satisfied. The predetermined conditions in this case will be explained in the third embodiment below, but the predetermined conditions include, for example, the start of a predetermined period, the start of a jackpot game, and the opening/closing execution mode of the jackpot game. For example, the start of the Even when the display order of the numbers displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 is set due to the establishment of these predetermined conditions, the display order of the numbers on the 7-segment display section 39 is prevented from being fixed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the same information from being repeatedly presented on the 7-segment display section 39 and from making the display of information on the 7-segment display section 39 monotonous.

In addition, in the number display order determination table shown in FIG. 36(A), for the same setting value, the probability that all number display orders are selected is the same, but the probability that a number display order is selected is not necessarily the same. It doesn't have to be. For example, the number display order determination table may be set such that the probability that at least some number display orders are selected is different from other number display orders for the same setting value. That is, it is conceivable to make it easier to select a specific display order and, conversely, to make it harder to select a specific display order. In this way, if the probability of at least some number display orders being selected according to the setting value is set to be different from other number display orders, it becomes easier for a particular number display order to be selected according to the setting value. However, it is also possible to make it difficult for a particular number display order to be selected. That is, unlike the case where the display order of all numbers has the same probability of being selected, it is easy to identify a specific non-set value, and conversely, it is difficult to identify a specific non-set value. It will also be possible to do so. This makes it possible to adjust the probability of a high setting value and the probability of a low setting value. Specifically, for example, when the setting value is a low setting value (for example, setting value 2 or less), the display order of numbers indicating non-setting values corresponding to high setting values (for example, setting value 5 or more) is delayed. You may also do so. In this case, by leaving until the end the possibility that the setting value is high when the setting value is low, the player is given a sense of expectation that the setting value is high, while at the same time it is possible that the setting value is low. Early identification by the player is prevented. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the game on the gaming machine 10 from ending prematurely while suppressing a decline in interest in the game, and to suppress a decline in the operating rate of the gaming machine 10. Conversely, when the setting value is a high setting value (for example, a setting value of 5 or more), the display order of the numbers indicating the non-setting value corresponding to a low setting value (for example, a setting value of 2 or less) is delayed. You can. In this case, the numbers corresponding to the high setting value and the numbers corresponding to the low setting value are not displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 until immediately before it is determined that the setting value is the high setting value, and the player The possibility that the set value is low remains until just before it is known that the set value is high. This allows players to focus on whether the set value is high, which is advantageous to the player, or low, which is disadvantageous to the player, and enjoy the thrill of the moment right before realizing that the set value is high. . Furthermore, regardless of the set value, it is also possible to make the display order of the numbers corresponding to the lowest game setting value among the non-set values not late, for example, the display order that is the slowest, is more likely to be selected. In this case, the number that indicates the non-set value that is most disadvantageous to the player is displayed last, so until the last number is displayed, the number that indicates the non-set value that is the most disadvantageous to the player, and the non-set value that is more disadvantageous to the player There remains the possibility of a non-set value that is advantageous to . This makes it difficult for the player to understand that the game setting value (jackpot probability) is the most disadvantageous for the player, so it is possible to prevent the game on the gaming machine 10 from ending early, and It is possible to suppress the decline in machine operating rate.

Further, it is conceivable to set a number display order in which a number indicating a non-set value corresponding to a high setting value and a number indicating a non-setting value corresponding to a low setting value are displayed in a later order to facilitate selection. For example, a numerical display order is selected in which at least one of "1" and "2" corresponding to a low setting value and at least one of "5" and "6" corresponding to a high setting value are displayed in a later display order. It is also possible to make it easier to In this case as well, until just before the player grasps the setting value, the setting value includes the possibility of a high setting value that is advantageous to the player and the possibility of a low setting value that is disadvantageous to the player. You can enjoy the excitement of knowing whether the high setting value is the low setting value or not until just before you realize it.

Also, except when the set value is the highest set value (set value is 6), the number display order is set so that it is easy to select a number display order in which numbers corresponding to non-set values higher than the set value are displayed later. It is possible that For example, setting a high selection rate for a display order in which the priority of numbers indicating non-set values with a higher probability of favorable judgment than the set value is lower than the priority of numbers indicating non-set values with lower probability of favorable judgment than the set value. is possible. By delaying the display order of numbers indicating non-set values that are higher than the set value, players are made to expect that the set value may be higher than the actual set value immediately before they grasp the set value. I can do it. This allows the user to enjoy guessing the non-set value (set value) while expecting a high possibility of the set value until just before the set value is known. On the contrary, unless the setting value is the lowest setting value (setting value is 1), it is easy to select a number display order in which numbers corresponding to non-setting values lower than the setting value are displayed later. It is possible to set it as follows. For example, setting a higher selection rate for a display order in which the priority of numbers indicating non-set values with a lower probability of favorable determination than the set value is lower than the priority of numbers indicating non-set values with higher probability of favorable determination than the set value. is possible. By delaying the display order of the numbers indicating non-set values lower than the set value, the numbers indicating the non-set values corresponding to the game setting values lower than the set value will be displayed immediately before the set value is grasped. It is left as a displayed number. As a result, the final candidates for the set value are the actual set value and the game set value (non-set value) lower than the set value. As a result, in the end, the game setting value that is more advantageous to the player is grasped as the set value, so that the joy when the set value is grasped is improved.

Further, regardless of the setting value, it may be possible to set a number display order in which the display order of numbers corresponding to a high setting value (for example, a setting value of 5 or more) is delayed so that it is easy to select. On the contrary, it may be possible to set a number display order in which numbers corresponding to a low setting value (for example, a setting value of 2 or less) are displayed earlier in the display order so that it is easier to select the number display order. In this way, the numbers corresponding to the low setting values are displayed earlier and the numbers corresponding to the higher setting values are displayed later, so that the higher setting values are displayed later. As a result, until just before the player grasps the setting value, it is possible to make the player expect that the setting value may be high, which is advantageous to the player, so that the player can expect the setting value to be high while expecting the setting value to be high. You can have fun guessing (setting value).

[Counter update processing]
In the counter update process (step S2001), the MPU 51 updates the first stop symbol type counter, production pattern type counter, variable display counter, and the like. Specifically, the MPU 51 adds 1 to the counter values of the first stop symbol type counter and the production type counter, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. The first stop symbol type counter updated here is used to determine the type of decorative symbol to be stopped first based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 4. For example, the first stop symbol type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0 and 99. Further, the performance pattern type counter is used to determine the performance type (performance pattern) based on the variable pattern command received from the main control device 4. For example, the performance type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0 and 109. On the other hand, the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the fluctuation display counter. This variable display counter is for measuring the variable display time of the symbol display section 341, and the counter value of the variable display counter is set to be 0 when the remaining variable display time becomes 0. Therefore, based on the counter value of the variable display counter, it is possible to know the remaining variable display time, that the variable display is in progress, that the variable display of the symbol display section 341 has ended, etc.

[Command judgment processing]
In the command determination process (step S2002), a command received from the main controller 4 is determined, and a process corresponding to the command is executed. Here, FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the command determination process executed in step S2002 in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. 34.

<Step S2101>
As shown in FIG. 37, in step S2101, the MPU 51 determines whether a command has been received from the main controller 4. Here, when the MPU 51 receives the command (step S2101: Yes), the process moves to step S2102. On the other hand, if the MPU 51 has not received the command (step S2101: No), the MPU 51 ends the command determination process. Note that the command received from the main controller 4 is stored in the unprocessed command storage area of the RAM 512, and the MPU 51 determines whether or not a command has been received by referring to the unprocessed command storage area. Note that the command stored in the unprocessed command storage area is deleted from the unprocessed command storage area when it is determined that the command has been received in step S2101 and becomes the target of processing, and is stored, for example, in the processing work storage area. be remembered.

<Step S2102>
In step S2102, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a variable pattern command. Here, if the command is a variable pattern command (step S2102: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S2103, and if the command is not a variable pattern command (step S2102: No), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S2106.

<Step S2103>
In step S2103, the MPU 51 determines a fluctuation pattern (stop symbol combination of decorative symbols and performance type (performance pattern)) based on the fluctuation pattern command received from the main control device 4. Specifically, the MPU 51 receives the fluctuation pattern command, the first stop symbol selection table (see FIG. 38(A)), the fluctuation type table (see FIG. 38(B)), and the effect type table (see FIG. 38(B)), which are stored in the ROM 511 in advance. 39(A) to FIG. 39(C)) and the value of the performance type counter stored in the RAM 512, the fluctuation pattern is determined. Moreover, when the variable pattern command includes information regarding the jackpot type, the MPU 51 sets on the jackpot flag according to the jackpot type. Specifically, the MPU 51 sets the 5R normal jackpot flag to ON when the jackpot type is a 5R normal jackpot, sets the 5R probability odd jackpot flag to ON when the jackpot type is a 5R probability variable jackpot, and sets the 5R probability variable jackpot flag to ON when the jackpot type is a 5R probability variable jackpot. When is a 16R probability variable jackpot, the 16R probability variable jackpot flag is set to ON.

The stop symbol combination of decorative symbols consists of a first stop symbol, a second stop symbol, and a final stop symbol. The first stop symbol is a decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed first in the symbol display section 341, the second stop symbol is a decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed second, and the final stop symbol is a decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed last. It is a design that The performance type table includes a normal reach performance pattern type selection table corresponding to normal reach (see Figure 39 (A)), a super reach performance pattern type selection table corresponding to super reach (see Figure 39 (B)), and a table corresponding to special reach. A special reach effect pattern type selection table (see FIG. 39(C)) is included.

Here, FIG. 38(A) is a diagram showing an example of the first stop symbol selection table. As shown in FIG. 38(A), in the first stop symbol selection table, a decorative symbol (first stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed first in the symbol display section 341 is determined. In addition, in FIG. 38(A), the decorative patterns are "1" to "9", and the symbol combination "777" indicates that "333" is a probability-variable jackpot (either a 5R probability-variable jackpot or a 16R probability-variable jackpot). ” is a symbol combination that indicates a 16R probability-variable jackpot, and a double number other than "333" and "777" is a symbol combination that indicates either a 5R regular jackpot, a 5R probability-variable jackpot, or a 16R probability-variable jackpot. It is a premise.

When the lottery result is "5R normal jackpot", there is no distribution of "3" and "7" as the first stop symbol, and the first stop symbol is selected from decorative symbols other than "3" and "7" with a predetermined probability. It is determined. That is, when the lottery result is "5R regular jackpot", the symbol combination "333" or "777" indicating a 5R probability variable jackpot or 16R probability variable jackpot (probability variable jackpot) is not displayed in a stopped state.

In addition, when the lottery result is "5R guaranteed strange jackpot", "7" is not distributed as the first stop symbol, and the first stop symbol is determined from decorative symbols other than "7" with a predetermined probability. That is, when the lottery result is a "5R probability variable jackpot", the symbol combination "777" indicating a 16R probability variable jackpot will not be stopped and displayed. On the other hand, even if the lottery result is a "5R probability-variable jackpot", the symbol combinations of zeros other than the "333" symbol combination, which indicates a 5R probability-variable jackpot, may be stopped and displayed. In other words, even if the lottery result is a "5R guaranteed strange jackpot", the result of the stop display of the decorative symbols may be a zero number symbol combination other than the symbol combination "333" which suggests a 5R normal jackpot. Then, when the lottery result is a "5R guaranteed strange jackpot" and a decorative pattern other than "3" excluding "7" is determined as the first stop symbol, the MPU 51 recognizes that it is a 5R guaranteed strange jackpot in the jackpot game. Execute the clearly indicated 5R definite change promotion performance.

In addition, when the lottery result is "16-probable jackpot", there is a distribution for all decorative symbols from "1" to "9", and the first stop is determined by a predetermined probability from the decorative symbols from "1" to "9". The design is determined. That is, even if the lottery result is a "16R probability-variable jackpot," the symbol combinations of zeros other than the "777" symbol combination indicating a 16R probability-variable jackpot may be stopped and displayed. In other words, even if the lottery result is a "16R sure-change jackpot," the stop-display result of the decorative pattern is a zero-number symbol combination other than the "777" symbol combination that suggests a 5R probability-change jackpot or a 5R regular jackpot. can be done. When the lottery result is a ``16R probability variable jackpot'' and ``7'' is determined as the first stop symbol, the MPU 51 executes a 16R promotion performance that clearly indicates a 16R probability variable jackpot in the jackpot game.

When the MPU 51 determines the first stop symbol when the lottery result is a jackpot, the MPU 51 determines the second stop symbol and the final stop symbol to be the same symbols as the previously determined first stop symbol. As a result, the stopped symbol combination that will be stopped and displayed on the active line of the symbol display section 341 in the relevant game round is determined.

On the other hand, if the lottery result is "lost", there is a distribution for all decorative symbols from "1" to "9", and the first stop symbol is determined from the decorative symbols from "1" to "9" with a predetermined probability. be done. Then, when the MPU 51 determines the first stop symbol when the lottery result is "lost", the MPU 51 selects the miss type selected based on the miss type table (FIG. 14(D)) and the previously determined first stop symbol. A second stop symbol is determined based on the symbol. For example, when the miss type is front and back miss reach, the second stop symbol is determined to be the same as the first stop symbol, and the final stop symbol is determined to be the symbol before and after the first stop symbol. In addition, if the miss type is reach other than front and back miss, the second stop symbol is determined to be the same as the first stop symbol, and the final stop symbol is different from the first stop symbol and the symbols before and after the first stop symbol. Determined by the design. Further, when the miss type is a complete miss, the second stop symbol is determined to be a different symbol from the first stop symbol, and the final stop symbol is determined regardless of the first stop symbol and the second stop symbol. Note that the stop symbol combination of the decorative symbols may be determined in the display control device 6. Only the first stop symbol is determined in the audio lamp control device 5, and the second and final stop symbols are determined in the display control device 6. You may decide.

Further, FIG. 38(B) is a diagram showing an example of a variation type table. As shown in FIG. 38(B), in the variation type table, the content of the variation display time and variation type (effect pattern) corresponding to the variation pattern command is defined. For example, a variation pattern command "A01" whose lottery result is "normal jackpot" and a variation pattern is "01" is associated with a variation display time of "30s" and a variation type of "normal reach performance pattern". In addition, the fluctuation pattern command "B02" whose lottery result is "5R guaranteed strange jackpot" and the fluctuation pattern is "02" is associated with the fluctuation display time "60s" and the fluctuation type "super reach effect pattern". The variation pattern command "C03" whose lottery result is "16R Probable Variable Jackpot" and the variation pattern is "03" is associated with the variation display time "90s" and the variation type "Special reach effect pattern". Furthermore, the variation pattern command "D04" where the lottery result is "lost" and the variation pattern is "04" is associated with the variation display time "7s" and the variation type "non-reach effect pattern". The variation pattern command "D05" whose result is "miss" and whose variation pattern is "05" is associated with a variation display time of "10s" and a variation type of "non-reach effect pattern".

Furthermore, FIGS. 39(A) to 39(C) are diagrams showing examples of effect pattern type selection tables. The performance pattern type selection table is set for each variation type (performance pattern). Specifically, FIG. 39(A) is a normal reach performance pattern type selection table that is referred to when the final individual performance type in a variable game performance is a normal reach performance, and FIG. 39(B) is a normal reach performance pattern type selection table that is referred to when the final individual performance type in a variable game performance is a normal reach performance. This is a super reach performance pattern type selection table that is referred to when the individual performance type is a super reach performance, and FIG. 39(C) is referred to when the final individual performance type in a variable game performance is a special reach performance. This is a special reach performance pattern type selection table.

In addition, in this embodiment, although the case where the number of production types corresponding to each variation type is five types will be described as an example, the number of production types may be six or more. Moreover, in FIG. 39, the performance type table when the variation type is no reach is omitted.

In the normal reach effect pattern type selection table shown in FIG. 39(A), the effect pattern type corresponding to the counter value of the effect pattern type counter is selected according to the lottery result (5R normal jackpot, 5R probability variable jackpot, 16R probability variable jackpot, and loss). ``Rendering pattern X1'' to ``Rendering pattern X5'' are defined. When the MPU 51 determines that the variation type (performance pattern) is a normal reach performance pattern, the MPU 51 selects the performance pattern type corresponding to the counter value of the performance pattern type counter from the normal reach performance pattern type selection table according to the lottery result. select. Here, the performance patterns X1 to X3 included in the normal reach performance pattern type selection table are performances in which, for example, a normal reach performance in which the decorative symbol becomes a reach state after the end of a high-speed variation performance in which the decorative symbol changes at high speed is executed. , the final individual performance type is a normal reach performance.

In addition, in the super reach performance pattern type selection table shown in FIG. 39(B), "performance pattern Y1" to "performance pattern Y5" are determined as performance pattern types corresponding to the counter value of the performance pattern type counter according to the lottery result. It is being Then, when the MPU 51 determines that the variation type (performance pattern) is a super reach performance pattern, the MPU 51 selects a performance pattern type corresponding to the counter value of the performance pattern type counter according to the lottery result. Select from table. Here, the performance patterns Y1 to Y3 included in the super reach performance pattern type selection table are such that, for example, the normal reach performance is executed after the high-speed fluctuation performance ends, and the final individual performance type has a higher jackpot expectation than the normal reach performance. This is a performance that develops into a super reach performance with a higher performance and longer execution time than a normal reach performance. In addition, the super reach performance pattern type selection table may include a super reach performance pattern performance that develops into a super reach performance after the end of the high-speed fluctuation performance without going through the normal reach performance.

Furthermore, in the special reach performance pattern type selection table shown in FIG. 39(C), "performance pattern Z1" to "performance pattern Z5" are determined as performance pattern types corresponding to the counter value of the performance pattern type counter according to the lottery result. It is being Then, when the MPU 51 determines that the variation type (performance pattern) is a special reach performance pattern, the MPU 51 selects a special reach performance pattern type from the performance pattern type corresponding to the counter value of the performance pattern type counter according to the lottery result. Select from table. Here, performance patterns Z1 to Z3 included in the special reach performance pattern type selection table are, for example, normal reach performance and super reach performance are executed after the end of the high-speed fluctuation performance, and furthermore, as the final individual performance type, normal reach performance and super reach performance. This is a performance that develops into a special reach performance with higher expectations for a jackpot than a reach performance, and a longer performance execution time than a normal reach performance. In addition, the special reach performance pattern type selection table includes special reach performance patterns that develop into special reach performance after the end of high-speed fluctuation performance or normal reach performance without going through at least one of normal reach performance and super reach performance. You can stay there.

Then, the MPU 51 sends to the RAM 512 a display variation pattern command indicating the stop symbol combination of decorative symbols determined based on the variation pattern command, the variation type table, the production type table, and the production type counter, and the variation type (production pattern type). Set.

<Step S2104>
Returning to the explanation of FIG. 37, in step S2104, the MPU 51 sets the variable display time corresponding to the variable pattern command in the variable display counter. The variable display time is determined according to the variable pattern information included in the variable pattern command. Then, the fluctuation display counter is decremented by 1 in the counter update processing of step S2001 in the sub-timer interrupt processing of FIG. It is possible to determine the remaining display time, etc. For example, the MPU 51 can determine that the symbol fluctuation display has ended when the fluctuation display counter reaches 0.

<Step S2105>
In step S2105, the MPU 51 outputs a display variation pattern command to the display control device 6 for specifying the stop symbol combination of decorative symbols in the symbol display section 341 and the content of the variation type (effect pattern type), and determines the command. Finish the process. The display variation pattern command is information for identifying the stop symbol combination of the decorative symbols determined in step S2103 and the variation type (performance pattern type). On the other hand, the ROM 611 of the display control device 6 stores variable images and performance images of decorative symbols corresponding to each display variation pattern command. Thereby, in the display control device 6, the MPU 61 executes the variable display and effect display on the symbol display section 341 according to the stop symbol combination, variation type, and effect type of the decorative symbols corresponding to the display variation pattern command.

Specifically, in the symbol display section 341, the MPU 61 of the display control device 6 executes variable display of a plurality of decorative symbols (for example, three) until a preset variable display time elapses, and The changes in the decorative patterns are stopped and displayed in order. During the variable display of decorative symbols, various effects corresponding to the content of the variation type (effect pattern type) specified by the display variation pattern command are executed by the pattern display section 341, the speaker 26, the illumination section 27, etc. .

Furthermore, when outputting the display variation pattern command to the display control device 6, the MPU 51 sets the variable game production in progress flag to ON. This variable game presentation flag is a flag indicating that a variable game presentation is being executed.

<Step S2106>
In step S2106, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a jackpot game start command. The jackpot game start command is a command indicating to start a jackpot game, and is set when the jackpot game execution flag is set on by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 at the start of the jackpot game as described above. Here, when the received command is a jackpot game start command (step S2106: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S2107, and when the received command is not a jackpot game start command (step S2106: No), the process The process moves to step S2109.

<Step S2107>
If the jackpot game start command is received (step S2106: Yes), the MPU 51 executes jackpot game performance determination processing (step S2107). The jackpot game performance determination process is a process for determining the performance to be executed on the symbol display section 341 and the like when the gaming state shifts to the jackpot game state. Specifically, the MPU 51 determines the opening performance, ending performance, and opening/closing execution mode performance to be executed in the jackpot game.

<Step S2108>
In step S2108, the MPU 51 sets the jackpot game performance start flag to ON, and ends the command determination process. The jackpot game performance start flag is a flag for starting the jackpot game performance (opening performance), and determines whether or not to execute the opening performance start process in the jackpot game performance process of step S2004 in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. Referenced when making decisions.

<Step S2109>
In step S2109, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a round game start command. The round game start command is a command indicating to start the round game in the opening/closing execution mode, and is set when starting the round game in the jackpot game control process of step S1305 in the main process of FIG. Here, when the received command is a round game start command (step S2109: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S2110, and when the received command is not a round game start command (step S2109: No), the process The process moves to step S2111.

<Step S2310>
When the round game start command is received (step S2108: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the round game presentation start flag to ON (step S2310), and ends the command determination process. The round game start flag is referred to when determining whether to start the round game performance in the jackpot game performance in step S2004 in the sub-timer interrupt process in FIG.

<Step S2111>
In step S2111, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a round game end command. The round game end command is a command indicating to end the round game in the opening/closing execution mode, and is set when the round game is ended in the jackpot game control process of step S1305 in the main process of FIG. Here, when the received command is a round game end command (step S2111: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S2112, and when the received command is not a round game end command (step S2111: No), the process The process moves to step S2113.

<Step S2312>
When the round game end command is received (step S2111: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the round game performance end flag to ON (step S2312), and ends the command determination process. The round game end flag is referred to when determining whether to end the round game performance in the jackpot game performance in step S2004 in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG.

<Step S2113>
In step S2113, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a special out ball detection command. The special out ball detection command is a command that indicates that the game ball detected by the special out ball sensor 384 is a special out ball that entered the special out ball opening 373 of the croon device 37, and is a command that indicates that the game ball detected by the special out ball sensor 384 is a special out ball that has entered the special out ball opening 373 of the croon device 37. It is set in the sensor detection process in step S1001 in the interrupt process. Here, if the received command is a special out ball detection command (step S2113: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S2114, and if the received command is not a special out ball detection command (step S2113: No). , the process moves to step S2115.

<Step S2114>
In step S2114, the MPU 51 sets the special out ball detection flag to ON, and ends the command determination process. The special out ball detection flag is referred to when determining whether or not to add the value of the special out ball counter in step S2208 in the setting value suggestion process of FIG. 40, which will be described later.

<Step S2115>
In step S2115, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is an ending start command. The ending start command is a command indicating to start the ending in the jackpot game, and is set in the jackpot game control process of step S1305 in the main process of FIG. Here, if the received command is an ending start command (step S2115: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S2116, and if the received command is not an ending start command (step S2115: No), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S2116. The process moves to S2117.

<Step S2116>
In step S2116, the MPU 51 sets the ending start effect flag to ON, and ends the command determination process. The ending effect start flag is referred to when determining whether or not to start the ending effect process in the jackpot game effect process of step S2004 in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. Furthermore, the ending performance start flag is referenced when determining whether or not to move the stopper section 383 of the game ball retention section 38 downward from the upper limit position to the lower limit position in step S2201 in the setting value suggestion process in FIG. Ru.

<Step S2117>
In step S2117, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a jackpot game end command. The jackpot game end command is a command indicating to end the jackpot game, and is set in the jackpot game control process of step S1305 in the main process of FIG. Here, when the received command is a jackpot game end command (step S2117: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S2118, and when the received command is not a jackpot game end command (step S2117: No), the process The process moves to step S2119.

<Step S2118>
In step S2118, the MPU 51 sets the jackpot game performance end flag to ON, and ends the command determination process. The jackpot game performance end flag is a flag that ends the jackpot game performance (ending performance), and determines whether or not to execute the ending performance end process in the jackpot game performance process of step S2004 in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. referenced when making decisions. Further, the jackpot game production end flag is referred to in step S2301 in the 7-segment display unit control process in FIG. 41 when determining whether to turn off the lit segment on the 7-segment display unit 39.

<Step S2119>
In step S2119, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a setting value change command. The setting value change command is a command that notifies the audio lamp control device 5 that the game setting value has been changed and the changed game setting value, and is set in step S1710 in the setting value change process in FIG. . Here, when the received command is a setting value change command (step S2119: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S2120, and when the received command is not a setting value change command (step S2119: No), the process The process moves to step S2121.

<Step S2120>
In step S2120, the MPU 51 changes the setting value stored in the RAM 512 to the changed setting value included in the setting value change command, stores it, and ends the command determination process. Note that the setting values stored in the RAM 512 are read out in step S2014 in the display order setting process in FIG.

<Step S2121>
In step S2121, the MPU 51 executes processing based on other commands received from the main control device 4, and then ends the command determination processing.

[Variable game performance processing]
Returning to the explanation of FIG. 34, in the variable game production process (step S2003) of the sub-timer interrupt process, when a variable pattern command is received in the variable game that notifies the lottery result of the jackpot lottery, the command determination process of FIG. A variable game performance according to the performance pattern determined in step S2103 is executed by the symbol display section 341, the speaker 26, the illumination section 27, etc.

[Jackpot game performance processing]
In the jackpot game performance process (step S2004) of the sub-timer interrupt process, the opening performance, ending performance, and opening/closing execution mode performance determined in the jackpot game performance determination process of step S2107 of the command determination process in FIG. 37 are executed. In this embodiment, in the ending performance, an ending additional image indicating the display result on the 7-segment display section 39 is displayed on the symbol display section 341 (see FIG. 47).

[Setting value suggestion processing]
In the setting value suggestion process (step S2005) of the sub-timer interrupt process, the vertical movement of the stopper part 383 of the game ball retention part 38 is controlled, and the lighting and extinguishing of each segment A to G of the 7-segment display part 39 is controlled. be done. Further, in the setting value suggestion process, as an ending effect of the jackpot game, a process of displaying an ending additional image showing the display result on the 7-segment display unit 39 in the jackpot game on the symbol display unit 341 is executed. Here, FIG. 40 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the setting value suggestion process executed in the command determination process of FIG. 37.

<Step S2201>
As shown in FIG. 40, in step S2201, the MPU 51 determines whether the ending effect start flag is set on. The ending effect start flag is a flag for starting the ending effect, and is set to ON in step S2116 in the command determination process in FIG. 37. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether it is the timing to start the ending effect based on the ending effect start flag. Here, when the ending effect start flag is on (step S2201: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S2202, and when the ending effect start flag is off (step S2201: No), the process proceeds to step S2206. to move to.

<Step S2202>
When the ending performance start flag is on (step S2201: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the stopper section 383 of the game ball retention section 38 downward from the upper limit position to the lower limit position (step S2202). That is, the MPU 51 moves the stopper section 383 of the game ball retention section 38 downward from the upper limit position to the lower limit position at the ending performance start timing. As a result, when the game ball 99 is retained in the retention lane 381 of the game ball retention section 38, the game ball 99 is moved to the discharge lane 382. At this time, the game ball 99 moved from the retention lane 381 to the discharge lane 382 is detected by the special out ball sensor 384.

<Steps S2203 to S2205>
When the stopper section 383 of the game ball retention section 38 is moved downward from the upper limit position to the lower limit position (step S2202), the MPU 51 sets the stopper downward movement flag indicating that the stopper section 383 is moving downward to ON. (Step S2203). The stopper moving down flag is referred to in step S2206 in order to determine whether the timing is such that the game ball (special out ball) retained in the retention lane 381 can be detected by the special out ball sensor 384. Then, the MPU 51 sets a downward movement time counter corresponding to the time required to return the stopper section 383 to the upper limit position (step S2204), further sets the ending effect start flag to OFF (step S2205), and Ends the setting value suggestion process.

<Step S2206>
When the ending effect start flag is off (step S2201: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the stopper lowering flag, which was set on in step S2203, is set on (step S2206). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether the timing is such that the game ball (special out ball) retained in the retention lane 381 can be detected by the special out ball sensor 384. Here, if the stopper moving down flag is on (step S2206: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S2207, and if the stopper moving down flag is off (step S2206: No), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S2207. The process moves to step S2216.

<Step S2207>
If the stopper is moving down (step S2206: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether the special out ball detection flag is set to on (step S2207). The special out ball detection flag is a flag indicating that a game ball has been detected by the special out ball sensor 384, and is set to ON in step S2114 in the command determination process in FIG. 37. Here, if the special out ball detection flag is on (step S2207: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S2208, and if the special out ball detection flag is off (step S2207: No), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S2208. The process moves to step S2210.

<Steps S2208 and S2209>
If the special out ball detection flag is on (step S2207: Yes), the MPU 51 adds 1 to the value of the special out ball counter set in the RAM 512 (step S2208), and sets the special out ball detection flag to off. (Step S2209). That is, the MPU 51 counts the number of special out balls when the special out balls that entered the special out ball opening 373 of the croon device 37 are retained in the game ball retention section 38 in the opening/closing execution mode of the jackpot game. The number of special out balls counted in this manner is referred to in order to control lighting or extinguishing of segments A to G of the 7-segment display section 39 in the 7-segment display section control process shown in FIG. 41, which will be described later.

<Steps S2210 and S2211>
In step S2210, the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the value of the downward movement time counter set in step S2204. Then, the MPU 51 determines whether the value of the downward movement time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S2211). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether it is the timing to return the stopper section 383 of the game ball retention section 38, which is at the lower limit position, to the upper limit position.

Note that whether or not it is the timing to return the stopper portion 383 to the upper limit position is determined by whether or not a special out ball is not detected for a certain period of time, that is, whether the special out ball detection flag is continuously off for a predetermined number of times or more. It may be determined by If the condition for returning the stopper part 383 to the upper limit position is that no special out balls are detected for a certain period of time, even if there are many special out balls, those special out balls can be accurately counted. .

Here, if the value of the downward movement time counter is 0 (step S2211: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S2212, and if the value of the downward movement time counter is not 0 (step S2211: No), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S2212. Ends the setting value suggestion process.

<Steps S2212 and S2213>
When the value of the downward movement time counter is 0 (step S2211: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the stopper part 383 of the game ball retention part 38 upward from the lower limit position to the upper limit position (step S2212), and turns it on in step S2203. The set stopper-moving-down flag is set to OFF (step S2213). As a result, the game ball retention section 38 is returned to a state in which the game balls 99 can be retained in the retention lane 381.

<Step S2214>
In step S2214, the MPU 51 executes a 7-segment display unit control process that controls the on/off state of the 7-segment display unit 39. In other words, for each jackpot game, at the ending of the jackpot game after a specific period has elapsed, the MPU 51 responds to the number of game balls 99 that entered the special out ball opening 373 of the croon device during the opening/closing execution mode of the jackpot game. Then, a 7-segment display section control process for controlling the turning on and off of the 7-segment display section 39 is executed. The details of the 7-segment display control process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 41 to 45.

<Step S2215>
In step S2215, the MPU 51 executes an ending additional image control process to display an additional image corresponding to the on/off state of the 7-segment display section 39 on the symbol display section 341 at the ending of the jackpot game. This ending addition image control process makes it possible to confirm the on/off state of the 7-segment display section 39 on the symbol display section 341 as well. The details of the 7-segment display control process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 46 and 47.

<Step S2216>
When the stopper lowering flag is off (step S2206: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the jackpot game production end flag is set on (step S2216). The jackpot game performance end flag is a flag that ends the jackpot game performance, and is set to ON in step S2118 in the command determination process in FIG. 37. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the timing to end the jackpot game performance (ending performance) based on the jackpot game performance end flag. Here, if the jackpot game performance end flag is on (step S2216: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S2217, and if the jackpot game performance end flag is off (step S2216: No), the MPU 51 sets the relevant setting. Ends value suggestion processing.

<Step S2217>
When the jackpot game performance end flag is on (step S2216: Yes), the MPU 51 turns off the lit segments A to G in the 7-segment display section 39 (step S2217). That is, the MPU 51 turns off all segments A to G on the 7-segment display section 39 when the jackpot game effect is ended. In other words, segments A to G of the 7-segment display section 39 can be lit only during the ending of the jackpot game.

Here, segments A to G of the 7-segment display section 39 display game setting values (non-standard values) other than game setting values (setting values) that define the probability that the lottery result of the jackpot lottery in the gaming machine 10 will be a jackpot. All or part of the number corresponding to the set value) is displayed. Therefore, each time a jackpot game is executed, the player can obtain information for specifying or estimating the non-set value at the ending of the jackpot game. Thereby, the player can specify or guess the non-set value every time the jackpot game is executed, and therefore can enjoy specifying or guessing the non-set value in the jackpot game. In addition, by obtaining information that allows you to specify or infer the non-set values for each jackpot game, if the number of jackpot games increases, for example, if the number of consecutive jackpots increases, all (5) non-set values can be grasped. In that case, it becomes possible to understand the setting value. In other words, since the player can grasp the set value based on the specified non-set value, it becomes possible to guess the set value in a jackpot game, thereby improving the interest of the game.

<Steps S2218 and S2219>
In step S2218, the MPU 51 sets the jackpot game performance end flag to OFF (step S2218). Furthermore, the MPU 51 sets the jackpot type flag (5R probability variable jackpot flag, 16R probability variable jackpot flag, or 5R normal jackpot flag) to OFF (step S2219), and ends the set value suggestion performance.

[7-segment display control processing]
Here, FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the 7-segment display unit control process executed in step S2214 of the setting value suggestion process of FIG.

<Step S2301 and Step S2302>
As shown in FIG. 41, in the 7-segment display control process, the MPU 51 first acquires the value of the special out ball counter that is added and stored in the RAM 512 in step S2208 in the setting value suggestion process in FIG. (Step S2301), and it is determined whether the value of this special out ball counter is 1 or more (Step S2302). The value of the special out ball counter is the number of special out balls that entered the variable winning hole 316 and entered the special out ball hole 373 of the croon device 37 in the jackpot opening/closing execution mode. Then, if the value of the special out ball counter is 1 or more (step S2302: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S2303, and if the value of the special out ball counter is not 1 or more, that is, 0 ( Step S2302: No), since there is no need to light any of the segments A to G of the 7-segment display section 39, the 7-segment display section control process ends.

<Steps S2303 to S2307>
In step S2303, the MPU 51 reads segment display unit control information from the 7-segment display unit control information storage area (see FIG. 42(A)) set in the RAM 512 of the audio lamp control device 5 (step S2303). The segment display unit control information is information necessary to control the 7-segment display unit 39 during a predetermined period (a period for accumulating the number of game balls 99 that have entered the special out ball opening 373 of the croon device 37). . Then, the MPU 51 controls the 7-segment display unit 39 based on the value of the special out ball counter acquired in step S2301 and the 7-segment display unit control information read from the 7-segment display unit control information storage area in step S2303. is determined (step S2304), and control of the 7-segment display section 39 is executed based on this control content (step S2305). Note that details of the determination of control contents and control for the 7-segment display section 39 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 42 to 45. Furthermore, the MPU 51 updates the already displayed information storage area (see FIG. 42(A)) of the 7-segment display control information stored in the RAM 512 (step S2306), and clears the value of the special out ball counter. (Step S2307), the 7-segment display unit control process ends.

Here, FIG. 42 is a diagram for explaining the 7-segment display unit control information storage area set in the RAM 512 of the audio lamp control device 5. Specifically, FIG. 42(A) is a diagram showing an example of a 7-segment display control information storage area, and FIG. 42(B) is a diagram showing an example of a control order storage area of the 7-segment display control information storage area. FIG. 42C is a diagram showing an example of the initial state (not updated) of the displayed information storage area of the 7-segment display control information storage area.

As shown in FIG. 42(A), the 7-segment display unit control information storage area includes a control order storage area shown in FIG. 42(B) and an already displayed information storage area shown in FIG. 42(C).

As shown in FIG. 42(B), the control order storage area is displayed in the 7-segment display section 39 during a predetermined period (a period for accumulating the number of game balls 99 that have entered the special out ball opening 373 of the croon device 37). This area stores the order of numbers to be displayed and the order of control objects for segments A to G when displaying each number. This control order storage area includes a numeric display order storage area and a segment control order storage area.

The number display order storage area is stored in the 7-segment display unit 39 and 7-segment display area until the end of a predetermined period (for example, from the start of a jackpot game for a jackpot in the low probability mode to the end of the opening/closing execution mode of a jackpot game for a normal jackpot). The order of numbers to be displayed (number display order) is memorized. The number display order is determined by the display order setting process of FIG. 35 described above based on the number display order determination table (see FIG. 36) that is set for the setting value that defines the probability that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery will be a jackpot. Determined in In the number display order storage area of the example shown in FIG. As the display order of numbers on the segment display section 39, "2" → "3" → "4" → "5" → "6" is stored. In other words, unless the settings are changed while the gaming hall is open, a fixed number display order is determined for each business day, and the number display order is fixed for a predetermined period during the same business day. . In this way, by fixing the number display order in the predetermined period of the business day, the numbers are displayed in the same order on the 7-segment display section 39 every time the predetermined period starts. Numbers that are early in the numerical display order are likely to be displayed, and numbers that are late in the numerical display order are difficult to be displayed. For example, if the number display order is "2" → "3" → "4" → "5" → "6", the numbers are displayed in this order, so "2" and "3" are likely to be displayed. On the other hand, "5" and "6" are difficult to display. This makes it possible to estimate and specify the setting value, while preventing the setting value from being easily specified, and allows the user to enjoy estimating and specifying the setting value. In addition, because the number display order is fixed during the business day, numbers that are early in the display order are likely to be displayed, and numbers that are late in the display order are difficult to display.For example, when the setting value is set to low, (When the jackpot probability in the low probability mode is low), it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing that the setting is low due to a small number of initial hits. This prevents a player from prematurely ending a game on the gaming machine 10 in progress, and suppresses a decrease in the operating rate of the gaming machine 10.

Further, it is expected that the 7-segment display section 39 will display a larger number as the number of specific periods in the predetermined period increases (the larger the number of successive jackpots). Therefore, as the number of successive jackpots increases, the number of non-set values that can be identified among a plurality of non-set values other than the set value also increases. As a result, since the number of successive jackpots increases, it is possible to obtain a lot of information for identifying non-set values, and therefore it is possible to narrow down candidates for set values. Then, by letting 35 or more game balls 99 into the special out ball opening 373 of the croon device 37 during a predetermined period, the player can identify all non-set values, and as a result, recognize the set values. becomes possible. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game with the goal of identifying all non-set values, that is, recognizing the set values, and whether the jackpot series will continue (if the jackpot type is Players can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to whether it is a big hit or a normal jackpot, and the interest in the game is improved.

Note that the number display order is not limited to the case where it is fixed to the one set when the gaming machine 10 is powered on or when the settings are changed, but also when a jackpot game is started for a jackpot (first win) in low probability mode, etc. may be determined. In this way, when a jackpot game such as a first win is started, the number display order is determined, so that the number display order is determined every predetermined period, for example. This makes it difficult for the player to guess the order in which the numbers are displayed, so that variations in the order of numbers corresponding to non-set values displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 are reduced. Therefore, it becomes possible to identify all non-set values with a small number of initial hits, and it becomes possible to recognize the set values at an early stage. As a result, the player can check the numbers displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 based on the numbers displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 in the past in order to identify all non-set values and recognize the set values. You can enjoy the progress of the game while expecting to see numbers that are not available.

On the other hand, the segment control order storage area stores the control order of segments A to G (segment control order) when displaying numbers on the 7-segment display section 39. The segment control order is fixed as segment A→segment B→segment C→segment D→segment E→segment F→segment G. That is, the segment control order is not determined by turning on the power to the gaming machine 10, changing settings, winning a jackpot, etc., but is fixed as an order specific to the gaming machine 10. In this way, by fixing the segment control order as an order unique to the gaming machine 10, the player can control the segments A to G when a number corresponding to a non-set value is displayed on the 7-segment display section 39. It becomes possible to grasp the order. Thereby, the player can grasp the numbers scheduled to be displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 even before the numbers are displayed on the 7-segment display section 39. Therefore, the player can enjoy guessing numbers that have never been displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 based on the control order of the segments A to G, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

It should be noted that, like the numerical display order, the segment control order is fixed within the same business day by being determined when the gaming machine 10 is turned on or when setting values are changed, but it is determined for each business day. It is also possible to make it so that In this case, compared to a case where the segment control order is fixed as an order specific to the gaming machine 10, it becomes difficult to grasp numbers that have never been displayed on the 7-segment display section 39. This increases the difficulty until all non-set values are identified and the set value is recognized, so for example when the set value is a low setting (when the jackpot probability is low in low probability mode) , it is possible to prevent the player from early recognizing that the setting is low. This prevents the player from prematurely ending the game he is playing on the gaming machine 10.

In addition, the segment control order is determined when a jackpot game for a jackpot in a low probability mode is started (when a predetermined period is started), etc., as explained in the third embodiment below. Good too.

As shown in FIG. 42(C), the already displayed information storage area stores information regarding numbers already displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 during a predetermined period, numbers in the middle of display, and segments A to G that have already been controlled. area. This already displayed information storage area stores already displayed number flag information, currently displayed number flag information, and already displayed segment flag information.

The already displayed number flag information is information regarding a flag indicating whether or not the number has been displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 for a predetermined period. This displayed number flag information includes a number 1 already displayed flag, a number 2 already displayed flag, a number 3 already displayed flag, a number 4 already displayed flag, a number 5 already displayed flag, and a number 6 already displayed flag. The numeral 1 already displayed flag is a flag indicating whether or not the numeral 1 corresponding to the game setting value 1 has been displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 as a non-setting value during a predetermined period. This number 1 already displayed flag indicates that the number 1 has been displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 for a predetermined period when set to on, and indicates that the number 1 is displayed for a predetermined period when set to off. This indicates that the number 1 is not displayed in section 39. The numeral 2 already displayed flag is a flag indicating whether or not the numeral 2 corresponding to the game setting value 2 has been displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 as a non-setting value during a predetermined period. This number 2 already displayed flag indicates that the number 2 has been displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 for a predetermined period when set to on, and indicates that the number 2 is displayed for a predetermined period when set to off. This indicates that the number 2 is not displayed in section 39. The number 3 display flag is a flag indicating whether or not the number 3 corresponding to the game setting value 3 has been displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 as a non-set value during a predetermined period. This number 3 already displayed flag indicates that the number 3 has been displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 for a predetermined period when set to on, and indicates that the number 3 is displayed for a predetermined period when set to off. This indicates that the number 3 is not displayed in section 39. The numeral 4 already displayed flag is a flag indicating whether or not the numeral 4 corresponding to the game setting value 4 has been displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 as a non-setting value during a predetermined period. This number 4 already displayed flag indicates that the number 4 has been displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 for a predetermined period when set to on, and indicates that the number 4 is displayed for a predetermined period when set to off. This indicates that the number 4 is not displayed in section 39. The numeral 5 already displayed flag is a flag indicating whether or not the numeral 5 corresponding to the game setting value 5 has been displayed as a non-setting value on the 7-segment display section 39 during a predetermined period. This number 5 already displayed flag indicates that the number 5 has been displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 for a predetermined period when set to on, and indicates that the number 5 is displayed for a predetermined period when set to off. This indicates that the number 5 is not displayed in section 39. The numeral 6 already displayed flag is a flag indicating whether or not the numeral 6 corresponding to the game setting value 6 has been displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 as a non-setting value during a predetermined period. This number 6 already displayed flag indicates that the number 6 has been displayed on the 7 segment display section 39 for a predetermined period when set to on, and indicates that the number 6 is displayed for a predetermined period when set to off. This indicates that the number 6 is not displayed in section 39.

The display target number flag information is a flag indicating whether or not the number is to be displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 during a predetermined period. This display target number flag information includes a number 1 display target flag, a number 2 display target flag, a number 3 display target flag, a number 4 display target flag, a number 5 display target flag, and a number 6 display target flag. The number 1 display target flag is a flag indicating whether or not the number 1 corresponding to the game setting value 1 is to be displayed as a non-set value on the 7-segment display section 39 during a predetermined period. This number 1 display target flag indicates that the number 1 is to be displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 when set to on, and indicates that the number 1 is displayed in 7 segments when set to off. Indicates that it is not a display target in section 39. The number 2 display target flag is a flag indicating whether or not the number 2 corresponding to the game setting value 2 is to be displayed as a non-set value on the 7-segment display section 39 during a predetermined period. This number 2 display target flag indicates that the number 2 is to be displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 when set to on, and indicates that the number 2 is displayed in 7 segments when set to off. Indicates that it is not a display target in section 39. The number 3 display target flag is a flag indicating whether or not the number 3 corresponding to the game setting value 3 is to be displayed as a non-set value on the 7-segment display section 39 during a predetermined period. This number 3 display target flag indicates that the number 3 is to be displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 when set to on, and indicates that the number 3 is displayed in 7 segments when set to off. Indicates that it is not a display target in section 39. The number 4 display target flag is a flag indicating whether or not the number 4 corresponding to the game setting value 4 is to be displayed as a non-set value on the 7-segment display section 39 during a predetermined period. This number 4 display target flag indicates that the number 4 is to be displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 when set to on, and indicates that the number 4 is displayed in 7 segments when set to off. Indicates that it is not a display target in section 39. The number 5 display target flag is a flag indicating whether or not the number 5 corresponding to the game setting value 5 is to be displayed as a non-set value on the 7-segment display section 39 during a predetermined period. This number 5 display target flag indicates that the number 5 is to be displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 when set to on, and indicates that the number 5 is displayed in 7 segments when set to off. Indicates that it is not a display target in section 39. The number 6 display target flag is a flag indicating whether the number 6 corresponding to the game setting value 6 is to be displayed as a non-set value on the 7-segment display section 39 during a predetermined period. This number 6 display target flag indicates that the number 6 is to be displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 when set to on, and indicates that the number 6 is displayed in 7 segments when set to off. Indicates that it is not a display target in section 39.

The already targeted segment flag information is a flag indicating whether or not each of the segments A to G of the 7-segment display section 39 has been controlled to turn on or off in the display control of the numbers to be displayed in a predetermined period. This target segment flag information includes the segment A target flag, the segment B target flag, the segment C target flag, the segment D target flag, the segment E target flag, the segment F target flag, and the segment G target flag. including. The segment A target flag is a flag indicating whether or not segment A of the 7-segment display section 39 has been controlled to turn on and off in the display control of numbers to be displayed during a predetermined period. This Segment A Already Target Flag indicates that Segment A has become a control target in the display control of numbers to be displayed in a predetermined period when set to ON, and indicates that Segment A has become a control target when set to OFF. Indicates that the control target is not controlled. The segment B target flag is a flag indicating whether or not segment B of the 7-segment display section 39 has been controlled to turn on and off in the display control of numbers to be displayed in a predetermined period. This Segment B Already Target Flag indicates that Segment B has become the control target in the display control of numbers to be displayed in a predetermined period when set to ON, and indicates that Segment B has become a control target when set to OFF. Indicates that the control target is not controlled. The segment C target flag is a flag indicating whether or not the segment C of the 7-segment display section 39 has been controlled to turn on and off in the display control of the numbers to be displayed in a predetermined period. This segment C already targeted flag indicates that segment C has become a control target in the display control of display target numbers in a predetermined period when set to on, and when set to off, segment C Indicates that the control target is not controlled. The segment D target flag is a flag indicating whether or not the segment D of the 7-segment display section 39 has been controlled to turn on and off in the display control of the numbers to be displayed in a predetermined period. This Segment D Already Target Flag indicates that segment D has become a control target in display control of display target numbers in a predetermined period when set to on, and indicates that segment D has become a control target when set to off. Indicates that the control target is not controlled. The segment E target flag is a flag indicating whether or not the segment E of the 7-segment display section 39 has been controlled to turn on and off in the display control of the numbers to be displayed in a predetermined period. This segment E already target flag indicates that segment E has become a control target in the display control of display target numbers in a predetermined period when set to on, and when set to off, segment E Indicates that the control target is not controlled. The segment F already targeted flag is a flag indicating whether or not segment F of the 7-segment display section 39 has become a target for lighting/extinguishing control in the display control of numbers to be displayed in a predetermined period. This segment F already targeted flag indicates that segment F has become a control target in the display control of numbers to be displayed in a predetermined period when set to on, and indicates that segment F has become a control target when set to off. Indicates that the control target is not controlled. The segment G target flag is a flag indicating whether or not the segment G of the 7-segment display section 39 has been controlled to turn on and off in the display control of the numbers to be displayed in a predetermined period. This segment G already targeted flag indicates that segment G has become a control target in the display control of numbers to be displayed in a predetermined period when set to on, and when set to off, it indicates that segment G Indicates that the control target is not controlled.

In the already displayed information storage area, all flags included in already displayed number flag information, display target number flag information, and already target segment flag information are set to OFF. Here, the initial state is a state outside the predetermined period, that is, at the start of a jackpot game for a jackpot (first jackpot) in a low probability mode (the number of game balls 99 that entered the special out ball opening 373 of the croon device 37). indicates the state at the beginning of the predetermined period in which the data is accumulated. In this embodiment, all the flags included in the already displayed information storage area are set when the jackpot type is 5R normal jackpot (step S2404: Yes) in step S2405 in the ending additional image control process of FIG. 46, which will be described later. , that is, it is set off (cleared) when it is a normal jackpot for which the end of the predetermined period is set.

Here, FIGS. 43 to 45 are diagrams showing control examples (display examples) of the 7-segment display section 39 of the 7-segment display section control information storage area and updating examples of the already displayed information storage area. Hereinafter, with reference to FIGS. 43 to 45, a control example (display example) of the 7-segment display section 39 and an example of updating the already displayed information storage area of the 7-segment display section control information storage area will be described.

As described above, in the 7-segment display section control process of FIG. 41, the control content of the 7-segment display section 39 is determined (step S2304), and the 7-segment display section 39 is controlled at the ending of the jackpot game according to the control content. (Step S2305). After that, each flag information stored in the already displayed information storage area is updated (step S2306).

The control content of the 7-segment display unit 39 is the value of the special out ball counter acquired in step S2301 of the 7-segment display unit control process in FIG. 373 (the number of game balls 99 that entered the ball). For example, when the displayed information storage area is in the initial state (see FIG. 42(C)), if the value of the special out ball counter is less than 7, the 7 segments A to G on the 7 segment display section 39 Some of the segments are subject to lighting/extinguishing control. Specifically, for example, if the value of the special out ball counter is 5 (the number of game balls 99 that entered the special out ball opening 373 of the croon device 37 during a specific period is 5), then the value of the control order storage area is When the contents are in the state shown in FIG. 42(B) and the displayed information storage area is in the initial state shown in FIG. 42(C) (all flags are set to off), the 7-segment display section 39 The five segments A to E are to be controlled for turning on and off. When the contents of the control order storage area are in the state shown in FIG. 42(B), the number 2 is displayed first, so segment A is lit, segment B is lit, Segment C is turned off, segment D is turned on, and segment E is turned on. Therefore, in the 7-segment display section 39, from the all-out state (uncontrolled state) in which all segments A to G shown in FIG. 43(A) are turned off, to the segment A, segment B, and segment shown in FIG. D and segment E are changed to a partially controlled state where they are lit.

The change from the uncontrolled state shown in FIG. 43(A) to the partially controlled state shown in FIG. 43(B) may be performed all at once, or the segments A to E may be sequentially controlled. This may be done in stages by turning on or off. Furthermore, when segments A to E are sequentially turned on or off as control targets, the segments A to E that are control targets may be made to blink to clearly indicate that they are control targets. Of course, the segment to be controlled does not necessarily need to be clearly specified.

On the other hand, when the control of the 7-segment display section 39 is finished, the already displayed information storage area is updated. For example, when the 7-segment display section 39 is changed from the uncontrolled state shown in FIG. 43(A) to the partially controlled state shown in FIG. 43(B), the already displayed information storage area is changed as shown in FIG. 42(C). The initial state in which all flags are set to OFF is updated to the content shown in FIG. 43(C). Specifically, in the display state shown in FIG. 43(B), for the number 2 initially displayed on the 7-segment display section 39, five segments A to E of segments A to G are targeted for control. Therefore, segments F and G are not subject to control. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 43(C), since none of the numbers 1 to 6 are displayed in the displayed number flag information, the number 1 already displayed flag, the number 2 already displayed flag, and the number 3 already displayed flag are flagged. , the number 4 already displayed flag, the number 5 already displayed flag, and the number 6 already displayed flag are maintained off. In addition, in the currently displayed number flag information, the currently displayed number 2 flag for the number 2 whose five segments A to E are controlled is set to ON. In addition, in the already displayed segment flag information, since segments A to E are the control targets, the segment A already targeted flag, segment B already targeted flag, segment C already targeted flag, and segment D already targeted flag for segments A to E , and the segment E target flag is set on.

In addition, when the already displayed information storage area is in the initial state (see FIG. 42(C)), the value of the special out ball counter (set in the jackpot game) acquired in step S2301 of the 7-segment display control process in FIG. When the number of game balls 99 that entered the special out ball opening 373 of the croon device 37 during the specified period exceeds 7, at least one number (for example, 2) is displayed on the 7-segment display section 39. Specifically, for example, if the value of the special out ball counter is 10 (the number of game balls 99 that entered the special out ball opening 373 of the croon device 37 during a specific period is 10), the 7-segment display section 39 A total of 10 segments A to G are to be controlled. In other words, in the 7-segment display section 39, seven (all) segments A to G are subject to lighting/extinguishing control, so that the number in the first display order is displayed on the 7-segment display section 39, and then the number in the second display order is displayed. Three segments A to C in terms of order numbers are to be controlled for the second lighting/extinguishing. Specifically, when the contents of the control order storage area are in the state shown in FIG. 42(B) and the displayed information storage area is in the initial state shown in FIG. 42(C) (all flags are set to off), 2), the first number in the display order is 2, so the number 2 is displayed on the 7-segment display section 39, and then the number 3 is displayed. Therefore, in the 7-segment display section 39, from the uncontrolled state in which all segments A to G shown in FIG. 44(A) are turned off, segments A, B, D, E, and is turned on, and segments C and F are turned off, changing to an all-segment control state in which the number 2 is displayed on the 7-segment display section 39. ) is changed from the all segment control state in which the number 2 is displayed to a partial segment control state in which segments A to C are controlled as shown in FIG. 44(C). In the example shown in FIG. 44(C), the second displayed number is 3, so segments A to C are lit.

Note that the change from the non-control state shown in FIG. 44(A) to the all-segment control state shown in FIG. 44(B), and the change from the all-segment control state shown in FIG. 44(B) to the partial state shown in FIG. 44(C) The change to the segment control state may be performed all at once, or may be performed in stages by sequentially turning on or off segments A to G or segments A to C. Furthermore, when segments A to G or segments A to C are turned on or off in sequence, the segment being controlled may be made to blink to clearly indicate that it is being controlled. Of course, the segment to be controlled does not necessarily need to be clearly specified.

Further, when the 7-segment display section 39 is controlled, the already displayed information storage area is updated. For example, the 7-segment display section 39 is changed from the non-control state shown in FIG. 44(A), through the all-segment control state shown in FIG. 44(B), to the partial segment control state shown in FIG. 44(C). In this case, the displayed information storage area changes from the initial state shown in FIG. 42(C) in which all flags are set to OFF, through the contents shown in FIGS. 45(A) and 45(B), and finally to the state shown in FIG. 45(C). Specifically, in the state shown in FIG. 44(B), with respect to the number 2 initially displayed on the 7-segment display section 39, all segments A to E of segments A to G are subject to control. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 45(A), in the displayed segment flag information, all the displayed target flags for segments A to G are set to ON. Then, when all the target flags for segments A to G are set to ON, the control for displaying the number 2 has ended, so as shown in FIG. 45(B), the number 2 already displayed flag is set to ON, and in the currently displayed number flag information, the currently displayed number 2 flag is set to OFF, while the currently displayed number 3 flag is set to ON. Thereafter, in the displayed segment flag information, all the displayed target flags for segments A to G are set to OFF. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 45(C), in the displayed segment flag information, the segment A already targeted flag, segment B already targeted flag, and segment C already targeted flag for segments A to C are set to ON. In other words, every time all the target flags in the displayed segment flag information are set to on (every time seven segments A to G are set as control targets), they become display targets in the displayed number flag information. The already displayed flag for the number is set to on, and the display target flag for the number that was to be displayed in the currently displayed number flag information is set to off, while the display target flag for the next number to be displayed is turned on. Set.

As described above, the 7-segment display section 39 is controlled according to the value of the special out ball counter acquired in step S2301 and the 7-segment display section control information, so that the jackpot lottery in the gaming machine 10 is All or part of the numbers corresponding to game setting values (non-setting values) other than the gaming setting values (setting values) that define the probability that the lottery result will be a jackpot are displayed. This allows the player to specify or infer the non-set value based on the content displayed on the 7-segment display section 39, and as a result, it becomes possible to recognize the set value.

By the way, some gaming machines, like the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, have a plurality of setting values with different jackpot winning probabilities in the jackpot lottery, and the gaming hall side can select the setting value. In this case, the game hall desires to set the set value low in order to lower the expected ball payout value. When the setting value is set low, the setting value is not known to the player because it is desired to avoid the player from quitting the game due to the player recognizing that the setting value is low. There is a tendency to want it to be a gaming machine.

On the other hand, in order to play a game on a gaming machine 10 with a high expected ball payout value, the player can guess (narrow down to multiple setting values) or recognize the setting value for a gaming machine that has a setting value. I would like to have good gameplay. As described above, gaming halls and players tend to have conflicting wishes regarding gaming machines that suggest or specify gaming setting values.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, in a specific period from the start of the first jackpot game to the end of the opening/closing execution mode of the normal jackpot, among the game balls 99 that have entered the variable winning opening 316, the special The game ball (special out ball) that has entered the out ball opening 373 is retained in the retention lane 381 of the game ball retention section 38. After the specific period has elapsed, the number of game balls 99 (special out balls) retained in the retention lane 381 is counted, and the segments A to G of the 7-segment display section 39 are set as control targets according to the counted number. do. That is, at least unless the lottery result in the jackpot lottery becomes a jackpot and the game is transferred to a jackpot game, the segments A to G of the 7-segment display section 39 are neither controlled nor lit up. Therefore, unless the game is shifted to a jackpot game, the set value will not be estimated or recognized.

In addition, it is difficult for the game ball 99 to enter the special out ball opening 373 of the croon device 37, and for example, 1 to 2 balls (approximately 1 ball per 10R round game) per 16R jackpot game. It is expected that 99 game balls will land. Therefore, in one jackpot, it is difficult to specify or guess the non-set value using the 7-segment display section 39. On the other hand, the 7-segment display section 39 shows that after the jackpot game (opening) that is executed when the lottery result in the low probability mode becomes a jackpot starts, the opening/closing execution mode in the normal jackpot game ends (ending). During the predetermined period until the start of the game, control is performed according to the cumulative total of game balls 99 that have entered the special out ball opening 373 of the croon device 37. In other words, if the first hit is a variable jackpot, the predetermined period will not end as long as the series of jackpots in the high probability mode continues, and the opening/closing of the normal jackpot game when winning the normal jackpot will not end. Continues until the mode ends. That is, in this embodiment, although it has a game feature in which it is not easy to recognize the non-set value or even the set value, the longer the series of jackpots in the high probability mode continues, the more the special out ball opening 373 of the croon device 37 When many game balls 99 are expected to enter the ball, the non-set value (set value) can be estimated more accurately, and 35 or more game balls 99 enter the special out ball opening 373 in a predetermined period. Non-set values (set values) can be reliably identified. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 has information that allows the setting value to be inferred according to the number of specific conditions satisfied in a predetermined period, that is, the number of game balls that entered the special out ball opening 373 of the croon device 37 in a predetermined period. Since the expected value of the number of game balls 99 entering the special out ball opening 373 is low in a single jackpot, it is difficult to guess or recognize the non-set value (set value). On the other hand, in the case of consecutive jackpots, if the number of consecutive hits is small, it is difficult to guess or recognize the non-set value (set value), but as the number of consecutive hits increases, the game ball to the special out ball opening 373 Since the expected value of the number of balls entering 99 becomes high, the difficulty of guessing the non-set value (set value) is reduced, providing a gaming experience. That is, in this embodiment, the setting value can be estimated by specifying or estimating some or all of the plurality of non-setting values by stacking all or some of the numbers displayed on the 7-segment display section 39. be. In this way, in the gaming machine 10, by suppressing the setting value from being easily identified or guessed (narrowed down), the non-setting value (setting value) can be set more accurately according to the wish of the store side by winning consecutive jackpots. By making it possible to guess, it is possible to meet the player's wishes. As a result, a gaming machine 10 that meets the wishes of both the store side and the player side is provided.

By the way, in conventional slot machines, an image suggesting or clarifying a setting value may be displayed on a display device such as a liquid crystal display device on which a game effect is executed. Images that suggest or clarify the setting value are displayed, for example, on the jackpot confirmation screen, jackpot start screen, jackpot end screen, start screen, continuation screen, and end screen of ART and AT, and the content of the displayed image is determined by lottery. be done. Specifically, on an image display unit such as a liquid crystal display device, in addition to a default screen that does not suggest or explicitly indicate a set value, such as a jackpot game end screen, a certain probability that the value is greater than or equal to a specific set value (for example, an intermediate setting value (setting value 4 to 6) or higher), high setting value (e.g. setting value 5 or 6), odd number setting value (e.g. setting value 1, 3 or 5), even number setting value ( For example, a screen is presented that suggests or clearly indicates that the setting value is 2, 4, or 6), that it is not a specific setting value (for example, the negation of setting value 1), that it is the highest setting value (for example, setting value 6), etc. .

However, in conventional slot machines, when suggesting or clarifying the setting value, there is a high probability that a default screen that does not suggest or clarify the setting value will be presented so that the setting value cannot be easily identified or guessed. The probability that a suggestion or explicit screen will be presented is set low. In particular, the probability that a setting value will be suggested or specified as being advantageous to the player or that a specific setting value will be specified is set to be low. Furthermore, suggestions that the setting value is an odd number or an even number tend to have low reliability, and for example, the reliability is often set to about 60%. Furthermore, although a slot machine may suggest or explicitly indicate a high setting value, it does not suggest or explicitly deny that it is a high setting value (for example, a setting value of 5 or 6), and especially the highest setting value. No suggestion or explicit statement denying the set value (for example, set value 6) is executed. That is, in the slot machine, information disadvantageous to the player, such as denying a high setting value, is not presented.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the setting is made according to the number of specific conditions satisfied in a predetermined period as described above, that is, the number of game balls that entered the special out ball opening 373 of the croon device 37 in a predetermined period. Information whose value can be estimated (non-set value) is displayed as a number on the 7-segment display section 39. In other words, by displaying the numbers of the non-set values one by one on the 7-segment display section 39, it is possible to identify or infer some of the non-set values, so the set value can be estimated, and all of the non-set values Since all non-set values can be recognized by displaying the numbers, it becomes possible to identify the set values.

In this way, in this embodiment, the number displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 is fundamentally different from the suggestion or explicit setting value in a fixed ratio, which is adopted in gaming machines such as slot machines. The setting value can be recognized by identifying multiple non-setting values based on the following. In addition, in this embodiment, the non-set value (set value) is specified depending on the number of specific conditions (entering of the game ball 99 into the special out ball opening 373) during the jackpot game in a predetermined period. This point also differs from conventional gaming machines in which setting values are suggested or specified at a fixed rate. Furthermore, in this embodiment, as the number of successive jackpots increases, the difficulty of identifying or guessing some or all of the multiple non-set values decreases compared to conventional gaming machines such as slot machines. It is different from the suggestion or explicit setting value of

In the present embodiment, numerical information indicating a plurality of non-set values depending on the number of specific conditions (entering of the game ball 99 into the special out ball opening 373) during a jackpot game in a predetermined period of time is provided. Because the information used to specify the setting value is presented less frequently than in conventional gaming machines, the frequency of presentation of information for specifying the setting value does not decrease, and as long as the predetermined period continues (the consecutive jackpots continue). Since the presentation of information for identifying non-set values (set values) is continued, it is possible to enjoy guessing the set values even more, and the interest in the game is improved.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, if the specific condition is satisfied for the number of non-setting values in a predetermined period, all the non-setting values can be specified. In other words, all non-set values are presented to the player, including information that is disadvantageous to the player, regardless of the level of the non-set value. In this way, in this embodiment, unlike the case where setting values are suggested or specified in conventional slot machines, even information that is disadvantageous to the player, such as denying the highest setting value, is presented. As a result, the player can obtain not only advantageous information but also disadvantageous information as information for specifying or estimating the set value, and therefore continues playing on the gaming machine 10 based on the disadvantageous information. It can be determined whether or not. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, it is conceivable to set a number display order in which the display order of numbers corresponding to a high setting value (for example, a setting value of 5 or more) is delayed so that it is easier to select. On the contrary, it may be possible to set a number display order in which numbers corresponding to a low setting value (for example, a setting value of 2 or less) are displayed earlier in the display order so that it is easier to select the number display order. In this way, the numbers corresponding to the low setting values are displayed earlier and the numbers corresponding to the higher setting values are displayed later, so that the higher setting values are displayed later. As a result, until just before the player grasps the setting value, it is possible to make the player expect that the setting value may be high, which is advantageous to the player, so that the player can expect the setting value to be high while expecting the setting value to be high. You can have fun guessing (setting value).

[Ending added image control processing]
Here, FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the ending added image control process executed in step S2215 in the setting value suggestion process of FIG.

<Steps S2401 to S2403>
As shown in FIG. 46, in the ending additional image control process, the MPU 51, in step S2401, updates various information in the already displayed information storage area updated in step S2306 of FIG. The already displayed number flag information, the currently displayed number flag information, and the already displayed segment flag information are read out, and based on these information, an additional image to be displayed on the symbol display section 341 at the ending of the jackpot game is determined (step S2402). Here, the additional image is an image that shows the display contents of the 7-segment display section 39, and is an image that allows the non-setting value to be specified or estimated (Fig. 47 (B1), Fig. 47 (B2), and Fig. 47 (C )reference). Then, the MPU 51 transmits to the display control device 6 an additional image display command that causes the symbol display section 341 to display the additional image determined in step S2402 in the ending effect. As a result, the additional image is displayed on the symbol display section 341 as an ending effect.

Here, FIG. 47 is a diagram showing an example of screen transition in the ending performance of the jackpot game. Specifically, FIG. 47 (A1) is an example of the screen of the symbol display section 341 in the first half of the ending in a variable jackpot game, and FIG. 47 (A2) is a screen example of the symbol display section 341 in the first half of the ending in a normal jackpot game. This is an example. Moreover, FIG. 47 (B1), FIG. 47 (B2), and FIG. 47 (C) are screen examples (set value suggestion screen examples) of the symbol display section 341 in the latter half of the ending.

As shown in FIG. 47 (A1), in the ending of a certain variable jackpot game, as the first half of the ending effect, it is clearly indicated on the symbol display section 341 that the transition to the high probability mode and high frequency support mode will occur after the certain variable jackpot game ends. The image will be displayed. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 47 (B1), in the ending of the normal jackpot game, the low probability mode and low frequency support mode (time saving mode) are displayed in the symbol display section 341 as the first half of the ending performance after the end of the normal jackpot game. An image will be displayed to clearly indicate the transition to . In addition, in the first half of the ending performance, in addition to an image that clearly indicates the game mode to which the game mode will be transferred after the end of the jackpot game, an image that clearly shows the number of successive jackpots and the number of balls to be played is displayed.

On the other hand, in the second half of the ending performance of the jackpot game, the image including the additional image determined in step S2402 of the ending additional image control process in FIG. Is displayed. As shown in FIG. 47 (B1), FIG. 47 (B2), and FIG. 47 (C), the additional image shows the display history on the 7-segment display section 39 until the end of one predetermined period, It includes five setting value suggestion images imitating a seven-segment display section 39 on which numbers corresponding to non-setting values can be displayed. Specifically, when the 7-segment display section 39 is controlled from the initial state shown in FIG. 43(A) to the display state shown in FIG. 43(B), the 7-segment display section 39 changes as shown in FIG. 47(B1). An additional image including an image simulating the display state in is displayed on the symbol display section 341 as the second half of the ending effect. Further, when the 7-segment display section 39 is controlled from the initial state shown in FIG. 43(A) to the display state shown in FIG. 44(C) via FIG. 44(B), the display state shown in FIG. 47(B2) An additional image including a setting value suggestion image simulating the display state shown in FIG. 44(B) and a setting value suggestion image simulating the display state shown in FIG. 44(C) is displayed on the symbol display section 341 as the second half of the ending performance. Is displayed. Furthermore, if all five numbers corresponding to non-set values are displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 before the predetermined period ends, each number will be displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 as shown in FIG. 47(C). An additional image including a setting value suggestion image imitating the displayed state is displayed on the symbol display section 341 as the second half of the ending effect. In the example shown in FIG. 47(C), an image is displayed indicating that numbers "2" to "6" other than the number "1" are displayed on the 7-segment display section 39. In this case, it can be specified that the non-set value is "2" to "6", and as a result, it can be recognized that the set value is "1".

In this way, in the ending performance of the jackpot game, the display history on the 7-segment display section 39 until the end of one predetermined period is added including five setting value suggestion images imitating the 7-segment display section 39 as the second half part. Displayed as an image. Therefore, at the ending of each jackpot game, the player can check the information regarding the non-set values displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 up to the jackpot game. As a result, if you do not know that information related to non-set values will be displayed on the 7-segment display section 39, when you miss the display content on the 7-segment display section 39, or when the past 7-segment display section in the predetermined period Even if the user forgets the content displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39, the user can recognize the content displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 again. Therefore, for each jackpot game, the player can identify or guess the non-set value in the ending based on the additional image showing the display history on the 7-segment display section 39, and can recognize or guess the set value.

It should be noted that whether or not to display an additional image showing the display history on the 7-segment display section 39 until the end of one predetermined period on the symbol display section 341 as an ending effect for a jackpot game is a design matter; It is also conceivable that the additional image is not displayed on the symbol display section 341 in this case. In this way, when the additional image is not displayed in the ending effect, if there are numbers displayed in the past during a predetermined period, those numbers will not be displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 first unless they are memorized or recorded. It becomes difficult to identify or infer non-set values based on the numbers given, and it becomes difficult to infer or recognize set values. In other words, by not displaying the additional image in the ending performance, it becomes more difficult to identify or guess non-set values (set values), so the set values of the gaming machine 10 can be recognized early, and at least they are not high set values. It is possible to prevent this from being recognized. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the game of the gaming machine 10 from ending prematurely, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the operating rate of the gaming machine 10.

<Step S2404>
Returning to the explanation of FIG. 46, in step S2404, the MPU 51 determines whether the jackpot type that triggered the execution of the jackpot game is a 5R normal jackpot. Whether or not the jackpot type is a 5R normal jackpot can be determined based on whether or not the 5R normal jackpot flag, which can be set to on in step S2103 of FIG. 37, is on. Then, when the jackpot type is a 5R normal jackpot (step S2404: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S2305, and when the jackpot type is not a 5R normal jackpot (step S2404: No), the MPU 51 performs the ending additional image control process. end.

<Step S2405>
If the jackpot type is the 5R normal jackpot (step S2404: Yes), the MPU 51 initializes the already displayed information storage area (sets all flags off) and ends the ending added image control process. That is, if the jackpot is a 5R normal jackpot in which the end of the predetermined period is set, the MPU 51 initializes the already displayed information storage area.

As described above, in this embodiment, the non-set value (set value) can be identified or estimated, but in order to increase the accuracy of identifying or guessing the non-set value (set value), it is necessary to It is necessary to allow more game balls 99 to enter the special out ball opening 373 of the clone device 37, and the hurdle is high until a non-set value (set value) is specified. Therefore, there is an advantage for game halls that players cannot easily know the set values. On the other hand, the player has the advantage of being able to specify or estimate the set value. In addition, it is possible to specify or infer the set value by winning a jackpot lottery, and the accuracy of guessing the set value increases with the continuation of certain jackpots (jackpot success), and in some cases, the set value may increase. It is possible to provide the gaming machine 10 with a playability that allows it to be recognized. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game while meeting the wishes of both the game hall and the players.

Furthermore, when a jackpot game is started, unless there are special circumstances, the game is ended in the middle of the jackpot game, and if the game is in a high probability mode, the game is not ended during the high probability mode. Therefore, since the predetermined period is the period from the start of the jackpot game for the first win to the end of the opening/closing execution mode for the normal jackpot, the player is prevented from ending the game before the predetermined period ends. As a result, even if a player plays a game who does not know the timing (the end of a predetermined period) when a non-set value (set value) can be specified or estimated, the non-set value (set value) can be specified or estimated. This prevents the game from ending just before it becomes possible to guess. Therefore, even a player who does not know the timing at which the non-set value (set value) can be specified or estimated can guess or recognize the non-set value (set value). In addition, it is possible to eliminate the so-called hyena behavior of other players who play games at a timing when a non-set value (set value) can be specified or estimated.

In addition, since the start of the predetermined period is the start of a jackpot game triggered by a jackpot win in the first low probability mode, the non-set value (set value) can be specified or estimated at least once. Not only is it a condition to win the jackpot, but even if the predetermined period has started, the hurdle to identifying the non-set value (set value) is high as described above, so the non-set value (set value) A considerable number of game balls 99 are fired onto the game board 31 until the player guesses or specifies the number to a certain extent, and receives a considerable number of jackpot drawings. Therefore, at the stage where the set value can be estimated or specified with high accuracy, there is a high possibility that the stage has been reached where the unit jackpot lottery number (easiness of receiving the jackpot lottery) can also be sufficiently determined. As a result, if the player can guess or specify the non-set value (set value) with high accuracy, the player can check the gaming machine 10 while playing, including not only the non-set value (set value) but also the number of unit jackpot drawings. Since it is possible to judge the ball output performance of the game, it is possible to judge whether to continue playing the game. For example, even if the set value is low, if the number of unit jackpot lottery numbers is large, it is possible to make a comprehensive consideration and decide to continue the game. On the other hand, even if the set value is high, if the number of unit jackpot lottery is small, it is possible to make a comprehensive consideration and decide to give up on continuing the game.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine 10, information for specifying or estimating the non-setting value is displayed on the 7-segment display section 39, and the display history for a predetermined period on the 7-segment display section 39 indicates the symbol at the ending of the jackpot game. It is displayed on the display section 341. Therefore, at the ending of each jackpot game, the player can check the information regarding the non-set values displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 up to the jackpot game. As a result, if you do not know that information related to non-set values will be displayed on the 7-segment display section 39, when you miss the display content on the 7-segment display section 39, or when the past 7-segment display section in the predetermined period Even if the user forgets the content displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39, the user can recognize the content displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 again. Therefore, for each jackpot game, the player identifies or guesses the non-set value at the ending based on the additional image showing the display history on the 7-segment display section 39, recognizes or guesses the set value, and proceeds with the game. You can enjoy it.

In addition, in this embodiment, the display history for a predetermined period on the 7 segment display section 39 is displayed on the symbol display section 341 at the ending of the jackpot game, but the display history for the predetermined period on the 7 segment display section 39 is It may be displayed on a display section such as the symbol display section 341 after the end of the jackpot game in which the end of the predetermined period is set. In other words, the display history for a predetermined period may be displayed in a special period other than the specified period. For example, in a standby state in which neither a variable game nor a jackpot game is being executed, when a player performs a predetermined operation on the gaming machine 10, the display history for a predetermined period on the 7-segment display section 39 is displayed on a display section such as the symbol display section 341. It is conceivable to display the following. In this way, by displaying the display history for a predetermined period in the 7-segment display section 39 on the symbol display section 341 etc. after the end of the jackpot game in which the end of the predetermined period is set, the past 7-segment display This makes it possible to check the contents displayed in the section 39 in case you have forgotten them. This makes it possible to specify or estimate the non-setting value based on the past display content on the 7-segment display section 39. Note that displaying the display history on the symbol display section 341 or the like in the standby state will be described in detail in the fourth embodiment described later.

In this way, if the display history can be displayed on the symbol display section 341 or the like in the standby state, it becomes possible to check the past display contents on the 7-segment display section 39 if you have forgotten them. There are advantages. On the other hand, if the display history can be displayed on the symbol display section 341 or the like in a standby state, anyone can check the display history by performing a predetermined operation on an empty gaming machine 10. I can do it. In other words, it becomes possible to specify or infer a non-set value (set value) by taking advantage of the benefits obtained by others, allowing so-called hyena behavior. On the other hand, in this embodiment, it is not allowed to check the display history for a predetermined period on the 7-segment display section 39 after the end of the jackpot game where the end of the predetermined period is set. In other words, specific information indicating a non-set value including display history in a predetermined period is restricted from being displayed outside the specified period. Therefore, in this embodiment, it is possible to eliminate the hyena act of identifying or estimating a non-set value (set value) by taking advantage of the benefits obtained by others.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the first hit is a variable probability jackpot, a predetermined period is set from the start of the first jackpot game to the normal jackpot game for the normal jackpot in the high probability mode. One predetermined period may be set for each jackpot regardless of the jackpot type. That is, a predetermined period may be set for each jackpot game, regardless of whether it is a first win or a consecutive win. In this case, the predetermined period starts when the jackpot game or opening/closing execution mode starts, and ends when the jackpot game or opening/closing execution mode ends.

In addition, in this embodiment, numbers corresponding to non-setting values are displayed on the 7-segment display section 39, instead of or in addition to displaying numbers corresponding to non-setting values, the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is displayed as a jackpot. In this case, the non-set value is clearly displayed in the first special symbol display section 362 or the second special symbol display section 363 by displaying numbers or alphabets corresponding to the non-set value, and in the symbol display section 341 to clearly indicate the non-set value. A reach effect may also be executed. As a non-set value explicit reach effect, when the lottery result in a jackpot lottery is a jackpot, it is conceivable to stop displaying a decorative pattern at the solo number corresponding to the non-set value, for example. In this way, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the number corresponding to the non-set value is displayed on the first special symbol display section 362 or the second special symbol display section 363, and the non-set value is displayed on the symbol display section 341. By executing the non-set value explicit reach performance that clearly indicates the set value, the player can not only check whether the lottery result in the jackpot lottery in the variable game is a jackpot, but also the first special symbol display section 362 in the variable game. Alternatively, it is possible to enjoy a variable game by paying attention to the numbers etc. that are stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display section 363 and paying attention to the combination of decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed on the symbol display section 341. In addition, when a non-set value explicit reach effect is executed as one of the reach effects, in the reach of the decorative pattern of the number corresponding to the set value, the number will not be aligned as a zero and will be stopped and displayed as a miss. It is also possible. For example, if the setting value is 1, the decorative pattern can be stopped and displayed at "222", "333", "444", "555", and "666", but it cannot be stopped and displayed at "111", and the decorative pattern If is 1, the reach will always be off. In this way, by not displaying the zero of the number corresponding to the set value, it is normally desirable for the decorative pattern to be stopped and displayed at the solo number. Since it is desirable that the solo eye not be displayed in a stopped state, it becomes possible to enjoy the reach effect from a different perspective than before.

In addition, the display of numbers corresponding to the non-set value on the first special symbol display section 362 or the second special symbol display section 363, or the non-set value clear reach effect can be executed only at a specific timing. can also be considered. In this way, by displaying numbers corresponding to the non-set value on the first special symbol display section 362 or the second special symbol display section 363, or by performing the non-set value explicit reach effect, limited to a specific timing, It is possible to enjoy the game by paying attention to the variable game executed at a specific timing.

As a specific timing, for example, in a variable game executed in a variable probability game state or a time-saving game state, the first special symbol display section 362 or the second special symbol display section 363, and the symbol display section 341 display the lottery result of the jackpot lottery. The timing to notify that the player has won the jackpot can be considered. In this way, by specifying or suggesting a non-set value in a variable game in a fixed variable gaming state or a time-saving gaming state, the high-frequency support mode allows the reservation to be used at a high speed, and the fixed variable gaming state or time-saving gaming state that tends to become monotonous can be avoided. You can enjoy variable games. Further, the specific timing may be set when the number of variable games to be executed after shifting to the variable probability gaming state or the time saving gaming state is within a predetermined number of times range. For example, the predetermined number of times range is set when the number of variable games to be executed after transitioning to the fixed variable gaming state is small (for example, 1 to 10 times) or large (for example, 100 or more, 150 or more, 200 or more, etc.). ). That is, the non-set value may be specified or suggested when a jackpot occurs early after the transition to the variable probability gaming state, or when the player is addicted to the game with a large number of variable games played until the jackpot occurs. In this case, the non-set value is specified or suggested as a benefit for a big hit early after the end of the jackpot game, or as a relief for getting hooked. In addition, the predetermined number of times range is set when the number of variable games to be executed after transitioning to the time-saving gaming state is small (for example, 1 to 10 times), or just before the end of the time-saving gaming state (for example, 90 to 100 times). It is possible to set it. In this case, a non-set value is specified or suggested as a benefit for a jackpot early after the end of the jackpot game or a jackpot just before the end of the time saving.

[Other embodiments]
Other embodiments of the gaming machine 10 according to the present invention will be described below. Furthermore, in other embodiments described below, descriptions of the same configuration and steps as the processing procedure as those of the gaming machine 10 described in the above-described first embodiment will be omitted. Note that it is also possible to select and combine the configurations and processing functions of the first embodiment described above and other embodiments described below.

[Second embodiment]
In the first embodiment described above, for each jackpot game executed in a predetermined period (period from the start of the jackpot game for the first jackpot in the low probability mode to the end of the opening/closing execution mode in the normal jackpot game for the normal jackpot) A specific period (period from the start of the jackpot game to the end of the opening/closing execution mode) is set, and the number of game balls 99 that enters the special out ball opening 373 of the croon device 37 within the specific period when a specific condition is satisfied In the ending of the jackpot game in which the specific period is set, all or part of the specific information (numbers) corresponding to each of the plurality of non-set values (set values) is displayed on the 7-segment display section 39. We have explained the case presented in

By the way, as in the first embodiment described above, when a specific period is set for each jackpot game executed in a predetermined period, a plurality of specific periods corresponding to the number of consecutive jackpot games are set for each jackpot game. Set within the period. Therefore, in the jackpot series, all or part of the specific information corresponding to the non-set value (set value) is presented on the 7-segment display section 39 for each ending of the jackpot game. That is, in the jackpot series, all or part of the specific information is presented in multiple parts. However, if all or part of the specific information is presented on the 7-segment display section 39 for each ending of the jackpot game, that is, if all or part of the specific information is presented in multiple parts, the If the specific information presented at the ending of the jackpot game that is executed first is not memorized or recorded, it is not possible to specify the non-set value (set value) based on the specific information presented at the ending of the jackpot game that is executed first. It becomes difficult. That is, if the specific information presented in the past on the 7-segment display section 39 is not accurately stored or recorded, it is difficult to effectively specify or estimate the non-set value (set value). Therefore, in order to effectively identify or estimate the non-set value (set value), it is a hassle to accurately memorize or record the specific information presented on the 7-segment display section 39 in the past. It is also conceivable that the player may give up specifying or estimating the non-set value (set value). In this case, the significance of improving the interest of the game by being able to specify or estimate the non-set value (set value) is lost.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, a specific period is not set in the predetermined period as in the first embodiment, and one predetermined period is set based on the number of specific conditions that are satisfied in the predetermined period. Specific information for specifying or estimating the non-setting value (setting value) is presented only once. In this way, in this embodiment, specific information for specifying or estimating a non-set value (set value) is provided only once per predetermined period based on the number of specific conditions that are satisfied in a predetermined period. is presented. Therefore, in this embodiment, the inconvenience caused when specific information is presented multiple times in a predetermined period as in the first embodiment described above is resolved. That is, in this embodiment, specific information is presented only once after the end of one predetermined period, so there is no specific information that has been presented in the past during the predetermined period, and the player There is no specific information to remember or record. This allows the player to identify or infer the non-set value (set value) by focusing on specific information that is presented only once per predetermined period. This eliminates the hassle of having to accurately memorize or record specified information. Therefore, by being able to easily and effectively identify or guess the non-set value (set value), the player can enjoy the game while identifying or guessing the non-set value (set value), so that the player can enjoy the game while identifying or guessing the non-set value (set value). Interest will be improved.

In an example of the present embodiment, similarly to the first embodiment described above, the predetermined period is a period from the start of the jackpot game for a jackpot in the low probability mode to the end of the opening/closing execution mode of the normal jackpot game for a normal jackpot. A specific condition is that the game ball enters the special out ball opening of the Kroon device. Further, in an example of the present embodiment, specific information is displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 as in the first embodiment described above, but the display timing (regular period) of the specific information is one predetermined period. On the other hand, this is only the ending (after the end of the predetermined period) in the 5R normal jackpot game where the end of the predetermined period is set. That is, the specific information is presented on the 7-segment display section 39 only once after the end of the predetermined period. Therefore, in this embodiment, some steps of the setting value suggestion process, the 7-segment display unit control process, and the ending added image control process are different from the above-described first embodiment.

Here, FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the setting value suggestion process executed by the audio lamp control device 5 of the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the setting value suggestion process executed in the setting value suggestion process of FIG. FIG. 50 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure for a 7-segment display unit control process to be performed, and FIG. 50 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure for an ending added image control process executed in the setting value suggestion process of FIG. The present embodiment will be described below with reference to FIGS. 48 to 50, focusing on the differences from the above-described first embodiment.

[Setting value suggestion processing]
As shown in FIG. 48, in the setting value suggestion process in this embodiment, when the ending of the jackpot game is started (step S2201: Yes), the setting value suggestion process in the first embodiment described above (FIG. ), on the condition that the jackpot game is a 5R normal jackpot game in which the end of a predetermined period is set (step S2501: Yes), the game ball that entered the special out ball opening 373 of the croon device 37 Controlling the vertical movement of the stopper section 383 of the game ball retention section 38 that accepts the game ball 99, and counting the number of game balls 99 retained in the game ball retention section 38 in a predetermined period are executed (steps S2202 to S2213). . As a result, in this embodiment, in the 5R normal jackpot where the end of the predetermined period is set when the predetermined period ends, the game ball 99 that entered the special out ball opening 373 of the croon device 37 during the predetermined period are counted in one go.

In addition, in the setting value suggestion process of this embodiment, on the condition that it is a 5R normal jackpot game (step S2501: Yes), the vertical movement of the stopper section 383 of the game ball retention section 38 is controlled, and the game ball retention for a predetermined period of time. By executing the process of counting the number of game balls 99 retained in the section 38 (steps S2202 to S2213), the 7-segment display section control process (step S2502) and the ending additional image control process (step S2503) are also performed. , based on the stopper lowering flag that is set on the condition that it is a 5R normal jackpot game in which the end of the predetermined period is set (step S2203), and executed on the condition that it is a 5R normal jackpot game (step S2203). S2501: Yes).

[7-segment display control processing]
The 7-segment display control process in this embodiment is executed when the ending starts in the 5R normal jackpot game (when the opening/closing execution mode (predetermined period) ends) as described above. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 49, the 7-segment display control process in this embodiment is basically the same as the 7-segment display control process (see FIG. 41) in the first embodiment described above. When the value of the special out ball counter is 1 or more (step S2302: Yes), instead of reading out the control order and already displayed information (see FIG. 42) of the 7-segment display control information, the 7-segment display control is performed. Only the control order of information is read out (step S2504). That is, in the 7-segment display unit control process of this embodiment, the 7-segment display unit is activated only at the ending of the 5R normal jackpot (after the end of the predetermined period) in which the end of the predetermined period is set for one predetermined period. 39 is controlled (presentation of specific information), there is no need to read out the already displayed information and control the 7-segment display section 39.

[Ending added image control processing]
As shown in FIG. 50, the ending-added image control process in this embodiment is basically the same as the ending-added image control process in the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 46), but Step S2404, which performs the ending additional image control process in the embodiment, is omitted. That is, since the ending addition image control process of this embodiment is executed in response to the 5R normal jackpot (Yes in step S2501 of the setting value suggestion process in FIG. 48), the process is executed until it is determined that the 5R normal jackpot is the case. In step S2405, the already displayed information storage area is initialized.

As described above, in this embodiment, based on the number of specific conditions satisfied in a predetermined period, specific information (numerical ) may be presented in whole or in part. Therefore, there is no specific information presented in the past during the predetermined period, and there is no specific information that the player should memorize or record. This allows the player to identify or infer the non-set value (set value) by focusing on specific information that is presented only once per predetermined period. This eliminates the trouble of having to accurately memorize or record specified information. Therefore, by being able to easily and effectively identify or guess the non-set value (set value), the player can enjoy the game while identifying or guessing the non-set value (set value), so that the player can enjoy the game while identifying or guessing the non-set value (set value). Interest will be improved.

Note that in this embodiment, the same design changes as those in the first embodiment described above can be made within an applicable range.

[Third embodiment]
In the first embodiment described above, a plurality of non-set values (set values) are specified or estimated after a specific period has elapsed (ending of a jackpot game) based on the number of times when a specific condition is satisfied during a specific period. A case has been described in which all or part of the specific information (numbers) for the 7-segment display section 39 is presented. Further, in the first embodiment described above, in the 7-segment display section 39, the numbers corresponding to non-set values as specific information are displayed in the number display order determined when the gaming machine 10 is powered on or when the set value is changed. (See FIG. 36). Furthermore, in the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the order in which numbers are displayed on the seven-segment display section 39 is fixed.

By the way, in the first embodiment described above, a plurality of numbers corresponding to a plurality of non-set values as specific information are displayed in the number display order determined when the gaming machine 10 is powered on or when the set value is changed (see FIG. ), the numbers will be displayed in the same order unless the gaming machine 10 is turned off or the settings are changed. The control order of segments A to G is fixed. Therefore, if the number of specific conditions satisfied in a predetermined period is smaller than the number of specific conditions satisfied in the preceding predetermined period, only a smaller amount of information can be obtained than the specific information already presented, Unable to obtain new specific information. As a result, if it is expected that the number of specific conditions to be met in a predetermined number of times is small, such as in a jackpot game for a single jackpot, it is possible to determine whether or not the specific conditions will be met in a specific period, and the specific conditions to be met. There is concern that interest in specific information presented after a specific period of time may decline.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the order in which specific information is presented (number display order and segment display order) is determined (changed). In this way, by determining the order in which specific information is presented when a predetermined condition is met, the number of specific conditions that are met in the predetermined period is greater than the number of specific conditions that are met in the preceding predetermined period. Even if there is little information, new specific information may be obtained. Therefore, even if it is expected that the number of specific conditions to be met in a predetermined number of times is small, such as in a jackpot game for a single jackpot, it is difficult to determine whether or not the specific conditions are met in a specific period. It is possible to make the user interested in the number of specific conditions, and it is also possible to make the user interested in specific information that is presented after a specific period of time has elapsed. This makes it possible to more effectively improve the interest of gaming by presenting specific information that allows you to specify or infer non-set values (set values) depending on the number of times a specific condition is met. Become.

Predetermined conditions for determining (changing) the order in which specific information is presented include, for example, winning a jackpot, starting the opening of a jackpot game, opening/closing execution mode, or ending of a jackpot game. is possible. By setting the predetermined conditions in this manner, the presentation order of specific information is determined (changed) each time a jackpot game is executed. Therefore, since the presentation order of specific information is prevented from being fixed, it is possible to prevent the same specific information from being repeatedly presented and the presentation of specific information from becoming monotonous. As a result, it is expected that new information will be obtained as specific information each time a jackpot game is executed. Thereby, for example, it is possible to make the player interested in the presentation order of specific information in a jackpot game, so it is possible to increase interest in the jackpot game.

In addition, the predetermined conditions include winning a specific jackpot (for example, a certain variable jackpot, normal jackpot, or jackpot in a low probability mode), and winning a specific jackpot game (for example, a certain variable jackpot, a normal jackpot, or a jackpot in a low probability mode). It is conceivable that the opening of a jackpot game for a jackpot, the opening/closing execution mode, or the ending of a jackpot game is started. By setting the predetermined conditions in this way, the number of times the specific information presentation order is determined (changed) is reduced compared to the case where the predetermined conditions are not limited to a specific jackpot or jackpot game. Therefore, by reducing the possibility that new information will be presented in comparison to the specific information presented previously, the difficulty in identifying all non-setting values (identifying setting values) will increase. , it is possible to prevent all non-setting values from being identified (setting values being identified) at an early stage. This can prevent a player from prematurely ending a game on the gaming machine 10 when the set value is low, for example.

Furthermore, the predetermined condition may include the start or end of a predetermined period or a specific period. By setting the predetermined conditions in this manner, the presentation order of specific information is determined (changed) for each predetermined period or for each specific period. Therefore, it is expected that new information can be obtained as specific information every predetermined period or every specific period. This makes it possible to make the player interested in the presentation order of the specific information, thereby making it possible to increase interest in the game.

Further, as the predetermined condition, it is also conceivable that a specific performance is determined or executed as a variable game performance. The specific performance in this case may be set to either a non-reach performance or a reach performance, for example. Typically, the specific performance is a premium performance in which a jackpot or a variable jackpot among variable game performances is determined. Furthermore, as a specific performance, it is also possible that decorative symbols are displayed in a specific combination in the symbol display section 341 in a stopped state or a temporary stopped state (intermediate stopped state). For example, when a decorative symbol is stopped and displayed at "777" in the symbol display section 341, when it is stopped and displayed at a specific out-of-reach mark such as "767", when it is stopped and displayed at a specific out-of-reach mark such as "367" In addition to cases where the display is stopped at the (break-up) mark, when a development performance such as a super reach performance or special reach performance is executed as a reach performance, a temporary stop display (intermediate stop) that clearly indicates that the development performance will be executed. ) may be considered. As a temporary stop display (intermediate stop display) that clearly indicates that the development effect will be executed, for example, "7 development 7", the left and right decorative symbols are displayed temporarily in a reach state (intermediate stop display), It is conceivable that a symbol indicating that a development effect such as "development" will be executed may be temporarily stopped and displayed. Even when predetermined conditions are set in this way, the presentation order of specific information is determined (changed) for each predetermined period or for each specific period. Therefore, it is expected that new information can be obtained as specific information every predetermined period or every specific period. This makes it possible to make the player interested in the presentation order of the specific information, thereby making it possible to increase interest in the game.

Furthermore, the predetermined conditions may include a single jackpot occurring multiple times in a row, or the same specific information being presented in the same order multiple times in a row. By setting the predetermined conditions in this manner, the presentation order of specific information is determined (changed) when it is difficult to obtain new information as specific information. Therefore, it becomes easier to obtain new information as specific information, so it is possible to reduce the feeling of boredom when new specific information cannot be obtained, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

Note that if a predetermined condition is satisfied before the predetermined period starts, for example, the presentation order of specific information determined (changed) may be given priority to the predetermined condition that is met first, or Priority may be given to the presentation order of specific information that is determined (changed) based on a predetermined condition that is satisfied.

In an example of the present embodiment, multiple non-settings are set as specific information on the condition that a jackpot game for a jackpot in the low probability mode is started (a predetermined period is started, the first jackpot game is started). The display order of the numbers corresponding to each value and the segment display order when displaying each number are determined, and the end of the predetermined period is set according to these display orders. (after the elapse of time), all or part of the numbers for specifying the plurality of non-setting values are displayed on the 7-segment display section 39.

Here, FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the display order setting process executed by the audio lamp control device 5 of the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 52 is the procedure of the display order setting process of FIG. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing an example of a table referenced in FIG. The present embodiment will be described below with reference to FIGS. 51 and 52, focusing on the display order setting process, which is the difference from the first embodiment described above.

[Display order setting process]
<Step S2601>
As shown in FIG. 51, in the display order setting process in this embodiment, the MPU 51 determines whether the jackpot game performance start flag is set to on (step S2601). The jackpot game performance start flag is a flag indicating that the jackpot game performance is started, and is set to ON in step S2108 of the command determination process in FIG. 37. Then, when the jackpot game performance start flag is on (step S2601: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S2602, and when the jackpot game performance start flag is off (step S2601: No), the display order Finish the setting process.

<Step S2602>
If the jackpot game performance start flag is on (step S2601: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether the jackpot that triggered the start of the jackpot game performance is a low probability mode jackpot (step S2602 ). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether the jackpot is the first win and the predetermined period is started. Whether or not it is a low probability mode jackpot is determined by whether, for example, when a jackpot game is started, the jackpot that triggered the start of the jackpot game is a low probability mode jackpot or a high probability mode jackpot. In addition, when the jackpot game start command includes the probability mode information indicating the jackpot game start command, and the jackpot game start command is transmitted from the main control device 4 to the audio lamp control device 5, the probability mode information indicating the probability mode information is included in the command determination process of FIG. This can be determined by setting a flag indicating a jackpot in the low probability mode on or off, and checking the flag with the MPU 51. Note that the probability mode information may be set as a separate command from the jackpot game start command.

Then, when the jackpot is in the low probability mode (step S2602: Yes), that is, when the jackpot is the first jackpot (jackpot at the beginning of a predetermined period), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S2603. On the other hand, if it is not a jackpot in the low probability mode (step S2602: No), that is, if it is a jackpot in the high probability mode (step S2602: No), the MPU 51 ends the display order setting process.

<Steps S2603 to S2605>
If it is a jackpot in the low probability mode (step S2602: Yes), the MPU 51 acquires the setting value from the RAM 512 (step S2603), and further changes the display order of the numbers corresponding to the plurality of non-setting values on the 7-segment display section 39. is determined (step S2604), and the control order of segments A to G for each number is set (step S2605), and the display order setting process ends.

Here, the display order of the numbers corresponding to the plurality of non-set values on the 7-segment display section 39 is as shown in FIG. It is determined based on the number display order determination table shown in . Further, the determined display order of numbers is stored in the RAM 512.

Furthermore, the control order of segments A to G for each number is determined based on the control order determination table for segments A to G of the 7-segment display section 39 shown in FIG. In this control order determination table, a plurality of control orders for segments A to G are defined according to the value of the control order type counter updated in step S2001 of the sub-timer interrupt processing in FIG. 35, and each control order is determined. The probabilities are set to be the same. Then, the control order of segments A to G is determined from a plurality of control orders to the same order for each number, depending on the value of the control order type counter when the control order of segments A to G for each number is set. Ru. Further, the determined control order of segments A to G is stored in the RAM 512.

In this embodiment, when displaying numbers corresponding to non-set values on the 7-segment display section 39, segments A to G are controlled in the same order for all numbers, but the control order of each number is may be different. That is, the control order of segments A to G may be determined individually for each of a plurality of numbers corresponding to non-set values.

As described above, in this embodiment, the order in which numbers corresponding to non-set values are displayed on the seven-segment display section 39 is determined every predetermined period. This determines the order in which specific information is presented when a predetermined condition is met, so that the number of specific conditions satisfied in the predetermined period is greater than the number of specific conditions satisfied in the preceding predetermined period. Even if the amount is small, new specific information may be obtained. Therefore, even if it is expected that the number of specific conditions to be met in a predetermined number of times is small, such as in a jackpot game for a single jackpot, it is difficult to determine whether or not the specific conditions are met in a specific period. It is possible to make the user interested in the number of specific conditions, and it is also possible to make the user interested in specific information that is presented after a specific period of time has elapsed. This makes it possible to more effectively improve the interest of the game by presenting specific information according to the number of times when a specific condition that allows the non-set value (set value) to be specified or inferred is met. .

Note that in this embodiment, the same design changes as those in the first and second embodiments described above can be made within an applicable range.

[Fourth embodiment]
In the first embodiment described above, based on the number of times when a specific condition is satisfied in a specific period, specific information (numbers) corresponding to a plurality of non-set values are displayed after the specific period has elapsed (ending of the jackpot game). The case has been described in which all or part of the specific information is presented on the 7-segment display section 39, and the presentation of the specific information on the 7-segment display section 39 is terminated with the end of the jackpot game. That is, in the first embodiment described above, all or part of the specific information is displayed during a predetermined period (after a specific period has elapsed).

By the way, if a player misses or forgets to present specific information during a specified period, he or she may use specific It is assumed that the applicant wishes to reconfirm the information. Further, when a player is replaced, it is assumed that the replaced player wishes to confirm specific information that was displayed in the past. However, when the specific information is presented during the specified period, the specific information cannot be reconfirmed because it is not presented outside the specified period.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, all or part of the specific information presented in the past can be presented during a special period other than the specified period. In this way, by being able to present specific information that was presented in the past during a special period other than the specified period, the player is able to confirm specific information that was presented in the past during the special period. In other words, if a player misses or forgets to present specific information during a specified period, the player can reconfirm the specific information that was displayed in the past, and if the player is replaced, the player can check the specific information displayed after the player is replaced. The player can confirm specific information presented to past players. This allows players to identify or infer multiple non-setting values (setting values) by taking into account specific information presented to past players. Convenience for specifying or estimating is improved.

Here, the special period includes, for example, a period of a standby state (customer waiting state) in which neither a variable game nor a jackpot game is executed. Since the special period is a standby period in this way, it becomes possible to check specific information presented in the past while no game is being played. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the visual recognition of various performances executed on the symbol display section 341 and the like as the game progresses, such as variable game performances and jackpot game performances, from being obstructed.

In addition, if it is possible to present all or part of the specific information that was presented in the past during the standby state, predetermined input operations such as password input operations and command input operations may be performed on specific display screens that can be moved to during the standby state. It is also conceivable to make it a condition that the operation be performed. The password or command may be made available by displaying it on the symbol display section 341 at the end of a jackpot game in which the end of a predetermined period is set. In addition, passwords and commands can be entered externally by displaying a matrix type two-dimensional code on the symbol display section 341 in the jackpot game, and reading this matrix type two-dimensional code using a mobile terminal such as a smartphone or mobile phone. It may also be possible to enter through so-called mobile linkage, which is transmitted from the server to the mobile terminal.

In this way, by making it possible to present all or part of the specific information that was presented in the past during the standby state, on the condition that a predetermined input operation such as a password input operation or a command input operation is performed, Only players who can enter passwords, commands, etc., that is, only players who have been presented with all or part of the specific information, can confirm all or part of the specific information that has been presented in the past during the standby period. becomes possible. This makes it possible to eliminate so-called hyena behavior and free riding in which all or part of past specific information is confirmed by other players.

In addition, by using a mobile terminal such as a smartphone or mobile phone to read a matrix-type two-dimensional code on a specific display screen that can be moved to in the standby state, all or part of the specific information previously presented on the mobile terminal can be read. It is also conceivable to have the information presented.

Further, the special period may be set during the jackpot game, for example, during the opening, during the opening/closing execution mode, or during the ending. By setting the special period during the jackpot game in this way, past specific information is presented in a state where the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is not clearly indicated or suggested. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the display or suggestion of the result of the jackpot lottery from being obstructed by the presentation of specific information. In addition, since jackpot games are executed after the variable game clearly indicates that the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, player interest tends to decrease; By presenting the specific information, interest in the jackpot game is increased.

Moreover, it is also possible to set the special period during a variable game. Here, in the total time during which the game is executed (the time when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on minus the standby time), as a theoretical value, compared to the execution time of the jackpot variable game, the variable game has a longer execution time. Therefore, by making it possible to present past specific information during a variable game, it becomes possible to set many timings at which past specific information can be presented. However, when setting a special period during a variable game, for a certain period before the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, for example, during a non-reach state where a reach effect is not being executed as a variable game effect, or when the variable time is short, It is preferable to limit the presentation of specific information. Thereby, it is possible to prevent visual recognition of the lottery result clearly or suggested in the jackpot lottery from being obstructed by the static display of the decorative symbols.

Furthermore, presentation of past specific information during the special period may be performed at a timing determined by the gaming machine 10, or may be performed at the player's will.

If the past specific information is presented at a timing determined by the gaming machine 10, it becomes possible to have the past specific information presented at a timing that the player does not expect. Therefore, it is possible to provide the gaming machine 10 with unexpected gameplay. Furthermore, since past specific information is presented at a timing determined by the gaming machine 10 without the player performing any operations on the gaming machine 10, even if the player has little knowledge about the gaming machine 10, , it becomes possible to know specific information presented in the past. This ensures fairness among players.

Examples of cases in which past specific information is presented at a timing determined by the gaming machine 10 include, for example, presenting specific information that has been presented in the past as a demonstration screen in a standby state; When a specific reach effect is scheduled to be executed in a certain percentage (including 100%), specific information that was presented in the past before the said reach effect is executed, variable games, etc. For example, it may be decided to present specific information that has been presented in the past through a lottery executed at a specific timing of a jackpot game. When specific information that has been presented in the past is presented as a demonstration screen in the standby state, the player takes into account the past specific information that is presented on the demonstration screen and selects the game machine to play from an empty machine. 10 can be selected, the degree of freedom and convenience when selecting the gaming machine 10 on which to play the game are improved. In addition, if a specific reach effect is scheduled to be executed in a variable game and specific information that was presented in the past before the said reach effect is presented, the presentation of the past specific information is Since it plays a role as a advance notification performance for the execution of a specific reach performance, the interest in variable games is improved. In addition, the presentation of past specific information in variable games may be used to suggest expectations (reliability) in the event that the lottery result in a jackpot lottery is a jackpot (including a confirmation display that indicates a jackpot) or It is also possible to perform this as a chance-up effect to improve expectations (trust). In this case as well, the interest in the variable game is improved. In addition, when specific information presented in the past is presented by a lottery executed at a specific timing of a variable game or a jackpot game, the past specific information is presented at a random specific timing determined by the gaming machine 10. Therefore, it is possible to particularly add surprise to the game. In addition, if the player can know the specific timing at which specific information is presented, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by focusing on whether the specific information is presented at the specific timing, which increases the interest of the game. is improved.

On the other hand, if the presentation of past specific information in a special period is executed by the player's will, the special If it is a period, the player can actively check past specific information at a timing of his/her own preference. Therefore, when specifying or estimating multiple non-setting values (setting values) in consideration of past specific information, the timing of presenting the past specific information is not limited by the gaming machine 10 and reflects one's own intention. This improves convenience.

Here, as an example of presentation of past specific information in a special period according to the player's will, the player presses the operation button 2 during a special period set during a standby state, during a variable game, or during a jackpot game. For example, specific information that has been presented in the past may be presented when a predetermined operation is performed.

In an example of the present embodiment, all or part of the specific information (numbers) corresponding to a plurality of non-setting values displayed by the 7-segment display section 39 at the ending (regular period) of the jackpot game is displayed, and the waiting state is During the period (special period), by performing a predetermined operation on the operation button 20 or selection deciding section 21, all or part of the specific information (numbers) displayed at the ending of the last three jackpot games can be changed. It is displayed on the symbol display section 341. In addition, in an example of this embodiment, it is possible to display all or part of the specific information previously displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 on the pattern display section 341 without performing an input operation such as a password or a command. It is.

The present embodiment will be described below with reference to FIGS. 53 to 63, focusing on the differences from the above-described first embodiment.

Here, FIG. 53 is a perspective view showing an example of the configuration of the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment, and FIG. 54 is a block diagram showing an example of the system configuration of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 53.

As shown in FIG. 53, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment further includes a selection determining section 21 provided on the front frame 11.

The selection determining section 21 is operated by the player, and is a push button that accepts a push operation by the player in a standby state, which will be described later, and shifts the display screen (see FIG. 60) on the symbol display section 341. The selection deciding section 21 includes a plurality of selection buttons 21A and a decision button 21B.

The plurality of selection buttons 21A are operated by the player to provisionally select a desired item from the options (items) on various screens such as the top menu screen in the standby state screen transition process shown in FIGS. 61 and 62, which will be described later. (see FIG. 60), and includes an upper selection button 211, a lower selection button 212, a left selection button 213, and a right selection button 214. Here, provisional selection means a state in which the provisionally selected content is determined (stored in the RAM 512) by operating the determination button 21B. Each of these selection buttons 211 to 214 is an upper selection operation switch 211a, a lower selection operation switch 211b, a left selection operation switch 211c, and a right selection operation switch, which switch the input signal to the audio lamp control device 5, as shown in FIG. 211d. These switches 211a to 211d are connected to the input/output I/F of the audio lamp control device 5. Therefore, the audio lamp control device 5 can determine whether or not each of the selection buttons 211 to 214 has been operated based on the input signals of each of the switches 211a to 211d.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when it is detected that an operation on each of the selection buttons 211 to 214 has started, it is determined that each of the selection buttons 211 to 214 has been operated. Of course, it may be determined that the operation on each of the selection buttons 211 to 214 has been performed when it is detected that the operation on each of the selection buttons 211 to 214 continues or has been completed. .

On the other hand, the decision button 21B is operated by the player to decide the provisionally selected item. Further, the decision button 21B includes a decision operation switch 21Ba that switches an input signal to the audio lamp control device 5, which will be described later. The decision operation switch 21Ba is connected to the input/output I/F of the audio lamp control device 5. Therefore, the audio lamp control device 5 can determine whether or not the decision operation switch 21Ba has been operated based on the input signal of the decision operation switch 21Ba.

Furthermore, instead of the plurality of selection buttons 21A (211 to 214) and the decision button 21B, a touch panel that displays touch keys and receives operations by the player on the touch keys may be provided as the operation means. Furthermore, instead of the plurality of selection buttons 21A (211 to 214) and decision button 21B, it is also possible to provide a translucent touch panel on the front side of the symbol display section 341 to receive operations from the player. It is also conceivable to provide a jog dial instead of the plurality of selection buttons 21A (211-214). Further, the selection switches 211a to 211d and the decision operation switch 21Ba are contact type switches, but may also be piezoelectric elements, for example, as long as they can be used to detect the presence or absence of an operation by a player. .

Here, FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the sub-timer interrupt process executed by the audio lamp control device 5 of the gaming machine 10 shown in FIG. 53.

As shown in FIG. 55, in the sub-timer interrupt processing of this embodiment, in addition to the same processing (steps S2000 to S2005) as the sub-timer interrupt processing of the first embodiment described above, operation detection processing ( Step S2701) and standby state screen transition processing (step S2702) are executed.

[Operation detection processing]
The operation detection process is a process for detecting whether or not the various buttons 20, 21A, and 21B have been operated. Here, FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the operation detection process executed in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. 55.

As shown in FIG. 56, in the operation detection process, the MPU 41 performs operation button operation detection processing (step S2801), operation detection pattern determination processing (step S2802), selection button operation detection processing (step S2803), selection operation detection pattern determination Processing (step S2804), determination button operation detection processing (step S2805), and determination operation detection pattern determination processing (step S2806) are executed.

[Operation button operation detection processing]
In the operation button operation detection process (step S2201 of the operation detection process), the operation state of the operation button 20 is detected, and a process for sequentially updating the operation history of the past three times is executed. In the gaming machine 10, the MPU 41 executes the operation button operation detection process, so that the operation button 20 is operated at predetermined intervals (1 msec intervals in this embodiment) corresponding to the interrupt cycle of the sub-timer interrupt process. It will be determined whether or not there is. Here, FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the operation button operation detection process. The operation button operation detection process will be described below with reference to FIG.

<Steps S2901 to S2903>
As shown in FIG. 57, in step S2901, the MPU 41 shifts (overwrites) the setting of the second detection flag to the first detection flag. Furthermore, in step S2902, the MPU 41 shifts (overwrites) the setting of the third detection flag to the second detection flag. Thereafter, in step S2903, the MPU 41 sets (overwrites) the operation state of the operation button 20 detected by the operation switch 20a in the third detection flag, and the operation detection process ends.

In this way, in the operation button operation detection process, by executing the processes of steps S2901 to S2903, the operation status of the most recent three times at an interval of 1 msec is set as the operation history of the operation button 20 in the first detection flag to the third detection flag. It is stored in the RAM 512 as a flag. Specifically, the most recent operation state is stored as the third detection flag, the previous operation state is stored as the second detection flag, and the two previous operation state is stored as the first detection flag.

[Operation detection pattern determination processing]
Returning to the explanation of FIG. 57, in the operation detection pattern determination process of step S2802 in the operation detection process, the operation of the operation button 20 is determined based on the first operation detection flag, the second operation detection flag, and the third operation detection flag. An operation pattern flag is set for determining the operation state of the operation button 20 from the history. The operation pattern flags consist of first to third operation pattern flags, and the operation state of the operation button 20 can be determined by the combination of on and off of the first to third operation pattern flags. For example, if only the first operation pattern flag is set to on, it can be determined that the operation on the operation button 20 is being continued (see FIG. 38(A)). Furthermore, if only the second operation pattern flag is set to on, it can be determined that the operation on the operation button 20 has started (see FIG. 38(A)). Furthermore, if only the third operation pattern flag is set to on, it can be determined that the operation on the operation button 20 has ended (see FIG. 38(A)). If all of the first to third operation pattern flags are set to OFF, it can be determined that the operation button 20 is not operated (see FIG. 38(A)). Here, FIG. 58 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the operation detection pattern determination process. Further, FIG. 59(A) is a table showing the relationship between detection patterns and operation situations for the operation buttons 20. The operation button operation detection process will be described below with reference to FIGS. 58 and 59(A).

<Step S3001>
As shown in FIG. 58, in step S3001, the MPU 41 determines whether the first operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the operation button 20 three times before is set to on. Here, if the first operation detection flag is on (step S3001: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3002, and if the first operation detection flag is off (step S3001: No), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3002. The process moves to step S3005.

<Step S3002>
In step S3002, the MPU 41 determines whether the second operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the operation button 20 two times before is set to on. Here, if the second operation detection flag is on (step S3002: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3003, and if the second operation detection flag is off (step S3002: No), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3003. The process moves to step S3008.

<Step S3003>
In step S3003, the MPU 41 determines whether the third operation detection flag indicating the most recent operation state of the operation button 20 is set to on. Here, if the third operation detection flag is on (step S3003: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3004, and if the third operation detection flag is off (step S3003: No), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3004. The process moves to step S3010.

<Step S3004>
In step S3004, the MPU 41 sets the first operation pattern flag to ON, the second operation pattern flag and the third operation pattern flag to OFF, and ends the operation detection pattern determination process. That is, when the operation pattern of "ON", "ON", and "ON" occurs as the operation state of the operation button 20 three times, the MPU 41 sets the first operation pattern flag to ON and sets the second operation pattern. The flag and the third operation pattern flag are set to OFF (see FIG. 59(A)). The first operation pattern flag can be used as an index for determining whether or not the operating state of the operation button 20 continues. For example, when the first operation pattern flag is set to ON, the MPU 41 may set an operation button operation continuation command in the RAM 412 and send this operation button operation continuation command to the audio lamp control device 5. . As a result, the audio lamp control device 5 can determine that the operation button 20 is being continuously operated, and therefore the operation button 20 is being continuously operated based on the number of times the operation button operation continuation command is continuously transmitted. I can keep track of the time. Therefore, the audio lamp control device 5 can determine whether or not a long press operation has been performed on the operation button 20 based on the time period during which the operation button 20 is continuously operated. It becomes possible to execute.

<Step S3005>
If the MPU 41 determines that the first operation detection flag is not on in step S3001 (step S3001: No), the MPU 41 determines whether the second operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the operation button 20 two times before is on. A judgment is made (step S3005). Here, if the second operation detection flag is on (step S3005: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3006, and if the second operation detection flag is off (step S3005: No), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3006. The process moves to step S3010.

<Step S3006>
In step S3006, the MPU 41 determines whether the third operation detection flag indicating the most recent operation state of the operation button 20 is on. Here, if the third operation detection flag is on (step S3006: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3007, and if the third operation detection flag is off (step S3006: No), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3007. The process moves to step S3010.

<Step S3007>
In step S3007, the MPU 41 sets the second operation pattern flag to ON, and sets the first operation pattern flag and the third operation pattern flag to OFF. That is, when the operation patterns of "OFF", "ON", and "ON" occur as the three operation states of the operation button 20, the MPU 41 sets the second operation pattern flag to ON, and sets the second operation pattern flag to ON. The flag and the third operation pattern flag are set to OFF (see FIG. 59(A)), and the operation detection pattern determination process ends. The second operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the operation button 20 has changed from the non-operated state to the operated state (whether or not the operation of the operation button 20 has started). In this way, if it is determined whether or not the operation button 20 has changed from the non-operated state to the operated state using the second operation pattern flag, the operation state of the operation button 20 for three times will be reflected, so the radio wave Alternatively, erroneous detection of the start of operation of the operation button 20 due to noise such as static electricity is prevented, and the start of operation of the operation button 20 is prevented from being reflected in the performance display at a timing not intended by the player.

<Step S3008>
If the MPU 41 determines that the second operation detection flag is not on in step S3002 (step S3002: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the third operation detection flag indicating the most recent operation state of the operation button 20 is on. (Step S3008). Here, if the third operation detection flag is on (step S3008: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3010, and if the second operation detection flag is off (step S3008: No), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3010. The process moves to step S3009.

<Step S3009>
In step S3009, the MPU 41 sets the third operation pattern flag to ON, the first operation pattern flag and the second operation pattern flag to OFF, and ends the operation detection pattern determination process. That is, when the operation patterns of "ON", "OFF", and "OFF" occur as the three operation states of the operation button 20, the MPU 41 sets the third operation pattern flag to ON, and sets the third operation pattern flag to ON, and sets the third operation pattern flag to ON. The flag and the second operation pattern flag are set to OFF (see FIG. 59(A)). The third operation pattern flag can be used as an index for determining whether or not the operation button 20 has changed from the operation state to the non-operation state (whether or not the operation of the operation button 20 has ended). can.

<Step S3010>
In step S3010, the MPU 41 sets the first operation pattern flag, the second operation pattern flag, and the third operation pattern flag to OFF, and ends the operation detection pattern determination process. That is, the MPU 41 turns off all of the first to third operation pattern flags when an operation pattern other than the above, such as "OFF", "OFF", or "OFF" occurs as the operation state of the operation button 20 three times. (see FIG. 59(A)). Note that when all of the first to third operation pattern flags are off, the MPU 41 determines that the operation button 20 is in the non-operation state.

[Selection button operation detection processing]
Returning to the description of FIG. 56, in the selection button operation detection process (step S2803), the MPU 41 executes an upper selection button operation process, a lower selection button operation process, a left selection button operation process, and a right selection button operation process.

<Upper selection button operation process>
In the upper selection button operation process, the MPU 41 detects the operation state of the upper selection button 211 and executes processing for sequentially updating the operation history of the past three times. Here, since the upper selection button operation process is similar to the operation button operation detection process in FIG. 57, detailed explanation will be omitted. Note that in the upper selection button operation process, the "operation detection flag" may be replaced with the "upper selection operation detection flag" in each step of the operation button operation detection process in FIG.

<Down selection button operation process>
In the lower selection button operation process, the MPU 41 detects the operation state of the lower selection button 212 and executes processing for sequentially updating the past three operation histories. Here, the lower selection button operation process is similar to the operation button operation detection process in FIG. 57, so a detailed explanation will be omitted. Note that in the lower selection button operation process, the "operation detection flag" may be replaced with the "lower selection operation detection flag" in each step of the operation button operation detection process in FIG.

<Left selection button operation process>
In the left selection button operation process, the MPU 41 detects the operation state of the left selection button 213 and executes processing for sequentially updating the past three operation histories. Here, the left selection button operation process is similar to the operation button operation detection process in FIG. 57, so detailed explanation will be omitted. Note that in the left selection button operation process, the "operation detection flag" may be replaced with the "left selection operation detection flag" in each step of the operation button operation detection process in FIG.

<Right selection button operation process>
In the right selection button operation process, the MPU 41 detects the operation state of the right selection button 214 and executes processing for sequentially updating the operation history of the past three times. Here, the right selection button operation process is similar to the operation button operation detection process in FIG. 57, so a detailed explanation will be omitted. Note that in the right selection button operation process, the "operation detection flag" may be replaced with the "right selection operation detection flag" in each step of the operation button operation detection process in FIG.

[Selection operation detection pattern judgment processing]
In the selection operation detection pattern determination process (step S2804), the MPU 41 executes an upward selection operation detection pattern determination process, a downward selection operation detection pattern determination process, a left selection operation detection pattern determination process, and a right selection operation detection pattern determination process.

<Up selection operation detection pattern determination process>
In the upper selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 selects an upper selection operation from the operation history of the upper selection button 211 determined based on the first upper selection operation detection flag, the second upper selection operation detection flag, and the third upper selection operation detection flag. An up operation pattern flag for determining the operation state of the selection button 211 is set. Here, since the upward selection operation detection pattern determination process is similar to the operation detection pattern determination process in FIG. 58, detailed explanation will be omitted. Note that, in each step of the operation detection pattern determination process shown in FIG. It can be read as "flag".

Here, as shown in FIG. 59(B), in the upper selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 determines that the operation patterns of "ON", "ON", and "ON" are the operation states of the upper selection button 211 for three times. If this occurs, the first upper selection operation pattern flag is set to ON, and the second upper selection operation pattern flag and the third upper selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The first upper selection operation pattern flag can be used as an index for determining whether or not the operation state of the upper selection button 211 continues.

Furthermore, when the operation patterns of "OFF", "ON", and "ON" occur as the operation states of the upper selection button 211 three times, the MPU 41 sets the second upper selection operation pattern flag to ON, and The first upper selection operation pattern flag and the third upper selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The second upper selection operation pattern flag serves as an index for determining whether or not the upper selection button 211 has changed from the non-operated state to the operated state (whether or not the operation of the upper selection button 211 has started). used.

Furthermore, when the operation patterns of "ON", "OFF", and "OFF" occur as the operation states of the upper selection button 211 three times, the MPU 41 sets the third upper selection operation pattern flag to ON, and sets the third upper selection operation pattern flag to ON. The first upper selection operation pattern flag and the second upper selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The third upper selection operation pattern flag serves as an index for determining whether or not the upper selection button 211 has changed from the operated state to the non-operated state (whether or not the operation of the upper selection button 211 has been completed). used.

Furthermore, when an operation pattern other than the above, such as "OFF", "OFF", or "OFF" occurs as the operation state of the upper selection button 211 three times, the MPU 41 flags the first to third upper selection operation pattern flags. Set all of them to off. Note that, when all of the first to third upper selection operation pattern flags are off, the MPU 41 determines that the upper selection button 211 is in a non-operated state.

<Down selection operation detection pattern judgment process>
In the down selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 selects the down selection button from the operation history of the down selection button 212 determined based on the first down selection operation detection flag, the second down selection operation detection flag, and the down selection operation detection flag. A down operation pattern flag for determining the operation state for 212 is set. Here, the down selection operation detection pattern determination process is similar to the operation detection pattern determination process in FIG. 58, so detailed explanation will be omitted. Note that in each step of the operation detection pattern determination process shown in FIG. It can be read as "flag".

Here, as shown in FIG. 59(C), in the down selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 determines that the operation patterns of "ON", "ON", and "ON" are the operation states of the down selection button 212 for three times. If this occurs, the first lower selection operation pattern flag is set to ON, and the second lower selection operation pattern flag and the third lower selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The first lower selection operation pattern flag can be used as an index for determining whether or not the operation state of the lower selection button 212 continues.

In addition, when the operation patterns of "OFF", "ON", and "ON" occur as the operation states of the lower selection button 212 three times, the MPU 41 sets the second lower selection operation pattern flag to ON, and sets the second lower selection operation pattern flag to ON. The first lower selection operation pattern flag and the third lower selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The second lower selection operation pattern flag serves as an index for determining whether or not the lower selection button 212 has changed from the non-operated state to the operated state (whether or not the operation of the lower selection button 212 has started). used.

Furthermore, when the operation patterns of "ON", "OFF", and "OFF" occur as the three operation states of the lower selection button 212, the MPU 41 sets the third lower selection operation pattern flag to ON, and sets the third lower selection operation pattern flag to ON. The first lower selection operation pattern flag and the second lower selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The third lower selection operation pattern flag serves as an index for determining whether or not the lower selection button 212 has changed from the operated state to the non-operated state (whether or not the operation of the lower selection button 212 has been completed). used.

Additionally, when an operation pattern other than the above, such as "OFF", "OFF", or "OFF" occurs as the operation state of the lower selection button 212 three times, the MPU 41 flags the first to third lower selection operation detection flags. Set all of them to off. Note that when all of the first to third lower selection operation pattern flags are off, the MPU 41 determines that the lower selection button 212 is in the non-operated state.

<Left selection operation detection pattern judgment processing>
In the left selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 selects the left selection button from the operation history of the left selection button 213 determined based on the first left selection operation detection flag, the second left selection operation detection flag, and the left selection operation detection flag. A left operation pattern flag for determining the operation state for 213 is set. Here, since the left selection operation detection pattern determination process is similar to the operation detection pattern determination process in FIG. 58, detailed explanation will be omitted. Note that in the left selection operation detection pattern determination process, in each step of the operation detection pattern determination process in FIG. It can be read as "flag".

Here, as shown in FIG. 59(D), in the left selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 determines that the operation patterns of "ON", "ON", and "ON" are the operation states of the left selection button 213 three times. If this occurs, the first left selection operation pattern flag is set to ON, and the second left selection operation pattern flag and the third left selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The first left selection operation pattern flag can be used as an index for determining whether the operation state of the left selection button 213 continues.

Furthermore, when the operation patterns of "OFF", "ON", and "ON" occur as the operation states of the left selection button 213 three times, the MPU 41 sets the second left selection operation pattern flag to ON, and sets the second left selection operation pattern flag to ON. The first left selection operation pattern flag and the third left selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The second left selection operation pattern flag serves as an index for determining whether the left selection button 213 has changed from the non-operated state to the operated state (whether or not the operation of the left selection button 213 has started). used.

Furthermore, when the operation patterns of "ON", "OFF", and "OFF" occur as the operation states of the left selection button 213 three times, the MPU 41 sets the third left selection operation pattern flag to ON, and sets the third left selection operation pattern flag to ON. The first left selection operation pattern flag and the second left selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The third left selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether the left selection button 213 has changed from the operated state to the non-operated state (whether or not the operation of the left selection button 213 has been completed). used.

Additionally, when an operation pattern other than the above, such as "OFF", "OFF", or "OFF" occurs as the operation state of the left selection button 213 three times, the MPU 41 flags the first to third left selection operation pattern flags. Set all of them to off. Note that when all of the first to third left selection operation pattern flags are off, the MPU 41 determines that the left selection button 213 is in a non-operated state.

<Right selection operation detection pattern determination process>
In the right selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 selects the right selection button from the operation history of the right selection button 214 determined based on the first right selection operation detection flag, the second right selection operation detection flag, and the right selection operation detection flag. A right operation pattern flag for determining the operation state for 214 is set. Here, the right selection operation detection pattern determination process is similar to the operation detection pattern determination process in FIG. 58, so detailed explanation will be omitted. In the right selection operation detection pattern determination process, in each step of the operation detection pattern determination process in FIG. It can be read as "flag".

Here, as shown in FIG. 59(E), in the right selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 determines that the operation patterns of "ON", "ON", and "ON" are the three operation states of the right selection button 214. If this occurs, the first right selection operation pattern flag is set to ON, and the second right selection operation pattern flag and the third right selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The first right selection operation pattern flag can be used as an index for determining whether the operation state of the right selection button 214 continues.

In addition, when the operation patterns of "OFF", "ON", and "ON" occur as the three operation states of the right selection button 214, the MPU 41 sets the second right selection operation pattern flag to ON, and sets the second right selection operation pattern flag to ON. The first right selection operation pattern flag and the third right selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The second right selection operation pattern flag serves as an index for determining whether the right selection button 214 has changed from the non-operated state to the operated state (whether or not the operation of the right selection button 214 has started). used.

Furthermore, when the operation patterns of "ON", "OFF", and "OFF" occur as the three operation states of the right selection button 214, the MPU 41 sets the third right selection operation pattern flag to ON, and sets the third right selection operation pattern flag to ON. The first right selection operation pattern flag and the second right selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The third right selection operation pattern flag serves as an index for determining whether the right selection button 214 has changed from the operated state to the non-operated state (whether or not the operation of the right selection button 214 has been completed). used.

Additionally, when an operation pattern other than the above, such as "OFF", "OFF", or "OFF" occurs as the operation state of the right selection button 214 three times, the MPU 41 flags the first to third right selection operation pattern flags. Set all of them to off. Note that, when all of the first to third right selection operation pattern flags are off, the MPU 41 determines that the right selection button 214 is in the non-operated state.

[Enter button operation detection processing]
In the determination button operation detection process (step S2805 in FIG. 56), the MPU 41 detects the operation state of the determination button 21B and executes processing for sequentially updating the past three operation histories. Here, since the determination button operation detection process is similar to the operation button operation detection process in FIG. 57, detailed explanation will be omitted. Note that in the determination button operation detection process, the "operation detection flag" may be replaced with the "determination button operation detection flag" in each step of the operation button operation detection process in FIG.

[Decision operation detection pattern judgment processing]
In the decision operation detection pattern determination process (step S2806 in FIG. 56), the MPU 41 determines the operation history of the decision button 21B determined based on the first decision operation detection flag, the second decision operation detection flag, and the third decision operation detection flag. An operation pattern flag is set for determining the operation state of the decision button 21B. Here, since the determination operation detection pattern determination process is similar to the operation detection pattern determination process in FIG. 58, detailed explanation will be omitted. Note that in the determination operation detection pattern determination process, the "operation detection flag" may be replaced with the "determination operation detection flag" in each step of the operation detection pattern determination process in FIG.

Here, as shown in FIG. 59(F), in the determination operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 determines that the operation patterns of "ON", "ON", and "ON" have occurred as the operation states of the determination button 21B three times. In this case, the first determination operation pattern flag is set to ON, and the second determination operation pattern flag and the third determination operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The first determination operation pattern flag can be used as an index for determining whether or not the operation state of the determination button 21B continues.

Further, when the operation pattern of "OFF", "ON", and "ON" occurs as the operation state of the decision button 21B three times, the MPU 41 sets the second decision operation pattern flag to ON, and sets the second decision operation pattern flag to ON. The operation pattern flag and the third determined operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The second decision operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether the decision button 21B has changed from a non-operating state to an operating state (whether or not the operation of the decision button 21B has started). .

Furthermore, when the operation pattern of "ON", "OFF", and "OFF" occurs as the three operation states of the decision button 21B, the MPU 41 sets the third decision operation pattern flag to ON, and the first decision operation pattern flag is set to ON. The operation pattern flag and the second determined operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The third decision operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the decision button 21B has changed from the operated state to the non-operated state (whether or not the operation of the decision button 21B has ended). .

Furthermore, when an operation pattern other than the above, such as "OFF", "OFF", "OFF", etc. occurs as the operation state of the decision button 21B three times, the MPU 41 controls all of the first to third decision operation pattern flags. Set to off. Note that, when all of the first to third decision operation pattern flags are off, the MPU 41 determines that the decision button 21B is in a non-operated state.

[Standby state screen transition process]
Returning to the explanation of FIG. 55, in the standby state screen transition process executed in 2702 of the sub-timer interrupt process, in the standby state in which neither the variable game nor the jackpot game is being executed, the operation button 20, the selection button 21A, or the In response to the operation on the button 21B, the screen of the symbol display section 341 is moved, and a process is executed that allows the player to make various selections and settings. Here, FIG. 60 is a diagram showing an example of screen transition on the symbol display section 341 in a standby state.

As shown in FIG. 60, when the fluctuating display of the decorative symbols is stopped, the number of reservations N and the number of reservations M are "0", and the state does not shift to the jackpot game state, the fluctuation of the decorative symbols is stopped. State fluctuation stop screen is maintained. If the player operates the operation button 20 after the fluctuation stop screen is displayed, the display screen is shifted from the fluctuation stop screen to the top menu screen. This top menu screen includes a plurality of screen transition images and a cursor image.

The multiple screen transition images are images for selecting a transition destination display screen, and include a plurality of selectable items (transition destination display screens). The multiple screen transition images include a 7-segment display history selection screen transition image for transitioning to a 7-segment display history selection screen that displays "7-segment display history", and a character selection screen that displays "character selection". A character selection screen transition image for transitioning to the character selection screen, a character customization screen transition image for transitioning to the character customization screen that displays "Character customization," and a transition image for transitioning to the fluctuation stop screen that displays "Back" Contains variable stop screen transition images.

The cursor image is an image that indicates which item is currently temporarily selected among multiple selectable items, and the item corresponding to the screen transition image on the right side of the cursor image among the multiple screen transition images is an image that indicates which item is currently temporarily selected among multiple selectable items. This is a provisionally selected item. The example shown in FIG. 60 shows that "7 segment display section history" is temporarily selected. Furthermore, the screen transition image corresponding to the temporarily selected item among the multiple screen transition images is displayed in a manner distinguishable from other screen transition images in order to emphasize that it has been temporarily selected. . Note that the temporary selection items can be changed by operating the upper selection button 211 or the lower selection button 212.

On the top menu screen, by operating the enter button 21B, the temporarily selected item (transfer destination display screen) is determined, and the display screen corresponding to the item is selected. For example, when the player selects the 7-segment display history selection screen transition image of "7-segment display history" and operates the enter button 21B, the display screen changes from the top menu screen to the 7-segment display history selection screen. will be moved to

The 7-segment display section history selection screen is a screen that can be shifted to a history screen on which the contents of specific information displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 for a predetermined period are displayed. This history screen shows the display contents on the 7-segment display section 39 for any of the most recent three predetermined periods, and is the previous history screen in which the content of specific information for the previous predetermined period is displayed. , a 2nd previous history screen where the content of specific information for the 2nd previous predetermined period is displayed, and a 3rd previous history screen where the content of the specific information for the 3rd previous predetermined period is displayed. Each history screen is a history image in the same form as the additional image displayed on the symbol display section 341 in the second half of the ending of the jackpot game (see FIGS. 47(B1), 47(B2), and 47(C)). including. The history image shows the display history on the 7-segment display section 39 until the end of one predetermined period, and shows five settings imitating the 7-segment display section 39 in which numbers corresponding to non-setting values can be displayed. Contains value-suggesting images. In the example shown in FIG. 60, after the number 2 is displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 due to the entry of the game ball 99 into the special out ball opening 373 of the croon device 37 in the previous predetermined period, the segments A~ This indicates that C has a history of being lit.

In addition, the 7-segment display history selection screen includes a cursor image indicating that it has been temporarily selected, and a previous history screen for transitioning to the previous history screen, which displays "History 1 (1st previous)". Transition image, 2nd previous history screen transition image for transitioning to the 2nd previous history screen that is displayed as "History 2 (2nd time ago)", 3rd previous history screen that is displayed as "History 3 (3rd time ago)" It includes a 3rd previous history screen transition image for transitioning to the history screen, and a fluctuation stop screen transition image for transitioning to the fluctuation stop screen where "end" is displayed. Then, on the 7-segment display section history selection screen, by operating the enter button 21B, the temporarily selected item (transfer destination display screen) is determined, and the display screen corresponding to the item is selected. For example, if the player operates the enter button 21B when the previous history screen transition image of "History 1 (1st previous)" is temporarily selected, the display screen changes from the 7-segment display history selection screen to 1. You will be moved to the previous history screen. Also, when "History 2 (2nd time ago)" is selected, the 7-segment display section history selection screen is moved to the 2nd previous history screen, and when "History 3 (3rd time ago)" is selected, is transferred from the 7-segment display section history selection screen to the 3rd previous history screen. Further, when "End" is selected, the screen is transferred from the 7-segment display section history selection screen to the top menu screen.

In this way, it is possible to shift from the 7-segment display section history selection screen to any of the 1st previous history screen, 2nd previous history screen, and 3rd previous history screen according to the player's selection. That is, the player can check the desired history information by moving to the desired history screen. This makes it possible to effectively check the history while avoiding checking history information such as previously checked information or information with a small amount of information, so it is possible to efficiently check the history.

Further, in this embodiment, information for specifying a non-set value at the ending of the jackpot game is displayed on a 7-segment display section 39 different from the symbol display section 341 in which decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. Therefore, even when displaying information for specifying non-set values, visual recognition of the image effect executed on the symbol display section 341 is not obstructed. On the other hand, in the standby state, history information having the same content as the information displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 at the ending is displayed on a symbol display section 341 different from the 7-segment display section 39. Here, since the symbol display section 341 generally has a large display area, the visibility of the history information is improved by displaying the history information on the symbol display section 341. Further, the symbol display section 341 may be used to perform various settings such as effects and characters to be executed in the gaming machine 10. Therefore, if the content displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 at the ending is displayed on the symbol display section 341, it becomes possible to check the history information through operations similar to those for making various settings. Therefore, the convenience of checking history information is improved.

Note that in this embodiment, it is possible to shift from a plurality of history screens to a history screen selected by the player, but it is also possible to display a plurality of pieces of history information on one screen at the same time. In this case, since many histories can be checked at once, the presented contents can be checked efficiently in this case as well.

In addition, on the top menu screen, if the character screen transition image of "Character selection" is selected, the display screen will be transitioned to the character selection screen, and if the character customization screen transition image of "Character customization" is selected, the display screen will be displayed. The screen will shift to the character customization screen. That is, in this embodiment, it is possible to select a character that appears in a variable game production, etc., and it is possible to customize the costume, accessories, hairstyle, etc. of the character.

In addition, in the top menu screen, when the "return" variation stop screen transition image is selected, the display screen is shifted to the variation stop screen.

As described above, in this embodiment, the display history on the 7-segment display section 39 for the most recent three predetermined periods can be checked by operating the selection decision section 21 (selection button 21A and decision button 21B) in the standby state. I can do it. Therefore, if the player misses or forgets the content displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 at the ending of a jackpot game, the player can reconfirm the content displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 in the past. When the player is replaced, the player after the replacement can check the past display contents of the 7-segment display section 39. This allows the player to specify or infer a plurality of non-setting values (setting values) by taking into consideration the past display contents of the 7-segment display section 39. Convenience for specifying or estimating is improved.

Here, FIGS. 61 and 62 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the standby state screen transition process executed in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. 55. The procedure of the standby state screen transition process executed in step S2702 of the sub-timer interrupt process in FIG. 55 will be described below with reference to FIGS. 61 and 62.

<Steps S3101 and S3102>
As shown in FIG. 61, in the standby state screen transition process, the MPU 51 first determines whether or not it is in the standby state (steps S3101 and S3102). Specifically, the MPU 51 sets the fluctuating game performance flag set to on in step S2105 in the command determination process of FIG. 37 to OFF (step S3101: No), and executes the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. If the jackpot game performance flag, which is set to ON when transmitting the display variation pattern command to the display control device 6 in the jackpot game performance process in step S2004, is set to OFF (step S3102: No), the standby state I judge that there is. On the other hand, the MPU 51 is not in a standby state if the variable game performance flag is set to ON (step S3101: Yes) or if the jackpot game performance flag is set to ON (step S3102: Yes). I judge that.

Then, if the MPU 51 is in the standby state (No in both steps S3101 and S3102), the process moves to step S3103, and if it is not in the standby state (Yes in step S3101 or S3102), it ends the standby state screen transition process. .

<Step S3103>
If it is in the standby state (No in both steps S3101 and S3102), the MPU 51 determines whether the fluctuation stop screen flag is set on (step S3103). The fluctuation stop screen flag is a flag indicating that the display screen on the symbol display section 341 is a fluctuation stop screen. This fluctuation stop screen flag is used when transitioning from the fluctuation gaming state or the jackpot gaming state to the standby state, that is, when all the screen flags other than the fluctuation stop screen flag are set to OFF in the standby state, as shown in FIG. 62 described below. is set to on in step S3120. Further, the fluctuation stop screen flag is also set to ON when a display screen other than the fluctuation stop screen is transitioned to the fluctuation stop screen. Specifically, when the display screen is shifted from the top menu screen to the fluctuation stop screen in the top menu screen process of step S3109 in FIG. 62, which will be described later, the fluctuation stop screen flag is set to is transferred from the previous history screen processing to the fluctuation stop screen, when the display screen is transferred from the second previous history screen processing to the fluctuation stop screen in step S3115, and when the display screen is transferred from the second previous history screen processing to the fluctuation stop screen in step S3117. It is also set to ON when the display screen is transitioned from the 3rd previous history screen process to the fluctuation stop screen in the 3rd previous history screen process. The fluctuation stop screen flag is set to OFF in step S3107 when the display screen is shifted from the fluctuation stop screen to the top menu screen, and is set to OFF when the fluctuation display of decorative symbols is started.

Then, if the fluctuation stop screen flag is set to ON (step S3103: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3104, and if the fluctuation stop screen flag is set to OFF (step S3103: No). , the process moves to step S3108 in FIG.

<Step S3104>
If the fluctuation stop screen flag is set to ON (step S3103: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether the second operation pattern flag is set to ON (step S3104). The second operation pattern flag is a flag indicating that the operation on the operation button 20 has started, and is set to ON in step S3007 in the operation detection pattern determination process in FIG. 58. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the operation button 20 is operated when the display screen is the fluctuation stop screen. Then, if the second operation pattern flag is set to ON (step S3104: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3105, and if the second operation pattern flag is set to OFF (step S3104: No), the standby state screen transition process ends.

<Steps S3105 to S3107>
If the second operation pattern flag is set to on (step S3104: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the display screen from the fluctuation stop screen to the top menu screen where various selections and settings are made (step S3105) (FIG. 60 reference). That is, when the display screen is a variable display screen and the operation button 20 is operated, the MPU 51 shifts the display screen from the variable stop screen to the top menu screen.

Then, the MPU 51 sets the top menu screen flag indicating that the display screen is the top menu screen to ON (step S3106), and sets the fluctuation stop screen flag indicating that the display screen is the fluctuation stop screen to OFF (step S3106). S3107), the standby state screen transition process ends.

<Step S3108>
If the fluctuation stop screen flag is set to OFF (step S3103: No), as shown in FIG. 62, the MPU 51 determines whether the top menu screen flag indicating that the display screen is the top menu screen is set to ON. (Step S3108). The top menu screen flag is set to ON when the display screen is to be transitioned from various screens such as the fluctuation stop screen to the top menu screen in the standby state (for example, step S3106 in FIG. 61). If the top menu screen flag is set to ON (step S3108: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3109, and if the top menu screen flag is set to OFF (step S3108: No), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3109. The process moves to S3110.

<Step S3109>
If the top menu screen flag is set to on (step S3108: Yes), the MPU 51 executes top menu screen processing (step S3109). In the top menu screen processing, the temporarily selected item is changed in accordance with the operation on the selection button 21A. In addition, in the top menu screen processing, when the operation on the enter button 21B is performed, a screen corresponding to the provisionally selected item, specifically a fluctuation stop screen, a 7-segment display history selection screen, a character selection screen, or a character selection screen, is displayed. Shift the display screen to the customization screen. Furthermore, when the display screen is transferred from the top menu screen to another screen, the MPU 51 sets the screen flag for the transfer destination screen to ON, while setting the top menu screen flag to OFF.

<Step S3110>
If the top menu screen flag is set to OFF (step S3108: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the 7-segment history selection screen flag indicating that the display screen is the 7-segment display section history selection screen is set to ON. (Step S3110). The 7-segment history selection screen flag is set to ON when the display screen is transitioned from the top menu screen to the 7-segment display section history selection screen in the top menu screen process of step S3109. If the 7-segment history selection screen flag is set to ON (step S3110: Yes), the process moves to step S3111, and if the 7-segment history selection screen flag is set to OFF (step S3110: No), The process moves to step S3112.

<Step S3111>
If the 7-segment history selection screen flag is set to on (step S3110: Yes), the MPU 51 executes 7-segment history selection screen processing. The 7-segment history selection screen process is a process that is executed when the 7-segment display section history selection screen is displayed. Details of the 7-segment history selection screen process will be described later with reference to FIG. 63.

<Step S3112>
If the 7-segment history selection screen flag is set to OFF (step S3110: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the previous history screen flag indicating that the display screen is the previous history screen is set to ON. It is determined whether or not (step S3112). The previous history screen flag is set to ON when the display screen is transitioned from the 7 segment display history selection screen to the previous history screen in step S3212 of the 7 segment history selection screen process in FIG. 63, which will be described later. Ru. Then, if the previous history screen flag is set to ON (step S3112: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3113, and if the previous history screen flag is set to OFF (step S3112: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3113. S3112: No), the process moves to step S3114.

<Step S3113>
If the previous history screen flag is set to ON (step S3112: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the previous history screen process and ends the standby state screen transition process. In the previous history screen process, when "Return" is selected, the display screen is shifted from the previous history screen to the 7-segment display section history selection screen. At this time, the MPU 51 sets the previous history screen flag to OFF, while setting the 7-segment history selection screen flag to ON.

<Step S3114>
If the first previous history screen flag is set to OFF (step S3112: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the second previous history screen flag indicating that the display screen is the second previous history screen is set to ON. It is determined whether or not (step S3114). The 2nd previous history screen flag is set to ON when the display screen is transitioned from the 7 segment display history selection screen to the 2nd previous history screen in step S3215 of the 7 segment history selection screen process in FIG. 63, which will be described later. Ru. Then, the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3115 if the 2nd previous history screen flag is set to ON (step S3114: Yes), and if the 2nd previous history screen flag is set to OFF (step S3114: Yes) S3114: No), the process moves to step S3116.

<Step S3115>
If the 2nd previous history screen flag is set to on (step S3114: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the 2nd previous history screen process and ends the standby state screen transition process. In the second previous history screen process, when "Return" is selected, the display screen is shifted from the second previous history screen to the 7-segment display section history selection screen. At this time, the MPU 51 sets the 2nd previous history screen flag to OFF, while setting the 7-segment history selection screen flag to ON.

<Step S3116>
If the 2nd previous history screen flag is set to OFF (step S3114: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the 3rd previous history screen flag indicating that the display screen is the 3rd previous history screen is set to ON. It is determined whether or not (step S3116). The 6th previous history screen flag is set to ON when the display screen is transitioned from the 7 segment display section history selection screen to the 3rd previous history screen in step S3217 of the 7 segment history selection screen process in FIG. 63, which will be described later. Ru. Then, the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3117 if the 3rd previous history screen flag is set to on (step S3116: Yes), and if the 3rd previous history screen flag is set to OFF (step S3116: No), the process moves to step S3118.

<Step S3117>
If the 3rd previous history screen flag is set to ON (step S3116: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the 3rd previous history screen process and ends the standby state screen transition process. In the 3rd previous history screen process, when "Return" is selected, the display screen is shifted from the 3rd previous history screen to the 7 segment display section history selection screen. At this time, the MPU 51 sets the 3rd previous history screen flag to OFF, while setting the 7-segment history selection screen flag to ON.

<Steps S3118 and S3119>
If the three previous history screen flag is set to OFF (step S3116: No), the MPU 51 determines whether another screen flag (character selection screen flag or character customization screen flag) is set to ON. (Step S3118). The other screen flags are set to on when the display screen is transitioned from the top menu screen to another screen in the top menu screen process of step S3109. If the other screen flag is set to on (step S3118: Yes), other screen processing corresponding to the other screen is executed (step S3119), and the standby state screen transition processing ends. On the other hand, if the other screen flags are set to off (step S3118: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3120.

<Step S3120>
If the other screen flags are set to OFF (step S3118: No), the MPU 51 sets the fluctuation stop screen flag to ON (step S3120), and ends the standby state screen transition process. In other words, when the MPU 51 is in the standby state, if all the screen flags are off, the change is made from the variable gaming state or the jackpot gaming state to the waiting state, and the display screen can be determined to be the variable stop screen. Set the stop screen flag on.

[7 segment history selection screen processing]
In the 7-segment history selection screen process executed in step S3111 of the standby state screen transition process, the display screen is changed to the 7-segment history selection screen according to the player's operation on the selection decision unit 21 (selection button 21A and decision button 21B). A process of moving from the selection screen to the fluctuation stop screen, the previous history screen, the history screen 2nd time, or the history screen 3rd time is executed (see FIG. 60). Here, FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the 7-segment history selection screen process executed in the standby state screen transition process of FIG. 62.

<Step S3201>
As shown in FIG. 63, in the 7-segment history selection screen process, the MPU 51 first determines whether the second upper selection pattern flag is set to on (step S3201). The second upper selection pattern flag is a flag indicating that an operation on the upper selection button 211 has started, and is used to detect the upper selection operation performed in the selection operation detection pattern determination process in step S2804 in the operation detection process of FIG. Set to on in pattern determination processing. If the second upper selection pattern flag is set to ON (step S3201: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3202, and if the second upper selection pattern flag is set to OFF (step S3201: No), the process moves to step S3203.

<Step S3202>
If the second upper selection pattern flag is set to ON (step S3201: Yes), the MPU 51 performs a process of changing the temporarily selected item (temporary selection display) on the 7-segment display history selection screen to the upper side. Execute. For example, if "History 2 (2nd time ago)" is temporarily selected before the 2nd upper selection pattern flag is set to on, the temporary selection display changes to "History 1 (1st time ago)". (See Figure 60). Note that if the upper selection button 211 is operated while "History 1 (1st previous)" displayed at the top of the option images is provisionally selected, the provisional selection display is not changed. Alternatively, the temporary selection display may be changed to "End" displayed at the bottom of the option images (see FIG. 60).

<Step S3203>
If the second upper selection pattern flag is set to OFF (step S3201: No), that is, if the operation on the upper selection button 211 has not been started, the MPU 51 determines that the second lower selection pattern flag is set to ON. It is determined whether there is one (step S3203). The second lower selection pattern flag is a flag indicating that an operation on the lower selection button 212 has started, and is used to detect the lower selection operation performed in the selection operation detection pattern determination process in step S2804 in the operation detection process of FIG. Set to on in pattern determination processing. If the second lower selection pattern flag is set to ON (step S3203: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3204, and if the second lower selection pattern flag is set to OFF (step S3203: No), the process moves to step S3205.

<Step S3204>
If the second lower selection pattern flag is set to ON (step S3203: Yes), the MPU 51 performs a process of changing the temporarily selected item (temporary selection display) on the 7-segment display history selection screen to the lower side. Execute. For example, if "History 2 (previously 2 times)" is temporarily selected before the second upper selection pattern flag is set to on, the temporary selection display changes to "History 3 (previously 3 times)". (See Figure 60). Note that if the lower selection button 212 is operated while "End" displayed at the bottom of the option images is provisionally selected, the provisional selection display may not be changed, or the option The temporary selection display may be changed to "history 1 (previous time)" displayed at the top of the image (see FIG. 60).

<Step S3205>
If the second lower selection pattern flag is set to OFF (step S3203: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the second determination operation pattern flag is set to ON (step S3205). The second decision operation pattern flag is a flag indicating that an operation on the decision button 21B has started, and is set to on in the decision button operation detection pattern determination process executed in step S2806 in the operation detection process in FIG. Ru. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the enter button 21B has been operated when the display screen is the 7-segment display section history selection screen. Then, if the second determination operation pattern flag is set to ON (step S3205: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3206, and if the second determination operation pattern flag is set to OFF (step S3205: No), the standby state screen transition process ends.

<Steps S3206 and S3207>
If the second determination operation pattern flag is set to ON (step S3205: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the 7-segment history screen flag to OFF (step S3206), and if the determination button 21B is operated, provisional selection is performed. It is determined whether the currently selected item is "end" (step S3207). If the item that was tentatively selected when the enter button 21B was operated is "End" (step S3207: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3208, and selects the provisionally selected item when the enter button 21B is operated. If the selected item is not "end" (step S3207: No), the process moves to step S3210.

<Steps S3208 and S3209>
If the tentatively selected item is "End" when the decision button 21B is operated (step S3207: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the display screen from the 7-segment display section history selection screen to the fluctuation stop screen. (Step S3208) (see FIG. 60). Then, the MPU 51 sets on the fluctuation stop screen flag indicating that the display screen is a fluctuation stop screen (step S3209), and ends the standby state screen transition process.

<Step S3210>
If the temporarily selected item is not "End" when the enter button 21B is operated (step S3207: No), the MPU 51 determines that the temporarily selected item is "History 1 (1st Previous)". It is determined whether or not (step S3210). If the temporarily selected item is "history 1 (previously)" (step S3210: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3211, and the temporarily selected item is "history 1 (previously)" (step S3210: Yes). )" (step S3210: No), the process moves to step S3213.

<Steps S3211 and S3212>
If the temporarily selected item is "History 1 (1st previous)" (Step S3210: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the display screen from the 7-segment display history selection screen to the 1st previous history screen (Step S3210: Yes). S3211) (see FIG. 60), sets the previous history screen flag to ON (step S3212), and ends the 7-segment history selection screen process.

<Step S3213>
If the item provisionally selected when the enter button 21B is operated is not "history 1 (previous)" (step S3210: No), the MPU 51 changes the item provisionally selected to "history 2 (previous)". (step S3213). If the temporarily selected item is "history 2 (2 times ago)" (step S3213: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3214, and the temporarily selected item is "history 2 (2 times)" (step S3213: Yes). Previous)" (step S3213: No), the process moves to step S3216.

<Steps S3214 and S3215>
If the temporarily selected item is "history 2 (2nd time ago)" (step S3213: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the display screen from the 7 segment display section history selection screen to the 2nd time previous history screen (step S3213: Yes). S3214) (see FIG. 60), sets the 2nd previous history screen flag to ON (step S3215), and ends the 7-segment history selection screen process.

<Steps S3216 and S3217>
If the item provisionally selected when the enter button 21B is operated is not "History 2 (2nd time)" (step S3213: No), the MPU 51 changes the item provisionally selected to "History 3 (3rd time)". Therefore, the display screen is shifted from the 7-segment display section history selection screen to the 3rd previous history screen (step S3216) (see Figure 60), and the 3rd previous history screen flag is set to on. (Step S3217), and the 7-segment history selection screen process ends.

In this way, on the 7-segment history screen that is executed in the standby state, the display screen changes from the 7-segment display section history selection screen to any of the 1st previous history screen, 2nd previous history screen, and 3rd previous history screen. and corresponds to each of a plurality of non-set values displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 according to the number of game balls 99 that entered the special out ball opening 373 of the croon device 37 for the past three predetermined periods. All or part of the specific information can be confirmed (see FIG. 60). Therefore, if the player misses or forgets the content displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 at the ending of a jackpot game, the player can reconfirm the content displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 in the past. In the case of a change, the player after the change can check the past display contents of the 7-segment display section 39. This allows the player to identify or infer a plurality of non-setting values (setting values) in consideration of the past display contents of the 7-segment display section 39. Convenience for specifying or estimating is improved.

In particular, in the standby state, unless a variable game is executed by launching the game ball 99, and unless the player intentionally performs a screen transition operation, the display screen is the history screen (previous history screen). , 2nd previous history screen, and 3rd previous history screen) to other screens such as the change stop screen. Therefore, the player stops launching the game ball 99 and maintains the standby state without being subject to time constraints such as when specific information is displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 at the ending of a jackpot game. This allows the user to carefully and carefully take their time and check the specific information displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 in the past at their own pace. This allows players to think carefully at their own pace when specifying or estimating multiple non-setting values (setting values) based on past specific information. The convenience of specifying or estimating the set value is improved.

In the present embodiment, the past specific information on the 7-segment display section 39 that can be displayed on the symbol display section 341 by the player's operation (intention) in the standby state is displayed for a predetermined period of three times in the past. However, there is no limit to the number of past specific information that can be displayed. That is, it may be possible to confirm specific information for a predetermined period of one, two, or four or more past times.

Further, past specific information may be displayed not only by the symbol display section 341 but also by other display means as long as it has a display function. For example, the past specific information may be displayed on the 7-segment display section 39, or a display section different from the symbol display section 341 and the 7-segment display section 39, for example, a separate display section provided for displaying the past specific information. It may be a display section. In addition, if there is a display section provided to execute a part of a performance such as a variable game performance, apart from the symbol display section 341, past information may be displayed on the display section. Conceivable.

Further, in this embodiment, the same design changes as those in the first to third embodiments described above can be made within an applicable range.

[Fifth embodiment]
In the first embodiment described above, based on the number of times when a specific condition is satisfied during a specific period, after the specific period has elapsed (the ending of the jackpot game), each of the plurality of non-set values (set values) is set. A case has been described in which all or part of the specific information is presented on the 7-segment display section 39, and the presentation of the specific information on the 7-segment display section 39 is ended with the end of the jackpot game. That is, in the first embodiment described above, each time a specific period set as a predetermined period passes, specific information is displayed in a prescribed period set after the specific period has elapsed.

By the way, when displaying numbers corresponding to a plurality of non-set values on the 7-segment display section 39, all segments A to G of the 7-segment display section 39 are controlled, so that the numbers (non-set values) to be displayed are setting value) can be specified. Furthermore, it is also possible to grasp the numbers to be displayed on the seven segment display section 39 before all segments A to G become the control targets. For example, when segments A to G are controlled in the order of segment A → segment B → segment C → segment D → segment E → segment F → segment G, segment A, which is the first target to be controlled, is turned off. The number candidates displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 are "1" and "4". When segment F, which is the sixth control target, is turned on, it can be recognized as "4", and when segment F is turned off, it can be recognized as "1". That is, the number "1" or "4" can be recognized at the stage when segment F, which is the sixth control target, becomes the control target before all segments A to G become the control target. Furthermore, when segment A, which is the first control target, is turned on, the number candidates displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 are "2," "3," "5," and "6." Then, when segment B, which is the second control target, is turned on, it can be determined that it is either "2" or "3", and when segment B is turned off, it can be determined that it is "5" or "3". 6". Further, when the third control target, segment C, is turned on, it can be recognized as "3", and when segment C is turned off, it can be recognized as "2". That is, the number "2" or "3" can be recognized at the stage when segment C, which is the third control object, becomes the control object before all segments A to G become the control object. Further, when the fifth control target, segment E, is turned on, it can be recognized as "6", and when segment E is turned off, it can be recognized as "5". That is, the number "5" or "6" can be recognized at the stage when segment E, which is the fifth control object, becomes the control object before all segments A to G become the control object. In other words, the numbers "2" and "3" can be recognized when segment C, which is the third controlled object, is turned on or off, and the numbers "5" and "6" can be recognized when the segment C, which is the third controlled object, is turned on or off. It can be recognized when E is turned on or off, and the numbers "1" and "4" can be recognized when segment F, which is the sixth controlled object, is turned on or off.

However, in the first embodiment described above, segments A to G are controlled to display the next number to be displayed after all segments A to G have been controlled. Therefore, even if the numbers displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 can be recognized before all segments A to G become control targets, the next display will not be displayed until after all segments A to G become control targets. Control of segments A to G for displaying the target numbers is not started. Therefore, even if the player recognizes the number displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 before all segments A to G become control targets, the display of the next number to be displayed will start. Until now, information is displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 to identify the numbers that the player has already recognized. In other words, when segments A to G are controlled to display the next number to be displayed after all segments A to G have been controlled, information unnecessary for the player may be displayed on the seven segment display section 39. There is a concern that interest in the game may decrease during a period in which such unnecessary information is displayed on the 7-segment display section 39.

In addition, in the first embodiment described above, the 7-segment display section 39 is controlled at the ending of the jackpot game every time the specific period set for the jackpot game passes, so it corresponds to each of the plurality of non-set values. All or part of the numbers (specific information) to be used are dispensed in small amounts every time a specific period passes. Therefore, if a number corresponding to any non-set value is displayed in the specific period that has elapsed earlier, it is possible that the user may forget the number. In this case, it becomes difficult to specify or estimate the set value from a plurality of non-set values.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the non-set value display means (lamp display section) having a plurality of information display sections (six individual lamp sections) greater than or equal to the number of non-set values (five), each information display section Information (numbers) identifying non-set values is displayed. Each information display section has two modes: a display state (lit state) in which specific information is presented, and a non-display state (lights out state) in which specific information is not presented. Non-setting values can be specified by specific information displayed on the information display section. By setting the information display section in either of the two modes, the display state and the non-display state, the non-setting value can be specified by the specific information presented on the information display section in the display state. That is, in this embodiment, only information that allows identification of non-setting values is displayed as specific information, and information that allows estimation of non-setting values is not displayed. Therefore, after specific information that allows one non-setting value to be identified is presented, specific information for inferring the non-setting value is not unnecessarily presented, so unnecessary specific information is not presented. This prevents the player from losing interest in the game due to this.

There are no particular restrictions on the non-set value display means, but for example, a display device having a plurality of lamp groups that can be turned on and off individually, a display device having a plurality of 7-segment display sections, a liquid crystal display, an organic EL display, a dot display, etc. Examples include matrix displays and plasma displays. Further, as the non-set value display means, it is also possible to use a display means in which a decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner.

In addition, in this embodiment, the number of information display sections corresponding to the number of specific conditions satisfied in a predetermined period is displayed, and until the end of the jackpot game for which the end of the predetermined period is set, at least for a specific period The information display section that was previously set to the display state is set to the display state. For example, the information display section that was in the display state during the previous specific period in the same predetermined period is also in the display state in the specific period after the predetermined period. In this way, the information display section that was in the display state in the previous specific period in the same predetermined period is also in the display state in the specific period after the predetermined period, so that it is possible to change the display state at least during the specific period in the same predetermined period. But you can check it. Therefore, you will not forget the specific information displayed in the previous specific period in the same predetermined period, and it will be convenient when specifying multiple non-setting values based on the specific information, and even when specifying or estimating the setting value. performance is improved.

In addition, the information display section that is in the display state during the specific period may be kept in the display state at all times until the end of the jackpot game for which the predetermined period and the end of the predetermined period are set, and only during the jackpot game. The display state may be maintained, or the display state may be maintained only for a specific period.

In an example of the present embodiment, in a lamp display section having six individual lamp sections labeled with any number from 1 to 6, a game ball is entered into a special out ball opening of a croon device during a specific period. By winning the lamp lighting lottery, which is triggered by It is turned on. Then, during the predetermined period in which the specific period is set, the lighting state is maintained until the jackpot game for which the end of the predetermined period is set ends.

The present embodiment will be described below with reference to FIGS. 64 to 71, focusing on the differences from the above-described first embodiment. Note that FIGS. 69 to 71 are diagrams showing modified examples of this embodiment.

Here, FIG. 64 is a front view showing an example of the game board 31 of the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 65 is a block diagram showing an example of the system configuration of the gaming machine 10 shown in FIG. 66 is a diagram showing an example of turning on and off the lamp display section 35.

As shown in FIG. 64, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment is provided with a special out ball discharge section 38A in place of the game ball retention section 38 of the first embodiment described above, and is provided with a special out ball discharge section 38A. A lamp display section 35 is provided on the game board 31 in place of the seven segment display section 39 in the embodiment.

The special out ball discharging section 38A is for discharging the game balls 99 that have entered the special out ball opening 373 of the croon device 37 to the back side of the game board 31. This special out ball discharge section 38A has a configuration in which the stopper section 383 is omitted in the game ball retention section 38 of the first embodiment described above, and the game ball retention section 38A has a structure in which the stopper section 383 is omitted. It has a similar configuration. In such a special out ball discharging section 38A, the game balls 99 that have entered the special out ball opening 373 are discharged to the back side of the game board 31 without being retained (stopped) in the special out ball discharging section 38A. be done. Therefore, the game ball 99 that has entered the special out ball opening 373 is not detected by the special out ball sensor 384 after a specific period has elapsed as in the first embodiment described above, but is detected by the special out ball sensor 384 during the specific period. However, each time a game ball 99 enters the special out ball opening 373, it is detected by the special out ball sensor 384.

The lamp display section 35 presents specific information for specifying non-set values, and includes a plurality of (six) individual lamp sections (first to sixth individual lamp sections 351 to 356) that can be turned on and off individually. including. The first to sixth individual lamp sections 351 to 356 are arranged in a row (linear) in the left-right direction. As shown in FIG. 65, the lamp display section 35 is connected to the input/output I/F 52 of the audio lamp control device 5. As a result, as can be understood from FIG. 66, the first to sixth individual lamp sections 351 to 356 can be turned on and off individually.

The number 1 is attached to the first individual lamp section 351, and when the first individual lamp section 351 is lit, one of the plurality of non-set values is the game setting value 1, and the game setting value is set as the setting value. 1 is denied. The number 2 is attached to the second individual lamp section 352, and when the second individual lamp section 352 is lit, one of the plurality of non-set values is the game setting value 2, and the game setting value is set as the setting value. 2 is denied. The number 3 is attached to the third individual lamp section 353, and when the third individual lamp section 353 is lit, one of the plurality of non-set values is the game setting value 3, and the game setting value is set as the setting value. 3 is denied. The number 4 is attached to the fourth individual lamp section 354, and when the fourth individual lamp section 354 is lit, one of the plurality of non-set values is the game setting value 4, and the game setting value is set as the setting value. 4 is denied. The number 5 is attached to the fifth individual lamp section 355, and when the fifth individual lamp section 355 is lit, one of the plurality of non-set values is the game setting value 5, and the game setting value is set as the setting value. 5 is denied. The number 6 is attached to the sixth individual lamp section 356, and when the sixth individual lamp section 356 is lit, one of the plurality of non-set values is the game setting value 6, and the game setting value is set as the setting value. 6 is denied.

That is, in the lamp display section 35, the numbers attached to the individual lamp sections 351 to 356 that are turned on correspond to a plurality of non-setting values, and the game setting value corresponding to the number is denied as a setting value. Ru. When the five individual lamp sections 351 to 356 corresponding to all (five) non-set values are turned on, one individual lamp section 351 to 356 corresponding to the set value is turned off and turned off. The number corresponding to one of the individual lamp sections 351 to 356, which is the state, corresponds to the setting value.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 66(A), when the second to fifth individual lamp sections 352 to 356 are turned on and only the first individual lamp section 351 is turned off, the non-set value is 2 to 356. 6, and the setting value is 1. As shown in FIG. 66(B), when the first, third to sixth individual lamp sections 351, 353 to 356 are turned on and only the second individual lamp section 352 is turned off, the non-set value is 1, 3 to 6, and it is specified that the set value is 2. As shown in FIG. 66(C), when the first, second, fourth to sixth individual lamp sections 351, 352, 354 to 356 are turned on and only the third individual lamp section 353 is turned off, It is specified that the set values are 1, 2, 4 to 6, and that the set value is 3. As shown in FIG. 66(D), when the first to third, fifth, and sixth individual lamp sections 351 to 353, 355, and 356 are turned on and only the fourth individual lamp section 354 is turned off, the It is specified that the set values are 1 to 3, 5, and 6, and that the set value is 4. As shown in FIG. 66(E), when the first to fourth and sixth individual lamp sections 351 to 354, 356 are turned on and only the fifth individual lamp section 355 is turned off, the non-set value is 1 to 356. 4 and 6, and it is specified that the set value is 5. As shown in FIG. 66(F), when the first to fifth individual lamp sections 351 to 355 are lit and only the sixth individual lamp section 356 is turned off, the non-set value is 1 to 5, and the set It is specified that the value is 6. The first to sixth individual lamp sections 351 to 356 of the lamp display section 35 are controlled in the setting value suggestion process executed in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG.

[Setting value suggestion processing]
In the setting value suggestion process of this embodiment, control is executed to turn on and off the lamp display section 35 (first to sixth individual lamp sections 351 to 356), and the first to sixth individual lamp sections 351 to 356 The set value is suggested by specifying the non-set value based on the lighting state or the off state of the light. Here, FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the setting value suggestion process executed in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. 34. In the setting value suggestion process of this embodiment, control is executed to turn on and off the lamp display section 35 (first to sixth individual lamp sections 351 to 356), and the first to sixth individual lamp sections 351 to 356 The set value is suggested by specifying the non-set value based on the lighting state or the off state of the light. The procedure for setting value suggestion processing will be described below with reference to FIG.

<Step S3301>
As shown in FIG. 67, in step S3301, the MPU 51 determines whether the ending effect start flag is set on. The ending effect start flag is a flag for starting the ending effect, and is set to ON in step S2116 in the command determination process in FIG. 37. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether it is the timing to start the ending effect based on the ending effect start flag. Here, when the ending effect start flag is on (step S3301: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3302, and when the ending effect start flag is off (step S3301: No), the process moves to step S3311. to move to.

<Step S3302>
When the ending effect start flag is on (step S3301: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether the special out ball detection flag is set on or not (step S3302). The special out ball detection flag is a flag indicating that a game ball has been detected by the special out ball sensor 384, and is set to ON in step S2114 in the command determination process in FIG. 37. Here, if the special out ball detection flag is on (step S3302: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3303, and if the special out ball detection flag is off (step S3302: No), the MPU 51 sets the Ends value suggestion processing.

<Step S3303>
When the special out ball detection flag is on (step S3302: Yes), that is, when it is detected that the game ball 99 has entered the special out ball opening 373 of the croon device 37, the individual lamp units 351 to 356 are activated. A lamp lighting lottery will be held to decide whether to turn on the lamp or not. That is, each time a game ball 99 is entered into the special out ball opening 373 of the croon device 37, a lamp lighting lottery is performed to determine whether or not to light the individual lamp sections 351 to 356.

By the way, in the first embodiment described above, five numbers corresponding to a plurality of non-set values are displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 before the 5R normal jackpot game in which the end of the predetermined period is set ends. This allows the setting values to be recognized. In the 7-segment display section 39, in order to display 5 numbers, it is necessary to control each of the 7 segments A to G 5 times. ) or more must hold true. That is, it is necessary to enter 35 game balls 99 into the special out ball opening 373 of the croon device 37 during a predetermined period.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the first to sixth individual lamp sections 351 to 356 of the lamp display section 35 display information corresponding to non-set values, and the first to sixth individual lamp sections 351 to 356 are in the lighting state. It is controlled in only two modes: and the light-off state. Therefore, in order to display five non-set values on the lamp display section 35 so that the set values can be recognized, the specific condition only needs to be satisfied five or more times. Further, in this embodiment, a croon device 37 similar to that of the first embodiment described above is employed. Therefore, if specific conditions for controlling the first to sixth individual lamp sections 351 to 356 are set in the same manner as in the first embodiment, the five individual lamp sections 351 to 356 that display non-set values will be It is obvious that the light will be turned on with a small number of jackpots.

Therefore, in this embodiment, as a specific condition for controlling the first to sixth individual lamp sections 351 to 356, in addition to the game ball 99 being entered into the special out ball opening 373 of the croon device 37. , the condition is that you win the lamp lighting lottery. In other words, by employing the lamp lighting lottery, the degree of difficulty in establishing a specific condition is adjusted, and the difficulty in identifying all of the plurality of non-set values is adjusted. As a result, the difficulty level of lighting up the five individual lamp sections 351 to 356 that display numbers corresponding to the non-set values on the lamp display section 35 is adjusted, and the five non-set values can be easily identified. That is, the set value is prevented from being easily recognized.

The probability of winning in the lamp lighting lottery is determined by indicating the degree of difficulty for controlling the lighting of the five individual lamp units 351 to 356 by displaying five numbers on the 7-segment display unit 39 in the first embodiment described above. The level of difficulty is set to be the same or approximately the same as the level of difficulty. Furthermore, the probability of winning in the lamp lighting lottery may be the same for five individual lamp sections 351 to 356 corresponding to a plurality of non-set values, or may be the same probability of winning for at least one individual lamp section 351 to 356. The winning probability may be different from that of the other individual lamp sections 351 to 356.

If the winning probability in the lamp lighting lottery is set to be the same for the five individual lamp sections 351 to 356, a game feature is provided in which the probability that the individual lamp sections 351 to 356 corresponding to the non-set value are lit is stabilized. Ru. When the winning probability is set to be the same for the five individual lamp sections 351 to 356, for example, the winning probability is set to about 100×(1/7)% (=14.3%) (for example, 10% or more and 20% or less). be done. This is because in the first embodiment described above, one number is displayed on the 7-segment display section 39 when seven game balls 99 are entered into the special out ball opening 373 of the croon device 37. Also in this embodiment, when seven game balls 99 are entered into the special out ball opening 373, about one individual lamp section 351 to 356 is lit on average. Note that when the winning probability in the lamp lighting lottery is set to be the same for the five individual lamp sections 351 to 356 corresponding to a plurality of non-set values, the winning probability is not limited to 10% or more and 20% or less, and may be set as appropriate. Can be changed.

In addition, the lottery condition that triggers the execution of a lamp lighting lottery for lighting one of the five individual lamp units 351 to 356 corresponding to a plurality of non-set values is a special lottery condition of the clone device 37. If it is a different lottery condition that the game ball 99 enters the out ball opening 373, the winning probability in the lamp lighting lottery may be set according to the degree of difficulty of establishing this lottery condition. In other words, if the difficulty of meeting the lottery conditions is low, the probability of winning in the lamp lighting lottery may be set low, and as the difficulty of meeting the lottery conditions increases, the probability of winning in the lamp lighting lottery may be set to be high. It will be done. By setting the winning probability in the lamp lighting lottery in accordance with the degree of difficulty in establishing the lottery conditions, it is possible to specify the degree of difficulty in establishing a specific condition necessary for lighting one individual lamp section 351 to 356. can be made uniform regardless of the type of conditions. This makes it possible to apply various conditions as specific conditions (more precisely, as lottery triggers).

On the other hand, if the winning probability for at least one individual lamp section 351 to 356 is made different from that for the other individual lamp sections 351 to 356, a game in which the probability of individual lamp sections 351 to 356 corresponding to non-set values being lit varies. gender is given. If the probability of winning for at least one of the individual lamp sections 351 to 356 is set to be different from that of the other individual lamp sections 351 to 356, it is conceivable to set the winning probability to be lower for the individual lamp sections 351 to 356 that are controlled later in the control order, for example. As an example, the winning probability is set to 25%, 20%, 15%, 10%, and 5% in order from the individual lamp units 351 to 356 that are controlled earlier.

<Step S3304>
In step S3304, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the lamp lighting lottery has been won. If the MPU 51 has won the lamp lighting lottery (step S3304: Yes), the process moves to step S3305, and if the lamp lighting lottery has not been won (step S3304: No), the MPU 51 ends the set value processing. .

<Step S3305>
If the lamp lighting lottery has been won (step S3304: Yes), the MPU 51 reads the lit lamp information (step S3305).

Here, the lit lamp information is information regarding the individual lamp units 351 to 356 that are lit, and includes lit lamp flag information as shown in FIGS. 68(B) and 68(C). The lit lamp flag information includes a first lit lamp flag indicating whether the first individual lamp section 351 is lit, and a second lit lamp flag indicating whether the second individual lamp section 352 is lit. , a third lit lamp flag indicating whether or not the third individual lamp section 353 is lit, a fourth lit lamp flag indicating whether or not the fourth individual lamp section 354 is lit, and a fifth individual lamp section. It consists of a fifth lit lamp flag indicating whether or not 355 is lit, and a sixth lit lamp flag indicating whether or not the sixth individual lamp section 356 is lit. Each lit lamp flag is set to ON when the individual lamp units 351 to 356 are lit, and set to OFF when the individual lamp units 351 to 356 are turned off. In the example shown in FIG. 68(B), all lit lamp flags are set to off (initial state), indicating that all of the first to sixth individual lamp sections 351 to 356 are turned off. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 68(C), the second lit lamp flag is set to ON, the first, third to sixth lit lamp flags are set to OFF, and the second individual lamp section 352 is lit, and the first, third to sixth individual lamp sections 351, 353 to 356 are turned off.

<Step S3306>
In step S3306, the MPU 51 determines whether all lit lamp flags are set to on in the lit lamp information. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether all five individual lamp sections 351 to 356 that specify non-set values are lit. Then, when all the lit lamp flags are set to on in the lit lamp information (step S3306: Yes), the MPU 51 ends the setting value suggestion process. That is, if all five individual lamp sections 351 to 356 that specify non-set values are lit, there are no other individual lamp sections 351 to 356 that should be lit, so the set value suggestion process ends. On the other hand, if there is a lit lamp flag set to OFF in the lit lamp information (step S3306: No), the process moves to step S3307.

<Step S3307>
If there is a lit lamp flag set to OFF in the lit lamp information (step S3306: No), the MPU 51 reads out the control order of the individual lamps (lamp control order) (step S3307).

Here, the lamp control order is set, for example, by a procedure similar to the display order setting process (see FIG. 35) of the first embodiment described above. That is, the lamp control order is determined by referring to the lamp control order determination table based on the setting values stored in the RAM 412 when the power is turned on or when the setting values are changed. This lamp control order determination table is similar to the number display order determination table (see FIG. 36) in the first embodiment described above, and if the numbers in the number display order determination table are considered as numbers attached to individual lamps, good. The number 1 in the number display order determination table in the first embodiment described above corresponds to the first individual lamp section 351, and similarly, the number 1 in the number display order determination table in the first embodiment described above corresponds to the first individual lamp section 351. Numbers 2 to 6 correspond to the second to sixth individual lamp sections 352 to 356, respectively. For example, as shown in FIG. 68(A), when the display order A1 is determined when the set value is 1, the control order of the individual lamp units 351 to 356 is: second individual lamp unit 352 → third individual lamp unit The order is as follows: lamp part 353 → fourth individual lamp part 354 → fifth individual lamp part 355 → sixth individual lamp part 356. Furthermore, in the number display order determination table in the first embodiment described above, each display order has the same probability of being selected, and in the lamp control order determination table in this embodiment, each lamp control order is selected. The probabilities are the same.

Note that the lamp control order may be set when the power is turned on or when setting values are changed, but it may also be set when a predetermined period is started. Also, the lamp control orders do not need to have the same probability of being selected.

<Steps S3308 to S3310>
In step S3308, the MPU 51 determines the individual lamp units 351 to 356 to be controlled based on the lamp control order read out in step S3305 and the lit lamp information read out in step S3307 (step S3308), and The lamp units 351 to 356 are turned on (step S3309). That is, each time a game ball 99 enters the special out ball opening 373 of the croon device 37, a lamp lighting lottery is executed, and if the lamp lighting lottery is won, the individual lamp sections 351 to 356 are lit. Specific information indicating the non-set value is presented. Then, the MPU 51 updates the lit lamp information (step S3310), and ends the setting value suggestion process. For example, when the second individual lamp unit 352 is turned on when all the lit lamp flags are set to off (initial state) as in the example shown in FIG. 68(B), the lit lamp information is as shown in FIG. As shown in 68(C), the second lit lamp flag corresponding to the second individual lamp section 352 is set to ON.

As described above, in this embodiment, a lamp lighting lottery is executed every time a game ball 99 is entered into the special out ball opening 373 of the croon device 37, and if the lamp lighting lottery is won, the individual lamp units 351 to A non-set value can be specified by lighting up 356. That is, in this embodiment, the non-set value can be specified by lighting the individual lamp units 351 to 356 even before the specific period has elapsed. Since the individual lamp sections 351 to 356 are in either of the two states, the lit state and the unlit state, non-set values can be identified by the numbers attached to the individual lamp sections 351 to 356 that are in the lit state. be. That is, in this embodiment, only information that allows identification of non-set values by lighting of the individual lamp units 351 to 356 is presented, and information that allows estimation of non-set values is not presented. Therefore, after specific information that allows one non-setting value to be identified is presented, specific information for inferring the non-setting value is not unnecessarily presented, so unnecessary specific information is not presented. This prevents the player from losing interest in the game due to this.

<Step S3311>
When the ending performance start flag is off (step S3301: No), it is determined whether the jackpot game performance end flag is on (step S3311). The jackpot game performance end flag is a flag for ending the jackpot game performance (ending performance), and is set to ON in step S2118 of the command determination process in FIG. 37. Then, when the jackpot game performance end flag is on (step S3311: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3312, and when the jackpot game performance end flag is off (step S3311: No), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3312, and when the jackpot game performance end flag is off (step S3311: No), the corresponding set value End suggestion processing.

<Step S3312>
When the jackpot game performance end flag is on (step S3311: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether the jackpot type to be ended is the 5R normal jackpot (step S3312). Whether or not the jackpot type is a 5R normal jackpot can be determined based on whether the 5R normal jackpot flag, which can be set to on in step S2103 of FIG. 37, is on. Then, when the jackpot type is a 5R normal jackpot (step S3312: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3313, and when the jackpot type is not a 5R normal jackpot (step S3312: No), the MPU 51 executes the setting value suggestion process. finish.

<Steps S3313 and S3314>
When the jackpot type is a 5R normal jackpot (step S3312: Yes), the MPU 51 selects the individual lamp sections 351 to 356 that are lit among the individual lamp sections 351 to 356 of the lamp display section 35. The individual lamp sections 351 to 356 are turned off (step S3313), the lit lamp information is cleared (initialized), and the setting value suggestion process is ended. That is, the individual lamp sections 351 to 356 of the lamp display section 35 are turned off when the end of the predetermined period is set as a 5R normal jackpot. As a result, the lit individual lamp sections 351 to 356 are maintained in a lit state until the end of the 5R normal jackpot game in which the end of the predetermined period is set. Therefore, until the end of the 5R normal jackpot game in which the end of the predetermined period is set, it is possible to confirm that the individual lamp sections 351 to 356 are lit at any time, that is, the specific information that specifies the non-set value. . Therefore, you will not forget the specific information that was previously presented in the same predetermined period, and it will be more convenient when identifying multiple non-setting values based on the specific information, and ultimately when identifying or estimating the setting value. be done.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the game ball 99 is entered into the special out ball opening 373 of the croon device 37 and the player wins the lamp lighting lottery, which is executed as a trigger, the non-set value on the lamp display section 35 corresponds to the non-setting value. The individual lamp sections 351 to 356 are turned on, but it is optional to perform a lamp lighting lottery, and instead of performing a lamp lighting lottery as in the first embodiment, a game is placed on the special out ball opening 373. When the ball 99 enters, the individual lamp sections 351 to 356 corresponding to non-set values may be turned on. If the lamp lighting lottery is not performed in this way, the difficulty of putting the game ball 99 into the special out ball opening 373 of the clown device 37 is increased, or the game ball 99 that has entered the special out ball opening 373 is sent to the special out ball sensor 384. It is conceivable to adjust the probability that the individual lamp sections 351 to 356 will be lit by sorting the routes into routes detected by and routes not detected by the special out ball sensor 384.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the individual lamp sections 351 to 356 of the lamp display section 35 that present a non-set value are in one of two states, the lit state and the unlit state, and the individual lamp section 351 in the lit state Information specifying non-setting values is presented according to the type (number) of 356 to 356. That is, in this embodiment, only information that allows identification of non-set values by lighting of the individual lamp units 351 to 356 is presented, and information that allows estimation of non-set values is not presented. Therefore, after specific information that allows one non-setting value to be identified is presented, specific information for inferring the non-setting value is not unnecessarily presented, so unnecessary specific information is not presented. This prevents the player from losing interest in the game due to this.

In addition, the individual lamp sections 351 to 356 that are lit are immediately lit by winning a lamp lighting lottery that is executed when the game ball 99 is entered into the special out ball opening 373 of the croon device 37. The lit individual lamp sections 351 to 356 remain lit until the end of the 5R normal jackpot game in which the end of the predetermined period is set. Therefore, until the end of the 5R normal jackpot game in which the end of the predetermined period is set, the specific information that identifies the non-set value is checked at any time based on whether or not the individual lamp sections 351 to 356 are lit. be able to. Therefore, you will not forget the specific information presented in the previous specific period in the same predetermined period, and it will be convenient when specifying multiple non-setting values based on the specific information, and even when specifying or estimating the setting value. performance is improved.

In addition, in this embodiment, as a specific condition for controlling the first to sixth individual lamp sections 351 to 356, in addition to the game ball 99 being entered into the special out ball opening 373 of the croon device 37. , the condition is that you win the lamp lighting lottery. As a result, the degree of difficulty in satisfying a specific condition is adjusted based on the probability of winning the lamp lighting lottery, and the difficulty in identifying all of the plurality of non-set values is adjusted. Therefore, the difficulty level of lighting up each of the five individual lamp sections 351 to 356 that display numbers corresponding to the non-set values on the lamp display section 35 is adjusted, and the five non-set values can be easily identified. , that is, the set value is prevented from being easily recognized.

It should be noted that the light is immediately turned on by winning the lamp lighting lottery which is triggered by the game ball 99 entering the special out ball opening 373 of the croon device 37, but the lamp lighting lottery is executed ( The fact that the game ball 99 has entered the special out ball opening 373) and the result of the lamp lighting lottery may be displayed to the player on a display means other than the lamp display section 35. For example, as shown in FIG. 69(A), it is clearly shown to the player that the lamp lighting lottery will be executed (that the game ball 99 has entered the special out ball opening 373 of the clown device 37), and The results of the lamp lighting lottery are clearly shown to the player as shown in (B1) or FIG. 69 (B2), and the individual lamp sections 351 to 356 are lit as shown in FIG. 69 (C1) or FIG. 69 (C2). Information regarding the symbol is clearly displayed on the symbol display section 341. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 69(A), when the game ball 99 is entered into the special out ball opening 373 of the croon device 37, the individual lamp sections 351 to 356 of the lamp display section 35 are lit. An image is displayed to draw attention to the possibility, that is, the lamp display section 35 (roulette). In this way, by clearly indicating that the lamp lighting lottery will be executed (that the game ball 99 has entered the special out ball opening 373) by the symbol display section 341, the game ball 99 will be displayed in the special out ball opening 373. Even if you miss that the game ball 99 has entered the special out ball opening 373, the image displayed on the symbol display section 341 will show that the game ball 99 has entered the special out ball opening 373, that is, the individual lamp sections 351 to 356 It is possible to know that there is a possibility that the light may be turned on.

If the lamp lighting lottery is won, as shown in FIG. 69 (B1), information regarding the individual lamp sections 351 to 356 that are to be turned on is clearly displayed. In the illustrated example, it is clearly shown that the second individual lamp section 352 is lit. In this way, by clearly displaying the result of the lamp lighting lottery on the symbol display section 341, it is possible to grasp whether or not the individual lamp sections 351 to 356 are lit not only on the lamp display section 35 but also on the symbol display section 341. This makes it possible to improve convenience.

Further, as shown in FIG. 69 (C1), in the symbol display section 341, information regarding the lit individual lamp sections 351 to 356 is continuously displayed during the execution of the jackpot game (at least during the opening/closing execution mode). be done. That is, the individual lamp sections 351 to 356 of the individual lamp section 35 that are lit are displayed on the symbol display section 341. Note that until the end of the 5R normal jackpot in which the end of the predetermined period is set, information regarding the individual lamp sections 351 to 356 that are lit may be displayed, for example, in the jackpot game (at least in the opening/closing execution mode). .

On the other hand, if the result of the lamp lighting lottery is a non-winning result, an image clearly indicating that the lamp lighting lottery result is a non-winning is displayed as shown in FIG. 69 (B1). In this way, information regarding the individual lamp sections 351 to 356 that are lit is continuously displayed by the symbol display section 341 during the execution of the jackpot game (at least during the execution of the opening/closing execution mode), so that the lamp display section 35 is Convenience is improved because the lit individual lamp sections 351 to 356 can be confirmed on the symbol display section 341 without needing confirmation.

Further, the specific information indicating the non-set value may be presented only on the symbol display section 341 instead of on the lamp display section 35 provided separately from the symbol display section 341. That is, the specific information may be presented to the player only by the effect on the symbol display section 341 regarding the lamp lighting lottery in the jackpot game (opening/closing execution mode) described with reference to FIG.

Also, in this embodiment, similarly to the first embodiment described above, an ending additional image for specifying a non-set value may be displayed on the symbol display section 341 in the ending performance of the jackpot game. . For example, as shown in FIG. 70, at the ending of a jackpot game, an image imitating the lamp display section 35 is displayed on the symbol display section 341 as an additional ending image. In the example shown in FIG. 70(A), the lamp display section 35 clearly shows that only the second individual lamp section 352 is lit, and in the example shown in FIG. It is clearly shown that the sixth individual lamp sections 352 to 356 are turned on and only the first individual lamp section 351 is turned off. In this way, by displaying the on/off state of the lamp display section 35 by the symbol display section 341 at the ending of the jackpot game, it is possible to confirm the on/off state of the individual lamp sections 351 to 356 that have been lit up to the jackpot game. Therefore, convenience is improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, the lamp display section 35 has the individual lamp sections 351 to 356 arranged in a row (line shape); It is not limited to those arranged in a row, but other shapes can also be adopted. For example, a lamp display section 35 in which individual lamp sections 351 to 356 are arranged in an annular manner as shown in FIG. 71(A), and a lamp display section 35 in which individual lamp sections 351 to 356 are arranged in a matrix as shown in FIG. 71(B) may be adopted. You can also do that. Further, the lamp display section 35 may be one in which individual lamp sections 351 to 356 are arranged in a staggered manner.

Further, instead of the lamp display section 35, a display device in which a plurality of 7-segment display devices are arranged in a row, a ring, a matrix, a staggered pattern, etc. may be adopted.

Further, in this embodiment, the same design changes as those in the first to fourth embodiments described above can be made within an applicable range.

[Sixth embodiment]
In the first embodiment described above, for each jackpot game executed in a predetermined period (period from the start of the jackpot game for the first jackpot in the low probability mode to the end of the opening/closing execution mode in the normal jackpot game for the normal jackpot) A specific period (period from the start of the jackpot game to the end of the opening/closing execution mode) is set, and the number of game balls 99 that enters the special out ball opening 373 of the croon device 37 within the specific period when a specific condition is satisfied In the ending of the jackpot game in which the specific period is set, all or part of the specific information (numbers) corresponding to each of the plurality of non-set values (set values) is displayed on the 7-segment display section 39. We have explained the case presented in

By the way, in gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines, a power outage monitoring process (power monitoring processing) is executed. In this power outage monitoring process, if the drive voltage is below a predetermined value, it is determined that a power outage has occurred, and various information is backed up. After the power is restored, the game proceeds in the state before the power was cut off based on the backup of various information.

However, in conventional power failure monitoring processing (power supply monitoring processing), it is determined whether the power has been cut off based on the drive voltage being below a predetermined value, and therefore the gaming machine cannot determine the cause of the power cutoff. Here, cutting off the power supply to the gaming machines includes, for example, cutting off the power supply to the island equipment of the gaming hall, simultaneously cutting off the power supply to each gaming machine in the gaming hall of the island equipment, and individually cutting off the power supply of the gaming machines. Examples include cutting off the power supply to each gaming machine by turning off a switch, cutting off the power supply to the gaming machine due to a power outage, and cutting off the power supply to the gaming machine due to a so-called "goto" act.

On the other hand, in the game hall, the power supply to the game machines in the island equipment is started all at once (power restoration) by starting power supply to the island equipment in the game hall, or each of the game machines is turned off by turning off the individual power switches of the game machines. Individual power supply to the gaming machine is started (power restored). Then, in the game machine to which power supply has been started (power restored), a power restoration process is executed, and as described above, the game proceeds in the state before the power was cut off based on the backup of various information at the time of the power cut.

Therefore, it is desirable for gaming machines to be improved in response to various conditions in the processing when power supply to the gaming machine is started, and the processing when power supply to the gaming machine is started and when the power is cut off. In processing, it is desirable to execute processing according to various states at the time of power shutdown.

In contrast, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the state of the power switch, which is a displacing means capable of displacing between a first state (for example, an OFF state) and a second state (for example, an ON state), is If the power switch is determined to be in the first state based on the detection content by the power switch state detection unit as a detection means capable of detecting the state of the If it is determined that the power switch is in the second state, the first process (e.g., power-on process) is executed when it is determined that the power switch is in an abnormal state (e.g., the power switch is turned off). The second process (for example, the process at the time of power outage recovery) is executed based on the judgment that the power is restored without turning on the power switch or shutting off the power without turning off the power switch.

In this way, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the first process when normal or the second process when abnormal is performed depending on the state of the power switch determined based on the detection content by the power switch state detection section. executed. Therefore, the first process for normal times or the second process for abnormal times is executed depending on the state of the power switch determined based on the detection content by the power switch state detection unit, so the first process is executed. By this, it is possible to determine that the state of the power switch is normal, while by executing the second process, it is possible to determine that the state of the power switch is abnormal. It becomes possible to execute processing according to the state of the displacement means (for example, the state of the displacement means at the time of power cutoff) at least one of the time of power cutoff and the time of power restoration.

Specifically, the gaming machine of this embodiment includes a power switch state detection section that detects at least one of the on state and off state of the power switch of the gaming machine. Further, the gaming machine of this embodiment checks at least one of the on state and off state of the power switch based on the detection result of the power switch state detection section when the power is cut off. Thereby, it is possible to distinguish whether the power interruption is due to turning off the power switch or not due to turning off the power switch. Therefore, when the power is cut off or when the power is restored, at least one of the main control device and the audio lamp control device can execute processing according to the state of the power switch at the time of the power cut. Become.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, a command that can specify the state of the power switch at the time of power cut-off is sent to the voice lamp control device at the time of the power cut-off or when the power is restored after the power cut-off. The position of the movable accessory member is controlled according to the state of the power switch when the power is cut off. For example, in this embodiment, when the state of the power switch at the time of the power cutoff is in the on state, the movable accessory member is located in the standby position (normal position), while the state of the power switch at the time of the power cutoff is is in the off state, the movable accessory member is located in the operating position. Of course, when the power switch is in the on state when the power is cut off, the movable accessory member is located in the operating position, and when the power switch is in the off state when the power is cut off, the movable accessory member is in the operating position. The movable accessory member may be controlled so that the object member is located at a standby position (normal position).

In this way, by controlling the position of the movable accessory member according to the state of the power switch when the power is cut off, the game hall can confirm that the cause of the power cut is not due to the turning off of the power switch. It can be visually recognized from the state of the gaming machine (the position of the movable accessory member). This makes it possible for the game hall side to easily detect the occurrence of a cheating act.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, if the power switch is in a predetermined state when the power is cut off, for example, when the power switch is in the OFF state when the power is cut off to the gaming machine, when the power is restored after the power is cut off, Error processing such as error notification is executed. In this way, if the power switch is in a predetermined state when the power is cut off, for example, if the power switch is in the OFF state when the power is cut off to the gaming machine, an error notification etc. will be sent when the power is restored after the power is cut off. By executing this error process, the gaming hall side can confirm that the power cut to the gaming machine was not caused by turning off the power switch, for example, the power supply to the gaming machine was cut off due to a power outage or a misbehavior. can be understood. This makes it possible for the gaming hall to respond to power interruptions to the gaming machines that are not caused by turning off the power switch.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, execution of a specific performance (for example, RTC performance) or a predetermined performance (for example, stationary performance) is restricted based on the state of the power switch when the power of the gaming machine is cut off. Specifically, in this embodiment, when the power switch of the gaming machine is turned off when the power is turned off (when the power is restored by turning on the power switch), execution of a specific effect (for example, RTC effect) is disabled. If the power switch is in the on state when the power to the game machine is turned off (when the power supply to the island equipment of the game hall is started), the execution of a predetermined effect (for example, a stationary effect) is restricted. . In this way, when the power to the gaming machine is interrupted by turning off the power switch (when the power is restored by turning on the power switch), execution of a specific effect (for example, RTC effect) is restricted, and the execution of a specific effect (for example, RTC effect) is restricted. If the power cut-off is not caused by turning off the power switch (when the power is restored by turning on the power switch), the execution of a predetermined effect (for example, a stationary effect) is restricted, thereby preventing power cut-off to the gaming machine. Inconveniences may occur due to the execution of a specific performance (for example, RTC performance) when the power switch is turned off (for example, a shift in the execution timing of the RTC performance), or if the power to the gaming machine is cut off when the power switch is turned off. This prevents inconveniences (for example, the player from knowing the game setting values) due to the execution of a predetermined performance (for example, a fixed performance) when the game is not based on the game.

Note that the first process and the second process do not necessarily need to be special control processes executed by the main control device, the audio lamp control device, or the like. For example, the first process (normal process) is to execute normal process without any special process, and the second process (abnormal process) is to perform special process in addition to or in place of some or all of the normal process. It is conceivable that some processing may be executed. Specifically, the first process is a process that allows the game to proceed (for example, execution of a jackpot lottery, notification of jackpot lottery results (for example, variable display and stop display of special symbols and decorative symbols), firing of game balls 99). Execute. On the other hand, as a second process, a process that makes it impossible to proceed with the game (for example, non-execution of the jackpot lottery, non-notification of the jackpot lottery result (for example, non-fluctuation of special symbols and decorative symbols), and stopping of firing of the game ball 99) is executed. Further, the first process and the second process may be execution/non-execution of a prescribed performance executed in the progress of a variable game or a jackpot game. For example, the first process may be a process that limits execution of a specific effect, and the second process may be a process that limits execution of a predetermined effect. In other words, for example, the first process may be the execution of a specific process and the second process may be the non-execution of the specific process; conversely, the first process may be the non-execution of the predetermined process and the second process is the predetermined process. It may also be the execution of a process. Specifically, for example, the first process may be the execution of a process that allows the game to proceed, and the second process may be the non-execution of the process that allows the game to proceed.

The present embodiment will be described below with reference to FIGS. 72 to 82, focusing on the differences from the above-described first embodiment.

[Configuration of inner frame 12]
Here, FIG. 72 is a front view showing an example of the game board 31 when the movable accessory member 342 of the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment is in the standby position, and FIG. 73 is a front view showing an example of the game board 31 when the movable accessory member 342 is in the operating position. FIG. 3 is a front view showing an example of the game board 31 when the game board 31 is in the state shown in FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 72 and 73, in the gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment, a movable accessory member 342 is provided on the gaming board 31. The movable accessory member 342 is a decorative member that can operate in a predetermined manner in the gaming machine 10 and is generally also referred to as an "accessory". In this embodiment, the movable accessory member 342 is set at a predetermined standby position located above the symbol display section 341 (see FIG. 72) and at a position below the standby position toward the center of the symbol display section 341. It is movable along the surface of the symbol display section 341 between the operating position (see FIG. 73).

In addition, the movable accessory member 342 may be entirely hidden without being exposed from the opening 31A at the standby position. Further, the gaming machine 10 may include a plurality of movable accessory members 342. Further, the movable accessory member 342 may be a combination of a plurality of separated movable members, a member that can be transformed into two or more forms, or a member that includes a display such as a liquid crystal display device. Of course, the movable accessory member 342 is not limited to covering a part of the display screen of the symbol display section 341, but may cover the entire display screen.

Such a movable accessory member 342 is controlled to operate in a variable game production for showing a lottery result in a jackpot lottery in a variable game. In particular, the movable accessory member 342 is operated as a confirmation effect indicating that the lottery result in a jackpot lottery is a win, and also as a chance-up effect when the probability of the lottery being a jackpot is high. There are many things. In addition, in this embodiment, the movable accessory member 342 may be operated in a promotion performance from a normal jackpot to a probability-variable jackpot, or a reserved successive win confirmation performance in a jackpot game.

In addition, in this embodiment, the movable accessory member 342 can be used to prevent a power outage that does not occur when the power switch 91 is turned off, as will be described later, for example, when the power to the gaming machine 10 is interrupted due to a power outage while the gaming hall is in operation or due to a misbehavior. When power is cut off to the island equipment of the game hall, it is moved to the operating position (see FIG. 73). Here, the store can be aware of power outages while the game hall is in operation or power cutoffs to the island equipment of the game hall. On the other hand, although the game hall side cannot directly grasp the power cutoff to the gaming machine 10 due to misbehavior, the movable accessory member 342 is moved to the operating position when the power to the gaming machine 10 is cut off, so that the game machine 10 due to misbehavior can be It becomes possible for the game hall side to understand whether the power supply to 10 is cut off. This makes it easier to detect misbehavior.

[System configuration of gaming machine 10]
The gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment includes a drive mechanism for the movable accessory member 342, and also includes a power monitoring circuit 95 for the power control device 9 to monitor power interruption. Here, FIG. 74 is a block diagram showing an example of a part of the system configuration of the gaming machine 10.

[Drive mechanism of movable accessory member 342]
As shown in FIG. 74, the gaming machine 10 includes a motor 342a that supplies driving force to the movable accessory member 342, and a return detection unit 342b that detects that the movable accessory member 342 has returned to the standby position. has. The motor 342a is a stepping motor, a DC motor, or the like, and the return detection section 342b is an optical sensor, a contact sensor, or the like. The movable accessory member 342 and the motor 342a are connected via a drive transmission mechanism such as a drive gear (not shown), and the movable accessory member 342 is directed from the standby position to the operating position according to the rotational direction of the motor 342a. or upward from the operating position to the standby position.

The gaming machine 10 also includes a motor driver 342c to which a motor 342a and a return detection section 342b are connected. The motor driver 342c is connected to the input/output I/F 52 of the audio lamp control device 5. Then, the motor driver 342c controls the motor 342a according to a control instruction from the audio lamp control device 5. Further, the motor driver 342c can acquire the detection result by the return detection section 342b and transmit it to the audio lamp control device 5. Note that the motor 342a and the return detection section 342b may be directly connected to the input/output I/F 52 of the audio lamp control device 5 and controlled by the audio lamp control device 5.
In the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the power supply control device 9 includes a power supply monitoring circuit that monitors the cutoff of power from the power supply equipment to the gaming machine 10, and a power switch that detects the on state or off state of the power cutoff switch 91. This embodiment differs from the first embodiment described above in that the state detection section is connected to the MPU 41 of the main control device 4.

[Power control device 9]
The power supply control device 9 of this embodiment includes a power switch 91, a RAM erase switch 92, a charging means 93, a power supply section 94, and a power supply monitoring circuit 95.

The power switch 91 and the RAM erase switch 92 are the same as those in the first embodiment described above, so their explanation will be omitted.

As described in the first embodiment, the charging means 93 is charged with electric power supplied from the power supply equipment PS, and is, for example, a capacitor or a secondary battery. With this charging means, in the gaming machine 10, even if the power supply from the power supply equipment PS is cut off, the information in the RAM provided in the control device is retained for a certain period of time by the power discharged from the capacitor. Further, in the gaming machine 10, even if the power supply from the power supply equipment PS is cut off, the control device can be driven for a certain period of time by the power discharged from the secondary battery, and the movable accessory member 342 can be moved into the operating position.

The power supply section 94 takes in external power (for example, AC 24V) supplied from the external power supply PS, converts it into internal power (for example, DC 24V), and generates various kinds of electric power from the internal power. The electric power generated by the power supply unit 94 is the driving voltage (for example, 12 V DC) electric power for driving devices such as various solenoids and various motors, and is used to drive various switches and execute control processing. This includes control voltage power (for example, 5 V DC) for the main controller 4, backup voltage power for retaining the contents of the RAM 412 of the MPU 41 in the main controller 4, and the like.

A power switch 91 is connected to the power supply section 94, and when the power switch 91 is in the on state, external power is taken in from the equipment power supply PS, and when the power switch 91 is in the off state, the equipment power supply is taken in. The intake of external power from the PS is stopped.

Further, the power supply unit 94 supplies various types of power generated from internal power to a power supply monitoring circuit 95, main control device 4, audio lamp control device 5, payout control device 7, firing control device 8 (see FIG. 12), etc. do. Specifically, the power supply monitoring circuit 95 is supplied with internal power, driving voltage, control voltage, and backup voltage. The main controller 4 is supplied with driving voltage, control voltage, and backup voltage power through a power supply monitoring circuit 95 . The audio lamp control device 5 is supplied with driving voltage and control voltage power. The payout control device 7 is supplied with driving voltage and control voltage power. The launch control device 8 is supplied with driving voltage and control voltage power.

The power supply monitoring circuit 95 monitors interruption of power supply from the power supply equipment PS to the power supply section 94. Specifically, the power supply monitoring circuit 95 monitors the drive voltage (for example, DC 12V) supplied from the power supply unit 94 to the main controller 4, and the drive voltage (monitoring voltage) is set at a predetermined level. When it is confirmed that the voltage is less than the value (for example, less than 10 V volts), a power cutoff signal indicating that the power supply from the power supply equipment PS to the power supply unit 94 has been cut off is output to the main controller 4. When the main control device 4 receives the power cutoff signal, it executes a power cutoff process (see FIG. 77), which will be described later.

Although the details of the power cut-off process will be described later, in the power cut-off process of this embodiment, the on/off state of the power switch 91 at the time of power cut is confirmed, and the switch state is changed according to the on/off state. A flag is set. In this way, the switch status flag is set according to the on/off state of the power switch 91 when the power is cut off, and by checking the switch status flag when the power supply is restored, it is possible to check the switch status flag when the power supply is restored. It is possible to determine whether the problem is caused by turning off the power switch 91 or by something other than turning off the power switch 91 (for example, power outage, cheating, power cutoff to the island equipment of the game hall). This prevents troubles that may occur when the power is cut off due to reasons other than turning off the power switch 91, such as undetected misbehavior and execution of a deferred performance, and makes it possible to detect mishaps.

In addition to the driving voltage (for example, 12 V DC) supplied to the main controller 4, the monitoring voltage includes the maximum voltage output from the power supply section 94 (for example, 24 V DC). In this case, the power supply monitoring circuit 95 outputs a power cutoff signal to the main controller 4 when it is confirmed that the monitored voltage is less than 22 V DC, for example.

Note that in this embodiment, "power cutoff" refers to the voltage monitored by the power supply monitoring circuit 95 becoming less than a predetermined value, and does not necessarily mean that the power supply is completely cut off.

Further, in this embodiment, a power switch state detection section 91a is connected to the main control device 4. This power switch state detection section 91a is used to determine whether the power switch 91 is in an on state or an off state. The power switch state detection unit 91a is not particularly limited as long as it can at least determine that the power switch 91 is in the on state or that the power switch 91 is in the off state. For example, there is a device that can detect at least one of the case where the power switch 91 is off and the case where the power switch 91 is off, and various known sensors and switches can be used. For example, the power switch state detection section 91a may use light, radiation, magnetism, or electricity, a combination of two or more of light, magnetism, and electricity, or a mechanical switch. Specifically, examples of the power switch state detection section 91a include an optical sensor, a photoelectric sensor, a photodiode, an infrared sensor, a proximity sensor, a limit switch, a push button switch, a piezoelectric element, and the like.

Here, FIG. 75 is a diagram showing an example of the power switch 91 and the power switch state detection section 91a of the power supply control device 9. Note that in the example shown in FIG. 75, the power switch state detection unit 91a outputs a low level signal when the power switch 91 is in the on state, and outputs a high level signal when the power switch 91 is in the off state. . That is, the power switch state detection unit 91a shown in FIG. 75 detects that the power switch 91 is in the off state. Of course, the power switch state detection unit 91a may be configured to detect that the power switch 91 is in the on state, or may be capable of detecting both the on state and the off state of the power switch 91. A sensor that can detect that the power switch 91 is in the on state and a sensor that can detect that the power switch 91 is in the off state are used together, and the power switch 91 is in the on state based on the detection results of the two sensors. Alternatively, it may be determined whether the device is in the off state or in the off state.

The power switch 91 shown in FIGS. 75(A1) to 75(A3) is a push-type rotary switch (rocker switch). In this power switch 91, the state in which the upper half of the operating section 911 shown in FIG. 75 (A2) is pressed down is the on state, and the state in which the lower half of the operating section 911 shown in FIG. 75 (A3) is pressed down. is off. Further, the power switch state detection section 91a is arranged at a position opposite to the lower half of the operation section 911, and when the lower half of the operation section 911 approaches or contacts the power switch state detection section 91a, or the operation section The lower half of 911 outputs a high level signal to MPU 41 of main control device 4 by pressing power switch state detection section 91a. On the other hand, the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 can understand that the power switch state detection section 91a is in the off state by receiving the high level signal from the power switch state detection section 91a.

The power switch 91 shown in FIGS. 75(B1) to 75(B3) is a lever-type rotary switch (one-way switch, toggle switch). In this power switch 91, the state in which the operating portion 911 is in the upper position shown in FIG. 75 (B2) is the on state, and the state in which the operating portion 911 is in the lower position shown in FIG. 75 (B3) is in the off state. Further, the power switch state detection section 91a is arranged at a position opposite to the lower end of a rotating body 912 that rotates integrally with the operation section 911, such that the lower end of the rotating body 912 is close to or close to the power switch state detection section 91a. A high-level signal is output to the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 by contacting it or by pressing the power switch state detection section 91a with the lower half of the operation section 911. On the other hand, the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 can understand that the power switch state detection section 91a is in the off state by receiving the high level signal from the power switch state detection section 91a.

The power switch 91 shown in FIGS. 75(C1) to 75(C3) is a selector switch. In this power switch 91, the state in which the operation part 911 is rotated to the left as shown in FIG. 75 (C2) is the on state, and the state in which the operation part 911 is in the position in which it is rotated to the right as shown in FIG. 75 (C3) is the on state. is off. Further, when the operating section 911 is in the clockwise rotated position, the power switch state detecting section 91a is located on the back side of the through hole 913 located on the back side of the upper end of the operating section 911. Placed. In this case, an optical sensor is adopted as the power switch state detection section 91a, for example, and the power switch state detection section 91a mainly controls a high level signal when the presence of an object in front of the through hole 913 is detected. It is output to the MPU 41 of the device 4. On the other hand, the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 can understand that the power switch state detection section 91a is in the off state by receiving the high level signal from the power switch state detection section 91a.

The power switch 91 shown in FIGS. 75(D1) to 75(D3) is a slide switch. In this power switch 91, the state in which the operating portion 911 is in the upper position shown in FIG. 75 (D2) is the on state, and the state in which the operating portion 911 is in the lower position shown in FIG. 75 (D3) is in the off state. Further, the power switch state detection section 91a is arranged at a position opposite to the lower end of the operation section 911 when the operation section 911 is in the lower position, and the lower end of the operation section 911 is close to the power switch state detection section 91a. A high-level signal is output to the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 by contacting it or by pressing the power switch state detection section 91a with the lower half of the operation section 911. On the other hand, the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 can understand that the power switch state detection section 91a is in the off state by receiving the high level signal from the power switch state detection section 91a.

Note that the power switch 91 may be another switch such as a push button switch, for example.

[Processing of main controller 4]
In this embodiment, different processes are executed in the main process when the power is restored depending on the cause of the power cut, and in the (usually) main process that is executed after the main process when the power is restored, in the main process when the power is restored, This embodiment differs from the above-described first embodiment in that a process is executed that allows determining the cause at the time of power shutdown. The present embodiment will be described below with reference to FIGS. 76 to 80, focusing on the differences from the above-described first embodiment.

[Normal main processing]
In the normal main processing of this embodiment, basically the same processing as the main processing (see FIG. 23) executed by the main control device 4 in the first embodiment described above is executed, but the power supply control device 9 The main process executed by the main controller 4 in the first embodiment is different from the main process ( (see FIG. 23). Here, FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the normal main processing executed by the main control device.

<Step S3401>
As shown in FIG. 76, in the normal main processing of this embodiment, the MPU 41 performs steps S1301 to S1309 similarly to the main processing executed by the main controller 4 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 23). After executing the process, it is determined whether the monitored voltage monitored by the power supply monitoring circuit 95 of the power supply control device 9 is less than a predetermined value (step S3401). Specifically, the MPU 41 performs monitoring depending on whether or not it has received a power cutoff signal transmitted from the power supply monitoring circuit 95 to the main controller 4 (MPU 41) when the monitored voltage is less than a predetermined value as described above. It is determined whether the voltage is less than a predetermined value.

If the monitored voltage monitored by the power monitoring circuit 95 is less than a predetermined value (step S3401: Yes), that is, if the MPU 41 receives a power cutoff signal transmitted from the power monitoring circuit 95, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3402. do. On the other hand, if the monitored voltage monitored by the power monitoring circuit 95 is not less than the predetermined value (step S3401: No), that is, if the power cutoff signal transmitted from the power monitoring circuit 95 is not received, the MPU 41 As in the first embodiment, the processes of steps S1310 to S1312 are executed.

<Step S3402>
If the monitored voltage monitored by the power supply monitoring circuit 95 is less than a predetermined value (step S3401: Yes), that is, if a power cutoff signal transmitted from the power supply monitoring circuit 95 is received, the MPU 41 executes a power cutoff process. . Note that details of the power-off processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 77.

[Processing when power is cut off]
In the power cutoff processing of this embodiment, a switch state flag is set according to the on/off state of the power switch 91 at the time of power cutoff. Here, FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the power-off processing executed in the normal main processing of FIG. 76.

<Step S3501>
As shown in FIG. 77, in the power cutoff process of this embodiment, the MPU 41 first determines whether the power switch 91 is in the off state. Specifically, the MPU 41 determines whether the level of the signal transmitted from the power switch state detection section 91a is high level. When the power switch 91 is in the off state (step S3501: Yes), that is, when the level of the signal transmitted from the power switch state detection unit 91a is high level, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3502. On the other hand, when the power switch 91 is in the on state (step S3501: No), that is, when the level of the signal transmitted from the power switch state detection section 91a is low level, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3504.

<Steps S3502 and S3503>
When the power switch 91 is in the off state (step S3501: Yes), that is, when the level of the signal transmitted from the power switch state detection unit 91a is high level, the MPU 41 sets a switch power-off command (step S3502). ). Here, the switch power off command is a command that notifies the audio lamp control device 5 that the power supply to the gaming machine 10 has been cut off by turning off the power switch 91. This switch power-off command is sent to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1301 in the main process of FIG. Thereby, the audio lamp control device 5 can understand that the power supply to the gaming machine 10 has been cut off by turning off the power switch 91.

Then, the MPU 41 sets the switch status flag to OFF (step S3503), and moves the process to step S3506. Here, the switch status flag is a flag indicating whether or not the power supply to the gaming machine 10 is cut off by turning off the power switch 91. Specifically, when the switch status flag is off, it indicates that the power supply to the gaming machine 10 has been cut off by turning off the power switch 91, and when the switch status flag is on, it indicates that the power supply to the gaming machine 10 has been cut off. This indicates that the power supply to the gaming machine 10 has been cut off due to a cause (eg, power outage, misbehavior, power cut off to island equipment). This switch state flag is referenced in the main process at power recovery shown in FIG. 78, which will be described later, and the process according to the setting type of the switch state flag (the process at power-on in FIG. 79 or the process at power recovery shown in FIG. 80) is executed. Ru.

<Steps S3504 and S3505>
When the power switch 91 is in the on state (step S3501: No), that is, when the level of the signal transmitted from the power switch state detection unit 91a is low level, the MPU 41 sets a non-switch power-off command (step S3501: No). S3504). Here, the non-switch power-off command is a command that notifies the audio lamp control device 5 that the power supply to the gaming machine 10 has been cut off while the power switch 91 is in the on state. This non-switch power-off command is sent to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1301 in the main process of FIG. Thereby, the audio lamp control device 5 can understand that the power supply to the gaming machine 10 is cut off while the power switch 91 is in the on state.

Then, the MPU 41 sets the switch status flag to ON (step S3505), and moves the process to step S3506. That is, when the power supply to the gaming machine 10 is cut off while the power switch 91 remains on without being turned off, the MPU 41 sets a switch status flag indicating this to on.

<Steps S3506 to 3508>
When the processing in steps S3502 and S3503 is completed, or when the processing in steps S3504 and S3505 is completed, or when the power supply to the gaming machine 10 is cut off, or when the processing according to the state of the power switch 91 is completed. , the MPU 41 executes steps S3506 to S0358, which are generally executed when the power is turned off. Specifically, the MPU 41 prohibits main timer interrupt processing (step S3506), executes calculation and storage of the judgment value in the RAM 412 (step S3507), prohibits access to the RAM 412 (step S3508), and turns off the power supply. The infinite loop continues until the process is completely shut down and processing cannot be executed.

As described above, in the power cutoff process, the power cutoff signal is sent from the power supply monitoring circuit 95 to the main control unit 4 (MPU 41) based on the level of the signal sent from the power switch state detection unit 91a. , the main control device 4 can grasp the state of the power switch 91 when the power is cut off. This allows the main control device 4 and the audio lamp control device 5 to execute different processes when the power is shut off and when the power is restored (after the power is restored) depending on the state of the power switch 91 when the power is shut off.

Specifically, when the power is cut off, the main control device 4 executes different processes depending on the state of the power switch 91 at the time of the power cut, thereby determining the state of the power switch 91 at the time of the power cut (power cut type). It is possible to set different commands (switch power-off command, non-switch power-off command) depending on the situation, and send the commands to the audio lamp control device 5.

On the other hand, when the power is cut off, the audio lamp control device 5 executes processing according to the type (state of the power switch 91 when the power is cut off) of the received command (switched power-off command, non-switched power-off command). It becomes possible to do so. Specifically, as will be described later, when the power is cut off, the audio lamp control device 5 receives a switch power off command indicating that the power switch 91 is in the off state at the time of power cutoff (the power is turned off by turning off the power switch 91). When the movable accessory member 342 is stopped at the standby position (see FIG. 72), and a non-switch power-off command indicating that the power switch 91 is in the on state when the power is cut off is received ( When the power is cut off without turning off the power switch 91), the movable accessory member 342 is stopped at the operating position (see FIG. 73).

Furthermore, when the power is cut off, the main control device 4 executes different processes depending on the state of the power switch 91 at the time of the power cut. Flags (switch status flags) can be set. Then, when the power is restored, the main control device 4 is able to execute different processes depending on the type of switch status flag that is set according to the state of the power switch 91 at the time of the power cut (power cut type). . Specifically, as will be described later, when the power is restored, the main controller 4 will shut off the power by turning off the power switch 91 if the switch status flag is off (if the power was cut off by turning off the power switch 91). If the power cut type command is set to notify the audio lamp control device 5 that the power switch 91 has been turned off, and the switch status flag is on (if the power is cut off while the power switch 91 is in the on state), A power outage type command is set to notify the audio lamp control device 5 that the power has been shut off in the on state without turning off the power switch 91.

On the other hand, when the power is restored (after the power is restored), the audio lamp control device 5 executes processing according to the type of the received power interruption type command (state of the power switch 91 at the time of power interruption). becomes possible. Specifically, as will be described later, when the power is restored (after the power is restored), when the audio lamp control device 5 receives a command indicating the state of the power switch 91 at the time of power cut, the sound lamp control device 5 specifies the state from this command. Identified by the state of the power switch 91 at the time of power cutoff and a command (switch power off command, non-switch power off command) sent from the main controller 4 at the time of power cutoff, indicating the state of the power switch 91 at the time of power cutoff. It is determined whether there is any inconsistency with the state of the power switch 91 when the power was cut off, and if there is any inconsistency, error processing is executed.

[Main processing when power is restored]
The main process at the time of power restoration of this embodiment is a process that is activated when the supply of power from the equipment power supply PS to the power supply unit 94 is started. In this power recovery main process, after executing the process related to the RAM 412 of the MPU 41, a process that enables execution of the normal main process (see FIG. 76) and main timer interrupt process (see FIG. 20), which will be described later, is executed. . Here, FIG. 78 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the main processing upon power restoration executed by the main control device 4 of the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment.

<Step S3601>
As shown in FIG. 78, in the main processing upon power recovery of this embodiment, the MPU 41 first executes startup processing. Specifically, the MPU 41 waits for about 500 msec, for example, for the control board to become operational.

<Step S3602>
In step S3602, the MPU 41 determines whether a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 sec), which is a permission prohibition period, has elapsed since the start-up process. If the predetermined time has elapsed (step S3602: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3603. On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not elapsed (step S3602: No), the process of step S3602 is executed again.

Note that whether or not a predetermined period of time has elapsed is determined by counting the number of times step S3602 has been processed. For example, if the time required from when the MPU 41 determines that the predetermined time has not elapsed (step S3602: No) until the process of step S3602 is executed again is, for example, 0.1 msec, the process of step S3602 When the count value of the number of processing times reaches 10,000, it is determined that 1 second has passed since the start-up processing in step S3601. Note that the specific configuration for measuring time is arbitrary, and for example, a real-time clock may be used to measure time.

<Steps S3603 and S3604>
If the predetermined time has elapsed (step S3602: Yes), the MPU 41 permits access to the RAM 412 (step S3603), and determines whether the switch state flag is set to OFF (step S3604). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether the power switch 91 was in the on state or the off state when the power was cut off.

Here, when the power supply to the gaming machine 10 is cut off, the switch status flag determines whether the power supply was cut off due to the power switch 91 of the power supply control device 9 being turned off, or whether it is due to other factors ( This flag is used to determine whether the problem is due to a power outage or the power to the island equipment in the game hall being turned off. This switch state flag is set to OFF when the power switch 91 is in the OFF state when the power supply is cut off, in the power cutoff process shown in FIG. and is set to on when the power switch 91 is in the on state.

Then, if the switch status flag is set to OFF (step S3604: Yes), that is, if the power switch 91 is in the OFF state and the power supply to the gaming machine 10 is cut off, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3605. do. On the other hand, if the switch status flag is set to on (step S3604: No), that is, if the power switch 91 is in the on state and the power supply to the gaming machine 10 is cut off, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3606. do.

<Step S3605>
If the switch state flag is set to OFF (step S3604: Yes), that is, if the power switch 91 is in the OFF state and the power supply to the gaming machine 10 is cut off, the MPU 41 executes the power-on process. Note that details of the power-on processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 79.

<Step S3606>
If the switch state flag is set to on (step S3604: No), that is, if the power supply switch 91 is in the on state and the power supply to the gaming machine 10 is cut off, the MPU 41 executes the power outage recovery process. Note that details of the processing upon power recovery will be described later with reference to FIG. 80.

<Step S3607>
When the power-on process in step S3605 is completed, or when the power recovery process in step S3606 is completed, the MPU 41 allows execution of the main timer interrupt process in FIG. 20, and returns to the normal main process in FIG. 76 described above. Transition.

[Power-on processing]
The power-on process of the present embodiment is activated when the power supply PS starts supplying power to the power supply unit 94 when the power switch 91 is in the OFF state and the power supply to the gaming machine 10 is cut off. This is the process to be performed. That is, this is a process executed when the power supply to the gaming machine 10 is restored by turning on the power switch 91. Here, FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the power-on process executed in the power-return main process of FIG. 78.

<Step S3701>
As shown in FIG. 79, in the power-on process of this embodiment, the MPU 41 first determines whether the RAM erase switch 92 is turned on. If the RAM erase switch 92 is turned on (step S3701: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3702, and if the RAM erase switch 92 is not turned on (step S3701: No), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3702. The process moves to step S3704.

<Steps S3702 and S3703>
When the RAM erase switch 92 is turned on (step S3701: Yes), the MPU 41 clears the used area of the RAM 412 to 0 (step S3702), and executes the initialization process of the RAM 412 (step S3703).

<Step S3704>
If the RAM erase switch 92 is not turned on (step S3701: No), the MPU 41 executes a power restoration process to return to the state when the gaming machine 10 was previously powered off (step S3704). Specifically, in the power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer saved in the RAM 412 is written to the stack pointer of the MPU 41, and the data saved in the RAM 412 is restored to the register of the MPU 41, thereby changing the state of the register of the MPU 41. The state will be restored to the state before the power was cut off.

<Step S3705>
When the processes of steps S3702 and S3703 are executed, or when the process of step S3704 is executed, the MPU 41 sets a power interruption type command (step S3705), and ends the power-on process. The power outage type command is a command that notifies the audio lamp control device 5 whether the power switch 91 was in the on state or the off state when the power to the gaming machine 10 was cut off last time. Here, since the power-on process is a process executed when the power switch 91 was in the off state when the power to the gaming machine 10 was previously cut off, an off-power cutoff command is set in step S3705. This off-power cutoff command is sent to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1301 in the main process of FIG. Thereby, the audio lamp control device 5 can understand that the power supply to the gaming machine 10 has been cut off by turning off the power switch 91.

[Processing when power is restored]
The processing at the time of power outage recovery of the present embodiment is started when power supply to the gaming machine 10 is cut off with the power switch 91 in the on state, and power supply starts from the equipment power supply PS to the power supply unit 94. This is the process to be performed. That is, this is a process that is executed when the power supply to the gaming machine 10 is restored regardless of whether the power switch 91 is turned on. Here, FIG. 80 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the power failure recovery process executed in the power recovery main process of FIG. 78.

<Steps S3801 and S3802>
As shown in FIG. 80, in the power failure recovery process of this embodiment, the MPU 41 first calculates the determination value of the RAM 3801 (step S3801), and the determination value is used in step S3507 of the power failure recovery process of FIG. It is compared with the computed and stored determination value of the RAM 412 to determine whether it is normal (step S3802). If the determination value of the RAM 412 is normal (step S3802: Yes), the MPU 41 moves the process to step S3803, and if the determination value of the RAM 412 is not normal (step S3802: No), the process moves to step S3804.

<Step S3803>
If the determination value of the RAM 412 is normal (step S3802: Yes), the MPU 41 executes a power restoration process to return to the state when the power was cut off to the gaming machine 10 last time (step S3803). Specifically, in the power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer saved in the RAM 412 is written to the stack pointer of the MPU 41, and the data saved in the RAM 412 is restored to the register of the MPU 41, thereby changing the state of the register of the MPU 41. The state will be restored to the state before the power was cut off.

<Steps S3804 and S3805>
If the determination value of the RAM 412 is not normal (step S3802: No), the MPU 41 clears the used area of the RAM 412 to 0 (step S3804), and executes the initialization process of the RAM 412 (step S3805).

<Step S3806>
When the process of step S3803 is executed, or when the process of steps S3804 and S3805 is executed, the MPU 41 sets a power outage type command (step S3806), and ends the process at the time of power outage recovery. The power outage type command is a command that notifies the audio lamp control device 5 whether the power switch 91 was in the on state or the off state when the power to the gaming machine 10 was cut off last time. Here, since the power failure recovery process is a process that is executed when the power switch 91 was in the on state when the power to the gaming machine 10 was previously cut off, an on-power cutoff command is set in step S3806. This on/off command is sent to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1301 in the main process of FIG. Thereby, the audio lamp control device 5 can recognize that the power supply to the gaming machine 10 is cut off in the on state, regardless of whether the power switch 91 is turned off.

In this manner, in the power recovery process, the state of the power switch 91 at the time of power cutoff is determined based on the type of switch status flag that is set according to the state of the power switch 91 at the time of power cutoff in the power cutoff process in FIG. It is possible to understand. As a result, when the power is restored (after the power is restored), different processes can be executed in the main control device 4 and the audio lamp control device 5 depending on the state of the power switch 91 when the power is cut off.

Specifically, when the power is restored, the main control device 4 executes different processes depending on the state of the power switch 91 at the time of the power cut, thereby determining the state of the power switch 91 at the time of the power cut (power cut type). It is possible to set different commands (off power cutoff command, on power cutoff command) depending on the situation, and send the commands to the audio lamp control device 5.

On the other hand, when the power is restored (after the power is restored), the audio lamp control device 5 executes processing according to the type of the received power interruption type command (state of the power switch 91 at the time of power interruption). becomes possible. Specifically, as will be described later, when the power is restored (after the power is restored), when the audio lamp control device 5 receives a command indicating the state of the power switch 91 at the time of power cut, the sound lamp control device 5 specifies the state from this command. Identified by the state of the power switch 91 at the time of power cutoff and a command (switch power off command, non-switch power off command) sent from the main controller 4 at the time of power cutoff, indicating the state of the power switch 91 at the time of power cutoff. It is determined whether there is any inconsistency with the state of the power switch 91 when the power was cut off, and if there is any inconsistency, error processing is executed.

[Processing of audio lamp control device 5]
In the audio lamp control device 5 of the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, processing is executed based on a command according to the state of the power switch 91 at the time of power cutoff and transmitted from the main control device 4 when the power is cut off and when the power is restored. be done.

[Command judgment processing]
In the command determination process of this embodiment, the process of restricting the execution of a specific effect based on the command transmitted from the main control device 4 at the time of power cut-off according to the state of the power switch 91 at the time of power cut-off, and the process of turning off the power switch 91 The process of stopping the movable accessory member 342 at the operating position in the case of power cut-off without the use of the Processing to confirm consistency (power outage type verification processing) is executed. Here, FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the command determination process executed by the audio lamp control device 5 in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG.

<Step S3901>
As shown in FIG. 81, when a command is received (step S2101: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a switch power-off command (step S3901). Here, the switch power off command is a command indicating that the power supply to the gaming machine 10 is cut off by turning off the power switch 91. This switch power-off command is set in step S3502 of the power-off processing performed by the main controller 4 in FIG. 77. That is, in step S3901, the MPU 51 determines whether the power supply to the gaming machine 10 has been cut off by turning off the power switch 91. Then, if the received command is a switch power-off command (step S3901: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3902, and if the received command is not a switch power-off command (step S3901: No), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3902. The process moves to step S3906.

<Step S3902>
If the received command is a switch power-off command (step S3901: Yes), that is, if the power supply to the gaming machine 10 is cut off by turning off the power switch 91, the MPU 51 sets the RTC performance restriction flag to on. (Step S3902).

Note that the RTC performance restriction flag indicates an RTC performance (the execution timing (time) of which is managed by a real-time clock (RTC)) that is executed when a predetermined time has elapsed (for example, at a specific time) after the power to the gaming machine 10 is restored. It is a flag that restricts the execution of a performance, for example, a performance that is performed every predetermined time (for example, every 30 minutes, 1 hour, or 2 hours). This RTC performance restriction flag indicates that the RAM 512 of the MPU 51 will Set as a flag that is not turned off even after initialization. That is, when the power supply to the gaming machine 10 is interrupted by turning off the power switch 91, the MPU 51 executes the RTC effect when the variable game becomes executable by turning on the power switch 91 next time. to avoid being In other words, if the next power supply to the gaming machine 10 is scheduled to be by turning on the power switch 91, the execution of the RTC effect will be restricted when the next turning on of the power switch 91 makes it possible to execute a variable game. be done.

Here, if multiple machines of the same type that perform RTC effects are installed in the island equipment of the gaming hall, and the power switch 91 is turned on individually for each gaming machine 10, the power is turned on for each gaming machine 10. The timing is different. Therefore, when turning on the power switch 91 for each gaming machine 10 individually, the timing at which the RTC effect is executed differs for each gaming machine 10. The RTC effect is generally one in which music is output from the speaker 26 in addition to an image effect on the symbol display section 341. Therefore, if the timings at which the RTC effects are executed are different, not only will the image effects between the game machines 10 deviate and be an eyesore, but also the output timing of music between the gaming machines 10 will be deviated, making the music unpleasant to the ears. , which may cause discomfort to players.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, when the power switch 91 is turned on individually for each gaming machine 10, execution of the RTC effect is restricted. Therefore, the RTC performance is not executed at different timings for each gaming machine 10, and the RTC performance does not cause discomfort to the player.

Note that in this embodiment, if the power supply to the gaming machine 10 is cut off by turning off the power switch 91, the RTC performance restriction flag is set to on in the command determination process; may be set to on in the power-off process (power-off process) executed in the audio lamp control device 5 when the power supply to the gaming machine 10 is cut off, or the sub It may be set to ON in the main process (startup process) executed in the audio lamp control device 5 upon power restoration before execution of the timer interrupt process is permitted.

<Step S3903>
In step S3903, the MPU 51 sets the stationary performance restriction flag to OFF. Note that the fixed performance restriction flag will be described in detail when explaining step S3907 below, but by setting the fixed performance restriction flag to OFF in step S3903, the power switch 91 is turned off to control the gaming machine 10. When the power to the game machine 10 is restored after the power supply to the game machine 10 is cut off, the stationary performance is executed without restriction.

<Steps S3904 and S3905>
In step S3904, the MPU 51 drives the movable accessory member 342 so that it is stopped at the standby position, further sets the movable accessory member activation flag to OFF (step S3905), and executes the command determination process. finish.

Here, the movable accessory member activation flag is a flag indicating whether or not the movable accessory member 342 is stopped at the operating position. This flag is set as a flag that will not be turned off even if the RAM 512 of the MPU 51 is initialized in the main processing (startup processing) executed in the audio lamp control device 5 upon recovery. In addition, the movable accessory member activation flag is used in the power outage type verification process shown in FIG. Referenced for comparison.

In this embodiment, when the power supply to the gaming machine 10 is cut off by turning off the power switch 91, the movable accessory member 342 is stopped at the standby position. Therefore, when the power supply to the gaming machine 10 is cut off and the movable accessory member 342 is stopped at the standby position, the power supply to the gaming machine 10 is cut off by turning off the power switch 91. You can see what happened. As a result, the gaming hall side can confirm the position (state) of the movable accessory member 342 in a state where the power supply to the gaming machine 10 is cut off, and turn off the power switch 91 to supply power to the gaming machine 10. You can confirm that it has been blocked.

In this embodiment, when the power supply to the gaming machine 10 is cut off by turning off the power switch 91, the movable accessory member 342 is stopped at the standby position when the power supply is cut off. Conversely, when the power supply to the gaming machine 10 is cut off without turning off the power switch 91, the movable accessory member 342 may be stopped at the standby position. Further, the timing at which the movable accessory member 342 is stopped at the standby position may be the next time the power is restored after the power supply has been cut off.

<Step S3906>
If the received command is not a switch power-off command (step S3901: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a non-switch power-off command (step S3906). Here, the non-switch power-off command is a command indicating that the power supply to the gaming machine 10 is cut off while the power switch 91 remains on without being turned off. This non-switch power-off command is set in step S3504 of the power-off processing by the main controller 4 in FIG. That is, in step S3906, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the power supply to the gaming machine 10 has been cut off while the power switch 91 remains on without being turned off. Then, if the received command is a non-switch power-off command (step S3906: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the process to step S3907, and if the received command is not a non-switch power-off command (step S3906: No), The process moves to step S3911.

<Step S3907>
If the received command is a non-switch power-off command (step S3906: Yes), that is, if the power supply to the gaming machine 10 is cut off while the power switch 91 is in the on state without being turned off, the stationary production restriction is applied. The flag is set on (step S3907), and the command determination process ends.

The deferred performance restriction flag indicates that there is no change in the game setting value for the current day (see Figures 14(A) and 14(B)) from the game setting value on the previous business day of the game hall (the game setting value remains unchanged). This is a flag that restricts the execution of a fixed performance that allows the player to understand that the two characters are the same. This deferred performance restriction flag indicates that the RAM 512 of the MPU 51 will Set as a flag that is not turned off even after initialization. That is, if the power supply to the gaming machine 10 is cut off while the power switch 91 is in the on state without turning off the power switch 91, the MPU 51 executes the stationary effect when the variable game becomes executable after the power is restored. be restricted from being

Here, in a gaming machine in which the game hall side can set a game setting value from a plurality of game setting values with different jackpot winning probabilities in a jackpot lottery, an effect that explicitly or suggests the game setting value may be executed. Therefore, if the power to the gaming machine is cut off due to a power outage while the gaming hall is in operation, depending on the content of the performance, the player may find out that the gaming setting value remains unchanged. Therefore, for example, if it is determined that the game setting value (jackpot lottery probability) is likely to be low based on the game history for the previous game hall business day, if the player understands that the game setting value will remain unchanged. , interest in games decreases.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, if the power supply to the gaming machine 10 is cut off while the power switch 91 is in the on state without turning off the power switch 91, the variable game becomes executable after the power is restored. The deferred performance is restricted from being executed. Therefore, even if the power supply to the gaming machine 10 is cut off while the power switch 91 is in the on state without turning off the power switch 91, it is possible to prevent the player from knowing that the gaming setting value remains unchanged. Therefore, even if it is determined that the game setting value (big hit lottery probability) is likely to be low based on the game history for the previous game hall business day, the interest in the game is prevented from decreasing.

In addition, in this embodiment, if the power supply to the gaming machine 10 is cut off while the power switch 91 is in the on state without turning off the power switch 91, the stationary performance restriction flag is set to on in the command determination process. , the stationary performance restriction flag may be set to on in the power cutoff process (power cutoff process) executed in the audio lamp control device 5 when the power supply to the gaming machine 10 is cut off, or the It may be set to ON in the main processing (startup processing) executed in the audio lamp control device 5 upon power restoration, before execution of the sub-timer interrupt processing is permitted after power restoration.

<Step S3908>
In step S3908, the MPU 51 sets the RTC performance restriction flag to OFF. Thereby, when the power supply to the gaming machine 10 is cut off with the power switch 91 in the on state and then the power is restored, the RTC performance is executed without being restricted. In other words, after power supply to the gaming machines 10 is cut off with the power switch 91 in the on state, power is restored to the gaming machines 10 of the same island equipment in the gaming hall all at once, so RTC effects are limited. It is executed without any trouble.

<Steps S3909 and S3910>
In step S3909, the MPU 51 drives the movable accessory member 342 so that it is stopped at the operating position, further sets the movable accessory member activation flag to ON (step S3910), and executes the command determination process. finish.

Here, the movable accessory member activation flag is a flag indicating whether or not the movable accessory member 342 is stopped at the operating position. This flag is set as a flag that will not be turned off even if the RAM 512 of the MPU 51 is initialized in the main processing (startup processing) executed in the audio lamp control device 5 upon recovery. In addition, the movable accessory member activation flag compares the power outage information when the power supply to the gaming machine 10 is cut off and the information when the gaming machine 10 returns to power in the power outage type verification process shown in FIG. 82, which will be described later. referenced to do so.

In this embodiment, if the power supply to the gaming machine 10 is cut off while the power switch 91 is not turned off but remains on, the movable accessory member 342 is stopped at the operating position. Therefore, when the power supply to the gaming machine 10 is cut off and the movable accessory member 342 is stopped at the operating position, the power switch 91 remains on without being turned off. It can be visually confirmed that the power supply to 10 has been cut off. As a result, the game hall side can check the position (state) of the movable accessory member 342 while the power supply to the game machine 10 is cut off, and the power switch 91 can be turned on without being turned off. It is possible to confirm that the power supply to the gaming machine 10 has been cut off, for example, that the power supply to the gaming machine 10 has been cut off due to a misbehavior.

Note that in this embodiment, when the power supply to the gaming machine 10 is cut off regardless of whether the power switch 91 is turned off, the movable accessory member 342 is stopped at the operating position when the power supply is cut off. Conversely, when the power supply to the gaming machine 10 is cut off by turning off the power switch 91, the movable accessory member 342 may be stopped at the operating position. Moreover, the timing at which the movable accessory member 342 is stopped at the operating position may be the next time the power is restored after the power supply is cut off. In this case, the movable accessory member 342 may be stopped at the operating position before the operation check of the movable accessory member 342 that is started upon power restoration, or after the operation check of the movable accessory member 342 is started. It may be.

<Steps S3911 and S3912>
If the received command is not a non-switch power disconnection command (step S3906: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a power disconnection type command (off power disconnection command or on power disconnection command) (step S3906: No). S3911). Here, the power outage type command is a command that indicates whether the power switch 91 was in the on state or off state when the power was cut off to the gaming machine 10 last time, and is a command that indicates whether the power switch 91 was in the on state or the off state when the power was turned off to the gaming machine 10 last time, and is a command that indicates whether the power switch 91 was in the on state or the off state when the power was turned off. It is set as an OFF power outage command in the process (step S3705 in FIG. 79), or as an on power outage command in the power outage recovery process (step S3806 in FIG. 80) of the power recovery main process in FIG. In other words, the power outage type command is a command that is set when the power is restored to the gaming machine 10, and indicates the type of power outage before the power is restored, which is determined by the main control board 4 when the gaming machine 10 is restored. .

Then, when the received command is a power cut type command (off power cut command or on power cut command) (step S3911: Yes), the MPU 51 interrupts the power cut based on the power cut type specified by the power cut type command. An off flag is set (step S3912), and the process moves to step S3913. Specifically, the MPU 51 sets the power cut off flag to ON when the received command is an OFF power cut command, and sets the power cut OFF flag to OFF when the received command is an ON power cut command. That is, when the MPU 51 receives the power interruption type command, it sets a power interruption off flag that reflects the type of power interruption before the power restoration, which is determined by the main control board 4 when the gaming machine 10 is restored.

On the other hand, if the received command is not a power outage type command (step S3911: No), the MPU 51 executes processing according to the type of the received command (steps S2102 to S2122), similarly to the first embodiment described above. ), the command determination process ends.

<Step S3913>
In step S3913, the MPU 51 executes power interruption type verification processing, and ends the command determination processing. Note that details of the power outage type verification process will be explained below.

[Power outage type verification process]
In the power interruption type verification process of this embodiment, a process is executed to check the mutual consistency of commands indicating the state of the power switch 91 at the time of power interruption and transmitted from the main control device 4 at the time of power interruption and power restoration. . Here, FIG. 82 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the power interruption type verification process executed in the command determination process of FIG. 81.

<Steps S4001 and S4002>
In the power interruption type verification process of this embodiment, the MPU 51 first determines whether the power interruption off flag is on (step S4001). Here, the power interruption off flag is a flag that reflects the type of power interruption before power restoration, which is determined by the main control board 4 when the gaming machine 10 is restored to power. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether the type of power cutoff before power restoration, which is determined by the main control board 4 when the gaming machine 10 is powered back on, is whether the power cutoff to the gaming machine 10 was due to the power switch 91 being turned off. to judge.

If the power cutoff flag is on (step S4001: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the power cutoff flag to off (step S4002), and moves the process to step S4003. On the other hand, if the power interruption off flag is off (step S4001: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4006.

<Steps S4003 to S4005>
In step S4003, the MPU 51 determines whether the movable accessory member activation flag is set to OFF. This movable accessory member operation flag is a flag indicating whether or not the movable accessory member 342 is stopped at the operating position. In addition, the movable accessory member activation flag is set to on when the movable accessory member 342 is activated in step S3910 of the command determination process because the power to the gaming machine 10 is not cut off by turning off the power switch 91. The movable accessory member 342 is set to OFF when the movable accessory member 342 is not operated because the power to the gaming machine 10 is cut off by turning off the power switch 91. That is, in step S4003, the MPU 51 determines that the main control device 4 at the time of power restoration of the gaming machine 10 determines that the power interruption to the gaming machine 10 before the power restoration was due to the power switch 91 being turned off. (Step S4001: Yes), it is determined based on the movable accessory actuating member activation flag whether or not the power cut off to the gaming machine 10 before the current power restoration in the gaming machine 10 was due to turning off the power switch 91. . In other words, in step S4003, the MPU 51 checks whether the cause of the power cutoff determined at the time of the current power restoration matches the cause of the power cutoff determined at the time of the power cutoff before the power restoration. .

Then, when the movable accessory member activation flag is set to OFF (step S4003: Yes), the MPU 51 ends the power outage type verification process. That is, the MPU 51 determines that if the cause of the power cutoff determined at the time of the current power restoration and the cause of the power cutoff determined before the power restoration are both caused by the turning off of the power switch 91, Since it can be determined that the cause of the power cutoff is normal, the power cutoff type verification process ends.

On the other hand, when the movable accessory member activation flag is set to ON (step S4003: No), the MPU 51 sets the movable accessory member activation flag to OFF (step S4004), and moves the process to step S4005. That is, the MPU 51 executes error processing if the cause of power cutoff determined at the time of power restoration this time and the cause of power cutoff determined at the time of power cutoff before power restoration do not match (step S4005). , the power outage type verification process ends.

In the error processing, for example, an error notification is performed to the effect that the cause of power cutoff determined at the time of power restoration this time and the cause of power cutoff determined before power restoration do not match. The error notification may be, for example, an error image on the symbol display section 341 or an audio output from the speaker 26. In this way, by providing an error notification that the cause of the power cut-off determined when the power is restored this time and the cause of the power cut-off determined at the time of the power cut before the power is restored are not consistent, the gaming hall side can Since the 10 power cutoff abnormalities can be grasped, it becomes possible to deal with the power cutoff abnormalities. For example, if the game hall side can determine that there is no problem with the situation at the time of error notification (type of power cutoff), it is desirable to allow the game to be played and to enable the error to be cleared. To cancel the error, for example, the game machine 10 may be provided with an error cancel button, and the game hall side may operate the error cancel button to cancel the error. As a result, if an error occurs in which the cause of the power cut-off determined when the power is restored this time and the cause of the power cut-off determined at the time of the power cut before the power is restored, the error can be canceled on the gaming hall side. becomes possible. Further, the error is not limited to being canceled by using the error cancellation button, but may be canceled by other methods. For example, the error may be canceled by turning off and then turning on the power switch 91, or by operating the RAM erase switch 92. In other words, when an error occurs, the error may be canceled by the gaming hall performing a predetermined operation on the gaming machine 10.

In the error processing, it is also possible to clear the used area of the RAM 512 of the MPU 51 and execute initialization processing of the RAM 512. In this way, by clearing the used area of the RAM 512 of the MPU 51 and executing the initialization process of the RAM 512, it is possible to respond to a power cutoff abnormality in the gaming machine 10 without bothering the gaming hall side.

Moreover, the error process may be one that stops (restricts) the progress of the variable game. For example, the error processing may include non-execution of the jackpot lottery, non-notification of the jackpot lottery result (for example, non-fluctuation of special symbols and decorative symbols), and stopping the firing of the game balls 99. In this way, since the error processing is to stop the progress of the variable game, the cause of the power cutoff determined when the power is restored this time is consistent with the cause of the power cutoff determined when the power is cut off before the power is restored. This prevents the game from proceeding in a state where an error has occurred. On the other hand, when the error is canceled, a process (removal of restrictions) is executed to allow the progression of the variable game.

Further, the error processing may be a restriction on the execution of a preset prescribed effect such as an RTC effect or a demo screen. In this way, since the error processing is a restriction on the execution of the specified performance, for example, the execution of a performance such as an RTC performance in which audio such as a song is output from the speaker 26 is restricted, thereby reducing error notification. To prevent the occurrence of an inconvenience in which the audio output becomes inaudible due to the prescribed performance. Additionally, if the specified performance is a demo screen performance, this prevents the player from starting the game by misunderstanding that the game can be executed, and prevents the error screen from being hidden by the demo screen. be done. On the other hand, if the error is cleared, a process (removal of restriction) is executed to allow execution of the prescribed effect.

<Step S4006 and Step S4007>
If the power cutoff flag is off (step S4001: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the movable accessory member activation flag is set on (step S4006). As described above, the movable accessory member activation flag is a flag indicating whether or not the movable accessory member 342 is stopped at the operating position. In addition, the movable accessory member activation flag is set to on when the movable accessory member 342 is activated in step S3910 of the command determination process because the power to the gaming machine 10 is not cut off by turning off the power switch 91. The movable accessory member 342 is set to OFF when the movable accessory member 342 is not operated because the power to the gaming machine 10 is cut off by turning off the power switch 91. That is, in this step S4003, if the main control device 4 determines that the power interruption to the gaming machine 10 before power restoration is not due to the power switch 91 being turned off, the MPU 51 performs Step S4001: No), it is determined based on the movable accessory operating member activation flag whether or not the power cut-off to the gaming machine 10 before the current power restoration in the gaming machine 10 was not caused by turning off the power switch 91. do. That is, in step S4006, the MPU 51 checks whether or not the cause of power cutoff determined at the time of power restoration this time matches the cause of power cutoff determined before power restoration.

Then, when the movable accessory member activation flag is set to ON (step S4006: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the movable accessory member activation flag to OFF (step S4007), and ends the power outage type verification process. do. That is, when the MPU 51 determines that the cause of the power cutoff determined when the power is restored this time and the cause of the power cutoff determined before the power is restored match in that they are not caused by turning off the power switch 91. In this case, it can be determined that the cause of the power cutoff is normal, so the power cutoff type verification process is ended.

On the other hand, when the movable accessory member activation flag is set to OFF (step S4006: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S4005. That is, the MPU 51 executes error processing if the cause of power cutoff determined at the time of power restoration this time and the cause of power cutoff determined at the time of power cutoff before power restoration do not match (step S4005). , the power outage type verification process ends. Note that error processing is as described above.

Note that in this embodiment, the power outage type verification process is executed in the command determination process; It may also be executed in the main process (startup process) executed in the audio lamp control device 5.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the state of the power switch 91 when the power is cut off is determined based on the movable accessory member activation flag, but other than the movable accessory member activation flag that indicates the state of the power switch 91 when the power is turned off. A flag may be set and the state of the power switch 91 at the time of power cut-off may be determined based on the flag.

As described above, this embodiment includes the power-off switch state detection section 91a that detects at least one of the on state and off state of the power switch of the gaming machine. Furthermore, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment checks at least one of the on state and the off state of the power switch 91 based on the detection result by the power cut-off switch state detection unit 91a when the power is cut off. Thereby, it is possible to distinguish whether the power interruption is due to turning off the power switch or not due to turning off the power switch. Therefore, by sending a command that can identify the cause of the shutdown to the audio lamp control device when the power is shut off or restored, the setting value can be left unchanged ( It becomes possible to restrict the execution of a performance in which the player is aware that the setting value has not been changed from the previous day. This prevents the player from understanding that the setting value will remain unchanged based on the presentation content, for example, if it is determined from the previous day's gaming history that the setting value (jackpot lottery probability) is likely to be low. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest in games. In addition, since the game hall can understand if there is a power outage or if the power supply to the island equipment in the game hall is cut off, it is possible for the game hall to understand if the power supply is cut off due to a power outage that is not caused by the power switch being turned off. It becomes possible for the game hall side to understand that an act has occurred. This makes it possible to deter acts of fraud.

In addition, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, the main control device 4 sends a command that can identify the cause of the shutdown to the audio lamp control device 5 when the power is shut off or when the power is restored. If it is not due to OFF, the movable accessory member 342 is stopped at the operating position. In this way, when the power cutoff is not due to the power switch 91 being turned off, the movable accessory member 342 is stopped in the operating position, so the game hall side can determine that the power switch 91 is the cause of the power cutoff. It can be visually confirmed from the state of the gaming machine 10 (the position of the movable accessory member 342) that it is not based on 91 off. This makes it possible for the game hall side to easily detect the occurrence of a cheating act.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when power is cut off to the gaming machine without turning off the power switch 91, error processing such as error notification is executed when the power is restored. In this way, when the power to the gaming machine is cut off without turning off the power switch 91, error processing such as error notification is executed when the power is restored, so that the gaming hall side can control the gaming machine 10. It can be understood that the power interruption is not due to turning off the power switch 91, for example, the power supply to the gaming machine 10 is interrupted due to a power outage or a fraudulent act. This makes it possible for the gaming hall to deal with the fact that the power to the gaming machine 10 is not cut off by turning off the power switch 91.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, execution of the RTC effect (specific effect) is restricted when the power cutoff to the gaming machine 10 is due to turning off the power switch 91, and the power cutoff to the gaming machine 10 is caused by turning off the power switch 91. Execution of the fixed effect (predetermined effect) is restricted if the effect is not based on the specified effect. In this way, execution of the RTC effect is restricted when the power to the gaming machine 10 is cut off by turning off the power switch 91, and the power cut to the gaming machine 10 is not caused by turning off the power switch 91. When the execution of the stationary effect is restricted, the RTC effect is executed when the power to the gaming machine 10 is cut off by turning off the power switch 91, resulting in a lag in the execution timing of the RTC effect. When power is cut off to the gaming machine 10 without turning off the power switch 91, the stationary performance is executed, thereby preventing the player from grasping the gaming setting value.

Of course, the specific performance that is restricted when the power cutoff to the gaming machine 10 is due to turning off the power switch is not limited to the RTC performance, but may be other effects, and the power cutoff to the gaming machine 10 is limited to the power switch off. The predetermined performance that is restricted when not depending on the turn-off of 91 is not limited to the stationary performance, but may be another performance. In addition, when the power cutoff to the gaming machine 10 is caused by turning off the power switch, execution of a predetermined effect (for example, a stationary effect) is allowed, and the power cutoff to the gaming machine 10 is not caused by turning off the power switch 91. In this case, execution of a specific effect (RTC effect) may be permitted.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, execution of a specific effect or a predetermined effect is restricted in the voice lamp control device 5 when the power is cut off, based on a command sent from the main control device 4 to the voice lamp control device 5 when the power is cut off. When the power is turned off, the main control device 4 sends a power outage type command to the audio lamp control device 5, and based on the power outage type command, the audio lamp control device 5 executes a specific effect or a predetermined effect when the power is restored. When the power is restored, the main control device 4 sends a power outage type command to the audio lamp control device 5, and based on the power outage type command, the audio lamp control device 5 performs a specific effect or a predetermined effect when the power is restored. Execution of the performance may be restricted.

Further, in this embodiment, the same design changes as those in the first to fifth embodiments described above can be made within an applicable range.

[Summary of the invention]
Hereinafter, a summary of the invention extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be added. In addition, in order to facilitate understanding of the correspondence between each supplementary note and each embodiment, reference numerals may be added to the description for convenience, but the invention according to the supplementary note is limited to the specific configuration with the reference numeral. It's not a thing. Furthermore, it is also possible to select and arbitrarily combine each configuration and each processing function described below.

[Appendix A1']
Transition determination means (for determining whether to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game advantageous to the player (jackpot game) is executed (jackpot lottery) based on the establishment of a determination condition (jackpot lottery); 41) and
a storage means (41) for storing numerical information (game setting values) corresponding to a plurality of mutually different advantage determination probabilities (jackpot probabilities);
selection means (41) for selecting each of the numerical information;
A gaming machine comprising:
Numerical information storage means (41) for storing one predetermined numerical information (setting value) selected from a plurality of types of numerical information;
When a specific condition is met, at least specific numerical information (non-set value) other than the predetermined numerical information among the plurality of types of numerical information is indicated during a specified period from a predetermined start timing to a predetermined end timing. Display control means (51) for displaying specific information (numbers) on the display means (35, 39, 341);
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that during the specified period, the predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical value information is not displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341).

In the gaming machine according to appendix A1', when a specific condition is met, specific information indicating specific numerical information other than one predetermined numerical information selected from a plurality of types of numerical information is displayed on the display means during a specified period. be done. This allows the player to specify specific numerical information based on the specific information displayed on the display means, and also allows the player to recognize predetermined numerical information by displaying all specific numerical information. be. Therefore, the player can enjoy grasping the specific numerical information and further guessing or specifying the predetermined numerical information based on the specific information displayed on the display means, thereby improving the interest of the game.

[Appendix A2']
The display control means (51) can cause the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information and special information (a part of the numerical value) that does not indicate the plurality of types of numerical information. The gaming machine according to appendix A1', characterized in that:

[Appendix A3']
The display control means (51) may cause the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information and special information (part of a number) indicating a part of the plurality of types of numerical information. The gaming machine according to appendix A1', characterized in that it is possible.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A2' or appendix A3', the display means displays not only specific information but also special information that does not indicate multiple types of numerical information or special information that indicates part of multiple types of numerical information. . This allows the player to not only identify specific numerical information based on specific information when specific information is displayed on the display means, but also to specify specific numerical information based on the special information when special information is displayed on the display means. specific numerical information can be inferred. Therefore, even if the specific information is not displayed, the player can enjoy guessing the specific numerical information based on the special information, thereby improving the interest of the game.

[Appendix A4']
The display means (35, 39, 341) has a plurality of display areas in which the specific information is displayed,
The gaming machine according to appendix A2' or appendix A3', wherein the display control means (51) displays the special information using a part of the plurality of display areas.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A4', special information is displayed by a portion of the plurality of display areas of the display means in which specific information is displayed. In other words, the special information display area is shared with the specific information display area. Thereby, the specific information and the special information can be displayed on the common display means, so the control for displaying the specific information and the special information can be simplified, and the configuration of the display means can also be simplified.

[Appendix A5']
The gaming machine according to appendix A4', wherein the display means (39) has a plurality of light emitting areas (segments A to G) as the plurality of display areas.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A5', the display means has a plurality of light emitting areas. Such a display means can be realized by an easily available and low-cost display device such as a 7-segment display device. Therefore, it is possible to equip the gaming machine with a display means for displaying specific information and special information while suppressing the complexity of the configuration and the increase in manufacturing costs.

[Appendix A6']
The display means (341) is capable of displaying an image,
The gaming machine according to appendix A4', wherein the display control means (51) causes the display means (341) to display the specific information or the special information as an image.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A6', the specific information and special information are displayed as images on the image display means. Therefore, there are many options for image types and display modes to be displayed as specific information and special information, and specific information and special information can be displayed in various forms. This makes it possible to increase the player's interest in specifying or guessing specific numerical information or predetermined numerical information based on the specific information and special information.

[Appendix A7']
The gaming machine according to appendix A6', wherein the image display means (341) is capable of displaying a variable display image in which a pattern (decoration pattern) suggesting or clarifying the result of the transition determination is displayed in a variable manner. .

In the gaming machine according to appendix A7', specific information and special information are displayed on the image display means capable of displaying a variable display image of a symbol that suggests or clearly indicates the result of the transition determination. Therefore, when displaying a variable display image on the image display means in a gaming machine, the image display means can be used to display a specific image. This is advantageous in terms of manufacturing costs because the specific image can be displayed using the display means necessary for the gaming machine without separately providing a display means for displaying the specific information and special information.

[Appendix A8']
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A1' to A7', wherein the specified period is set to a period that indicates or clearly indicates the result of the transition determination.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A8', when specific conditions are met, specific information indicating specific numerical information is displayed on the display means, and a specified period during which predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical information is not displayed on the display means is the transition determination. The period is set to indicate or clarify the results of the Therefore, it becomes possible to display specific information together with the migration determination result. For example, when a variable display image of a symbol suggesting or clarifying the result of the transition determination is displayed on the image display means, it is also possible to cause the image display means to display specific information at the same time. This makes it possible to increase interest in suggesting or clarifying the result of migration determination by displaying specific information.

[Appendix A9']
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A1' to A3', wherein the specific condition is established when a game ball passes through a specific area (373).

In the gaming machine according to appendix A9', a specific condition can be established upon passing through a specific area, so the player can easily understand that the specific condition is satisfied. This allows you to enjoy more about whether or not certain conditions are met. Moreover, specific information displayed on the display means is controlled by the display control means when the game ball passes through the specific area. Therefore, even in a situation where the game tends to proceed inorganically, it is possible to improve the gameplay by focusing on whether or not the game ball passes through a specific area.

[Appendix A10']
It further includes a discharge port (373) for discharging the game ball to the back side of the game board (31) from which the game ball is launched.
The gaming machine according to appendix A9', wherein the specific area is the outlet (373).

[Appendix A11']
It further includes a plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) from which prize balls are paid out when game balls enter the game ball,
The discharge port (373) includes a first discharge port (318) that discharges game balls that have not entered the plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) to the back side of the game board (31), and a second outlet (373) different from the first outlet (318);
The gaming machine according to appendix A10', wherein the specific area is the second outlet (373).

[Appendix A12']
The gaming machine according to appendix A11', wherein the second outlet (373) allows a ball to enter in the special game.

In the gaming machines according to appendix A10' to appendix A12', when a specific condition is satisfied when a game ball passes through the second outlet into which the ball can enter in a special game, a specific message is displayed on the display means. The display content of information is controlled. Therefore, in a special game where the game tends to proceed inorganically, it is possible to improve the gameplay by focusing on whether or not the game ball enters the second outlet.

[Appendix A13']
The plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) include a variable winning hole (316) into which a game ball can enter in the special game,
The game machine according to appendix A12', wherein the second discharge port (373) allows a game ball that has passed through the variable winning hole (316) to pass through.

In the game machine according to appendix A13', when a specific condition is satisfied when a game ball passes through the second discharge port through which a game ball that has entered the variable winning hole can pass in a special game, the display means The display content of specific information displayed on the screen is controlled. Therefore, in the special game, the game ball can be passed through the second ejection port by hitting the game ball into the game area and making the game ball win the variable prize opening. Therefore, it becomes possible to display specific information on the display means without requiring any special skill by simply playing the special game as usual. As a result, compared to the case where a difference in skill may occur due to the game balls entering the second ejection port, it is possible to avoid playing games on the gaming machine due to the possibility of a difference in skill. Prevented.

[Appendix A14']
the third outlet (378) through which game balls that have entered the variable prize opening (316) can pass, and which is different from the second outlet (373);
a sorting means (37) for sorting the game balls that have entered the variable prize opening (316) to either the second outlet (373) or the third outlet (378);
The gaming machine according to appendix A13', further comprising:

In the gaming machine according to appendix A14', since the game balls are distributed to the second discharge port and the third discharge port by the distribution means, it depends on the distribution of the game balls by the distribution means whether or not a specific condition is satisfied. This gives you the gameplay of playing the game. This makes it possible to enjoy the game by paying attention to the behavior of the game balls in the distribution means as to whether or not specific conditions are met.

[Appendix A15']
The display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information when the specific condition is satisfied during a predetermined period in which a start time is set for the special game. The gaming machine according to any one of appendix A1' to appendix A3'.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A15', specific information indicating specific numerical information is displayed on the display means when a specific condition is satisfied during a predetermined period in which a start time is set for a special game. Therefore, a player can enjoy guessing or specifying specific numerical information, and furthermore, guessing or specifying predetermined numerical information, based on the specific information displayed on the display means when specific conditions are met for a predetermined period of time. . By setting the start of the predetermined period to the special game, the player can enjoy the game by focusing on whether or not a specific condition is satisfied in the special game.

[Appendix A16']
The special gaming state is
After the special game in the special game state ends, a first special game state (5R Usually jackpot) and
After the special game ends in the special game state, the probability that the transition determination means (41) determines that the transition to the special game state is to be made is higher than that in the first game state, and the result of the transition determination is notified. a second special gaming state (a 5R probability variable jackpot gaming state and a 16R probability variable jackpot gaming state) in which the second gaming state (high probability mode) is transferred to a second gaming state (high probability mode);
The starting time of the predetermined period is set to the special game that is transferred when the result of the transfer determination in the first gaming state is to transfer to the special game. gaming machines.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A16', when the start of the predetermined period is the first gaming state in which the transition determination means has a lower probability of determining that the transition will be made to the special gaming state than the second gaming state, the result of the transition determination is special. If the game is to be transferred to a game, it is set as a special game to be transferred. That is, the start of the predetermined period is set to the so-called first winning special game. As a result, a predetermined period is always set for each first hit, regardless of whether it is a single hit or a consecutive hit, so specific numerical information and even specific numerical information can be inferred or specified for each first hit. At least one opportunity is guaranteed.

[Appendix A17']
The special game has a value imparting game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) that impart a gaming value to the player,
The gaming machine according to appendix A15' or A16', wherein the start time of the predetermined period is set between the start time of the special game and the start time of the value-adding game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A17', the start of the predetermined period is set between the start of the special game and the start of the value-adding game, so the specific condition is satisfied at least after the value-adding game is started. You can enjoy the game by focusing on whether it is true or not.

[Appendix A18']
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A15' to A17', wherein the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A18', the end of the predetermined period is set as a special game. That is, the predetermined period starts in the special game and ends in the special game. Here, in the special game, the result of the transition determination is not announced. Therefore, there is a concern that players' interest in the special game may decrease. On the other hand, by setting an end period in addition to a starting period for the special game, interest in the special game, which tends to decrease, is improved.

[Appendix A19']
The special gaming state is
After the special game in the special game state ends, a first special game state (5R Usually jackpot) and
After the special game ends in the special game state, the probability that the transition determination means (41) determines that the transition to the special game state is to be made is higher than that in the first game state, and the result of the transition determination is notified. a second special gaming state (a 5R probability variable jackpot gaming state and a 16R probability variable jackpot gaming state) in which the second gaming state (high probability mode) is transferred to a second gaming state (high probability mode);
The end of the predetermined period is set to a special game (5R normal jackpot) executed in the first special gaming state that is transferred to the first gaming state after the end of the special game in the special gaming state. The gaming machine according to appendix A18', characterized by:

In the gaming machine according to appendix A19', the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game to be executed in the first special gaming state that is transferred to the first gaming state after the end of the special game. Therefore, if the result of the transition determination of the first gaming state is to shift to the first special gaming state, that is, if the first win is a single win that shifts to the first special gaming state, the execution will be executed in the first special gaming state. A predetermined period ends in the special game played. On the other hand, if the result of the transition determination of the first gaming state is to shift to the second special gaming state, that is, if the first win is a consecutive win that shifts to the second special gaming state, the second special gaming state will be changed to the second special gaming state. If the predetermined period in the special game to be executed does not end and the result of the transition determination of the second game state is to transition to the first special game state, the game is executed in the first special game state. A predetermined period ends in the special game. That is, in the case of consecutive winnings where the first winning is transferred to the second special game state, the predetermined period ends in the first special game where the consecutive winnings end. Therefore, in the case of consecutive games, the predetermined period is set to extend over the first special game at the end of the consecutive games, so the predetermined period is longer than that of a single game. The period will also be longer. As a result, there is a high possibility that a specific condition will be met more often in a consecutive home than in a single game, and the more times a certain condition is met in a consecutive home, the more likely it is that a specific condition will be met more times. Become. As a result, the player can not only increase the expected value of the game value that can be acquired as the number of consecutive games increases, but also obtain more specific information indicating specific numerical information, and can guess or estimate specific numerical information and even predetermined numerical information. The benefit is that it becomes easier to identify.

[Appendix A20']
The special game has a value imparting game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) that impart a gaming value to the player,
The gaming machine according to appendix A18' or A19', wherein the end of the predetermined period is set after the end of the value imparting game.

By the way, from the end of the value-giving game to the end of the special game, no game value is given or the result of the transition determination is notified. Therefore, from the player's perspective, the period from the end of the value-giving game to the end of the special game is a kind of blank period. On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to appendix A20', the end of the predetermined period is set between the end of the value-adding game and the end of the special game, so if a specific condition is satisfied during the predetermined period , it becomes possible to display specific information indicating specific numerical information on the display means by utilizing the blank period for the player. This makes it possible to display specific information on the display means in a time-efficient manner in the special game.

[Appendix A21']
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A1' to A3', wherein the specified period is set to the execution period of the special game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A21', specific information indicating specific numerical information is displayed on the display means during a prescribed period set as the execution period of the special game when a specific condition is satisfied. As a result, the player can enjoy specifying specific numerical information, and further guessing or specifying predetermined numerical information, based on the specific information displayed on the display means during the special game execution period (regular period). The interest in playing games is improved.

[Appendix A22']
The special game includes a value-adding game (open/close execution mode) that includes a plurality of unit games (round games) that provide game value to the player, and an ending that is executed after the end of the value-adding game (open/close execution mode). have,
The gaming machine according to appendix A21', wherein the specified period is set to the ending.

By the way, from the end of the value-giving game to the end of the special game, no game value is given or the result of the transition determination is notified. Therefore, from the player's perspective, the period from the end of the value-giving game to the end of the special game is a kind of blank period. On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to Appendix A22', the end of the predetermined period is set between the end of the value-adding game and the end of the special game, so if a specific condition is satisfied during the predetermined period , it becomes possible to display specific information indicating specific numerical information on the display means by utilizing the blank period for the player. This makes it possible to display specific information on the display means in a time-efficient manner in the special game.

[Appendix A23']
The display control means (51) displays at least specific information (numbers) indicating the specific numerical information (non-set value) during the specified period when the specific condition is satisfied during the predetermined period. 39, 341),
The gaming machine according to appendix A21' or A22', wherein the specified period is set after at least the predetermined period has elapsed.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A23', if a specific condition is satisfied within a predetermined period, specific information indicating specific numerical information is displayed after the predetermined period has elapsed. Therefore, the player enjoys the progress of the game by focusing on whether or not a specific condition is satisfied during a predetermined period of time, and after the elapse of the predetermined period, the player enjoys the game by focusing on specific information displayed on the display means. I can do it. This improves the interest of the game during a series of periods from the start of the predetermined period until the specific information is displayed after the elapse of the predetermined period.

[Appendix A24']
The special game has a value imparting game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) that impart a gaming value to the player,
The special gaming state is
After the special game in the special game state ends, a first special game state (5R Usually jackpot) and
After the special game ends in the special game state, the probability that the transition determination means (41) determines that the transition to the special game state is to be made is higher than that in the first game state, and the result of the transition determination is notified. a second special gaming state (a 5R probability variable jackpot gaming state and a 16R probability variable jackpot gaming state) in which the second gaming state (high probability mode) is transferred to a second gaming state (high probability mode);
The start of the predetermined period is set to the special game to be transitioned to when the result of the transition determination in the first gaming state is to transition to the special game,
The end of the predetermined period is set to a special game (5R normal jackpot) executed in the first special gaming state that is transferred to the first gaming state after the end of the special game in the special gaming state. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A21' to A23', characterized by:

In the gaming machine according to appendix A24', the start of the predetermined period is a special game to be executed in the special gaming state that is transitioned when the result of transition determination in the first gaming state is to transition to the special gaming state. Set. That is, the start of the predetermined period is set to the special game that is the first win. On the other hand, the end of the predetermined period is set to a special game to be executed in a first special game state that is transferred to a first game state after the end of the specific game in the special game state. That is, the end of the predetermined period is set to the last special game to be executed, regardless of whether it is a first win or a consecutive win. In this way, the predetermined period starts with the first win, the end period is set for the last special game to be executed, and specific information is displayed on the display means after the predetermined period has elapsed. As a result, it is possible to provide a game feature in which specific information indicating specific numerical information is presented to the player by effectively utilizing the period during which the special game is executed. In addition, in the case of winning a series of games, it is also possible to collectively present a number (amount) of information corresponding to the number of specific conditions satisfied in this winning of a series of games after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. Therefore, the player can confirm a lot of information regarding specific information in a short period of time after the predetermined period has elapsed. The convenience of identifying or estimating is improved.

[Appendix A25']
The predetermined period includes a specific period set for the special game that starts within the predetermined period,
The specified period is set after the specified period has elapsed,
Supplementary note A23' or supplementary note characterized in that the display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information when the specific condition is satisfied during the specific period. The gaming machine described in A24'.

The gaming machine according to appendix A25' includes a specific period set for a special game that starts within a predetermined period. That is, when special games are started a plurality of times in a predetermined period, such as when winning consecutive games, a plurality of special periods are set according to the number of special games started in the predetermined period. Moreover, specific information indicating specific numerical information is displayed on the display means after the specific period has elapsed. Therefore, if there are multiple specific periods within a given period, it is determined whether a specific condition is met for each specific period, and if a specific condition is met in that specific period, each specific period elapses. Information is displayed on the display means. As a result, it is possible to focus on whether or not a specific condition is satisfied for each special game, and to focus on specific information displayed on the display means when the specific condition is satisfied, thereby increasing the interest in the special game. It becomes possible to improve.

[Appendix A26']
The special game includes a value imparting game (open/close execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) that impart a gaming value to the player, and an ending that is executed after the end of the value imparting game,
The specific period includes a period in which the value imparting game is executed,
The gaming machine according to appendix A25', wherein the specified period is set to the ending.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A26', it is determined whether or not a specific condition is satisfied for each specific period including the value-adding game, and the value-adding game is terminated if the specific condition is satisfied in the specific period. Specific information is displayed in the ending that is executed from. Therefore, in the value-adding game, attention can be focused on whether or not a specific condition is satisfied, and if the specific condition is satisfied, attention can be focused on the content of specific information in the ending after the value-adding game is completed. As a result, the ending of the special game can be effectively utilized to provide a gameplay feature in which specific information is displayed, and the game can be made more interesting because it is possible to draw attention to the progress of the game throughout the special game.

[Appendix A27']
The specific condition is that a game ball passes through a specific area (373) and that the game ball passes through the specific area (373) to win a display lottery that is executed as a trigger.
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A21' to A26', wherein the specified period is after winning the display lottery.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A27', specific information is displayed on the display means by winning a display lottery that is executed when a game ball passes through a specific area. In this way, by performing a display lottery as a condition for displaying specific information on the display means, when a game ball passes through a specific area, it is possible to determine whether or not you have won the display lottery (whether specific information is displayed or not). Since the player can enjoy the progress of the game by focusing on the following points, the interest in the game is improved. Further, when a display lottery is performed as a condition for displaying specific information on the display means, it becomes easy to adjust the difficulty level and variation in satisfying the specific condition (difficulty level and variation in displaying specific information). As a result, various playability can be imparted to the display of specific information depending on the probability of winning in the display lottery, the lottery method, and the like.

[Appendix A28']
The display control means (51) displays the specific information on the display means (35, 39, 341) based on the number of specific conditions satisfied in the predetermined period, when a specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period. The gaming machine according to any one of appendix A1' to appendix A3', characterized in that the game machine displays the following.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A28', when a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period, specific information indicating specific numerical information is displayed on the display means based on the number of specific conditions satisfied in the predetermined period. Thereby, the player can guess the specific numerical information based on the specific information displayed on the display means, and by displaying all the specific numerical information, it is possible to specify all the specific numerical information. can. Further, it is also possible to recognize predetermined numerical information by specifying all specific numerical information. Therefore, the player can enjoy guessing or specifying specific numerical information, and furthermore, guessing or specifying predetermined numerical information, based on the specific information displayed on the display means, thereby improving the interest of the game. In particular, since specific information indicating specific numerical information is displayed on the display means based on the number of specific conditions that are satisfied in a predetermined period, it is expected that many specific conditions will be met in a predetermined period. You can enjoy the progress of the game by focusing on the number of conditions.

[Appendix A29']
The gaming machine according to appendix A28', wherein the display means is an information display means (35, 39, 341) capable of displaying information corresponding to each of the plurality of types of numerical information.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A29', the display means is an information display means. Therefore, the player can visually grasp the specific information based on the content displayed on the display means. As a result, the player can easily grasp the specific information, and therefore can easily specify or infer the specific numerical information based on the specific information.

[Appendix A30']
The specific information includes a plurality of individual information,
The information display means has a plurality of display areas (segments A to G) corresponding to the plurality of individual information,
Supplementary note characterized in that the display control means (51) causes the plurality of display areas of the information display means to display a number of the individual information corresponding to the number of the specific conditions satisfied in the predetermined period. The gaming machine described in A29'.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A30', the specific information includes a plurality of pieces of individual information, and the information display means has a plurality of display areas for displaying a plurality of pieces of individual information. Therefore, it becomes possible to individually display a plurality of pieces of individual information necessary for specifying specific numerical information in any of the plurality of display areas. As a result, it is possible to provide gameplay in which the difficulty of specifying or guessing specific numerical information can be adjusted depending on which information out of a plurality of individual pieces of information is displayed, thereby improving the interest of the game.

[Appendix A31']
The gaming machine according to appendix A30', wherein each of the plurality of display areas (segments A to G) displays the corresponding individual information among the specific information.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A31', each of the plurality of display areas displays corresponding individual information among the plurality of individual information, so that specific numerical information is specified or estimated based on the correspondence. becomes possible. Thereby, the player can enjoy specifying or guessing specific numerical information while looking forward to seeing which individual information among the plurality of pieces of individual information will be displayed when specific conditions are met.

[Appendix A32']
The gaming machine according to appendix A30' or A31', wherein the information display means (39) has a plurality of light emitting areas as the plurality of display areas.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A32', the information display means includes a plurality of light emitting areas. Such information display means can be realized by an easily available and low-cost display device such as a 7-segment display device. Therefore, it is possible to equip the gaming machine with an information display means for displaying specific information while suppressing the complexity of the configuration and the increase in manufacturing costs.

[Appendix A33']
The gaming machine according to appendix A30' or appendix A31', wherein the information display means (341) is capable of displaying the specific information as a specific image corresponding to the specific information.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A33', since the information display means can display a specific image that can specify or infer specific numerical information, there are many options for the form of the specific image and the process to display the specific image. Therefore, specific numerical information can be specified or inferred in various patterns depending on the aspect of the specific image and the process to display the specific image. This improves the gameplay of specifying or guessing specific numerical information.

[Appendix A34']
According to appendix A33', the information display means (341) is an image display means capable of displaying a variable display image in which a pattern (decoration pattern) suggesting or clarifying the result of the transition determination is displayed in a variable manner. The game machine described.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A34', a specific image is displayed on the image display means capable of displaying a variable display image of a symbol that suggests or clearly indicates the result of the transition determination. Therefore, when displaying a variable display image on the image display means in a gaming machine, the image display means can be used to display a specific image. This is advantageous in terms of manufacturing costs because the specific image can be displayed using the display means necessary for the gaming machine without separately providing a display means for displaying the specific image.

[Appendix A35']
The information display means (39) is capable of displaying numbers or alphabets in the plurality of display areas,
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A29' to A34', wherein the specific information is a number or an alphabet.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A35', the information display means can display numbers or alphabets, and the specific information is displayed in correspondence with the numbers or alphabets. This allows all or part of the specific information to be displayed as simple identification information such as numbers or alphabets, making it easy to identify or infer specific numerical information, and without requiring advanced gaming knowledge. Or you can easily enjoy guessing.

[Appendix A36']
The information display means (35) has a plurality of individual display sections (351 to 356) corresponding to each of the plurality of types of numerical information,
The display control means (51) displays the individual display sections (351 to 356) corresponding to the specific numerical information among the plurality of types of numerical information according to the number of specific conditions that are satisfied during the predetermined period. The gaming machine according to appendix A29', characterized in that the specific information is displayed.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A36', specific information is displayed on the individual display section corresponding to specific numerical information among the plurality of types of numerical information. That is, an individual display section on which specific information is displayed is defined for each specific numerical information. Therefore, the specific information can be easily grasped by the type of the individual display section on which the specific information is displayed, and the specific numerical information can be easily identified. This increases the convenience in identifying specific numerical information.

[Appendix A37']
The display control means (51) controls the individual display section (351 to 356) in one of two modes: a display state in which the specific information is displayed and a non-display state in which the specific information is not displayed. The gaming machine according to appendix A36', characterized by:

In the gaming machine according to appendix A37', the individual display section is controlled in one of two modes: a display state and a non-display state. Therefore, specific numerical information can be easily specified depending on the form of the individual display section. This increases the convenience in identifying specific numerical information.

[Appendix A38']
The gaming machine according to appendix A36' or A37', wherein the plurality of individual display sections (351 to 356) are arranged in a row, a ring, a matrix, or a staggered pattern.

[Appendix A39']
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A36' to A38', wherein the plurality of individual display sections (351 to 356) are a group of lamps.

In the gaming machines according to appendix A38' and appendix A39', the information display means can be formed easily and inexpensively.

[Appendix A40']
display order determining means (51) for determining a display order in which the specific information is to be displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341) when a predetermined condition is satisfied;
Furthermore,
The display control means (51) controls the display means (51) based on the display order determined by the display order determination means (51) in the specified period when the specific condition is satisfied for a predetermined period. 35, 39, 341), the gaming machine according to any one of appendices A1' to A3'.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A40', the display order in which the specific information is displayed on the display means is determined when a predetermined condition is satisfied. In this manner, the display order in which the specific information is displayed is determined when the predetermined condition is satisfied, thereby preventing the display order of the specific information from becoming constant. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the same specific information from being displayed repeatedly, and it is possible to prevent the display of the specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix A41']
The gaming machine according to appendix A40', wherein the predetermined condition is that the gaming machine (10) is powered on.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A41', the display order in which specific information is displayed on the display means is determined when the gaming machine is powered on. By the way, power to gaming machines is often turned on before the opening of the gaming parlor. Therefore, the display order of the specific information is determined every business day by determining the display order of the specific information when the gaming machine is powered on. This prevents the display order of the specific information from being fixed, so it is possible to prevent the same specific information from being repeatedly displayed on different business days and from making the display of the specific information monotonous.

[Appendix A42']
The gaming machine according to appendix A40', wherein the predetermined condition is that the predetermined numerical information (setting value) is stored in the numerical information storage means (41).

In the gaming machine according to appendix A42', the display order in which the specific information is displayed on the display means is determined by storing predetermined numerical information in the numerical information storage means. This makes it possible to determine the display order of the specific information according to the predetermined numerical information, thereby preventing the display of the specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix A43']
The gaming machine according to appendix A40', wherein the predetermined condition is that the predetermined period starts.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A43', the display order in which the specific information is displayed on the display means is determined by starting the predetermined period. Thereby, the display order of specific information is determined for each predetermined period. Therefore, since the display order of the specific information is prevented from being fixed, it is possible to prevent the same specific information from being displayed repeatedly and the display of the specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix A44']
The gaming machine according to appendix A40', wherein the predetermined condition is that the special game is started.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A44', the display order in which the specific information is displayed on the display means is determined by starting the special game. Thereby, the display order of specific information is determined for each special game. Therefore, since the display order of the specific information is prevented from being fixed, it is possible to prevent the same specific information from being displayed repeatedly and the display of the specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix A45']
The special game has a value imparting game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) that impart a gaming value to the player,
The gaming machine according to appendix A40', wherein the predetermined condition is that the value-adding game is started.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A45', the display order in which the specific information is displayed on the display means is determined when the value imparting game is started. Thereby, the display order of specific information is determined for each value-adding game. Therefore, since the display order of the specific information is prevented from being fixed, it is possible to prevent the same specific information from being displayed repeatedly and the display of the specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix A46']
display content storage means (512) for storing display content of the specific information displayed on the first display means (35, 39, 341) during the specified period;
In order to display the display content stored in the display content storage means (512) on the second display means (35, 39, 341) during a special period (for example, a standby period) different from the specified period. an operating means (21) operated by a player;
When the player performs a predetermined operation on the operation means (21) during the special period, the display contents stored in the display contents storage means (512) are displayed on the second display means (35, 39). , 341);
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A1' to A3', further comprising:

In the gaming machine according to appendix A46', the display content of the specific information displayed during the specified period can be displayed by operating the operating means during a special period different from the specified period. Thereby, by operating the operating means during the special period, the player can cause the second display means to display the display content of the specific information displayed during the specified period. Therefore, if a player wants to check the display content of specific information displayed during a specified period, for example, if he has forgotten the display content, or if there is a change in player, he may check the display content during the special period. I can do it. As a result, the player can identify or infer specific numerical information by checking the display contents during the specified period during the special period, and whether or not to play the game on the gaming machine in accordance with the identification or inference. It becomes possible to judge whether

[Appendix A47']
Further comprising a notification game execution means (41) that executes a notification game (variable game) that notifies the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41),
The gaming machine according to appendix A46', wherein the special period is set to a period in which neither the special game nor the notification game is executed.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A47', the special period in which the display contents during the specified period can be checked is set to a period in which neither the special game nor the notification game is being executed. This allows the player to carefully and carefully check the displayed content at his or her own pace, without being subject to time constraints, and decide whether or not to play the game on the gaming machine.

[Appendix A48']
The display content storage means (512) is capable of storing display content of a plurality of the specific information displayed in a plurality of mutually different prescribed periods,
The display content display control means (51) controls the plurality of display content stored in the display content storage means (512) when the player performs a predetermined operation on the operation means (21) during the special period. The gaming machine according to appendix A46' or appendix A47', characterized in that at least one of the display contents of the specific information is displayed on the second display means (35, 39, 341).

[Appendix A49']
The display content display control means (51) causes the player to perform a predetermined operation on the operation means (21) during the special period based on the display content of the plurality of specific information during the special period. The gaming machine according to appendix A48', characterized in that the display content selected by the second display means (35, 39, 341) is displayed on the second display means (35, 39, 341).

[Appendix A50']
The display content display control means (51) controls the plurality of display content stored in the display content storage means (512) when the player performs a predetermined operation on the operation means (21) during the special period. The gaming machine according to appendix A49', characterized in that two or more of the display contents of the specific information are displayed on the second display means (35, 39, 341).

In the gaming machines according to appendices A48' to A50', it is possible to cause the second display means to present at least one display content among the display contents of a plurality of specific information displayed in a plurality of prescribed periods. For example, it is possible to cause the second display means to present the display content selected by the player from the display content of a plurality of specific information stored in the display content storage means (512). In this case, since the player can select the content to be presented on the second display means from among the display content of a plurality of pieces of specific information, the player can confirm the display content that he or she desires. As a result, it is possible to effectively check the displayed contents while avoiding checking the displayed contents such as previously checked information or information with a small amount of information, so that the displayed contents can be checked efficiently. Further, when two or more display contents are displayed on the second display means, many display contents can be checked at once, so that the presented contents can be checked efficiently in this case as well.

[Appendix A51']
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A46' to A50', wherein the first display means (35, 39) and the second display means (341) are different display means.

[Appendix A52']
The gaming machine according to appendix A51', wherein the second display means (341) is a variable display image display means in which a symbol (decorative symbol) suggesting or clarifying the result of the transition determination is displayed in a variable manner. .

The gaming machines according to Appendix A51' and Appendix A52' are provided with a first display means that is displayed during the prescribed period and a second display means that is displayed during the special period, and different displays are displayed during each of the prescribed period and the special period. Specific information is displayed depending on the means. Therefore, in the prescribed period, when information other than the specific information is displayed on the second display means, it is possible to prevent the display from being obstructed. For example, when the second display means is a variable display image display means, visual recognition of the image (for example, image effect) displayed on the variable display image display means is prevented from being obstructed. On the other hand, in the special period (for example, standby state), the display contents of the specific information in the specified period are presented by a second display means such as a variable display image display means in which symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In general, the variable display image display means has a large display area, so when the variable display image display means is made to present the display content of specific information in a specified period, visibility is improved. Further, the variable display image display means may be used to perform various settings such as performances and characters to be executed in the gaming machine. Therefore, by making the variable display image display means present the display contents of the specific information in the specified period, the display contents of the specific information in the specified period can be displayed in a variable manner by the same operations as those for making various settings. It becomes possible to display the image on the image display means. Therefore, the convenience in displaying the display content of specific information on the variable display image display means during the special period is improved.

[Appendix A53']
The specific information includes a plurality of specific information,
The display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the plurality of pieces of specific information in the specified period in a predetermined display order when a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A1' to A8', characterized by:

In the gaming machine according to appendix A53', a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined order during a predetermined period. The predetermined order can be set as appropriate, for example, an order in which it is easy to narrow down and recognize the predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is difficult to narrow down and recognize the predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is easy to judge whether the probability of favorable judgment is high, or vice versa. It is possible to set the order in such a way that it is difficult to judge whether it is high or low. In this way, the plural pieces of specific information can be displayed in various orders, and by appropriately selecting the display order, it is possible to prevent the display order of the plural pieces of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix A54']
The display control means (51) is configured to display all of the plurality of pieces of specific information in the predetermined display order during the predetermined period when the number of times the specific condition is satisfied during the predetermined period exceeds a predetermined number of times. The gaming machine according to appendix A53', characterized in that the gaming machine is displayed.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A54', when the number of times a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period exceeds a predetermined number of times, all pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means in a predetermined display order during the predetermined period. In this way, when the specific condition of the number of times exceeding the specified number of times is satisfied, all of the plurality of specific information is displayed on the display means in a predetermined display order, so that the player can grasp the predetermined numerical information. It becomes possible. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to whether or not the number of times a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period exceeds the prescribed number of times.

Note that the gaming machine according to appendix A54' is different from the conventional slot machine in which information denying a high setting value such as the maximum setting value is not presented, in that all of the plurality of specific information (non-setting values) can be displayed on the display means. Different from the machine.

[Appendix A55']
display order selection means (51) for selecting one display order from a plurality of display orders that define the priority order of the display order of the plurality of specific information in the predetermined period;
further comprising selected display order storage means (51) for storing the one display order selected by the display order selection means (51),
The display control means (51) displays the plurality of pieces of specific information on the display means (35, 39, 341) in accordance with the one display order stored in the display order storage means (51) during the specified period. The gaming machine according to appendix A53', characterized in that a display is displayed.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A55', a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means during a prescribed period according to one display order selected from a plurality of display orders that define the priority order of the display order of the plurality of pieces of specific information. . Therefore, depending on the display order included in the multiple display orders and the selection rate thereof, it is possible to make it easier for multiple pieces of specific information to be displayed in a specific display order, to make it more difficult for multiple pieces of specific information to be displayed in a specific display order, and to make it easier for multiple pieces of specific information to be displayed in a specific display order. It is possible to prevent multiple pieces of specific information from being displayed depending on the display order. This makes it possible to display multiple pieces of specific information in various orders by appropriately setting the content and selection rate of multiple display orders, so the display order of multiple pieces of specific information becomes monotonous. can be prevented.

[Appendix A56']
The plurality of display orders are defined for each of the plurality of types of numerical information,
The gaming machine according to appendix A55', wherein the display order selection means (51) selects the one display order from the plurality of display orders based on the predetermined numerical information.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A56', a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means during a prescribed period according to a display order selected from a plurality of display orders based on predetermined numerical information. That is, since it is possible to set a plurality of display orders in relation to the predetermined numerical information, the display order can be set for each predetermined numerical information. As a result, the display order can be set based on whether the advantageous judgment probability corresponding to the predetermined numerical information is high or low, and it is also possible to characterize the display of a plurality of specific information for each predetermined numerical information.

[Appendix A57']
The gaming machine according to appendix A56', wherein the plurality of display orders include display orders having different probabilities (selection rates) of being selected by the display order selection means (51).

In the gaming machine according to appendix A57', it is possible to make it easier to select a specific display order, or to make it harder to select a specific display order. That is, unlike the case where all display orders have the same probability of being selected, it is easier to identify a specific non-set value, and conversely, it is difficult to identify a specific non-set value. It also becomes possible. This makes it possible to adjust the probability of a high setting value and the probability of a low setting value.

[Appendix A58']
The plurality of display orders include a first display in which the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the advantageous judgment probability having the lowest probability among the plurality of advantageous judgment probabilities corresponding to the plurality of specific information has the lowest priority. including the order;
The first display order is set to have a higher probability (selection rate) of being selected by the display order selection means (51) (including 100%) than display orders other than the first display order. The gaming machine according to appendix A57', characterized by:

In the gaming machine according to appendix A58', the first display has the lowest priority of the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the advantage determination probability with the lowest probability among the plurality of advantage determination probabilities corresponding to the plurality of specific information. The order is easy to choose. That is, other than the advantage determination probability corresponding to the predetermined numerical information, the specific information indicating the specific numerical information that has the lowest advantage determination probability and is most disadvantageous to the player has the lowest priority in the display order. Therefore, the specific numerical information that is most disadvantageous to the player is displayed last, so until the last specific information is displayed, the probability of an advantageous judgment that is the most disadvantageous to the player and the probability that is more advantageous to the player are displayed. The possibility of an advantageous judgment probability remains. This makes it difficult for the player to understand that the probability of an advantageous determination is the most disadvantageous for the player, which makes it possible to prevent the game on the gaming machine from ending early, and to reduce the operating rate of the gaming machine. The decline can be suppressed.

[Appendix A59']
The specific information includes first specific information indicating specific numerical information corresponding to a favorable determination probability having the lowest probability among the plurality of favorable determination probabilities corresponding to the plurality of specific numerical information, and the plurality of favorable determination probabilities. Second specific information indicating specific numerical information corresponding to the advantageous judgment probability with the highest probability;
The plurality of display orders include a second display order in which the first specific information and the second specific information have the lowest priorities,
The second display order is set to have a higher probability (selection rate) of being selected by the display order selection means (51) (including 100%) than display orders other than the second display order. The gaming machine according to appendix A57', characterized by:

In the gaming machine according to appendix A59', the second display order has a lower priority of the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the advantage determination probability having the lowest probability among the plurality of advantage determination probabilities corresponding to the plurality of specific information. is likely to be selected. Therefore, similar to the gaming machine according to appendix A58', it becomes difficult for the player to understand that the advantageous judgment probability is the most disadvantageous for the player, and the game on the gaming machine may be ended early. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the operating rate of gaming machines. Further, in the second display order, the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the advantageous determination probability with the highest probability among the plurality of advantageous determination probabilities corresponding to the plurality of specific information is low. Therefore, it becomes difficult for the player to understand that it is not only the advantageous determination probability that is disadvantageous to the player, but also the advantageous determination probability that is advantageous to the player. In this way, because the priority of the two specific pieces of information indicating the two specific numerical information corresponding to the advantageous determination probability that is disadvantageous to the player and the advantageous determination probability that is advantageous to the player is low, the advantages for the player are contradictory. Since it becomes difficult to determine until the end which of the two favorable judgment probabilities it is, it becomes possible to increase interest in the specific information displayed on the display means.

[Appendix A60']
The display order of the plurality of items is such that the priority order of the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the favorable determination probability having a higher probability than the first favorable determination probability corresponding to the predetermined numerical information is the first favorable determination probability. including a third display order lower than the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to an advantageous determination probability that is lower than the probability;
The third display order has a higher probability (including 100%) of being selected by the display order selection means (51) than display orders other than the third display order. The gaming machine described in appendix A57'.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A60', the priority of specific information indicating specific numerical information corresponding to an advantageous determination probability that is higher than the first advantageous determination probability is an advantageous determination probability that is lower than the first advantageous determination probability. The selection rate of the third display order, which is lower than the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to , is set high. By setting the selection rate for the third display order to be high, the player is given a possibility that the probability of an advantageous decision is higher than the actual first probability of an advantageous decision just before the player grasps the first advantageous decision probability. It can make you look forward to it. Thereby, the user can enjoy guessing specific information (predetermined information) while expecting the possibility that the advantageous determination probability is high until just before the first advantageous determination probability is grasped.

[Appendix A61']
The display order of the plurality of items is such that the priority order of the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the favorable determination probability lower than the first favorable determination probability corresponding to the predetermined numerical information is the first favorable determination probability. a fourth display order lower than the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to an advantageous judgment probability higher than the probability;
The fourth display order is characterized in that the probability (selection rate) of being selected by the display order selection means (51) is set higher (including 100%) than display orders other than the fourth display order. The gaming machine described in appendix A57'.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A61', the priority of specific information indicating specific numerical information corresponding to an advantageous determination probability that is lower than the first advantageous determination probability is an advantageous determination probability that is higher than the first advantageous determination probability. The selection rate of the fourth display order, which is lower than the specific information indicating specific numerical information corresponding to , is set high. By setting the selection rate of the fourth display order to be high, specific numerical information corresponding to an advantageous judgment probability whose probability is lower than the first advantageous judgment probability is displayed immediately before the first advantageous judgment probability is grasped. The specific information shown is left as hidden specific information. As a result, the final candidate for the first advantageous determination probability becomes specific information indicating the actual first advantageous determination probability and specific numerical information corresponding to an advantageous determination probability that is lower in probability than the first advantageous determination probability. As a result, in the end, the predetermined numerical information corresponding to the first advantageous judgment probability that is advantageous to the player is grasped as the first advantageous judgment probability (predetermined numerical information), so when the set value is grasped. pleasure is improved.

[Appendix A62']
Supplementary Notes A1' to A3 further comprising display restriction means (51) for restricting display of the specific information on the display means (35, 39, 341) during a period other than the prescribed period. A gaming machine described in any of '.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A62', displaying of specific information on the display means is restricted during periods other than the specified period. Therefore, the display of the specific information is performed as a benefit for the player who played a game that satisfies the specific conditions for displaying the specific information. This can prevent other players from taking advantage of the benefits obtained by the previous player and obtaining specific information for specifying or inferring specific numerical information.

[Appendix A63']
Further comprising a notification game execution means (41) that executes a notification game (variable game) that notifies the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41),
The gaming machine according to appendix A62', wherein a period other than the specified period is a standby period in which neither the special game nor the notification game is executed.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A63', displaying of specific information on the display means is restricted during a standby state period in which neither the special game nor the notification game is being executed. Here, the change of players is generally performed during a waiting period. Therefore, by restricting the display of specific information on the display means during the waiting period, other players may take advantage of the benefits obtained by the previous player and identify or guess specific numerical information. It is possible to more reliably prevent specific information from being obtained.

[Appendix A64']
The display restriction means (51) is characterized in that, in a period other than the specified period, the display of the specific information that was previously displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341) during the specified period is limited. The gaming machine described in appendix A62' or appendix A63'.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A64', display of specific information previously displayed on the display means during the specified period is restricted during periods other than the specified period. In other words, the specific information is displayed only during the specified period, and the display of the past display history of the specific information is also restricted outside the specified period. As a result, it is not possible to check the specific information displayed in the past based on the display history, so other players can take advantage of the benefits obtained by the previous player and identify specific numerical information based on the display history. Alternatively, it is possible to more reliably prevent obtaining specific information for making inferences.

[Appendix A65']
The display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the plurality of specific information (numbers) in a first display order when a first specific condition is satisfied for a predetermined period. , when a second specific condition different from the first specific condition is satisfied, the display means (35, 39, 341), the gaming machine according to any one of appendix A1' to appendix A3'.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A65', a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means in a first display order when a first specific condition is met, and a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means when a second specific condition is met. The specific information (numbers) is displayed on the display means in a second display order different from the first display order. That is, the display order of the plurality of specific information is set depending on the type of specific condition that is satisfied. Therefore, the display order of the plurality of specific information can be made difficult for the player to recognize, and the plurality of specific numerical information can be prevented from being easily specified or recognized based on the specific information. This prevents the player from quickly grasping that the advantageous determination probability is low when the advantageous determination probability is low. As a result, even if the advantageous judgment probability is low, the game on the gaming machine is prevented from being prematurely ended, and the operating rate of the gaming machine is prevented from decreasing.

[Appendix A66']
The first specific condition includes that first predetermined numerical information (set value) selected from the plurality of types of numerical information is stored in the numerical information storage means (41),
The second specific condition is such that second predetermined numerical information (setting value) different from the first predetermined numerical information (setting value) selected from the plurality of types of numerical information is the numerical information storage means (41). The gaming machine according to appendix A65', characterized in that the gaming machine is stored in .

In the gaming machine according to appendix A66', the first specific condition includes that the first predetermined numerical information is stored in the numerical information storage means, and the second specific condition includes that the second predetermined numerical information is stored in the numerical information storage means. This includes storing numerical information. That is, the type of specific condition depends on the predetermined numerical information. Therefore, a display order is defined based on predetermined numerical information, and a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means in a defined period according to the display order. That is, since it is possible to set the display order in relation to the predetermined numerical information, the display order can be set for each predetermined numerical information. As a result, the display order can be set based on whether the advantageous judgment probability corresponding to the predetermined numerical information is high or low, and it is also possible to characterize the display of a plurality of specific information for each predetermined numerical information.

[Appendix A67']
If the first specific condition or the second specific condition is satisfied, one display order is selected from a plurality of display orders that define the priority order of the display order of the plurality of specific information in the predetermined period. display order selection means (51) for
further comprising selected display order storage means (51) for storing the one display order selected by the display order selection means (51),
The display control means (51) displays the plurality of pieces of specific information on the display means (35, 39, 341) in accordance with the one display order stored in the display order storage means (51) during the specified period. The gaming machine according to appendix A65' or appendix A66', characterized in that the gaming machine displays a display.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A67', a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means during a prescribed period in accordance with one display order selected from a plurality of display orders that define the priority order of the display order of the plurality of pieces of specific information. . Therefore, depending on the display order included in the multiple display orders and the selection rate thereof, it is possible to make it easier for multiple pieces of specific information to be displayed in a specific display order, to make it more difficult for multiple pieces of specific information to be displayed in a specific display order, and to make it easier for multiple pieces of specific information to be displayed in a specific display order. It is possible to prevent multiple pieces of specific information from being displayed depending on the display order. This makes it possible to display multiple pieces of specific information in various orders by appropriately setting the content and selection rate of multiple display orders, so the display order of multiple pieces of specific information becomes monotonous. can be prevented.

[Appendix A68']
The plurality of display orders are defined for each of the plurality of types of numerical information,
The gaming machine according to appendix A67', wherein the display order selection means (51) selects the one display order from the plurality of display orders based on the predetermined numerical information.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A68', a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means during a prescribed period according to a display order selected from a plurality of display orders based on predetermined numerical information. That is, since it is possible to set a plurality of display orders in relation to the predetermined numerical information, the display order can be set for each predetermined numerical information. As a result, the display order can be set based on whether the advantageous judgment probability corresponding to the predetermined numerical information is high or low, and it is also possible to characterize the display of a plurality of specific information for each predetermined numerical information.

[Appendix A69']
further comprising a second display control means (41) for causing a second display means (45) to display predetermined information (numbers) indicating the predetermined numerical information;
The display means (35, 39, 341) is provided at a position visible to the player,
The second display means (45) is provided at a position where visibility by the player is restricted,
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A1' to A3', wherein the predetermined information is not displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341) during the specified period.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A69', specific information other than the predetermined information is displayed on the first display means provided at a position visible to the player, and the second display means provided at a position where the player's visibility is restricted. Predetermined information is displayed in (45). That is, when a specific condition is met, specific information indicating specific numerical information other than one predetermined numerical information selected from a plurality of types of numerical information is provided at a position that is visible to the player during a prescribed period. displayed on the first display means. Thereby, the player can specify the specific numerical information based on the specific information displayed on the first display means, and can also recognize the predetermined numerical information by displaying all the specific numerical information. It's possible. Therefore, the player can enjoy grasping the specific numerical information and further guessing or specifying the predetermined numerical information based on the specific information displayed on the first display means, thereby improving the interest of the game.

In addition, by displaying predetermined information on the second display means provided in a position where the player's visual recognition is restricted, the player can receive a predetermined numerical value based on the predetermined information displayed on the second display means during business hours. Information can be prevented from being grasped. On the other hand, the predetermined information can be grasped at the gaming hall side during non-business hours. Thereby, the gaming hall side can confirm the predetermined numerical information based on the predetermined information displayed on the second display means outside business hours, and when changing the predetermined numerical information, the predetermined numerical information after the change. Since the predetermined information indicating the value can be confirmed, the task of changing the predetermined numerical information is facilitated.

[Appendix A70']
Further comprising a game board (31) on which a game ball is launched,
The display means (35, 39, 341) is provided on the front side of the game board (31),
The gaming machine according to appendix A69', wherein the second display means (45) is provided on the back side of the gaming board (31).

In the gaming machine according to appendix A70', specific information indicating specific numerical information other than the predetermined numerical information is displayed on the first display means provided on the front side of the game board, and predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical information is displayed on the back side of the game board. It is displayed on a second display means provided on the side. Therefore, it is easy to visually recognize the specific information displayed on the first display means, and it is possible to easily restrict the visibility of the predetermined information displayed on the second display means.

[Appendix A71']
The game board (31) is fixed to the frame (12) so that it can be opened and closed,
The gaming machine according to appendix A70', characterized in that the second display means (45) is provided at a position where the second display means (45) is visible when the gaming board (31) is opened.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A71', a second display means is provided on the back side of the gaming board that is openably and closably fixed to the frame. Therefore, by closing the game board, the predetermined information displayed on the second display means can be prevented from being visible to the player, while by opening the game board, the predetermined information displayed on the second display means can be prevented. You can check this at the game hall. Thereby, it is possible to achieve a state in which the predetermined information on the second display means is visible and a state in which visibility is restricted by the simple operation of opening and closing the game board.

[Appendix A72']
The second display control means (41)
controllable between a display state in which the predetermined numerical information is displayed on the second display means (45) and a non-display state in which the predetermined numerical information is not displayed on the second display means (45);
controlling from the non-display state to the display state when a first operation is performed on a specific operation means (46) provided on the back side of the game board (31);
The gaming machine according to appendix A70' or appendix A71', characterized in that when a second operation is performed on the specific operating means (46), the display state is controlled to the non-display state.

In the game machine according to appendix A72', a display state in which predetermined information is displayed on the second display means and a non-display state in which the predetermined information is not displayed can be set by operating a specific operation means provided on the back side of the game board. You can choose. Therefore, by selecting the non-display state during the business hours of the game hall, even if the game board is opened in the event of a jam in the game machine, the predetermined information will be displayed to the player through the second display means. It is possible to reliably prevent this information from being grasped by someone else.

[Appendix B1']
Transition determination means (for determining whether to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game advantageous to the player (jackpot game) is executed (jackpot lottery) based on the establishment of a determination condition (jackpot lottery); 41) and
a storage means (41) for storing numerical information (game setting values) corresponding to a plurality of mutually different advantage determination probabilities (jackpot probabilities);
selection means (41) for selecting each of the numerical information;
A gaming machine comprising:
Numerical information storage means (41) for storing one predetermined numerical information (setting value) selected from a plurality of types of numerical information;
When a specific condition is met, at least specific numerical information (non-set value) other than the predetermined numerical information among the plurality of types of numerical information is indicated during a specified period from a predetermined start timing to a predetermined end timing. Display control means (51) for displaying specific information (numbers) on the display means (35, 39, 341);
Equipped with
The specific condition can be established when the game ball passes through the specific area (373),
A gaming machine characterized in that during the specified period, the predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical value information is not displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341).

In the gaming machine according to appendix B1', since a specific condition can be established upon passing through a specific area, the player can easily understand that the specific condition is satisfied. This allows you to enjoy more about whether or not certain conditions are met. Moreover, specific information displayed on the display means is controlled by the display control means when the game ball passes through the specific area. Therefore, even in a situation where the game tends to proceed inorganically, it is possible to improve the gameplay by focusing on whether or not the game ball passes through a specific area.

[Appendix B2']
The display control means (51) can cause the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information and special information (a part of the numerical value) that does not indicate the plurality of types of numerical information. The gaming machine according to appendix B1', characterized in that:

[Appendix B3']
The display control means (51) may cause the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information and special information (part of a number) indicating a part of the plurality of types of numerical information. The gaming machine according to appendix B1', characterized in that it is possible.

In the gaming machine according to appendix B2' or appendix B3', the display means displays not only specific information but also special information that does not indicate multiple types of numerical information or special information that indicates part of multiple types of numerical information. . This allows the player to not only identify specific numerical information based on specific information when specific information is displayed on the display means, but also to specify specific numerical information based on the special information when special information is displayed on the display means. specific numerical information can be inferred. Therefore, even if the specific information is not displayed, the player can enjoy guessing the specific numerical information based on the special information, thereby improving the interest of the game.

[Appendix B4']
It further includes a discharge port (373) for discharging the game ball to the back side of the game board (31) from which the game ball is launched.
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices B1' to B3', wherein the specific area is the discharge port (373).

[Appendix B5']
It further includes a plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) from which prize balls are paid out when game balls enter the game ball,
The discharge port (373) includes a first discharge port (318) that discharges game balls that have not entered the plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) to the back side of the game board (31), and a second outlet (373) different from the first outlet (318);
The gaming machine according to appendix B4', wherein the specific area is the second outlet (373).

[Appendix B6']
The gaming machine according to appendix B5', wherein the second outlet (373) allows a ball to enter in the special game.

In the gaming machines according to Appendix B4' to Appendix B6', when a specific condition is satisfied when a game ball passes through the second ejection port into which the ball can enter in a special game, the specific information displayed on the display means is displayed. The display content of information is controlled. Therefore, in a special game where the game tends to proceed inorganically, it is possible to improve the gameplay by focusing on whether or not the game ball enters the second outlet.

[Appendix B7']
The plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) include a variable winning hole (316) into which a game ball can enter in the special game,
The game machine according to appendix B6', wherein the second discharge port (373) allows a game ball that has passed through the variable winning hole (316) to pass therethrough.

In the game machine according to appendix B7', when a specific condition is satisfied when a game ball passes through the second discharge port through which the game ball that entered the variable winning hole can pass in the special game, the display means The display content of specific information displayed on the screen is controlled. Therefore, in the special game, the game ball can be passed through the second ejection port by hitting the game ball into the game area and making the game ball win the variable prize opening. Therefore, it becomes possible to display specific information on the display means without requiring any special skill by simply playing the special game as usual. As a result, compared to the case where a difference in skill may occur due to the game balls entering the second ejection port, it is possible to avoid playing games on the gaming machine due to the possibility of a difference in skill. Prevented.

[Appendix B8']
the third outlet (378) through which game balls that have entered the variable prize opening (316) can pass, and which is different from the second outlet (373);
a sorting means (37) for sorting the game balls that have entered the variable prize opening (316) to either the second outlet (373) or the third outlet (378);
The gaming machine according to appendix B7', further comprising:

In the game machine according to appendix B8', since the game balls are distributed to the second discharge port and the third discharge port by the distribution means, whether or not a specific condition is satisfied depends on the distribution of game balls by the distribution means. This gives you the gameplay of playing the game. This makes it possible to enjoy the game by paying attention to the behavior of the game balls in the distribution means as to whether or not specific conditions are met.

[Appendix B9']
The specific information includes a plurality of specific information,
The display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the plurality of pieces of specific information in the specified period in a predetermined display order when a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices B1' to B8', characterized by:

In the gaming machine according to appendix B9', a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined order during a predetermined period. The predetermined order can be set as appropriate, for example, an order in which it is easy to narrow down and recognize the predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is difficult to narrow down and recognize the predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is easy to judge whether the probability of favorable judgment is high, or vice versa. It is possible to set the order in such a way that it is difficult to judge whether it is high or low. In this way, the plural pieces of specific information can be displayed in various orders, and by appropriately selecting the display order, it is possible to prevent the display order of the plural pieces of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix B10']
The display control means (51) is configured to display all of the plurality of pieces of specific information in the predetermined display order during the predetermined period when the number of times the specific condition is satisfied during the predetermined period exceeds a predetermined number of times. The gaming machine according to appendix B9', characterized in that the gaming machine is displayed as follows.

In the gaming machine according to appendix B10', when the number of times a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period exceeds a predetermined number of times, all pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means in a predetermined display order during the predetermined period. In this way, when the specific condition of the number of times exceeding the specified number of times is satisfied, all of the plurality of specific information is displayed on the display means in a predetermined display order, so that the player can grasp the predetermined numerical information. It becomes possible. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to whether or not the number of times a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period exceeds the prescribed number of times.

Note that the gaming machine according to appendix B10' is different from the conventional slot machine in which information denying a high setting value such as the maximum setting value is not presented, in that all of the plurality of specific information (non-setting values) can be displayed on the display means. Different from the machine.

[Appendix C1']
Transition determination means (for determining whether to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game advantageous to the player (jackpot game) is executed (jackpot lottery) based on the establishment of a determination condition (jackpot lottery); 41) and
a storage means (41) for storing numerical information (game setting values) corresponding to a plurality of mutually different advantage determination probabilities (jackpot probabilities);
selection means (41) for selecting each of the numerical information;
A gaming machine comprising:
Numerical information storage means (41) for storing one predetermined numerical information (setting value) selected from a plurality of types of numerical information;
At least the predetermined numerical information among the plurality of types of numerical information during a specified period from a predetermined start timing to a predetermined end timing if a specific condition is satisfied for a predetermined period. display control means (51) for causing the display means (35, 39, 341) to display specific information (numbers) indicating specific numerical information (non-set value) other than the above;
Equipped with
During the specified period, the predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical information is not displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341),
A gaming machine characterized in that the start time of the predetermined period is set to the special game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix C1', specific information indicating specific numerical information is displayed on the display means when a specific condition is satisfied during a predetermined period in which a start time is set for a special game. Therefore, the player can enjoy specifying specific numerical information, and furthermore, guessing or specifying predetermined numerical information, based on the specific information displayed on the display means when a specific condition is satisfied for a predetermined period of time. By setting the start of the predetermined period to the special game, the player can enjoy the game by focusing on whether or not a specific condition is satisfied in the special game.

[Appendix C2']
The display control means (51) displays the specific information and special information (part of the numerical values) that does not indicate the plurality of types of numerical information during the specified period when the specific condition is satisfied. The gaming machine according to appendix C1', characterized in that it is possible to display the information on the means (35, 39, 341).

[Appendix C3']
The display control means (51) displays the specific information and special information (a part of a number) indicating a part of the plurality of types of numerical information during the specified period when the specific condition is satisfied. The gaming machine according to appendix C1', characterized in that it can be displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341).

In the gaming machine according to appendix C2' or appendix C3', the display means displays not only specific information but also special information that does not indicate multiple types of numerical information or special information that indicates part of multiple types of numerical information. . This allows the player to not only identify specific numerical information based on specific information when specific information is displayed on the display means, but also to specify specific numerical information based on the special information when special information is displayed on the display means. specific numerical information can be inferred. Therefore, even if the specific information is not displayed, the player can enjoy guessing the specific numerical information based on the special information, thereby improving the interest of the game.

[Appendix C4']
The special gaming state is
After the special game in the special game state ends, a first special game state (5R Usually jackpot) and
After the special game ends in the special game state, the probability that the transition determination means (41) determines that the transition to the special game state is to be made is higher than that in the first game state, and the result of the transition determination is notified. a second special gaming state (a 5R probability variable jackpot gaming state and a 16R probability variable jackpot gaming state) in which the second gaming state (high probability mode) is transferred to a second gaming state (high probability mode);
The starting point of the predetermined period is set to the special game that is transferred when the result of the transfer determination in the first gaming state is to transfer to the special game. The gaming machine according to any one of C3'.

In the gaming machine according to appendix C4', in the first gaming state in which the probability that the transition determining means determines that the transition to the special gaming state will be made is lower than that in the second gaming state, the transition determination result is special. If the game is to be transferred to a game, it is set as a special game to be transferred. That is, the start of the predetermined period is set to the so-called first winning special game. As a result, a predetermined period is always set for each first hit, regardless of whether it is a single hit or a consecutive hit, so specific numerical information and even specific numerical information can be inferred or specified for each first hit. At least one opportunity is guaranteed.

[Appendix C5']
The special game has a value imparting game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) that impart a gaming value to the player,
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices C1' to C4', wherein the start time of the predetermined period is set between the start time of the special game and the start time of the value-adding game.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix C5', the start of the predetermined period is set between the start of the special game and the start of the value-adding game, so the specific condition is satisfied at least after the value-adding game is started. You can enjoy the game by focusing on whether it is true or not.

[Appendix C6']
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices C1' to C5', wherein the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix C6', the end of the predetermined period is set as a special game. That is, the predetermined period starts in the special game and ends in the special game. Here, in the special game, the result of the transition determination is not announced. Therefore, there is a concern that players' interest in the special game may decrease. On the other hand, by setting an end period in addition to a starting period for the special game, interest in the special game, which tends to decrease, is improved.

[Appendix C7']
The special gaming state is
After the special game in the special game state ends, a first special game state (5R Usually jackpot) and
After the special game ends in the special game state, the probability that the transition determination means (41) determines that the transition to the special game state is to be made is higher than that in the first game state, and the result of the transition determination is notified. a second special gaming state (a 5R probability variable jackpot gaming state and a 16R probability variable jackpot gaming state) in which the second gaming state (high probability mode) is transferred to a second gaming state (high probability mode);
The end of the predetermined period is set to a special game (5R normal jackpot) executed in the first special gaming state that is transferred to the first gaming state after the end of the special game in the special gaming state. The gaming machine according to appendix C6', characterized by:

In the gaming machine according to appendix C7', the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game to be executed in the first special gaming state that is transferred to the first gaming state after the end of the special game. Therefore, if the result of the transition determination of the first gaming state is to shift to the first special gaming state, that is, if the first win is a single win that shifts to the first special gaming state, the execution will be executed in the first special gaming state. A predetermined period ends in the special game played. On the other hand, if the result of the transition determination of the first gaming state is to shift to the second special gaming state, that is, if the first win is a consecutive win that shifts to the second special gaming state, the second special gaming state will be changed to the second special gaming state. If the predetermined period in the special game to be executed does not end and the result of the transition determination of the second game state is to transition to the first special game state, the game is executed in the first special game state. A predetermined period ends in the special game. That is, in the case of consecutive winnings where the first winning is transferred to the second special game state, the predetermined period ends in the first special game where the consecutive winnings end. Therefore, in the case of consecutive games, the predetermined period is set to extend over the first special game at the end of the consecutive games, so the predetermined period is longer than that of a single game. The period will also be longer. As a result, there is a high possibility that a specific condition will be met more often in a consecutive home than in a single game, and the more times a certain condition is met in a consecutive home, the more likely it is that a specific condition will be met more times. Become. As a result, the player can not only increase the expected value of the game value that can be acquired as the number of consecutive games increases, but also obtain more specific information indicating specific numerical information, and can guess or estimate specific numerical information and even predetermined numerical information. The benefit is that it becomes easier to identify.

[Appendix C8']
The special game includes a value imparting game (open/close execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) that impart a gaming value to the player, and an ending that is executed after the end of the value imparting game,
The gaming machine according to appendix C6' or C7', wherein the end of the predetermined period is set to the ending.

By the way, from the end of the value-giving game to the end of the special game, no game value is given or the result of the transition determination is notified. Therefore, from the player's perspective, the period from the end of the value-giving game to the end of the special game is a kind of blank period. On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to Appendix C8', the end of the predetermined period is set between the end of the value-adding game and the end of the special game, so if a specific condition is satisfied during the predetermined period , it becomes possible to display specific information indicating specific numerical information on the display means by utilizing the blank period for the player. This makes it possible to display specific information on the display means in a time-efficient manner in the special game.

[Appendix C9']
The specific information includes a plurality of specific information,
The display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the plurality of pieces of specific information in the specified period in a predetermined display order when a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices C1' to C8', characterized by:

In the gaming machine according to appendix C9', a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined order during a specified period. The predetermined order can be set as appropriate, for example, an order in which it is easy to narrow down and recognize the predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is difficult to narrow down and recognize the predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is easy to judge whether the probability of favorable judgment is high, or vice versa. It is possible to set the order in such a way that it is difficult to judge whether it is high or low. In this way, the plural pieces of specific information can be displayed in various orders, and by appropriately selecting the display order, it is possible to prevent the display order of the plural pieces of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix C10']
The display control means (51) is configured to display all of the plurality of pieces of specific information in the predetermined display order during the predetermined period when the number of times the specific condition is satisfied during the predetermined period exceeds a predetermined number of times. The gaming machine according to appendix C9', characterized in that the gaming machine is displayed as follows.

In the gaming machine according to appendix C10', when the number of times a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period exceeds a predetermined number of times, all pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means in a predetermined display order during the predetermined period. In this way, when the specific condition of the number of times exceeding the specified number of times is satisfied, all of the plurality of specific information is displayed on the display means in a predetermined display order, so that the player can grasp the predetermined numerical information. It becomes possible. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to whether or not the number of times a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period exceeds the prescribed number of times.

Note that the gaming machine according to appendix C10' is a conventional slot machine in which all of the plurality of specific information (non-setting values) can be displayed on the display means, and information denying a high setting value such as the maximum setting value is not presented. Different from the machine.

[Appendix D1']
Transition determination means (for determining whether to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game advantageous to the player (jackpot game) is executed (jackpot lottery) based on the establishment of a determination condition (jackpot lottery); 41) and
a storage means (41) for storing numerical information (game setting values) corresponding to a plurality of mutually different advantage determination probabilities (jackpot probabilities);
selection means (41) for selecting each of the numerical information;
A gaming machine comprising:
Numerical information storage means (41) for storing one predetermined numerical information (setting value) selected from a plurality of types of numerical information;
When a specific condition is met, at least specific numerical information (non-set value) other than the predetermined numerical information among the plurality of types of numerical information is indicated during a specified period from a predetermined start timing to a predetermined end timing. Display control means (51) for displaying specific information (numbers) on the display means (35, 39, 341);
Equipped with
During the specified period, the predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical information is not displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341),
A gaming machine characterized in that the specified period is set to a period during which the special game is executed.

In the gaming machine according to appendix D1', when specific conditions are met, specific information indicating specific numerical information is displayed on the display means during a prescribed period set as the execution period of the special game. As a result, the player can enjoy specifying specific numerical information, and further guessing or specifying predetermined numerical information, based on the specific information displayed on the display means during the special game execution period (regular period). The interest in playing games is improved.

[Appendix D2']
The display control means (51) displays the specific information and special information (part of the numerical values) that does not indicate the plurality of types of numerical information during the specified period when the specific condition is satisfied. The gaming machine according to appendix D1', characterized in that it is possible to display the information on the means (35, 39, 341).

[Appendix D3']
The display control means (51) displays the specific information and special information (a part of a number) indicating a part of the plurality of types of numerical information during the specified period when the specific condition is satisfied. The gaming machine according to appendix D1', characterized in that it can be displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341).

In the gaming machine according to appendix D2' or appendix D3', the display means displays not only specific information but also special information that does not indicate multiple types of numerical information or special information that indicates part of multiple types of numerical information. . This allows the player to not only identify specific numerical information based on specific information when specific information is displayed on the display means, but also to specify specific numerical information based on the special information when special information is displayed on the display means. specific numerical information can be inferred. Therefore, even if the specific information is not displayed, the player can enjoy guessing the specific numerical information based on the special information, thereby improving the interest of the game.

[Appendix D4']
The special game includes a value-adding game (open/close execution mode) that includes a plurality of unit games (round games) that provide game value to the player, and an ending that is executed after the end of the value-adding game (open/close execution mode). have,
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices D1' to D3', wherein the specified period is set to the ending.

By the way, from the end of the value-giving game to the end of the special game, no game value is given or the result of the transition determination is notified. Therefore, from the player's perspective, the period from the end of the value-giving game to the end of the special game is a kind of blank period. On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to appendix D4', the end of the predetermined period is set between the end of the value-adding game and the end of the special game, so if a specific condition is satisfied during the predetermined period , it becomes possible to display specific information indicating specific numerical information on the display means by utilizing the blank period for the player. This makes it possible to display specific information on the display means in a time-efficient manner in the special game.

[Appendix D5']
The display control means (51) displays at least specific information (numbers) indicating the specific numerical information (non-set value) during the specified period when the specific condition is satisfied during the predetermined period. 39, 341),
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices D1' to D4', wherein the prescribed period is set after at least the predetermined period has elapsed.

In the gaming machine according to appendix D5', if a specific condition is satisfied during a predetermined period, specific information indicating specific numerical information is displayed after the predetermined period has elapsed. Therefore, the player enjoys the progress of the game by focusing on whether or not a specific condition is satisfied during a predetermined period of time, and after the elapse of the predetermined period, the player enjoys the game by focusing on specific information displayed on the display means. I can do it. This improves the interest of the game during a series of periods from the start of the predetermined period until the specific information is displayed after the elapse of the predetermined period.

[Appendix D6']
The special game has a value imparting game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) that impart a gaming value to the player,
The special gaming state is
After the special game in the special game state ends, a first special game state (5R Usually jackpot) and
After the special game ends in the special game state, the probability that the transition determination means (41) determines that the transition to the special game state is to be made is higher than that in the first game state, and the result of the transition determination is notified. a second special gaming state (a 5R probability variable jackpot gaming state and a 16R probability variable jackpot gaming state) in which the second gaming state (high probability mode) is transferred to a second gaming state (high probability mode);
The start of the predetermined period is set to the special game to be transitioned to when the result of the transition determination in the first gaming state is to transition to the special game,
The end of the predetermined period is set to a special game (5R normal jackpot) executed in the first special gaming state that is transferred to the first gaming state after the end of the special game in the special gaming state. The gaming machine according to appendix D5', characterized by:

In the gaming machine according to appendix D6', the start of the predetermined period is a special game to be executed in the special gaming state that is shifted when the result of the transition determination in the first gaming state is to shift to the special gaming state. Set. That is, the start of the predetermined period is set to the special game that is the first win. On the other hand, the end of the predetermined period is set to a special game to be executed in a first special game state that is transferred to a first game state after the end of the specific game in the special game state. That is, the end of the predetermined period is set to the last special game to be executed, regardless of whether it is a first win or a consecutive win. In this way, the predetermined period starts with the first win, the end period is set for the last special game to be executed, and specific information is displayed on the display means after the predetermined period has elapsed. As a result, it is possible to provide a game feature in which specific information indicating specific numerical information is presented to the player by effectively utilizing the period during which the special game is executed. In addition, in the case of winning a series of games, it is also possible to collectively present a number (amount) of information corresponding to the number of specific conditions satisfied in this winning of a series of games after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. Therefore, the player can confirm a lot of information regarding specific information in a short period of time after the predetermined period has elapsed. The convenience of identifying or estimating is improved.

[Appendix D7']
The predetermined period includes a specific period set for the special game that starts within the predetermined period,
The specified period is set after the specified period has elapsed,
Supplementary note D5' or supplementary note characterized in that the display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information when the specific condition is satisfied during the specific period. The gaming machine described in D6'.

The gaming machine according to appendix D7' includes a specific period set for a special game that starts within a predetermined period. That is, when special games are started a plurality of times in a predetermined period, such as when winning consecutive games, a plurality of special periods are set according to the number of special games started in the predetermined period. Moreover, specific information indicating specific numerical information is displayed on the display means after the specific period has elapsed. Therefore, if there are multiple specific periods within a given period, it is determined whether a specific condition is met for each specific period, and if a specific condition is met in that specific period, each specific period elapses. Information is displayed on the display means. As a result, it is possible to focus on whether or not a specific condition is satisfied for each special game, and to focus on specific information displayed on the display means when the specific condition is satisfied, thereby increasing the interest in the special game. It becomes possible to improve.

[Appendix D8']
The special game includes a value imparting game (open/close execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) that impart a gaming value to the player, and an ending that is executed after the end of the value imparting game,
The specific period includes a period in which the value imparting game is executed,
The gaming machine according to appendix D7', wherein the specified period is set to the ending.

In the gaming machine according to appendix D8', it is determined whether or not a specific condition is satisfied for each specific period including the value-adding game, and the value-adding game is terminated if the specific condition is satisfied in the specific period. Specific information is displayed in the ending that is executed from. Therefore, in the value-adding game, attention can be focused on whether or not a specific condition is satisfied, and if the specific condition is satisfied, attention can be focused on the content of specific information in the ending after the value-adding game is completed. As a result, the ending of the special game can be effectively utilized to provide a gameplay feature in which specific information is displayed, and the game can be made more interesting because it is possible to draw attention to the progress of the game throughout the special game.

[Appendix D9']
The specific condition is that a game ball passes through a specific area (373) and that the game ball passes through the specific area (373) to win a display lottery that is executed as a trigger.
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices D1' to D8', wherein the specified period is after winning the display lottery.

In the gaming machine according to appendix D9', specific information is displayed on the display means by winning a display lottery that is executed when a game ball passes through a specific area. In this way, by performing a display lottery as a condition for displaying specific information on the display means, when a game ball passes through a specific area, it is possible to determine whether or not you have won the display lottery (whether specific information is displayed or not). Since the player can enjoy the progress of the game by focusing on the following points, the interest in the game is improved. Further, when a display lottery is performed as a condition for displaying specific information on the display means, it becomes easy to adjust the difficulty level and variation in satisfying the specific condition (difficulty level and variation in displaying specific information). As a result, various playability can be imparted to the display of specific information depending on the probability of winning in the display lottery, the lottery method, and the like.

[Appendix D10']
The specific information includes a plurality of specific information,
The display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the plurality of pieces of specific information in the specified period in a predetermined display order when a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices D1' to D9', characterized by:

In the gaming machine according to appendix D10', a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined order during a specified period. The predetermined order can be set as appropriate, for example, an order in which it is easy to narrow down and recognize the predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is difficult to narrow down and recognize the predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is easy to judge whether the probability of favorable judgment is high, or vice versa. It is possible to set the order in such a way that it is difficult to judge whether it is high or low. In this way, the plural pieces of specific information can be displayed in various orders, and by appropriately selecting the display order, it is possible to prevent the display order of the plural pieces of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix D11']
The display control means (51) is configured to display all of the plurality of pieces of specific information in the predetermined display order during the predetermined period when the number of times the specific condition is satisfied during the predetermined period exceeds a predetermined number of times. The gaming machine according to appendix D10', characterized in that the game machine is displayed as follows.

In the gaming machine according to appendix D11', when the number of times a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period exceeds a predetermined number of times, all pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means in a predetermined display order during the predetermined period. In this way, when the specific condition of the number of times exceeding the specified number of times is satisfied, all of the plurality of specific information is displayed on the display means in a predetermined display order, so that the player can grasp the predetermined numerical information. It becomes possible. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to whether or not the number of times a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period exceeds the prescribed number of times.

Note that the gaming machine according to appendix D11' is a conventional slot machine in which all of a plurality of specific information (non-setting values) can be displayed on the display means, and information denying a high setting value such as the maximum setting value is not presented. Different from the machine.

[Appendix E1']
Transition determination means (for determining whether to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game advantageous to the player (jackpot game) is executed (jackpot lottery) based on the establishment of a determination condition (jackpot lottery); 41) and
a storage means (41) for storing numerical information (game setting values) corresponding to a plurality of mutually different advantage determination probabilities (jackpot probabilities);
selection means (41) for selecting each of the numerical information;
A gaming machine comprising:
Numerical information storage means (41) for storing one predetermined numerical information (setting value) selected from a plurality of types of numerical information;
When a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period, at least the plurality of types of numerical information are stored in a predetermined period from a predetermined start timing to a predetermined end timing based on the number of specific conditions satisfied in the predetermined period. Display control means (51) for displaying specific information (numbers) indicating specific numerical information (non-set value) other than the predetermined numerical information on the display means (35, 39, 341);
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that during the specified period, the predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical value information is not displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341).

In the gaming machine according to appendix E1', when a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period, specific information indicating specific numerical information is displayed on the display means based on the number of specific conditions satisfied in the predetermined period. As a result, the player can guess the specific numerical information based on the specific information displayed on the display means, and can specify all the specific numerical information by displaying all the specific information. . Further, it is also possible to recognize predetermined numerical information by specifying all specific numerical information. Therefore, the player can enjoy guessing or specifying specific numerical information, and furthermore, guessing or specifying predetermined numerical information, based on the specific information displayed on the display means, thereby improving the interest of the game. In particular, since specific information is displayed on the display means based on the number of specific conditions that are met in a predetermined period, it is expected that many specific conditions will be met in a predetermined period, but the number of specific conditions that are met is You can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to.

[Appendix E2']
The display control means (51) can cause the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information and special information (a part of the numerical value) that does not indicate the plurality of types of numerical information. The gaming machine according to appendix E1', characterized in that:

[Appendix E3']
The display control means (51) may cause the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information and special information (part of a number) indicating a part of the plurality of types of numerical information. The gaming machine according to appendix E1', characterized in that it is possible.

In the gaming machine according to appendix E2' or appendix E3', the display means displays not only specific information but also special information that does not indicate multiple types of numerical information or special information that indicates part of multiple types of numerical information. . This allows the player to not only identify specific numerical information based on specific information when specific information is displayed on the display means, but also to specify specific numerical information based on the special information when special information is displayed on the display means. specific numerical information can be inferred. Therefore, even if the specific information is not displayed, the player can enjoy guessing the specific numerical information based on the special information, thereby improving the interest of the game.

[Appendix E4']
The display means is an information display means (35, 39, 341) capable of displaying information corresponding to each of the plurality of types of numerical information, as described in any one of appendices E1' to E3'. gaming machines.

In the gaming machine according to appendix E4', the display means is information display means. Therefore, the player can visually grasp the specific information based on the content displayed on the display means. As a result, the player can easily grasp the specific information, and therefore can easily specify or infer the specific numerical information based on the specific information.

[Appendix E5']
The specific information includes a plurality of individual information,
The information display means has a plurality of display areas (segments A to G) corresponding to the plurality of individual information,
Supplementary note characterized in that the display control means (51) causes the plurality of display areas of the information display means to display a number of the individual information corresponding to the number of the specific conditions satisfied in the predetermined period. The gaming machine described in E4'.

In the gaming machine according to appendix E5', the specific information includes a plurality of pieces of individual information, and the information display means has a plurality of display areas for displaying a plurality of pieces of individual information. Therefore, it becomes possible to individually display a plurality of pieces of individual information necessary for specifying specific numerical information in any of the plurality of display areas. As a result, it is possible to provide gameplay in which the difficulty of specifying or guessing specific numerical information can be adjusted depending on which information out of a plurality of individual pieces of information is displayed, thereby improving the interest of the game.

[Appendix E6']
The gaming machine according to appendix E5', wherein each of the plurality of display areas (segments A to G) displays the corresponding individual information among the specific information.

In the gaming machine according to appendix E6', each of the plurality of display areas displays corresponding individual information among the plurality of individual information, so specific numerical information is specified or estimated based on the correspondence. becomes possible. Thereby, the player can enjoy specifying or guessing specific numerical information while looking forward to seeing which individual information among the plurality of pieces of individual information will be displayed when specific conditions are met.

[Appendix E7']
The gaming machine according to appendix E5' or E6', wherein the information display means (39) has a plurality of light emitting areas as the plurality of display areas.

In the gaming machine according to appendix E7', the information display means includes a plurality of light emitting areas. Such information display means can be realized by an easily available and low-cost display device such as a 7-segment display device. Therefore, it is possible to equip the gaming machine with an information display means for displaying specific information while suppressing the complexity of the configuration and the increase in manufacturing costs.

[Appendix E8']
The gaming machine according to appendix E5' or E6', wherein the information display means (341) is capable of displaying the specific information as a specific image corresponding to the specific information.

In the gaming machine according to appendix E8', since the information display means can display a specific image that allows specifying or inferring specific numerical information, there are many options for the form of the specific image and the process to display the specific image. Therefore, specific numerical information can be specified or inferred in various patterns depending on the aspect of the specific image and the process to display the specific image. This improves the gameplay of specifying or guessing specific numerical information.

[Appendix E9']
According to appendix E8', the information display means (341) is an image display means capable of displaying a variable display image in which a symbol (decoration symbol) suggesting or clarifying the result of the transition determination is displayed in a variable manner. The game machine described.

In the gaming machine according to appendix E9', a specific image is displayed on the image display means capable of displaying a variable display image of a symbol that suggests or clearly indicates the result of the transition determination. Therefore, when displaying a variable display image on the image display means in a gaming machine, the image display means can be used to display a specific image. This is advantageous in terms of manufacturing costs because the specific image can be displayed using the display means necessary for the gaming machine without separately providing a display means for displaying the specific image.

[Appendix E10']
The information display means (39) is capable of displaying numbers or alphabets in the plurality of display areas,
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices E5' to E9', wherein the specific information is a number or an alphabet.

In the gaming machine according to appendix E10', the information display means can display numbers or alphabets, and the specific information is displayed in correspondence with the numbers or alphabets. This allows all or part of the specific information to be displayed as simple identification information such as numbers or alphabets, making it easy to identify or infer specific numerical information, and without requiring advanced gaming knowledge. Or you can easily enjoy guessing.

[Appendix E11']
The information display means (35) has a plurality of individual display sections (351 to 356) corresponding to each of the plurality of types of numerical information,
The display control means (51) displays the individual display sections (351 to 356) corresponding to the specific numerical information among the plurality of types of numerical information according to the number of specific conditions that are satisfied during the predetermined period. The gaming machine according to appendix E4', characterized in that the specific information is displayed.

In the gaming machine according to appendix E11', specific information is displayed on the individual display section corresponding to specific numerical information among the plurality of types of numerical information. That is, an individual display section on which specific information is displayed is defined for each specific numerical information. Therefore, the specific information can be easily grasped by the type of the individual display section on which the specific information is displayed, and the specific numerical information can be easily identified. This increases the convenience in identifying specific numerical information.

[Appendix E12']
The display control means (51) controls the individual display section (351 to 356) in one of two modes: a display state in which the specific information is displayed and a non-display state in which the specific information is not displayed. The gaming machine according to appendix E11', characterized by:

In the gaming machine according to appendix E12', the individual display section is controlled in one of two modes: a display state and a non-display state. Therefore, specific numerical information can be easily specified depending on the form of the individual display section. This increases the convenience in identifying specific numerical information.

[Appendix E13']
The gaming machine according to appendix E11' or E12', wherein the plurality of individual display sections (351 to 356) are arranged in a row, annular, matrix, or staggered manner.

[Appendix E14']
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices E11' to E13', wherein the plurality of individual display sections (351 to 356) are a group of lamps.

In the gaming machines according to appendices E13' and E14', the information display means can be formed easily and inexpensively.

[Appendix E15']
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices E1' to E14', wherein the start time of the predetermined period is set to the special game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix E15', specific information indicating specific numerical information is displayed on the display means when a specific condition is satisfied during a predetermined period in which a start time is set for a special game. Therefore, a player can enjoy guessing or specifying specific numerical information, and furthermore, guessing or specifying predetermined numerical information, based on the specific information displayed on the display means when specific conditions are met for a predetermined period of time. . By setting the start of the predetermined period to the special game, the player can enjoy the game by focusing on whether or not a specific condition is satisfied in the special game.

[Appendix E16']
The special gaming state is
After the special game in the special game state ends, a first special game state (5R Usually jackpot) and
After the special game ends in the special game state, the probability that the transition determination means (41) determines that the transition to the special game state is to be made is higher than that in the first game state, and the result of the transition determination is notified. a second special gaming state (a 5R probability variable jackpot gaming state and a 16R probability variable jackpot gaming state) in which the second gaming state (high probability mode) is transferred to a second gaming state (high probability mode);
The starting time of the predetermined period is set to the special game that is transferred when the result of the transfer determination in the first gaming state is to transfer to the special game. gaming machines.

In the gaming machine according to appendix E16', when the start of the predetermined period is the first gaming state in which the transition determining means has a lower probability of determining that the transition will be made to the special gaming state than the second gaming state, the result of the transition determination is special. If the game is to be transferred to a game, it is set as a special game to be transferred. That is, the start of the predetermined period is set to the so-called first winning special game. As a result, a predetermined period is always set for each first hit, regardless of whether it is a single hit or a consecutive hit, so specific numerical information and even predetermined numerical information can be inferred or specified for each first hit. At least one opportunity is guaranteed.

[Appendix E17']
The special game has a value imparting game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) that impart a gaming value to the player,
The gaming machine according to appendix E15' or E16', wherein the start time of the predetermined period is set between the start time of the special game and the start time of the value-adding game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix E17', the start of the predetermined period is set between the start of the special game and the start of the value-adding game, so the specific condition is satisfied at least after the value-adding game is started. You can enjoy the game by focusing on whether it is true or not.

[Appendix E18']
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices E15' to E17', wherein the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix E18', the end of the predetermined period is set as a special game. That is, the predetermined period starts in the special game and ends in the special game. Here, in the special game, the result of the transition determination is not announced. Therefore, there is a concern that players' interest in the special game may decrease. On the other hand, by setting an end period in addition to a starting period for the special game, interest in the special game, which tends to decrease, is improved.

[Appendix E19']
The special gaming state is
After the special game in the special game state ends, a first special game state (5R Usually jackpot) and
After the special game ends in the special game state, the probability that the transition determination means (41) determines that the transition to the special game state is to be made is higher than that in the first game state, and the result of the transition determination is notified. a second special gaming state (a 5R probability variable jackpot gaming state and a 16R probability variable jackpot gaming state) in which the second gaming state (high probability mode) is transferred to a second gaming state (high probability mode);
The end of the predetermined period is set to a special game (5R normal jackpot) executed in the first special gaming state that is transferred to the first gaming state after the end of the special game in the special gaming state. The gaming machine according to appendix E18', characterized by:

In the gaming machine according to appendix E19', the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game to be executed in the first special gaming state that is transferred to the first gaming state after the end of the special game. Therefore, if the result of the transition determination of the first gaming state is to shift to the first special gaming state, that is, if the first win is a single win that shifts to the first special gaming state, the execution will be executed in the first special gaming state. A predetermined period ends in the special game played. On the other hand, if the result of the transition determination of the first gaming state is to shift to the second special gaming state, that is, if the first win is a consecutive win that shifts to the second special gaming state, the second special gaming state will be changed to the second special gaming state. If the predetermined period in the special game to be executed does not end and the result of the transition determination of the second game state is to transition to the first special game state, the game is executed in the first special game state. A predetermined period ends in the special game. That is, in the case of consecutive winnings where the first winning is transferred to the second special game state, the predetermined period ends in the first special game where the consecutive winnings end. Therefore, in the case of consecutive games, the predetermined period is set to extend over the first special game at the end of the consecutive games, so the predetermined period is longer than that of a single game. The period will also be longer. As a result, there is a high possibility that a specific condition will be met more often in a consecutive home than in a single game, and the more times a certain condition is met in a consecutive home, the more likely it is that a specific condition will be met more times. Become. As a result, the player can obtain more specific information for specifying specific numerical information, as well as obtain more specific numerical information as the number of consecutive games increases. It is possible to obtain the benefit that it becomes easier to infer or identify.

[Appendix E20']
The special game includes a value imparting game (open/close execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) that impart a gaming value to the player, and an ending that is executed after the end of the value imparting game,
The gaming machine according to appendix E18' or E19', wherein the end of the predetermined period is set to the ending.

By the way, from the end of the value-giving game to the end of the special game, no game value is given or the result of the transition determination is notified. Therefore, from the player's perspective, the period from the end of the value-giving game to the end of the special game is a kind of blank period. On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to appendix E20', the end of the predetermined period is set between the end of the value-adding game and the end of the special game, so if a specific condition is satisfied during the predetermined period , it becomes possible to display specific information indicating specific numerical information on the display means by utilizing the blank period for the player. This makes it possible to display specific information on the display means in a time-efficient manner in the special game.

[Appendix E21']
The specific information includes a plurality of specific information,
The display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the plurality of pieces of specific information in the specified period in a predetermined display order when a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices E1' to E20', characterized by:

In the gaming machine according to appendix E21', a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined order during a specified period. The predetermined order can be set as appropriate, for example, an order in which it is easy to narrow down and recognize the predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is difficult to narrow down and recognize the predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is easy to judge whether the probability of favorable judgment is high, or vice versa. It is possible to set the order in such a way that it is difficult to judge whether it is high or low. In this way, the plural pieces of specific information can be displayed in various orders, and by appropriately selecting the display order, it is possible to prevent the display order of the plural pieces of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix E22']
The display control means (51) is configured to display all of the plurality of pieces of specific information in the predetermined display order during the predetermined period when the number of times the specific condition is satisfied during the predetermined period exceeds a predetermined number of times. The gaming machine according to appendix E21', characterized in that the gaming machine is displayed.

In the gaming machine according to appendix E22', when the number of times a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period exceeds a predetermined number of times, all pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means in a predetermined display order during the predetermined period. In this way, when the specific condition of the number of times exceeding the specified number of times is satisfied, all of the plurality of specific information is displayed on the display means in a predetermined display order, so that the player can grasp the predetermined numerical information. It becomes possible. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to whether or not the number of times a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period exceeds the prescribed number of times.

Note that the gaming machine according to appendix E22' is a conventional slot machine in which information denying a high setting value such as the maximum setting value is not presented, in that all of the plurality of specific information (non-setting values) can be displayed on the display means. Different from the machine.

[Appendix F1']
Transition determination means (for determining whether to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game advantageous to the player (jackpot game) is executed (jackpot lottery) based on the establishment of a determination condition (jackpot lottery); 41) and
a storage means (41) for storing numerical information (game setting values) corresponding to a plurality of mutually different advantage determination probabilities (jackpot probabilities);
selection means (41) for selecting each of the numerical information;
A gaming machine comprising:
Numerical information storage means (41) for storing one predetermined numerical information (setting value) selected from a plurality of types of numerical information;
When a specific condition is satisfied during a predetermined period, at least specific numerical information other than the predetermined numerical information (non-set value) among the plurality of types of numerical information is ) display control means (51) that causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display specific information (numbers) indicating
display order determining means (51) for determining a display order in which the specific information is to be displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341) when a predetermined condition is satisfied;
Equipped with
The display control means (51) controls the display means based on the display order determined by the display order determination means (51) during the specified period when the specific condition is satisfied during the predetermined period. Display the specific information on (35, 39, 341),
A gaming machine characterized in that during the specified period, the predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical value information is not displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341).

In the gaming machine according to appendix F1', the display order in which the specific information is displayed on the display means is determined when a predetermined condition is satisfied. In this manner, the display order in which the specific information is displayed is determined when the predetermined condition is satisfied, thereby preventing the display order of the specific information from becoming constant. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the same specific information from being displayed repeatedly, and it is possible to prevent the display of the specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix F2']
The display control means (51) can cause the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information and special information (a part of the numerical value) that does not indicate the plurality of types of numerical information. The gaming machine according to appendix F1', characterized by the following.

[Appendix F3']
The display control means (51) may cause the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information and special information (part of a number) indicating a part of the plurality of types of numerical information. The gaming machine according to appendix F1', characterized in that it is possible.

In the gaming machine according to appendix F2' or appendix F3', the display means displays not only specific information but also special information that does not indicate multiple types of numerical information or special information that indicates part of multiple types of numerical information. . This allows the player to not only identify specific numerical information based on specific information when specific information is displayed on the display means, but also to specify specific numerical information based on the special information when special information is displayed on the display means. specific numerical information can be inferred. Therefore, even if the specific information is not displayed, the player can enjoy guessing the specific numerical information based on the special information, thereby improving the interest of the game.

[Appendix F4']
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices F1' to F3', wherein the predetermined condition is that the gaming machine (10) is powered on.

In the gaming machine according to appendix F4', the display order in which specific information is displayed on the display means is determined when the gaming machine is powered on. By the way, power to gaming machines is often turned on before the opening of the gaming parlor. Therefore, the display order of the specific information is determined every business day by determining the display order of the specific information when the gaming machine is powered on. This prevents the display order of the specific information from being fixed, so it is possible to prevent the same specific information from being repeatedly displayed on different business days and from making the display of the specific information monotonous.

[Appendix F5']
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices F1' to F3', wherein the predetermined condition is that the predetermined numerical information (setting value) is stored in the numerical information storage means (41). .

In the gaming machine according to appendix F5', the display order in which specific information is displayed on the display means is determined by storing predetermined numerical information in the numerical information storage means. This makes it possible to determine the display order of the specific information according to the predetermined numerical information, thereby preventing the display of the specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix F6']
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices F1' to F3', wherein the predetermined condition is that the predetermined period starts.

In the gaming machine according to appendix F6', the display order in which the specific information is displayed on the display means is determined by starting the predetermined period. Thereby, the display order of specific information is determined for each predetermined period. Therefore, since the display order of the specific information is prevented from being fixed, it is possible to prevent the same specific information from being displayed repeatedly and the display of the specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix F7']
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices F1' to F3', wherein the predetermined condition is that the special game is started.

In the gaming machine according to appendix F7', the display order in which the specific information is displayed on the display means is determined when the special game is started. Thereby, the display order of specific information is determined for each special game. Therefore, since the display order of the specific information is prevented from being fixed, it is possible to prevent the same specific information from being displayed repeatedly and the display of the specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix F8']
The special game has a value imparting game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) that impart a gaming value to the player,
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices F1' to F3', wherein the predetermined condition is that the value-adding game is started.

In the gaming machine according to appendix F8', the display order in which the specific information is displayed on the display means is determined when the value-adding game is started. Thereby, the display order of specific information is determined for each value-adding game. Therefore, since the display order of the specific information is prevented from being fixed, it is possible to prevent the same specific information from being displayed repeatedly and the display of the specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix F9']
display order selection means (51) for selecting one display order from a plurality of display orders that define a priority order of the display order of the plurality of specific information in the predetermined period when the predetermined condition is satisfied;
selected display order storage means (51) for storing the one display order selected by the display order selection means (51);
Furthermore,
The display control means (51) displays the plurality of pieces of specific information on the display means (35, 39, 341) in accordance with the one display order stored in the display order storage means (51) during the specified period. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices F1' to F8', characterized in that the game machine displays the information.

In the gaming machine according to appendix F9', a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means during a prescribed period according to one display order selected from a plurality of display orders that define the priority order of the display order of the plurality of pieces of specific information. . Therefore, depending on the display order included in the multiple display orders and the selection rate thereof, it is possible to make it easier for multiple pieces of specific information to be displayed in a specific display order, to make it more difficult for multiple pieces of specific information to be displayed in a specific display order, and to make it easier for multiple pieces of specific information to be displayed in a specific display order. It is possible to prevent multiple pieces of specific information from being displayed depending on the display order. This makes it possible to display multiple pieces of specific information in various orders by appropriately setting the content and selection rate of multiple display orders, so the display order of multiple pieces of specific information becomes monotonous. can be prevented.

[Appendix F10']
The plurality of display orders are defined for each of the plurality of types of numerical information,
The gaming machine according to appendix F9', wherein the display order selection means (51) selects the one display order from the plurality of display orders based on the predetermined numerical information.

In the gaming machine according to appendix F10', a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means in a prescribed period according to a display order selected from a plurality of display orders based on predetermined numerical information. That is, since it is possible to set a plurality of display orders in relation to the predetermined numerical information, the display order can be set for each predetermined numerical information. As a result, the display order can be set based on whether the advantageous judgment probability corresponding to the predetermined numerical information is high or low, and it is also possible to characterize the display of a plurality of specific information for each predetermined numerical information.

[Appendix F11']
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices F1' to F10', wherein the start time of the predetermined period is set to the special game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix F11', specific information indicating specific numerical information is displayed on the display means when a specific condition is satisfied during a predetermined period in which a start time is set for a special game. Therefore, a player can enjoy guessing or specifying specific numerical information, and furthermore, guessing or specifying predetermined numerical information, based on the specific information displayed on the display means when specific conditions are met for a predetermined period of time. . By setting the start of the predetermined period to the special game, the player can enjoy the game by focusing on whether or not a specific condition is satisfied in the special game.

[Appendix F12']
The special gaming state is
After the special game in the special game state ends, a first special game state (5R Usually jackpot) and
After the special game ends in the special game state, the probability that the transition determination means (41) determines that the transition to the special game state is to be made is higher than that in the first game state, and the result of the transition determination is notified. a second special gaming state (a 5R probability variable jackpot gaming state and a 16R probability variable jackpot gaming state) in which the second gaming state (high probability mode) is transferred to a second gaming state (high probability mode);
The starting time of the predetermined period is set to the special game that is transferred when the result of the transfer determination in the first gaming state is to transfer to the special game. gaming machines.

In the gaming machine according to appendix F12', in the first gaming state in which the probability that the transition determining means determines that the transition to the special gaming state will be made is lower than that in the second gaming state, the transition determination result is special. If the game is to be transferred to a game, it is set as a special game to be transferred. That is, the start of the predetermined period is set to the so-called first winning special game. As a result, a predetermined period is always set for each first hit, regardless of whether it is a single hit or a consecutive hit, so specific numerical information and even predetermined numerical information can be inferred or specified for each first hit. At least one opportunity is guaranteed.

[Appendix F13']
The special game has a value imparting game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) that impart a gaming value to the player,
The gaming machine according to appendix F11' or F12', wherein the start time of the predetermined period is set between the start time of the special game and the start time of the value-adding game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix F13', the start of the predetermined period is set between the start of the special game and the start of the value-adding game, so the specific condition is satisfied at least after the value-adding game is started. You can enjoy the game by focusing on whether it is true or not.

[Appendix F14']
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices F11' to F13', wherein the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix F14', the end of the predetermined period is set as a special game. That is, the predetermined period starts in the special game and ends in the special game. Here, in the special game, the result of the transition determination is not announced. Therefore, there is a concern that players' interest in the special game may decrease. On the other hand, by setting an end period in addition to a starting period for the special game, interest in the special game, which tends to decrease, is improved.

[Appendix F15']
The special gaming state is
After the special game in the special game state ends, a first special game state (5R Usually jackpot) and
After the special game ends in the special game state, the probability that the transition determination means (41) determines that the transition to the special game state is to be made is higher than that in the first game state, and the result of the transition determination is notified. a second special gaming state (a 5R probability variable jackpot gaming state and a 16R probability variable jackpot gaming state) in which the second gaming state (high probability mode) is transferred to a second gaming state (high probability mode);
The end of the predetermined period is set to a special game (5R normal jackpot) executed in the first special gaming state that is transferred to the first gaming state after the end of the special game in the special gaming state. The gaming machine according to appendix F14', characterized by:

In the gaming machine according to appendix F15', the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game executed in the first special gaming state that is transferred to the first gaming state after the end of the special game. Therefore, if the result of the transition determination of the first gaming state is to shift to the first special gaming state, that is, if the first win is a single win that shifts to the first special gaming state, the execution will be executed in the first special gaming state. A predetermined period ends in the special game played. On the other hand, if the result of the transition determination of the first gaming state is to shift to the second special gaming state, that is, if the first win is a consecutive win that shifts to the second special gaming state, the second special gaming state will be changed to the second special gaming state. If the predetermined period in the special game to be executed does not end and the result of the transition determination of the second game state is to transition to the first special game state, the game is executed in the first special game state. A predetermined period ends in the special game. That is, in the case of consecutive winnings where the first winning is transferred to the second special game state, the predetermined period ends in the first special game where the consecutive winnings end. Therefore, in the case of consecutive games, the predetermined period is set to extend over the first special game at the end of the consecutive games, so the predetermined period is longer than that of a single game. The period will also be longer. As a result, there is a high possibility that a specific condition will be met more often in a consecutive home than in a single game, and the more times a certain condition is met in a consecutive home, the more likely it is that a specific condition will be met more times. Become. As a result, the player can not only increase the expected value of the game value that can be acquired as the number of consecutive games increases, but also obtain more specific information indicating specific numerical information, and can guess or estimate specific numerical information and even predetermined numerical information. The benefit is that it becomes easier to identify.

[Appendix F16']
The special game includes a value imparting game (open/close execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) that impart a gaming value to the player, and an ending that is executed after the end of the value imparting game,
The gaming machine according to appendix F14' or F15', wherein the end of the predetermined period is set to the ending.

By the way, from the end of the value-giving game to the end of the special game, no game value is given or the result of the transition determination is notified. Therefore, from the player's perspective, the period from the end of the value-giving game to the end of the special game is a kind of blank period. On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to appendix F16', the end of the predetermined period is set between the end of the value-adding game and the end of the special game, so if a specific condition is satisfied during the predetermined period , it becomes possible to display specific information indicating specific numerical information on the display means by utilizing the blank period for the player. This makes it possible to display specific information on the display means in a time-efficient manner in the special game.

[Appendix F17']
The specific information includes a plurality of specific information,
The display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the plurality of pieces of specific information in the specified period in a predetermined display order when a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices F1' to F16', characterized by:

In the gaming machine according to appendix F17', a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined order during a specified period. The predetermined order can be set as appropriate, for example, an order in which it is easy to narrow down and recognize the predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is difficult to narrow down and recognize the predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is easy to judge whether the probability of favorable judgment is high, or vice versa. It is possible to set the order in such a way that it is difficult to judge whether it is high or low. In this way, the plural pieces of specific information can be displayed in various orders, and by appropriately selecting the display order, it is possible to prevent the display order of the plural pieces of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix F18']
The display control means (51) is configured to display all of the plurality of pieces of specific information in the predetermined display order during the predetermined period when the number of times the specific condition is satisfied during the predetermined period exceeds a predetermined number of times. The gaming machine according to appendix F17', characterized in that the game machine is displayed as follows.

In the gaming machine according to appendix F18', when the number of times a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period exceeds a predetermined number of times, all pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means in a predetermined display order during the predetermined period. In this way, when the specific condition of the number of times exceeding the specified number of times is satisfied, all of the plurality of specific information is displayed on the display means in a predetermined display order, so that the player can grasp the predetermined numerical information. It becomes possible. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to whether or not the number of times a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period exceeds the prescribed number of times.

Note that the gaming machine according to appendix F18' is different from the conventional slot machine in which information denying a high setting value such as the maximum setting value is not presented in that all of the plurality of specific information (non-setting values) can be displayed on the display means. Different from the machine.

[Appendix G1']
Transition determination means (for determining whether to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game advantageous to the player (jackpot game) is executed (jackpot lottery) based on the establishment of a determination condition (jackpot lottery); 41) and
a storage means (41) for storing numerical information (game setting values) corresponding to a plurality of mutually different advantage determination probabilities (jackpot probabilities);
selection means (41) for selecting each of the numerical information;
A gaming machine comprising:
Numerical information storage means (41) for storing one predetermined numerical information (setting value) selected from a plurality of types of numerical information;
When a specific condition is met, at least specific numerical information (non-set value) other than the predetermined numerical information among the plurality of types of numerical information is indicated during a specified period from a predetermined start timing to a predetermined end timing. first display control means (51) for displaying specific information (numbers) on first display means (35, 39, 341);
display content storage means (512) for storing display content of the specific information displayed on the first display means (35, 39, 341) during the specified period;
In order to display the display content stored in the display content storage means (512) on the second display means (35, 39, 341) during a special period (for example, a standby period) different from the specified period. an operating means (21) operated by a player;
When the player performs a predetermined operation on the operation means (21) during the special period, the display contents stored in the display contents storage means (512) are displayed on the second display means (35, 39). , 341);
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that during the specified period, the predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical value information is not displayed on the first display means (35, 39, 341).

In the gaming machine according to appendix G1', the display content of the specific information displayed during the specified period can be displayed by operating the operating means during a special period different from the specified period. Thereby, by operating the operating means during the special period, the player can cause the second display means to display the display content of the specific information displayed during the specified period. Therefore, if a player wants to check the display content of specific information displayed during a specified period, for example, if he has forgotten the display content, or if there is a change in player, he may check the display content during the special period. I can do it. As a result, the player can identify or infer specific numerical information by checking the display contents during the specified period during the special period, and whether or not to play the game on the gaming machine in accordance with the identification or inference. It becomes possible to judge whether

[Appendix G2']
The display control means (51) may cause the first display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information and special information (part of the numerical value) that does not indicate the plurality of types of numerical information. The gaming machine according to appendix G1', characterized in that it is possible.

[Appendix G3']
The display control means (51) causes the first display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information and special information (part of a number) indicating a part of the plurality of types of numerical information. The gaming machine according to appendix G1', wherein the gaming machine is capable of:

In the gaming machine according to appendix G2' or appendix G3', the first display means displays not only specific information but also special information that does not indicate multiple types of numerical information or special information that indicates part of multiple types of numerical information. be done. As a result, the player can not only specify the specific numerical information based on the specific information when the specific information is displayed on the first display means, but also be able to specify the specific numerical information based on the specific information when the special information is displayed on the first display means. Specific numerical information can be inferred based on special information. Therefore, even if the specific information is not displayed, the player can enjoy guessing the specific numerical information based on the special information, thereby improving the interest of the game.

[Appendix G4']
Further comprising a notification game execution means (41) that executes a notification game (variable game) that notifies the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41),
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices G1' to G3', wherein the special period is set to a period in which neither the special game nor the notification game is executed.

In the gaming machine according to appendix G4', the special period in which the display contents during the specified period can be checked is set to a period in which neither the special game nor the notification game is being executed. This allows the player to carefully and carefully check the displayed content at his or her own pace, without being subject to time constraints, and decide whether or not to play the game on the gaming machine.

[Appendix G5']
The display content storage means (512) is capable of storing display content of a plurality of the specific information displayed in a plurality of mutually different prescribed periods,
The display content display control means (51) controls the plurality of display content stored in the display content storage means (512) when the player performs a predetermined operation on the operation means (21) during the special period. The game according to any one of appendices G1' to G4', characterized in that at least one of the display contents of the specific information is displayed on the second display means (35, 39, 341). Machine.

[Appendix G6']
The display content display control means (51) causes the player to perform a predetermined operation on the operation means (21) during the special period based on the display content of the plurality of specific information during the special period. The gaming machine according to appendix G5', characterized in that the display content selected by the second display means (35, 39, 341) is displayed on the second display means (35, 39, 341).

[Appendix G7']
The display content display control means (51) controls the plurality of display content stored in the display content storage means (512) when the player performs a predetermined operation on the operation means (21) during the special period. The gaming machine according to appendix G5', characterized in that two or more of the display contents of the specific information are displayed on the second display means (35, 39, 341).

In the gaming machines according to appendices G5' to G7', it is possible to cause the second display means to present at least one display content among the display contents of a plurality of specific information displayed in a plurality of prescribed periods. For example, it is possible to cause the second display means to present the display content selected by the player from the display content of a plurality of specific information stored in the display content storage means (512). In this case, since the player can select the content to be presented on the second display means from among the display content of a plurality of pieces of specific information, the player can confirm the display content that he or she desires. As a result, it is possible to effectively check the displayed contents while avoiding checking the displayed contents such as previously checked information or information with a small amount of information, so that the displayed contents can be checked efficiently. Further, when two or more display contents are displayed on the second display means, many display contents can be checked at once, so that the presented contents can be checked efficiently in this case as well.

[Appendix G8']
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices G1' to G7', wherein the first display means (35, 39) and the second display means (341) are different display means.

[Appendix G9']
The gaming machine according to appendix G8', wherein the second display means (341) is a variable display image display means in which a symbol (decorative symbol) suggesting or clarifying the result of the transition determination is displayed in a variable manner. .

The gaming machines according to Appendix G8' and Appendix G9' are provided with a first display means that is displayed during the prescribed period and a second display means that is displayed during the special period, and different displays are displayed during each of the prescribed period and the special period. Specific information is displayed depending on the means. Therefore, in the prescribed period, when information other than the specific information is displayed on the second display means, it is possible to prevent the display from being obstructed. For example, when the second display means is a variable display image display means, visual recognition of the image (for example, image effect) displayed on the variable display image display means is prevented from being obstructed. On the other hand, in the special period (for example, standby state), the display contents of the specific information in the specified period are presented by a second display means such as a variable display image display means in which symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In general, the variable display image display means has a large display area, so when the variable display image display means is made to present the display content of specific information in a specified period, visibility is improved. Further, the variable display image display means may be used to perform various settings such as performances and characters to be executed in the gaming machine. Therefore, by making the variable display image display means present the display contents of the specific information in the specified period, the display contents of the specific information in the specified period can be displayed in a variable manner by the same operations as those for making various settings. It becomes possible to display the image on the image display means. Therefore, the convenience in displaying the display content of specific information on the variable display image display means during the special period is improved.

[Appendix G10']
The specific information includes a plurality of specific information,
The display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the plurality of pieces of specific information in the specified period in a predetermined display order when a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices G1' to G9', characterized by:

In the gaming machine according to appendix G10', a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined order during a predetermined period. The predetermined order can be set as appropriate, for example, an order in which it is easy to narrow down and recognize the predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is difficult to narrow down and recognize the predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is easy to judge whether the probability of favorable judgment is high, or vice versa. It is possible to set the order in such a way that it is difficult to judge whether it is high or low. In this way, the plural pieces of specific information can be displayed in various orders, and by appropriately selecting the display order, it is possible to prevent the display order of the plural pieces of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix G11']
The display control means (51) is configured to display all of the plurality of pieces of specific information in the predetermined display order during the predetermined period when the number of times the specific condition is satisfied during the predetermined period exceeds a predetermined number of times. The gaming machine according to appendix G10', characterized in that the gaming machine is displayed as follows.

In the gaming machine according to appendix G11', when the number of times a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period exceeds a predetermined number of times, all pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means in a predetermined display order in a predetermined period. In this way, when the specific condition of the number of times exceeding the specified number of times is satisfied, all of the plurality of specific information is displayed on the display means in a predetermined display order, so that the player can grasp the predetermined numerical information. It becomes possible. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to whether or not the number of times a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period exceeds the prescribed number of times.

Note that the gaming machine according to appendix G11' is a conventional slot machine in which all of the plurality of specific information (non-setting values) can be displayed on the display means, and information denying a high setting value such as the maximum setting value is not presented. Different from the machine.

[Appendix H1']
Transition determination means (for determining whether to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game advantageous to the player (jackpot game) is executed (jackpot lottery) based on the establishment of a determination condition (jackpot lottery); 41) and
a storage means (41) for storing numerical information (game setting values) corresponding to a plurality of mutually different advantage determination probabilities (jackpot probabilities);
selection means (41) for selecting each of the numerical information;
A gaming machine comprising:
Numerical information storage means (41) for storing one predetermined numerical information (setting value) selected from a plurality of types of numerical information;
When a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period, at least a plurality of specific numerical information (non-specific numerical information) other than the predetermined numerical information among the plurality of types of numerical information is a display control means (51) for displaying a plurality of pieces of specific information (numbers) indicating the set value on the display means (35, 39, 341) in a distinguishable manner;
Equipped with
The display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the plurality of specific information in the specified period in a predetermined display order,
A gaming machine characterized in that during the specified period, the predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical value information is not displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341).

In the gaming machine according to appendix H1', a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined order during a specified period. The predetermined order can be set as appropriate, for example, an order in which it is easy to narrow down and recognize the predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is difficult to narrow down and recognize the predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is easy to judge whether the probability of favorable judgment is high, or vice versa. It is possible to set the order in such a way that it is difficult to judge whether it is high or low. In this way, the plural pieces of specific information can be displayed in various orders, and by appropriately selecting the display order, it is possible to prevent the display order of the plural pieces of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix H2']
The display control means (51) can cause the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information and special information (a part of the numerical value) that does not indicate the plurality of types of numerical information. The gaming machine according to appendix H1', characterized by the following.

[Appendix H3']
The display control means (51) may cause the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information and special information (part of a number) indicating a part of the plurality of types of numerical information. The gaming machine according to appendix H1', characterized in that it is possible.

In the gaming machine according to appendix H2' or appendix H3', the display means displays not only specific information but also special information that does not indicate multiple types of numerical information or special information that indicates part of multiple types of numerical information. . This allows the player to not only identify specific numerical information based on specific information when specific information is displayed on the display means, but also to specify specific numerical information based on the special information when special information is displayed on the display means. specific numerical information can be inferred. Therefore, even if the specific information is not displayed, the player can enjoy guessing the specific numerical information based on the special information, thereby improving the interest of the game.

[Appendix H4']
display order selection means (51) for selecting one display order from a plurality of display orders that define the priority order of the display order of the plurality of specific information in the predetermined period;
further comprising selected display order storage means (51) for storing the one display order selected by the display order selection means (51),
The display control means (51) displays the plurality of pieces of specific information on the display means (35, 39, 341) in accordance with the one display order stored in the display order storage means (51) during the specified period. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices H1' to H3', characterized in that the game machine displays the information.

In the gaming machine according to appendix H4', a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means during a prescribed period according to one display order selected from a plurality of display orders that define the priority order of the display order of the plurality of pieces of specific information. . Therefore, depending on the display order included in the multiple display orders and the selection rate thereof, it is possible to make it easier for multiple pieces of specific information to be displayed in a specific display order, to make it more difficult for multiple pieces of specific information to be displayed in a specific display order, and to make it easier for multiple pieces of specific information to be displayed in a specific display order. It is possible to prevent multiple pieces of specific information from being displayed depending on the display order. This makes it possible to display multiple pieces of specific information in various orders by appropriately setting the content and selection rate of multiple display orders, so the display order of multiple pieces of specific information becomes monotonous. can be prevented.

[Appendix H5']
The plurality of display orders are defined for each of the plurality of types of numerical information,
The gaming machine according to appendix H4', wherein the one display order is selected from the plurality of display orders based on the predetermined numerical information.

In the gaming machine according to appendix H5', a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means during a prescribed period according to a display order selected from a plurality of display orders based on predetermined numerical information. That is, since it is possible to set a plurality of display orders in relation to the predetermined numerical information, the display order can be set for each predetermined numerical information. As a result, the display order can be set based on whether the advantageous judgment probability corresponding to the predetermined numerical information is high or low, and it is also possible to characterize the display of a plurality of specific information for each predetermined numerical information.

[Appendix H6']
The gaming machine according to appendix H5', wherein the plurality of display orders include display orders having different probabilities (selection rates) of being selected by the display order selection means (51).

In the gaming machine according to appendix H6', it is possible to make it easier to select a specific display order, or to make it harder to select a specific display order. That is, unlike the case where all display orders have the same probability of being selected, it is easier to identify a specific non-set value, and conversely, it is difficult to identify a specific non-set value. It also becomes possible. This makes it possible to adjust the probability of a high setting value and the probability of a low setting value.

[Appendix H7']
The plurality of display orders include a first display in which the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the advantageous judgment probability having the lowest probability among the plurality of advantageous judgment probabilities corresponding to the plurality of specific information has the lowest priority. including the order;
The first display order is set to have a higher probability (including 100%) of being selected by the display order selection means (51) than display orders other than the first display order. The gaming machine described in appendix H6'.

In the gaming machine according to appendix H7', the first display has the lowest priority of the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the advantage determination probability with the lowest probability among the plurality of advantage determination probabilities corresponding to the plurality of specific information. The order is easy to choose. That is, other than the advantage determination probability corresponding to the predetermined numerical information, the specific information indicating the specific numerical information that has the lowest advantage determination probability and is most disadvantageous to the player has the lowest priority in the display order. Therefore, the specific numerical information that is most disadvantageous to the player is displayed last, so until the last specific information is displayed, the probability of an advantageous judgment that is the most disadvantageous to the player and the probability that is more advantageous to the player are displayed. The possibility of an advantageous judgment probability remains. This makes it difficult for the player to understand that the probability of an advantageous determination is the most disadvantageous for the player, which makes it possible to prevent the game on the gaming machine from ending early, and to reduce the operating rate of the gaming machine. The decline can be suppressed.

[Appendix H8']
The specific information includes first specific information indicating specific numerical information corresponding to a favorable determination probability having the lowest probability among the plurality of favorable determination probabilities corresponding to the plurality of specific numerical information, and the plurality of favorable determination probabilities. Second specific information indicating specific numerical information corresponding to the advantageous judgment probability with the highest probability;
The plurality of display orders include a second display order in which the first specific information and the second specific information have the lowest priorities,
The second display order has a higher probability (including 100%) of being selected by the display order selection means (51) than display orders other than the second display order. The gaming machine described in appendix H6'.

In the gaming machine according to appendix H8', the second display order has a lower priority of the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the advantageous determination probability with the lowest probability among the plurality of advantageous determination probabilities corresponding to the plurality of specific information. is likely to be selected. Therefore, similar to the gaming machine according to Appendix H6', it becomes difficult for the player to understand that the probability of determining advantage is the most disadvantageous for the player, and the game on the gaming machine may be ended early. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the operating rate of gaming machines. Further, in the second display order, the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the advantageous determination probability with the highest probability among the plurality of advantageous determination probabilities corresponding to the plurality of specific information is low. Therefore, it becomes difficult for the player to understand that it is not only the advantageous determination probability that is disadvantageous to the player, but also the advantageous determination probability that is advantageous to the player. In this way, because the priority of the two specific pieces of information indicating the two specific numerical information corresponding to the advantageous determination probability that is disadvantageous to the player and the advantageous determination probability that is advantageous to the player is low, the advantages for the player are contradictory. Since it becomes difficult to determine until the end which of the two favorable judgment probabilities it is, it becomes possible to increase interest in the specific information displayed on the display means.

[Appendix H9']
The display order of the plurality of items is such that the priority order of the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the favorable determination probability having a higher probability than the first favorable determination probability corresponding to the predetermined numerical information is the first favorable determination probability. including a third display order lower than the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to an advantageous determination probability that is lower than the probability;
The third display order has a higher probability (including 100%) of being selected by the display order selection means (51) than display orders other than the third display order. The gaming machine described in appendix H6'.

In the gaming machine according to appendix H9', the priority order of specific information indicating specific numerical information corresponding to an advantageous determination probability that is higher than the first advantageous determination probability is an advantageous determination probability that is lower than the first advantageous determination probability. The selection rate of the third display order, which is lower than the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to , is set high. By setting the selection rate for the third display order to be high, the player is given a possibility that the probability of an advantageous decision is higher than the actual first probability of an advantageous decision just before the player grasps the first advantageous decision probability. It can make you look forward to it. Thereby, the user can enjoy guessing specific information (predetermined information) while expecting the possibility that the advantageous determination probability is high until just before the first advantageous determination probability is grasped.

[Appendix H10']
The display order of the plurality of items is such that the priority order of the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the favorable determination probability lower than the first favorable determination probability corresponding to the predetermined numerical information is the first favorable determination probability. a fourth display order lower than the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to an advantageous judgment probability higher than the probability;
The fourth display order is characterized in that the probability (selection rate) of being selected by the display order selection means (51) is set higher (including 100%) than display orders other than the fourth display order. The gaming machine described in appendix H6'.

In the gaming machine according to appendix H10', the priority of specific information indicating specific numerical information corresponding to an advantageous determination probability that is lower than the first advantageous determination probability is an advantageous determination probability that is higher than the first advantageous determination probability. The selection rate of the fourth display order, which is lower than the specific information indicating specific numerical information corresponding to , is set high. By setting the selection rate of the fourth display order to be high, specific numerical information corresponding to an advantageous judgment probability whose probability is lower than the first advantageous judgment probability is displayed immediately before the first advantageous judgment probability is grasped. The specific information shown is left as hidden specific information. As a result, the final candidate for the first advantageous determination probability becomes specific information indicating the actual first advantageous determination probability and specific numerical information corresponding to an advantageous determination probability that is lower in probability than the first advantageous determination probability. As a result, in the end, the predetermined numerical information corresponding to the first advantageous judgment probability that is advantageous to the player is grasped as the first advantageous judgment probability (predetermined numerical information), so when the set value is grasped. pleasure is improved.

[Appendix H11']
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices H1' to H10', wherein the start time of the predetermined period is set to the special game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix H11', specific information indicating specific numerical information is displayed on the display means when a specific condition is satisfied during a predetermined period in which a start time is set for a special game. Therefore, a player can enjoy guessing or specifying specific numerical information, and furthermore, guessing or specifying predetermined numerical information, based on the specific information displayed on the display means when specific conditions are met for a predetermined period of time. . By setting the start of the predetermined period to the special game, the player can enjoy the game by focusing on whether or not a specific condition is satisfied in the special game.

[Appendix H12']
The special gaming state is
After the special game in the special game state ends, a first special game state (5R Usually jackpot) and
After the special game ends in the special game state, the probability that the transition determination means (41) determines that the transition to the special game state is to be made is higher than that in the first game state, and the result of the transition determination is notified. a second special gaming state (a 5R probability variable jackpot gaming state and a 16R probability variable jackpot gaming state) in which the second gaming state (high probability mode) is transferred to a second gaming state (high probability mode);
The starting time of the predetermined period is set to the special game that is transferred when the result of the transfer determination in the first gaming state is to transfer to the special game. gaming machines.

In the gaming machine according to appendix H12', in the first gaming state where the probability that the transition determination means will determine that the transition to the special gaming state will be made is lower than that of the second gaming state, the transition determination result is special. If the game is to be transferred to a game, it is set as a special game to be transferred. That is, the start of the predetermined period is set to the so-called first winning special game. As a result, a predetermined period is always set for each first hit, regardless of whether it is a single hit or a consecutive hit, so specific numerical information and even specific numerical information can be inferred or specified for each first hit. At least one opportunity is guaranteed.

[Appendix H13']
The special game has a value imparting game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) that impart a gaming value to the player,
The gaming machine according to appendix H11' or H12', wherein the start time of the predetermined period is set between the start time of the special game and the start time of the value-adding game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix H13', the start of the predetermined period is set between the start of the special game and the start of the value-adding game, so the specific condition is satisfied at least after the value-adding game is started. You can enjoy the game by focusing on whether it is true or not.

[Appendix H14']
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices H11' to H13', wherein the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix H14', the end of the predetermined period is set as a special game. That is, the predetermined period starts in the special game and ends in the special game. Here, in the special game, the result of the transition determination is not announced. Therefore, there is a concern that players' interest in the special game may decrease. On the other hand, by setting an end period in addition to a starting period for the special game, interest in the special game, which tends to decrease, is improved.

[Appendix H15']
The special gaming state is
After the special game in the special game state ends, a first special game state (5R Usually jackpot) and
After the special game ends in the special game state, the probability that the transition determination means (41) determines that the transition to the special game state is to be made is higher than that in the first game state, and the result of the transition determination is notified. a second special gaming state (a 5R probability variable jackpot gaming state and a 16R probability variable jackpot gaming state) in which the second gaming state (high probability mode) is transferred to a second gaming state (high probability mode);
The end of the predetermined period is set to a special game (5R normal jackpot) executed in the first special gaming state that is transferred to the first gaming state after the end of the special game in the special gaming state. The gaming machine according to appendix H14', characterized by:

In the gaming machine according to appendix H15', the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game executed in the first special gaming state that is transferred to the first gaming state after the end of the special game. Therefore, if the result of the transition determination of the first gaming state is to shift to the first special gaming state, that is, if the first win is a single win that shifts to the first special gaming state, the execution will be executed in the first special gaming state. A predetermined period ends in the special game played. On the other hand, if the result of the transition determination of the first gaming state is to shift to the second special gaming state, that is, if the first win is a consecutive win that shifts to the second special gaming state, the second special gaming state will be changed to the second special gaming state. If the predetermined period in the special game to be executed does not end and the result of the transition determination of the second game state is to transition to the first special game state, the game is executed in the first special game state. A predetermined period ends in the special game. That is, in the case of consecutive winnings where the first winning is transferred to the second special game state, the predetermined period ends in the first special game where the consecutive winnings end. Therefore, in the case of consecutive games, the predetermined period is set to extend over the first special game at the end of the consecutive games, so the predetermined period is longer than that of a single game. The period will also be longer. As a result, there is a high possibility that a specific condition will be met more often in a consecutive home than in a single game, and the more times a certain condition is met in a consecutive home, the more likely it is that a specific condition will be met more times. Become. As a result, the player can not only increase the expected value of the game value that can be acquired as the number of consecutive games increases, but also obtain more specific information indicating specific numerical information, and can guess or estimate specific numerical information and even predetermined numerical information. The benefit is that it becomes easier to identify.

[Appendix H16']
The special game has a value imparting game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) that impart a gaming value to the player,
The gaming machine according to appendix H14' or appendix H15', wherein the end of the predetermined period is set after the end of the value-adding game.

By the way, from the end of the value-giving game to the end of the special game, no game value is given or the result of the transition determination is notified. Therefore, from the player's perspective, the period from the end of the value-giving game to the end of the special game is a kind of blank period. On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to appendix H16', the end of the predetermined period is set between the end of the value-adding game and the end of the special game, so if a specific condition is satisfied during the predetermined period , it becomes possible to display specific information indicating specific numerical information on the display means by utilizing the blank period for the player. This makes it possible to display specific information on the display means in a time-efficient manner in the special game.

[Appendix H17']
The display control means (51) is configured to display all of the plurality of pieces of specific information in the predetermined display order during the predetermined period when the number of times the specific condition is satisfied during the predetermined period exceeds a predetermined number of times. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices H1' to H15', characterized in that the game machine is displayed as follows.

In the gaming machine according to appendix H17', when the number of times a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period exceeds a predetermined number of times, all pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means in a predetermined display order during the predetermined period. In this way, when the specific condition of the number of times exceeding the specified number of times is satisfied, all of the plurality of specific information is displayed on the display means in a predetermined display order, so that the player can grasp the predetermined numerical information. It becomes possible. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to whether or not the number of times a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period exceeds the prescribed number of times.

Note that the gaming machine according to appendix H17' is different from the conventional slot machine in which information denying a high setting value such as the maximum setting value is not presented, in that all of the plurality of specific information (non-setting values) can be displayed on the display means. Different from the machine.

[Appendix I1']
Transition determination means (for determining whether to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game advantageous to the player (jackpot game) is executed (jackpot lottery) based on the establishment of a determination condition (jackpot lottery); 41) and
a storage means (41) for storing numerical information (game setting values) corresponding to a plurality of mutually different advantage determination probabilities (jackpot probabilities);
selection means (41) for selecting each of the numerical information;
A gaming machine comprising:
Numerical information storage means (41) for storing one predetermined numerical information (setting value) selected from a plurality of types of numerical information;
When a specific condition is met, at least specific numerical information (non-set value) other than the predetermined numerical information among the plurality of types of numerical information is indicated during a specified period from a predetermined start timing to a predetermined end timing. Display control means (51) for displaying specific information (numbers) on the display means (35, 39, 341);
display restriction means (51) that restricts display of the specific information on the display means (35, 39, 341) during a period other than the specified period;
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that during the specified period, the predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical value information is not displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341).

In the gaming machine according to appendix I1', displaying of specific information on the display means is restricted during periods other than the specified period. Therefore, the display of the specific information is performed as a benefit for the player who played a game that satisfies the specific conditions for displaying the specific information. This can prevent other players from taking advantage of the benefits obtained by the previous player and obtaining specific information for specifying or inferring specific numerical information.

[Appendix I2']
The display control means (51) can cause the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information and special information (a part of the numerical value) that does not indicate the plurality of types of numerical information. The gaming machine according to appendix I1', characterized in that:

[Appendix I3']
The display control means (51) may cause the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information and special information (part of a number) indicating a part of the plurality of types of numerical information. The gaming machine according to appendix I1', characterized in that it is possible.

In the gaming machine according to appendix I2' or appendix I3', the display means displays not only specific information but also special information that does not indicate multiple types of numerical information or special information that indicates part of multiple types of numerical information. . This allows the player to not only identify specific numerical information based on specific information when specific information is displayed on the display means, but also to specify specific numerical information based on the special information when special information is displayed on the display means. specific numerical information can be inferred. Therefore, even if the specific information is not displayed, the player can enjoy guessing the specific numerical information based on the special information, thereby improving the interest of the game.

[Appendix I4']
Further comprising a notification game execution means (41) that executes a notification game (variable game) that notifies the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41),
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices I1' to I3', wherein a period other than the specified period is a standby period in which neither the special game nor the notification game is executed.

In the gaming machine according to appendix I4', displaying of specific information on the display means is restricted during a standby state period in which neither the special game nor the notification game is executed. Here, the change of players is generally performed during a waiting period. Therefore, by restricting the display of specific information on the display means during the waiting period, other players may take advantage of the benefits obtained by the previous player and identify or guess specific numerical information. It is possible to more reliably prevent specific information from being obtained.

[Appendix I5']
The display restriction means (51) is characterized in that, in a period other than the specified period, the display of the specific information that was previously displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341) during the specified period is limited. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices I1' to I4'.

In the gaming machine according to appendix I5', display of specific information previously displayed on the display means during the specified period is restricted during periods other than the specified period. In other words, the specific information is displayed only during the specified period, and the display of the past display history of the specific information is also restricted outside the specified period. As a result, it is not possible to check the specific information displayed in the past based on the display history, so other players can take advantage of the benefits obtained by the previous player and identify specific numerical information based on the display history. Alternatively, it is possible to more reliably prevent obtaining specific information for making inferences.

[Appendix I6']
The specific information includes a plurality of specific information,
The display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the plurality of pieces of specific information in the specified period in a predetermined display order when a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices I1' to I5', characterized by:

In the gaming machine according to Appendix I6', a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined order during a specified period. The predetermined order can be set as appropriate, for example, an order in which it is easy to narrow down and recognize the predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is difficult to narrow down and recognize the predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is easy to judge whether the probability of favorable judgment is high, or vice versa. It is possible to set the order in such a way that it is difficult to judge whether it is high or low. In this way, the plural pieces of specific information can be displayed in various orders, and by appropriately selecting the display order, it is possible to prevent the display order of the plural pieces of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix I7']
The display control means (51) is configured to display all of the plurality of pieces of specific information in the predetermined display order during the predetermined period when the number of times the specific condition is satisfied during the predetermined period exceeds a predetermined number of times. The gaming machine according to appendix I6', characterized in that the gaming machine is displayed as follows.

In the gaming machine according to appendix I7', when the number of times a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period exceeds a predetermined number of times, all pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means in a predetermined display order during the predetermined period. In this way, when the specific condition of the number of times exceeding the specified number of times is satisfied, all of the plurality of specific information is displayed on the display means in a predetermined display order, so that the player can grasp the predetermined numerical information. It becomes possible. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to whether or not the number of times a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period exceeds the prescribed number of times.

Note that the gaming machine according to Appendix I7' is different from the conventional slot machine in which information denying a high setting value such as the highest setting value is not presented, in that all of the plurality of specific information (non-setting values) can be displayed on the display means. Different from the machine.

[Appendix J1']
Transition determination means (for determining whether to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game advantageous to the player (jackpot game) is executed (jackpot lottery) based on the establishment of a determination condition (jackpot lottery); 41) and
a storage means (41) for storing numerical information (game setting values) corresponding to a plurality of mutually different advantage determination probabilities (jackpot probabilities);
selection means (41) for selecting each of the numerical information;
A gaming machine comprising:
Numerical information storage means (41) for storing one predetermined numerical information (setting value) selected from a plurality of types of numerical information;
If a second specific condition different from the first specific condition or the second specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period, at least the plurality of types are Display control for displaying on the display means (35, 39, 341) a plurality of specific information (numbers) indicating a plurality of specific numerical information (non-set values) other than the predetermined numerical information among the numerical information in a distinguishable manner. means (51);
Equipped with
The display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the plurality of specific information (numbers) in a first display order when the first specific condition is satisfied; Displaying the plurality of specific information (numbers) on the display means (35, 39, 341) in a second display order different from the first display order when a second specific condition is satisfied;
A gaming machine characterized in that during the specified period, the predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical value information is not displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341).

In the gaming machine according to appendix J1', a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means in a first display order when a first specific condition is met, and a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means when a second specific condition is met. The specific information (numbers) is displayed on the display means in a second display order different from the first display order. That is, the display order of the plurality of specific information is set depending on the type of specific condition that is satisfied. Therefore, the display order of the plurality of specific information can be made difficult for the player to recognize, and the plurality of specific numerical information can be prevented from being easily specified or recognized based on the specific information. This prevents the player from quickly grasping that the advantageous determination probability is low when the advantageous determination probability is low. As a result, even if the advantageous judgment probability is low, the game on the gaming machine is prevented from being prematurely ended, and the operating rate of the gaming machine is prevented from decreasing.

[Appendix J2']
The display control means (51) can cause the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information and special information (a part of the numerical value) that does not indicate the plurality of types of numerical information. The gaming machine according to appendix J1', characterized in that:

[Appendix J3']
The display control means (51) may cause the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information and special information (part of a number) indicating a part of the plurality of types of numerical information. The gaming machine according to appendix J1', characterized in that it is possible.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix J2' or Appendix J3', the display means displays not only specific information but also special information that does not indicate multiple types of numerical information or special information that indicates part of multiple types of numerical information. . This allows the player to not only identify specific numerical information based on specific information when specific information is displayed on the display means, but also to specify specific numerical information based on the special information when special information is displayed on the display means. specific numerical information can be inferred. Therefore, even if the specific information is not displayed, the player can enjoy guessing the specific numerical information based on the special information, thereby improving the interest of the game.

[Appendix J4']
The first specific condition includes that first predetermined numerical information (set value) selected from the plurality of types of numerical information is stored in the numerical information storage means (41),
The second specific condition is such that second predetermined numerical information (setting value) different from the first predetermined numerical information (setting value) selected from the plurality of types of numerical information is the numerical information storage means (41). The gaming machine according to any one of appendix J1' to appendix J3', characterized in that the game machine is stored in .

In the gaming machine according to appendix J4', the first specific condition includes that the first predetermined numerical information is stored in the numerical information storage means, and the second specific condition includes that the second predetermined numerical information is stored in the numerical information storage means. This includes storing numerical information. That is, the type of specific condition depends on the predetermined numerical information. Therefore, the display order is defined by the predetermined numerical information, and a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means during the predetermined period according to the display order. That is, since it is possible to set the display order in relation to the predetermined numerical information, the display order can be set for each predetermined numerical information. Thereby, the display order can be set based on whether the advantageous judgment probability corresponding to the predetermined numerical information is high or low, and it is also possible to characterize the display of a plurality of specific information for each predetermined numerical information.

[Appendix J5']
If the first specific condition or the second specific condition is satisfied, one display order is selected from a plurality of display orders that define the priority order of the display order of the plurality of specific information in the predetermined period. display order selection means (51) for
further comprising selected display order storage means (51) for storing the one display order selected by the display order selection means (51),
The display control means (51) displays the plurality of pieces of specific information on the display means (35, 39, 341) in accordance with the one display order stored in the display order storage means (51) during the specified period. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices J1' to J4', characterized in that the game machine displays the following information.

In the gaming machine according to appendix J5', a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means during a prescribed period in accordance with one display order selected from a plurality of display orders that define the priority order of the display order of the plurality of pieces of specific information. . Therefore, depending on the display order included in the multiple display orders and the selection rate thereof, it is possible to make it easier for multiple pieces of specific information to be displayed in a specific display order, to make it more difficult for multiple pieces of specific information to be displayed in a specific display order, and to make it easier for multiple pieces of specific information to be displayed in a specific display order. It is possible to prevent multiple pieces of specific information from being displayed depending on the display order. This makes it possible to display multiple pieces of specific information in various orders by appropriately setting the content and selection rate of multiple display orders, so the display order of multiple pieces of specific information becomes monotonous. can be prevented.

[Appendix J6']
The plurality of display orders are defined for each of the plurality of types of numerical information,
The gaming machine according to appendix J5', wherein the display order selection means (51) selects the one display order from the plurality of display orders based on the predetermined numerical information.

In the gaming machine according to appendix J6', a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means in a prescribed period according to a display order selected from a plurality of display orders based on predetermined numerical information. That is, since it is possible to set a plurality of display orders in relation to the predetermined numerical information, the display order can be set for each predetermined numerical information. As a result, the display order can be set based on whether the advantageous judgment probability corresponding to the predetermined numerical information is high or low, and it is also possible to characterize the display of a plurality of specific information for each predetermined numerical information.

[Appendix J7']
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices J1' to J6', wherein the start time of the predetermined period is set to the special game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix J7', specific information indicating specific numerical information is displayed on the display means when a specific condition is satisfied during a predetermined period in which a start time is set for a special game. Therefore, a player can enjoy guessing or specifying specific numerical information, and furthermore, guessing or specifying predetermined numerical information, based on the specific information displayed on the display means when specific conditions are met for a predetermined period of time. . By setting the start of the predetermined period to the special game, the player can enjoy the game by focusing on whether or not a specific condition is satisfied in the special game.

[Appendix J8']
The special gaming state is
After the special game in the special game state ends, a first special game state (5R Usually jackpot) and
After the special game ends in the special game state, the probability that the transition determination means (41) determines that the transition to the special game state is to be made is higher than that in the first game state, and the result of the transition determination is notified. a second special gaming state (a 5R probability variable jackpot gaming state and a 16R probability variable jackpot gaming state) in which the second gaming state (high probability mode) is transferred to a second gaming state (high probability mode);
The starting time of the predetermined period is set to the special game that is to be transferred when the result of the transfer determination in the first gaming state is to transfer to the special game. gaming machines.

In the gaming machine according to appendix J8', when the start of the predetermined period is the first gaming state in which the probability that the transition determining means determines that the transition to the special gaming state will be made is lower than that in the second gaming state, the result of the transition determination is special. If the game is to be transferred to a game, it is set as a special game to be transferred. That is, the start of the predetermined period is set to the so-called first winning special game. As a result, a predetermined period is always set for each first hit, regardless of whether it is a single hit or a consecutive hit, so specific numerical information and even predetermined numerical information can be inferred or specified for each first hit. At least one opportunity is guaranteed.

[Appendix J9']
The special game has a value imparting game (opening/closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) that impart a gaming value to the player,
The gaming machine according to appendix J7' or J8', wherein the start time of the predetermined period is set between the start time of the special game and the start time of the value-adding game.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix J9', the start of the predetermined period is set between the start of the special game and the start of the value-adding game, so the specific conditions are satisfied at least after the value-adding game is started. You can enjoy the game by focusing on whether it is true or not.

[Appendix J10']
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices J7' to J9', wherein the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix J10', the end of the predetermined period is set as a special game. That is, the predetermined period starts in the special game and ends in the special game. Here, in the special game, the result of the transition determination is not announced. Therefore, there is a concern that players' interest in the special game may decrease. On the other hand, by setting an end period in addition to a starting period for the special game, interest in the special game, which tends to decrease, is improved.

[Appendix J11']
The special gaming state is
After the special game in the special game state ends, a first special game state (5R Usually jackpot) and
After the special game ends in the special game state, the probability that the transition determination means (41) determines that the transition to the special game state is to be made is higher than that in the first game state, and the result of the transition determination is notified. a second special gaming state (a 5R probability variable jackpot gaming state and a 16R probability variable jackpot gaming state) in which the second gaming state (high probability mode) is transferred to a second gaming state (high probability mode);
The end of the predetermined period is set to a special game (5R normal jackpot) executed in the first special gaming state that is transferred to the first gaming state after the end of the special game in the special gaming state. The gaming machine according to appendix J10', characterized by:

In the gaming machine according to appendix J11', the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game executed in the first special gaming state that is transferred to the first gaming state after the end of the special game. Therefore, if the result of the transition determination of the first gaming state is to shift to the first special gaming state, that is, if the first win is a single win that shifts to the first special gaming state, the execution will be executed in the first special gaming state. A predetermined period ends in the special game played. On the other hand, if the result of the transition determination of the first gaming state is to shift to the second special gaming state, that is, if the first win is a consecutive win that shifts to the second special gaming state, the second special gaming state will be changed to the second special gaming state. If the predetermined period in the special game to be executed does not end and the result of the transition determination of the second game state is to transition to the first special game state, the game is executed in the first special game state. A predetermined period ends in the special game. That is, in the case of consecutive winnings where the first winning is transferred to the second special game state, the predetermined period ends in the first special game where the consecutive winnings end. Therefore, in the case of consecutive games, the predetermined period is set to extend over the first special game at the end of the consecutive games, so the predetermined period is longer than that of a single game. The period will also be longer. As a result, there is a high possibility that a specific condition will be met more often in a consecutive home than in a single game, and the more times a certain condition is met in a consecutive home, the more likely it is that a specific condition will be met more times. Become. As a result, the player can not only increase the expected value of the game value that can be acquired as the number of consecutive games increases, but also obtain more specific information indicating specific numerical information, and can guess or estimate specific numerical information and even predetermined numerical information. The benefit is that it becomes easier to identify.

[Appendix J12']
The special game includes a value imparting game (open/close execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) that impart a gaming value to the player, and an ending that is executed after the end of the value imparting game,
The gaming machine according to appendix J10' or J11', wherein the end of the predetermined period is set to the ending.

By the way, from the end of the value-giving game to the end of the special game, no game value is given or the result of the transition determination is notified. Therefore, from the player's perspective, the period from the end of the value-giving game to the end of the special game is a kind of blank period. On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to Appendix J12', the end of the predetermined period is set between the end of the value-adding game and the end of the special game, so if a specific condition is satisfied during the predetermined period , it becomes possible to display specific information indicating specific numerical information on the display means by utilizing the blank period for the player. This makes it possible to display specific information on the display means in a time-efficient manner in the special game.

[Appendix J13']
The specific information includes a plurality of specific information,
The display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the plurality of pieces of specific information in the specified period in a predetermined display order when a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes J1' to Supplementary Notes J12'.

In the gaming machine according to appendix J13', a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined order during a specified period. The predetermined order can be set as appropriate, for example, an order in which it is easy to narrow down and recognize the predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is difficult to narrow down and recognize the predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is easy to judge whether the probability of favorable judgment is high, or vice versa. It is possible to set the order in such a way that it is difficult to judge whether it is high or low. In this way, the plural pieces of specific information can be displayed in various orders, and by appropriately selecting the display order, it is possible to prevent the display order of the plural pieces of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix J14']
The display control means (51) is configured to display all of the plurality of pieces of specific information in the predetermined display order during the predetermined period when the number of times the specific condition is satisfied during the predetermined period exceeds a predetermined number of times. The gaming machine according to appendix J13', characterized in that the game machine displays:

In the gaming machine according to appendix J14', when the number of times a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period exceeds a predetermined number of times, all pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means in a predetermined display order during the predetermined period. In this way, when the specific condition of the number of times exceeding the specified number of times is satisfied, all of the plurality of specific information is displayed on the display means in a predetermined display order, so that the player can grasp the predetermined numerical information. It becomes possible. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to whether or not the number of times a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period exceeds the prescribed number of times.

Note that the gaming machine according to appendix J14' is different from the conventional slot machine in which information denying a high setting value such as the maximum setting value is not presented, in that all of the plurality of specific information (non-setting values) can be displayed on the display means. Different from the machine.

[Appendix K1']
Transition determination means (for determining whether to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game advantageous to the player (jackpot game) is executed (jackpot lottery) based on the establishment of a determination condition (jackpot lottery); 41) and
a storage means (41) for storing numerical information (game setting values) corresponding to a plurality of mutually different advantage determination probabilities (jackpot probabilities);
selection means (41) for selecting each of the numerical information;
A gaming machine comprising:
Numerical information storage means (41) for storing one predetermined numerical information (setting value) selected from a plurality of types of numerical information;
When a specific condition is met, at least specific numerical information (non-set value) other than the predetermined numerical information among the plurality of types of numerical information is indicated during a specified period from a predetermined start timing to a predetermined end timing. first display control means (51) for displaying specific information (numbers) on first display means (35, 39, 341);
a second display control means (41) for causing a second display means (45) to display predetermined information (numbers) indicating the predetermined numerical information;
Equipped with
The first display means (35, 39, 341) is provided at a position visible to the player,
The second display means (45) is provided at a position where visibility by the player is restricted;
A gaming machine characterized in that the predetermined information is not displayed on the first display means (35, 39, 341) during the specified period.

In the gaming machine according to appendix K1', specific information other than the predetermined information is displayed on the first display means provided at a position visible to the player, and the second display means provided at a position where the player's visibility is restricted. Predetermined information is displayed in (45). That is, when a specific condition is met, specific information indicating specific numerical information other than one predetermined numerical information selected from a plurality of types of numerical information is provided at a position that is visible to the player during a prescribed period. displayed on the first display means. Thereby, the player can specify the specific numerical information based on the specific information displayed on the first display means, and can also recognize the predetermined numerical information by displaying all the specific numerical information. It's possible. Therefore, the player can enjoy grasping the specific numerical information and further guessing or specifying the predetermined numerical information based on the specific information displayed on the first display means, thereby improving the interest of the game.

In addition, by displaying predetermined information on the second display means provided in a position where the player's visual recognition is restricted, the player can receive a predetermined numerical value based on the predetermined information displayed on the second display means during business hours. Information can be prevented from being grasped. On the other hand, the predetermined information can be grasped at the gaming hall side during non-business hours. Thereby, the gaming hall side can confirm the predetermined numerical information based on the predetermined information displayed on the second display means outside business hours, and when changing the predetermined numerical information, the predetermined numerical information after the change. Since the predetermined information indicating the value can be confirmed, the task of changing the predetermined numerical information is facilitated.

[Appendix K2']
The first display control means (51) causes the first display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information and special information (part of a numerical value) that does not indicate the plurality of types of numerical information. The gaming machine according to appendix K1', characterized in that it is possible to.

[Appendix K3']
The first display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information and special information (part of a number) indicating a part of the plurality of types of numerical information. The gaming machine according to appendix K1', characterized in that it is possible to.

In the gaming machine according to appendix K2' or appendix K3', the first display means displays not only specific information but also special information that does not indicate multiple types of numerical information or special information that indicates part of multiple types of numerical information. be done. This allows the player to not only identify specific numerical information based on specific information when specific information is displayed on the display means, but also to specify specific numerical information based on the special information when special information is displayed on the display means. specific numerical information can be inferred. Therefore, even if the specific information is not displayed, the player can enjoy guessing the specific numerical information based on the special information, thereby improving the interest of the game.

[Appendix K4']
Further comprising a game board (31) on which a game ball is launched,
The first display means (35, 39, 341) is provided on the front side of the game board (31),
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices K1' to K3', wherein the second display means (45) is provided on the back side of the game board (31).

In the game machine according to appendix K4', specific information indicating specific numerical information other than the predetermined numerical information is displayed on the first display means provided on the front side of the game board, and predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical information is displayed on the back side of the game board. It is displayed on a second display means provided on the side. Therefore, it is easy to visually recognize the specific information displayed on the first display means, and it is possible to easily restrict the visibility of the predetermined information displayed on the second display means.

[Appendix K5']
The game board (31) is fixed to the frame (12) so that it can be opened and closed,
The gaming machine according to appendix K4', wherein the second display means (45) is provided at a position where the second display means (45) is visible when the gaming board (31) is opened.

In the gaming machine according to appendix K5', a second display means is provided on the back side of the gaming board that is openably and closably fixed to the frame. Therefore, by closing the game board, the predetermined information displayed on the second display means can be prevented from being visible to the player, while by opening the game board, the predetermined information displayed on the second display means can be prevented. You can check this at the game hall. Thereby, it is possible to achieve a state in which the predetermined information on the second display means is visible and a state in which visibility is restricted by the simple operation of opening and closing the game board.

[Appendix K6']
The second display control means (41)
controllable between a display state in which the predetermined information is displayed on the second display means (45) and a non-display state in which the predetermined information is not displayed on the second display means (45);
controlling from the non-display state to the display state when a first operation is performed on a specific operation means (46) provided on the back side of the game board (31);
The gaming machine according to appendix K4' or K5', characterized in that when a second operation is performed on the specific operating means (46), the display state is controlled to the non-display state.

In the game machine according to appendix K6', a display state in which predetermined information is displayed on the second display means and a non-display state in which the predetermined information is not displayed can be set by operating a specific operation means provided on the back side of the game board. You can choose. Therefore, by selecting the non-display state during the business hours of the game hall, even if the game board is opened in the event of a jam in the game machine, the predetermined information will be displayed to the player through the second display means. It is possible to reliably prevent this information from being grasped by someone else.

[Appendix K7']
The specific information includes a plurality of specific information,
The display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the plurality of pieces of specific information in the specified period in a predetermined display order when a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices K1' to K6', characterized by:

In the gaming machine according to appendix K7', a plurality of pieces of specific information are displayed in a predetermined order during a predetermined period. The predetermined order can be set as appropriate, for example, an order in which it is easy to narrow down and recognize the predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is difficult to narrow down and recognize the predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is easy to judge whether the probability of favorable judgment is high, or vice versa. It is possible to set the order in such a way that it is difficult to judge whether it is high or low. In this way, the plural pieces of specific information can be displayed in various orders, and by appropriately selecting the display order, it is possible to prevent the display order of the plural pieces of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix K8']
The display control means (51) is configured to display all of the plurality of pieces of specific information in the predetermined display order during the predetermined period when the number of times the specific condition is satisfied during the predetermined period exceeds a predetermined number of times. The gaming machine according to supplementary note K7', characterized in that the game machine is displayed as follows.

In the gaming machine according to appendix K8', when the number of times a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period exceeds a predetermined number of times, all pieces of specific information are displayed on the display means in a predetermined display order during the predetermined period. In this way, when the specific condition of the number of times exceeding the specified number of times is satisfied, all of the plurality of specific information is displayed on the display means in a predetermined display order, so that the player can grasp the predetermined numerical information. It becomes possible. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to whether or not the number of times a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period exceeds the prescribed number of times.

Note that the gaming machine according to appendix K8' is different from the conventional slot machine in which information denying a high setting value such as the maximum setting value is not presented, in that all of the plurality of specific information (non-setting values) can be displayed on the display means. Different from the machine.

[Appendix L1']
a displacement means (91) capable of displacing between a first state (off state of the power switch 91) and a second state different from the first state (on state of the power switch 91);
judgment information output means (91a) for outputting information by which the state of the displacement means can be judged;
Equipped with
If it is determined that the displacement means (91) is in the first state based on the information from the determination information output means (91a), the displacement means (91) is in the normal state (for example, the power is restored by turning on the power switch 91, the power switch 91 The first process (for example, power-on process) is executed by determining that the
When it is determined that the displacement means (91) is in the second state based on the information from the judgment information output means (91a), an abnormal state (power restoration without turning on the power switch 91, The gaming machine is characterized in that the game machine determines that the power is cut off without turning off the power switch 91) and executes a second process (for example, a process at the time of power recovery) that is different from the first process.

In the gaming machine according to appendix L1', the first process in a normal state or the second process in an abnormal state is executed depending on the state of the displacement means determined based on information from the determination information output means. In this way, the first process is executed by executing the first process in the normal state or the second process in the abnormal state depending on the state of the displacement means judged based on the information from the judgment information output means. By executing the second process, it can be determined that the displacement means is normal, and by executing the second process, it can be determined that the displacement means is normal.

[Appendix L2']
The gaming machine according to appendix L1', wherein the first process and the second process are executed when the power is restored from a power-off state.

In the gaming machine according to appendix L2', the first process and the second process are executed when the power is restored from a power-off state. In this way, by executing the first process and the second process when the power is restored from a power-off state, the state of the displacement means, for example, the state of the displacement means at the time of power-off can be determined after the power is restored.

[Appendix L3']
When the power is restored from the power-off state, the state of the displacement means (91) at the time of the power-off is determined based on the state of the displacement means (91) stored at the power-off before the power is restored. The gaming machine according to appendix L2'.

In the gaming machines according to appendix L2' and appendix L3', when the power is restored from a power-off state, the displacement means at the time of power-off ( 91) is determined. In this way, when the power is restored from a power-off state, the state of the displacement means (91) at the time of the power-off is determined based on the state of the displacement means that was stored at the time of the power-off before the power was restored. By a simple method of storing the state of the displacement means when the power is cut off before the power is restored, the state of the displacement means can be determined when the power is cut off before the power is restored.

[Appendix L4']
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices L1' to L3', wherein the displacement means (91) is capable of switching between power cutoff and power restoration.

[Appendix L5']
The first state is a state in which the power can be cut off,
The gaming machine according to appendix A4, wherein the second state is a state in which the power can be restored.

In the gaming machines according to appendices L4' and L5', the displacement means can switch between power cutoff and power restoration. As described above, since the displacement means can switch between power cutoff and power restoration, it becomes possible to judge whether the displacement means is normal or abnormal when the power is cut off, that is, whether the power cutoff is normal or abnormal. .

[Appendix L6']
As the first process, if it is determined that the displacement means (91) is in the first state at the time of power cutoff based on the information from the determination information output means (91a), the displacement means (91) is in the normal state (for example, the power switch 91 is turned on, power is cut off by turning off the power switch 91), and processes (e.g., switch power-off command setting process, switch status flag off setting process, RTC performance restriction flag setting process) Run
As the second process, if it is determined that the displacement means (91) is in the second state at the time of power cutoff based on information from the determination information output means (91a), an abnormal state ( For example, a process different from the first process (for example, a process for setting a non-switch power-off command, a switch status The gaming machine according to any one of appendices L1' to L5', characterized in that the processing machine executes a process for setting a flag on, a process for setting a fixed performance restriction flag.

In the gaming machine according to appendix L6', the first process in a normal state or the second process in an abnormal state is executed depending on the state of the displacement means determined at the time of power cutoff, based on the information from the judgment information output means. be done. In this way, the first process for normal times or the second process for abnormal times is executed depending on the state of the displacement means judged based on the information from the judgment information output means when the power is cut off. By executing the first process, it can be determined that the displacement means is normal, while by executing the second process, it can be determined that the displacement means is normal. That is, it can be determined whether the state of the displacement means at the time of power cut-off is normal or abnormal.

[Appendix L7']
The gaming machine according to appendix L6', wherein the first process and the second process are executed when the power is shut off.

In the gaming machine according to appendix L7', the first process and the second process are executed when the power is turned off. In this way, by executing the first process and the second process when the power is cut off, it is possible to check whether the state of the displacement means at the time of the power cut is normal or abnormal, not only when the power is cut off, but also when the power is cut off. It becomes possible to determine whether the displacement means is normal or abnormal even after the power is restored. Thereby, if the state of the displacement means at the time of power cutoff is abnormal, it becomes possible to deal with the abnormal state of the displacement means at the time of power cutoff after the power is restored.

[Appendix L8']
The main control means (41) performs the first process (power-on process) and the first process according to the state of the displacement means (91) determined based on information from the determination information output means (91a). The gaming machine according to appendix L6' or L7', characterized in that the gaming machine executes two processes.

In the game machine according to appendix L8', the main control means that controls the progress of the notification game performs the first process in normal mode or abnormally depending on the state of the displacement means determined based on information from the judgment information output means. The second process at the time is executed. In this way, the main control means executes the first process in the normal state or the second process in the abnormal state depending on the state of the displacement means judged based on the information from the judgment information output means. By executing the first process in the main control means, it can be determined that the displacement means is normal, and by executing the second process, it can be determined that the displacement means is normal. Thereby, when the state of the displacement means is abnormal, it becomes possible for the main control means to take measures against the abnormal state of the displacement means.

[Appendix L9']
The game according to appendix L8', wherein the first process and the second process are processes for setting information (switch status flag) necessary for the process executed in the main control means (41). Machine.

In the gaming machine according to appendix L9', the first process and the second process are processes for setting information necessary for the process executed by the main control means. In this way, the first process and the second process are processes for setting information necessary for the process to be executed in the main control means, so that the main control means can perform a process according to the state of the displacement means, for example, a displacement It becomes possible to deal with cases where the means is in an abnormal state.

[Appendix L10']
Performance means (26, 341, 342) for performing performance at least in the notification game;
performance control means (51) for controlling the performance executed in the performance means (26, 341, 342) based on information regarding the notification game transmitted from the main control means (41);
Equipped with
The first process and the second process are processes for setting information (switch power-off command, non-switch power-off command) necessary for the process executed in the production means (26, 341, 342). The gaming machine described in appendix L8' or L9' as a feature.

In the gaming machine according to appendix L10', the first process and the second process are processes for setting information necessary for the process executed by the presentation means. In this way, since the first process and the second process are processes for setting information necessary for the process to be executed in the effect means, the effect control means can control the displacement means based on the information from the main control means. It becomes possible to perform processing according to the state, for example, when the displacement means is in an abnormal state.

[Appendix L11']
Based on the establishment of the determination condition, a transition determination (jackpot lottery) is made as to whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed, and the transition determination is made. a main control means (41) that controls the progress of a notification game (variable game) that reports the results of;
Performance means (26, 341, 342) for executing a notification performance at least in the notification game;
performance control means (51) for controlling the performance executed in the performance means (26, 341, 342) based on information regarding the notification game transmitted from the main control means (41);
Equipped with
The performance control means (51) is
As the first process, when it is determined that the displacement means (91) is in the first state based on the information from the determination information output means (91a), the displacement means (91) is in the normal state (for example, by turning on the power switch 91). power restoration, power cutoff by turning off the power switch 91), and executes a process to limit the execution of a specific effect (for example, a process necessary to limit the execution of an RTC effect),
As the second process, when it is determined that the displacement means (91) is in the second state based on the information from the determination information output means (91a), an abnormal state (power switch 91 is turned on) is detected. (Power return without turning off the power switch 91, power cut off without turning off the power switch 91), and executes a process to limit a predetermined effect different from the specific effect (for example, a process necessary to limit the execution of a stationary effect). The gaming machine according to any one of appendices L1' to L10'.

In the gaming machine according to appendix L11', execution of the specific performance is restricted when the displacement means is in the first state, and execution of the predetermined performance is restricted when the displacement means is in the second state. In this way, execution of the specific effect is restricted when the displacement means is in the first state, and execution of the predetermined effect is restricted when the displacement means is in the second state. It is possible to restrict the execution of a specific performance (for example, an RTC performance) that would cause inconvenience if executed when the displacement means is in the second state, and a predetermined performance (for example, You can restrict the execution of deferred production.

[Appendix L12']
The gaming machine according to appendix L11', wherein the first process and the second process are executed when the power is shut off.

In the gaming machine according to appendix L12', the first process and the second process are executed when the power is turned off. In this way, by executing the first process and the second process when the power is cut off, it is possible to avoid inconveniences regarding effects that occur depending on the state of the displacement means at the time of the power cut when the power is restored.

[Appendix L13']
The gaming machine according to appendix L11' or L12', wherein the specific performance is a performance (RTC performance) that is executed when a predetermined time has elapsed (specific time) after the power is restored.

In the gaming machine according to appendix L13', the specific performance is a performance (RTC performance) that is executed when a predetermined period of time has elapsed (specific time) since the power was restored. That is, when the displacement means is in the first state, which is a normal state, execution of the performance (RTC performance) that is performed when a predetermined time has elapsed (specific time) after the power is restored is restricted. As a result, for example, when a plurality of machines of the same type are installed in an island facility of a game hall, inconveniences caused by deviations in execution timing of specific effects (RTC effects) among the plurality of game machines can be prevented.

[Appendix L14']
Advantageous determination probability setting that allows an advantageous determination probability (game setting value) determined to be transferred to the special gaming state in the transition determination by the main control means (41) to be set from among a plurality of mutually different advantageous determination probabilities. comprising means (41);
The predetermined performance is a performance that allows the player to understand that the advantageous determination probability when the power is cut off and the advantageous determination probability when the power is restored are the same. The gaming machine described in any of the above.

In the gaming machine according to appendix L14', the predetermined performance is a performance that allows the player to understand that the advantageous determination probability when the power is cut off is the same as the advantageous determination probability when the power is restored. That is, when the displacement means is in the abnormal state, which is the second state, the effect is such that the player can understand that the probability of an advantageous determination when the power is cut off is the same as the probability of an advantageous determination when the power is restored. Execution is restricted. As a result, players can understand that the advantageous judgment probability is the same when the power is cut off and after the power is restored, that is, the advantageous judgment probability remains unchanged since the previous business day of the gaming hall. Prevented.

[Appendix L15']
The movable member control means (51) performs the first process or the second process depending on the state of the displacement means (91) determined based on information from the determination information output means (91a). The gaming machine according to any one of appendices L1' to L14', characterized in that the position of the movable member (342) is controlled.

In the gaming machine according to appendix L15', the position of the movable member is controlled depending on the state of the displacement means. In this way, by controlling the position of the movable member according to the state of the displacement means, it is possible to easily visually check from the position of the movable member whether the state of the displacement means, that is, the state of the displacement means is normal. become.

[Appendix L16']
The gaming machine according to appendix L15', wherein the movable member control means (51) controls the position of the movable member (342) when the power is cut off.

In the gaming machine according to appendix L16', the movable member control means controls the position of the movable member when the power is cut off. In this way, by controlling the position of the movable member when the power is cut off, the movable member control means can grasp the state of the displacement means when the power is cut off, so that the state of the displacement means when the power is cut off is normal. It becomes possible to visually check from the position of the movable member whether or not it is the case.

[Appendix L17']
The movable member control means (51)
When it is determined that the displacement means (91) is in the first state based on the information from the determination information output means (91a), it is determined that the displacement means (91) is in the normal state (for example, the power is restored by turning on the power switch 91, the power switch 91 is turned on, the movable member (342) is located at the standby position;
When it is determined that the displacement means (91) is in the second state based on the information from the determination information output means (91a), an abnormal state (power return without turning on the power switch 91, power supply The gaming machine according to appendix L15' or L16', characterized in that the movable member (342) is positioned at the operating position.

In the gaming machine according to appendix L17', the movable member is positioned at the standby position when the displacement means is in the first state, which is the normal state, and the movable member is positioned at the standby position when the displacement means is in the second state, which is the abnormal state. is placed in the operating position. In this way, the movable member is located in the standby position when the displacement means is in the first state, which is the normal state, and the movable member is located in the operating position, when the displacement means is in the second state, which is the abnormal state. By doing so, it is possible to easily detect an abnormality in the displacement means simply by visually checking whether or not the movable member is in the operating position.

[Appendix L18']
Based on the establishment of the determination condition, a transition determination (jackpot lottery) is made as to whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed, and the transition determination is made. a main control means (41) that controls the progress of a notification game (variable game) that reports the results of;
Performance means (26, 341, 342) for performing performance at least in the notification game;
performance control means (51) for controlling the performance executed in the performance means (26, 341, 342) based on information regarding the notification game transmitted from the main control means (41);
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices L15' to L17', wherein the presentation means (26, 341, 342) includes the movable member (342).

In the gaming machine according to appendix A18, the presentation means includes a movable member. In this way, since the presentation means includes the movable member, there is no need to separately provide a movable member to judge the state of the displacement means, and the state of the displacement means can be determined using the movable member as the presentation means. becomes possible. This makes it possible to reduce manufacturing costs and improve design freedom.

[Appendix L19']
first means (51) for determining the state of the displacement means (91) based on information from the determination information output means (91a) when power is cut off;
second means (41) for determining the state of the displacement means (91) based on information from the determination information output means (91a) when the power is restored;
comparison means (51) for comparing the state of the displacement means (91) determined by the first means (51) and the state of the displacement means (91) determined by the second means (41); and,
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices L1' to L18', characterized by comprising:

In the gaming machine according to appendix L19', the state of the displacement means determined when the power is cut off is compared with the state of the displacement means determined when the power is restored. In this way, by comparing the state of the displacement means determined when the power is cut off and the state of the displacement means determined when the power is restored, it is possible to improve the accuracy of determining the state of the displacement means. Become.

[Appendix L20']
The comparison means (51) compares the state of the displacement means (91) determined by the first means (51) and the state of the displacement means (91) determined by the second means (41) when the power is restored. The gaming machine according to appendix L19', characterized in that the state of .

In the gaming machine according to appendix L20', the state of the displacement means determined when the power is cut off and the state of the displacement means determined when the power is restored are compared when the power is restored. In this way, the state of the displacement means determined when the power is cut off and the state of the displacement means determined when the power is restored are compared when the power is restored, so that the state of the displacement means determined when the power is cut off, If there is a mismatch between the state of the displacement means determined when the power is restored, the game can be prevented from starting. This makes it possible to prevent the game from becoming possible to start if there is a mismatch between the state of the displacement means determined when the power is cut off and the state of the displacement means determined when the power is restored. .

[Appendix L21']
The determination result by the comparison means (51) is the state of the displacement means (91) determined by the first means (51) and the state of the displacement means (91) determined by the second means (41). The gaming machine according to appendix L19' or L20', further comprising an error processing means (51) that executes error processing when the states do not match.

In the gaming machine according to appendix L21', if the determination result by the comparison means is that the state of the displacement means determined by the first means does not match the state of the displacement means determined by the second means, Error handling is performed. That is, error processing is executed when the state of the displacement means determined when the power is cut off and the state of the displacement means determined when the power is restored do not match. In this way, error processing is executed when the state of the displacement means determined when the power is turned off does not match the state of the displacement means determined when the power is restored, so that the state of the displacement means determined when the power is turned off does not match. It is possible to reliably prevent the game from becoming possible to start when the state and the state of the displacement means determined when the power is restored do not match.

[Appendix L22']
Based on the establishment of the determination condition, a transition determination (jackpot lottery) is made as to whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed, and the transition determination is made. a main control means (41) that controls the progress of a notification game (variable game) that reports the results of;
Performance means (26, 341, 342) for performing performance at least in the notification game;
performance control means (51) for controlling the performance executed in the performance means (26, 341, 342) based on information regarding the notification game transmitted from the main control means (41);
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to appendix L21', wherein the performance control means (51) includes the comparison means (51).

In the gaming machine according to appendix L22', the performance control means for controlling the performance of the notification game includes a comparison means. In this way, by providing the performance control means that controls the performance of the information game with the comparison means, the performance control means can compare the state of the displacement means determined when the power is cut off and the state of the displacement means determined when the power is restored. It can be determined that they do not match.

[Appendix L23']
The gaming machine according to appendix L22', wherein the performance control means (51) includes the error processing means (51).

In the gaming machine according to appendix L23', the performance control means for controlling the performance of the notification game includes a comparison means. In this way, by providing the performance control means that controls the performance of the notification game with the comparison means, it becomes possible to execute error processing in the performance control means.

[Appendix L24']
The gaming machine according to appendix L23', wherein the error processing includes processing to notify that there is an error.

In the gaming machine according to appendix L24', the error process includes a process of notifying that there is an error. In this way, by including the process of notifying that the error process is an error, the game hall side can prevent the state of the displacement means determined when the power is cut off from being the same as the state of the displacement means determined when the power is restored. I can understand things. This makes it possible for the game hall to deal with the case where the state of the displacement means determined when the power is cut off does not match the state of the displacement means determined when the power is restored.

[Appendix M1']
a displacement means (91) capable of displacing between a first state (off state of the power switch 91) and a second state different from the first state (on state of the power switch 91);
judgment information output means (91a) for outputting information by which the state of the displacement means can be judged;
Equipped with
If it is determined that the displacement means (91) is in the first state when the power is cut off based on the information from the determination information output means (91a), the power is restored to the normal state (for example, by turning on the power switch 91). , the power is cut off by turning off the power switch 91), and executes the first process (for example, a switch power-off command setting process, a switch status flag off setting process, an RTC production restriction flag setting process),
Based on the information from the judgment information output means (91a), if it is determined that the displacement means (91) is in the second state at the time of power cutoff, an abnormal state (for example, when the power switch 91 is turned on) is detected. A second process that is different from the first process (for example, a process to set a non-switch power-off command, a process to turn on a switch state flag) is performed. A gaming machine characterized in that a setting process and a setting process of a fixed performance restriction flag are executed.

In the gaming machine according to appendix M1', the first process in a normal state or the second process in an abnormal state is executed depending on the state of the displacement means determined at the time of power cutoff, based on information from the judgment information output means. be done. In this way, the first process for normal times or the second process for abnormal times is executed depending on the state of the displacement means judged based on the information from the judgment information output means when the power is cut off. By executing the first process, it can be determined that the displacement means is normal, while by executing the second process, it can be determined that the displacement means is normal. That is, it can be determined whether the state of the displacement means at the time of power cut-off is normal or abnormal.

[Appendix M2']
The gaming machine according to appendix M1', wherein the first process and the second process are executed when the power is shut off.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B2, the first process and the second process are executed when the power is turned off. In this way, by executing the first process and the second process when the power is cut off, it is possible to check whether the state of the displacement means at the time of the power cut is normal or abnormal, not only when the power is cut off, but also when the power is cut off. It becomes possible to determine whether the displacement means is normal or abnormal even after the power is restored. Thereby, if the state of the displacement means at the time of power cutoff is abnormal, it becomes possible to deal with the abnormal state of the displacement means at the time of power cutoff after the power is restored.

[Appendix M3']
The main control means (41) performs the first process (power-on process) and the first process according to the state of the displacement means (91) determined based on information from the determination information output means (91a). The gaming machine according to appendix M1' or M2', characterized in that the gaming machine executes two processes.

In the game machine according to appendix M3', the main control means that controls the progress of the notification game performs the first processing in normal mode or abnormal state depending on the state of the displacement means determined based on information from the judgment information output means. The second process at the time is executed. In this way, the main control means executes the first process in the normal state or the second process in the abnormal state depending on the state of the displacement means judged based on the information from the judgment information output means. By executing the first process in the main control means, it can be determined that the displacement means is normal, and by executing the second process, it can be determined that the displacement means is normal. Thereby, when the state of the displacement means is abnormal, it becomes possible for the main control means to take measures against the abnormal state of the displacement means.

[Appendix M4']
The game according to appendix M3', wherein the first process and the second process are processes for setting information (switch status flag) necessary for the process executed by the main control means (41). Machine.

In the gaming machine according to appendix M4', the first process and the second process are processes for setting information necessary for the process executed by the main control means. In this way, the first process and the second process are processes for setting information necessary for the process to be executed in the main control means, so that the main control means can perform a process according to the state of the displacement means, for example, a displacement It becomes possible to deal with cases where the means is in an abnormal state.

[Additional note M5']
Performance means (26, 341, 342) for performing performance at least in the notification game;
performance control means (51) for controlling the performance executed in the performance means (26, 341, 342) based on information regarding the notification game transmitted from the main control means (41);
Equipped with
The first process and the second process are processes for setting information (switch power-off command, non-switch power-off command) necessary for the process executed in the production means (26, 341, 342). The gaming machine described in appendix M3' or appendix M4' as a feature.

In the gaming machine according to appendix M5', the first process and the second process are processes for setting information necessary for the process executed by the presentation means. In this way, since the first process and the second process are processes for setting information necessary for the process to be executed in the effect means, the effect control means can control the displacement means based on the information from the main control means. It becomes possible to perform processing according to the state, for example, when the displacement means is in an abnormal state.

[Appendix M6']
Based on the establishment of the determination condition, a transition determination (jackpot lottery) is made as to whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed, and the transition determination is made. a main control means (41) that controls the progress of a notification game (variable game) that reports the results of;
Performance means (26, 341, 342) for executing a notification performance at least in the notification game;
performance control means (51) for controlling the performance executed in the performance means (26, 341, 342) based on information regarding the notification game transmitted from the main control means (41);
Equipped with
The performance control means (51) is
As the first process, when it is determined that the displacement means (91) is in the first state based on the information from the determination information output means (91a), the displacement means (91) is in the normal state (for example, by turning on the power switch 91). power restoration, power cutoff by turning off the power switch 91), and executes a process to limit the execution of a specific effect (for example, a process necessary to limit the execution of an RTC effect),
As the second process, when it is determined that the displacement means (91) is in the second state based on the information from the determination information output means (91a), an abnormal state (power switch 91 is turned on) is detected. (Power return without turning off the power switch 91, power cut off without turning off the power switch 91), and executes a process to limit a predetermined effect different from the specific effect (for example, a process necessary to limit the execution of a stationary effect). The gaming machine according to any one of appendices M1' to M5'.

In the gaming machine according to appendix M6', execution of the specific performance is restricted when the displacement means is in the first state, and execution of the predetermined performance is restricted when the displacement means is in the second state. In this way, execution of the specific effect is restricted when the displacement means is in the first state, and execution of the predetermined effect is restricted when the displacement means is in the second state. It is possible to restrict the execution of a specific performance (for example, an RTC performance) that would cause inconvenience if executed when the displacement means is in the second state, and a predetermined performance (for example, You can restrict the execution of deferred production.

[Appendix M7']
The gaming machine according to appendix M6', wherein the first process and the second process are executed when the power is shut off.

In the gaming machine according to appendix M7', the first process and the second process are executed when the power is turned off. In this way, by executing the first process and the second process when the power is cut off, it is possible to avoid inconveniences regarding effects that occur depending on the state of the displacement means at the time of the power cut when the power is restored.

[Appendix M8']
The gaming machine according to appendix M6' or M7', wherein the specific performance is a performance (RTC performance) that is executed when a predetermined time has elapsed (specific time) after the power is restored.

In the gaming machine according to appendix M8', the specific performance is a performance (RTC performance) that is executed when a predetermined period of time has elapsed (specific time) since the power was restored. That is, when the displacement means is in the first state, which is a normal state, execution of the performance (RTC performance) that is performed when a predetermined time has elapsed (specific time) after the power is restored is restricted. As a result, for example, when a plurality of machines of the same type are installed in an island facility of a game hall, inconveniences caused by deviations in execution timing of specific effects (RTC effects) among the plurality of game machines can be prevented.

[Appendix M9']
Advantageous determination probability setting that allows an advantageous determination probability (game setting value) determined to be transferred to the special gaming state in the transition determination by the main control means (41) to be set from among a plurality of mutually different advantageous determination probabilities. comprising means (41);
The predetermined performance is a performance that allows the player to understand that the advantageous determination probability when the power is cut off is the same as the advantageous determination probability when the power is restored. The gaming machine described in any of the above.

In the gaming machine according to appendix M9', the predetermined performance is a performance that allows the player to understand that the advantageous determination probability when the power is cut off is the same as the advantageous determination probability when the power is restored. That is, when the displacement means is in the abnormal state, which is the second state, the effect is such that the player can understand that the probability of an advantageous determination when the power is cut off is the same as the probability of an advantageous determination when the power is restored. Execution is restricted. As a result, players can understand that the advantageous judgment probability is the same when the power is cut off and after the power is restored, that is, the advantageous judgment probability remains unchanged since the previous business day of the gaming hall. Prevented.

[Additional note M10']
The movable member control means (51) performs the first process or the second process depending on the state of the displacement means (91) determined based on information from the determination information output means (91a). The gaming machine according to any one of appendices M1' to M9', characterized in that the position of the movable member (342) is controlled.

In the gaming machine according to appendix M10', the position of the movable member is controlled according to the state of the displacement means. In this way, by controlling the position of the movable member according to the state of the displacement means, it is possible to easily visually check from the position of the movable member whether the state of the displacement means, that is, the state of the displacement means is normal. become.

[Additional note M11']
The gaming machine according to appendix M9', wherein the movable member control means (51) controls the position of the movable member (342) when the power is cut off.

In the gaming machine according to appendix M11', the movable member control means controls the position of the movable member when the power is cut off. In this way, by controlling the position of the movable member when the power is cut off, the movable member control means can grasp the state of the displacement means when the power is cut off, so that the state of the displacement means when the power is cut off is normal. It becomes possible to visually check from the position of the movable member whether or not it is the case.

[Additional note M12']
The movable member control means (51)
When it is determined that the displacement means (91) is in the first state based on the information from the determination information output means (91a), it is determined that the displacement means (91) is in the normal state (for example, the power is restored by turning on the power switch 91, the power switch 91 is turned on, the movable member (342) is located at the standby position;
When it is determined that the displacement means (91) is in the second state based on the information from the determination information output means (91a), an abnormal state (power return without turning on the power switch 91, power supply The gaming machine according to appendix M10' or M11', characterized in that the movable member (342) is positioned at the operating position when the movable member (342) is positioned at the operating position.

In the gaming machine according to appendix M1', the movable member is positioned at the standby position when the displacement means is in the first state, which is the normal state, and the movable member is positioned at the standby position when the displacement means is in the second state, which is the abnormal state. is placed in the operating position. In this way, the movable member is located in the standby position when the displacement means is in the first state, which is the normal state, and the movable member is located in the operating position, when the displacement means is in the second state, which is the abnormal state. By doing so, it is possible to easily detect an abnormality in the displacement means simply by visually checking whether or not the movable member is in the operating position.

[Additional note M13']
Based on the establishment of the determination condition, a transition determination (jackpot lottery) is made as to whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed, and the transition determination is made. a main control means (41) that controls the progress of a notification game (variable game) that reports the results of;
Performance means (26, 341, 342) for performing performance at least in the notification game;
performance control means (51) for controlling the performance executed in the performance means (26, 341, 342) based on information regarding the notification game transmitted from the main control means (41);
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices M10' to M12', wherein the presentation means (26, 341, 342) includes the movable member (342).

In the gaming machine according to appendix M13', the presentation means includes a movable member. In this way, since the presentation means includes the movable member, there is no need to separately provide a movable member to judge the state of the displacement means, and the state of the displacement means can be determined using the movable member as the presentation means. becomes possible. This makes it possible to reduce manufacturing costs and improve design freedom.

[Additional note M14']
first means (51) for determining the state of the displacement means (91) based on information from the determination information output means (91a) when power is cut off;
second means (41) for determining the state of the displacement means (91) based on information from the determination information output means (91a) when the power is restored;
comparison means (51) for comparing the state of the displacement means (91) determined by the first means (51) and the state of the displacement means (91) determined by the second means (41); and,
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices M1' to M13', characterized by comprising:

In the gaming machine according to appendix M14', the state of the displacement means determined when the power is cut off is compared with the state of the displacement means determined when the power is restored. In this way, by comparing the state of the displacement means determined when the power is cut off and the state of the displacement means determined when the power is restored, it is possible to improve the accuracy of determining the state of the displacement means. Become.

[Additional note M15']
The comparison means (51) compares the state of the displacement means (91) determined by the first means (51) and the state of the displacement means (91) determined by the second means (41) when the power is restored. The gaming machine according to appendix M14', characterized in that the state of .

In the gaming machine according to appendix M15', the state of the displacement means determined when the power is cut off and the state of the displacement means determined when the power is restored are compared when the power is restored. In this way, the state of the displacement means determined when the power is cut off and the state of the displacement means determined when the power is restored are compared when the power is restored, so that the state of the displacement means determined when the power is cut off, If there is a mismatch between the state of the displacement means determined when the power is restored, the game can be prevented from starting. This makes it possible to prevent the game from becoming possible to start if there is a mismatch between the state of the displacement means determined when the power is cut off and the state of the displacement means determined when the power is restored. .

[Additional note M16']
The determination result by the comparison means (51) is the state of the displacement means (91) determined by the first means (51) and the state of the displacement means (91) determined by the second means (41). The gaming machine according to appendix M14' or M15', further comprising an error processing means (51) that executes error processing when the states do not match.

In the gaming machine according to appendix M16', if the determination result by the comparison means is that the state of the displacement means determined by the first means does not match the state of the displacement means determined by the second means, Error handling is performed. That is, error processing is executed when the state of the displacement means determined when the power is cut off and the state of the displacement means determined when the power is restored do not match. In this way, error processing is executed when the state of the displacement means determined when the power is turned off does not match the state of the displacement means determined when the power is restored, so that the state of the displacement means determined when the power is turned off does not match. It is possible to reliably prevent the game from becoming possible to start when the state and the state of the displacement means determined when the power is restored do not match.

[Additional note M17']
Based on the establishment of the determination condition, a transition determination (jackpot lottery) is made as to whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed, and the transition determination is made. a main control means (41) that controls the progress of a notification game (variable game) that reports the results of;
Performance means (26, 341, 342) for performing performance at least in the notification game;
performance control means (51) for controlling the performance executed in the performance means (26, 341, 342) based on information regarding the notification game transmitted from the main control means (41);
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to appendix M16', wherein the performance control means (51) includes the comparison means (51).

In the gaming machine according to appendix M17', the performance control means for controlling the performance of the notification game includes a comparison means. In this way, by providing the performance control means that controls the performance of the information game with the comparison means, the performance control means can compare the state of the displacement means determined when the power is cut off and the state of the displacement means determined when the power is restored. It can be determined that they do not match.

[Additional note M18']
The gaming machine according to appendix M17', wherein the performance control means (51) includes the error processing means (51).

In the gaming machine according to appendix M18', the effect control means for controlling the effect of the notification game includes a comparison means. In this way, by providing the performance control means that controls the performance of the notification game with the comparison means, it becomes possible to execute error processing in the performance control means.

[Additional note M19']
The gaming machine according to appendix M18', wherein the error processing includes processing to notify that there is an error.

In the gaming machine according to appendix M19', the error process includes a process of notifying that there is an error. In this way, by including the process of notifying that the error process is an error, the game hall side can prevent the state of the displacement means determined when the power is cut off from being the same as the state of the displacement means determined when the power is restored. I can understand things. This makes it possible for the game hall to deal with the case where the state of the displacement means determined when the power is cut off does not match the state of the displacement means determined when the power is restored.

[Additional note M20']
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices M1' to M19', wherein the displacement means (91) is capable of switching between power cutoff and power restoration.

[Appendix M21']
The first state is a state in which the power can be cut off,
The gaming machine according to appendix M20', wherein the second state is a state in which the power can be restored.

In the gaming machines according to appendices M20' and M21', the displacement means can switch between power cutoff and power restoration. As described above, since the displacement means can switch between power cutoff and power restoration, it becomes possible to judge whether the displacement means is normal or abnormal when the power is cut off, that is, whether the power cutoff is normal or abnormal. .

[Appendix N1']
Based on the establishment of the determination condition, a transition determination (jackpot lottery) is made as to whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed, and the transition determination is made. a main control means (41) that controls the progress of a notification game (variable game) that reports the results of;
a displacement means (91) capable of displacing between a first state (off state of the power switch 91) and a second state different from the first state (on state of the power switch 91);
judgment information output means (91a) for outputting information by which the state of the displacement means can be judged;
Equipped with
The main control means (41) includes:
When it is determined that the displacement means (91) is in the first state based on the information from the determination information output means (91a), it is determined that the displacement means (91) is in the normal state (power is restored by turning on the power switch 91). and execute the first process (power-on process),
When it is determined that the displacement means (91) is in the second state based on the information from the judgment information output means (91a), an abnormal state (power return without turning on the power switch 91) is detected. A gaming machine characterized in that it determines that this is the case and executes a second process (process at the time of power outage recovery) that is different from the first process.

In the game machine according to appendix N1', the main control means that controls the progress of the notification game performs the first processing in normal operation or abnormal operation depending on the state of the displacement means determined based on information from the determination information output means. The second process at the time is executed. In this way, the main control means executes the first process in the normal state or the second process in the abnormal state depending on the state of the displacement means judged based on the information from the judgment information output means. By executing the first process in the main control means, it can be determined that the displacement means is normal, and by executing the second process, it can be determined that the displacement means is normal. Thereby, when the state of the displacement means is abnormal, it becomes possible for the main control means to take measures against the abnormal state of the displacement means.

[Appendix N2']
The gaming machine according to appendix N1', wherein the first process and the second process are executed when the power is restored from a power-off state.

In the gaming machine according to appendix N2', the first process and the second process are executed when the power is restored from a power-off state. In this way, by executing the first process and the second process when the power is restored from a power-off state, the state of the displacement means can be determined by the main control means after the power is restored.

[Appendix N3']
The gaming machine according to appendix N1', wherein the first process and the second process are executed when the power is turned off.

In the gaming machine according to appendix N3', the first process and the second process are executed when the power is turned off. In this way, by executing the first process and the second process when the power is turned off, it is possible to obtain information that allows the main control means to determine the state of the displacement means when the power is turned off.

[Appendix N4']
Notes N1' to N3' are characterized in that the first process and the second process are processes for setting information (switch state flag) necessary for the process executed in the main control means (41). A gaming machine described in any of the above.

In the gaming machine according to appendix N4', the first process and the second process are processes for setting information necessary for the process executed by the main control means. In this way, the first process and the second process are processes for setting information necessary for the process to be executed in the main control means, so that the main control means can perform a process according to the state of the displacement means, for example, a displacement It becomes possible to deal with cases where the means is in an abnormal state.

[Appendix N5']
Performance means (26, 341, 342) for performing performance at least in the notification game;
performance control means (51) for controlling the performance executed in the performance means (26, 341, 342) based on information regarding the notification game transmitted from the main control means (41);
Equipped with
The first process and the second process are processes for setting information (switch power-off command, non-switch power-off command) necessary for the process executed in the production means (26, 341, 342). The gaming machine according to any one of features N1' to N4'.

In the gaming machine according to appendix N5', the first process and the second process are processes for setting information necessary for the process executed by the presentation means. In this way, since the first process and the second process are processes for setting information necessary for the process to be executed in the effect means, the effect control means can control the displacement means based on the information from the main control means. It becomes possible to perform processing according to the state, for example, when the displacement means is in an abnormal state.

[Appendix N6']
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices N1' to N5', wherein the displacement means (91) is capable of switching between power cutoff and power restoration.

[Appendix N7']
The first state is a state in which the power can be cut off,
The gaming machine according to appendix N6', wherein the second state is a state in which the power can be restored.

In the gaming machines according to appendices N6' and N7', the displacement means can switch between power cutoff and power restoration. As described above, since the displacement means can switch between power cutoff and power restoration, it becomes possible to judge whether the displacement means is normal or abnormal when the power is cut off, that is, whether the power cutoff is normal or abnormal. .

[Appendix O1']
Based on the establishment of the determination condition, a transition determination (jackpot lottery) is made as to whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed, and the transition determination is made. a main control means (41) that controls the progress of a notification game (variable game) that reports the results of;
Performance means (26, 341, 342) for performing performance at least in the notification game;
performance control means (51) for controlling the performance executed in the performance means (26, 341, 342) based on information regarding the notification game transmitted from the main control means (41);
a displacement means (91) capable of displacing between a first state (off state of the power switch 91) and a second state different from the first state (on state of the power switch 91);
judgment information output means (91a) for outputting information by which the state of the displacement means can be judged;
Equipped with
The performance control means (51) is
When it is determined that the displacement means (91) is in the first state based on the information from the determination information output means (91a), it is determined that the displacement means (91) is in the normal state (power is restored by turning on the power switch 91). and execute the first process (power-on process),
When it is determined that the displacement means (91) is in the second state based on the information from the judgment information output means (91a), an abnormal state (power return without turning on the power switch 91) is detected. A gaming machine characterized in that it determines that this is the case and executes a second process (process at the time of power outage recovery) that is different from the first process.

In the game machine according to supplementary note O1', the performance control means that controls the performance of the notification game performs the first process in a normal state or abnormally depending on the state of the displacement means determined based on information from the determination information output means. The second process at the time is executed. In this way, by performing the first process in normal times or the second process in abnormal times by the effect control means depending on the state of the displacement means determined based on the information from the judgment information output means, By executing the first process in the performance control means, it can be determined that the displacement means is normal, and by executing the second process, it can be determined that the displacement means is normal. Thereby, when the state of the displacement means is abnormal, it becomes possible for the performance control means to take measures against the abnormal state of the displacement means.

[Appendix O2']
The gaming machine according to appendix O1', wherein the first process and the second process are executed when the power is restored from a power-off state.

In the gaming machine according to appendix O2', the first process and the second process are executed when the power is restored from a power-off state. In this way, by executing the first process and the second process when the power is restored from the power cut-off state, the effect control means changes the state of the displacement means, for example, the state of the displacement means when the power is cut off, to the state of the displacement means when the power is cut off. You can decide after you return.

[Appendix O3']
The gaming machine according to appendix O1', wherein the first process and the second process are executed when the power is turned off.

In the gaming machine according to appendix O3', the first process and the second process are executed when the power is turned off. In this way, by executing the first process and the second process when the power is cut off, it is possible to obtain information that allows the effect control means to determine the state of the displacement means when the power is cut off.

[Appendix O4']
The first process and the second process include information (RTC performance restriction flag, stationary performance restriction flag, movable accessory member activation flag) necessary for controlling the performance executed in the performance means (26, 341, 342). The gaming machine according to any one of appendices O1' to O3', characterized in that the processing is for setting.

In the gaming machine according to appendix O4', the first process and the second process are processes for setting information necessary for controlling the performance executed by the performance means. In this way, since the process sets information necessary for controlling the performance performed by the performance means, the performance performed by the performance means can be controlled based on specific information according to the state of the displacement means. becomes possible.

[Appendix O5']
The first process is a process of setting information (RTC performance restriction flag, stationary performance restriction flag, movable accessory member activation flag) necessary for controlling a specific performance executed in the performance means (26, 341, 342). and
The second process includes information (RTC performance restriction flag, stationary performance restriction flag, movable accessory member operation) necessary for controlling a predetermined performance different from the specific performance executed in the performance means (26, 341, 342). The gaming machine according to appendix O4', characterized in that the processing is for setting a flag).

In the gaming machine according to appendix O5', the first process is a process for setting information necessary for controlling a specific effect executed in the effect means, and the second process is a process for setting information necessary for controlling a specific effect executed in the effect means. This is a process of setting information necessary for controlling the performance. In this way, the first process is a process for setting information necessary for controlling a specific effect executed in the effect means, and the second process is a process for setting information necessary for controlling a predetermined effect different from the specific effect executed in the effect means. By performing the process of setting such information, it becomes possible to control the performance according to the state of the displacement means. Therefore, it is possible to restrict the execution of specific effects (for example, RTC effects) that would cause inconvenience if executed when the displacement means is in the first state, and to prevent inconveniences if executed when the displacement means is in the second state. Execution of a predetermined effect (for example, a stationary effect) that occurs can be restricted.

On the contrary, by executing a specific effect when the displacement means is in the first state and executing a predetermined effect when the displacement means is in the second state, the specific effect is executed when the displacement means is in the first state. The predetermined performance can be performed as a unique performance in a certain case, and the predetermined performance can be performed as a unique performance when the displacement means is in the second state. Thereby, it is possible to understand that the displacement means is in the first state when a specific effect is executed, and it is possible to understand that the displacement means is in the second state when a predetermined effect is executed. As a result, it becomes possible to determine whether the displacement means is normal or abnormal depending on whether a specific effect or a predetermined effect is executed.

[Appendix O6']
Based on the establishment of the determination condition, a transition determination (jackpot lottery) is made as to whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed, and the transition determination is made. a main control means (41) that controls the progress of a notification game (variable game) that reports the results of;
Performance means (26, 341, 342) for executing a notification performance at least in the notification game;
performance control means (51) for controlling the performance executed in the performance means (26, 341, 342) based on information regarding the notification game transmitted from the main control means (41);
Equipped with
The performance control means (51) is
As the first process, when it is determined that the displacement means (91) is in the first state based on the information from the determination information output means (91a), the displacement means (91) is in the normal state (for example, by turning on the power switch 91). power restoration, power cutoff by turning off the power switch 91), and executes a process to limit the execution of a specific effect (for example, a process necessary to limit the execution of an RTC effect),
As the second process, when it is determined that the displacement means (91) is in the second state based on the information from the determination information output means (91a), an abnormal state (power switch 91 is turned on) is detected. (Power return without turning off the power switch 91, power cut off without turning off the power switch 91), and executes a process to limit a predetermined effect different from the specific effect (for example, a process necessary to limit the execution of a stationary effect). The gaming machine according to any one of appendices O1' to O5'.

In the gaming machine according to appendix O6', execution of the specific performance is restricted when the displacement means is in the first state, and execution of the predetermined performance is restricted when the displacement means is in the second state. In this way, execution of the specific effect is restricted when the displacement means is in the first state, and execution of the predetermined effect is restricted when the displacement means is in the second state. It is possible to restrict the execution of a specific performance (for example, an RTC performance) that would cause inconvenience if executed when the displacement means is in the second state, and a predetermined performance (for example, You can restrict the execution of deferred production.

[Appendix O7']
The gaming machine according to appendix O6', wherein the first process and the second process are executed when the power is shut off.

In the gaming machine according to appendix O7', the first process and the second process are executed when the power is turned off. In this way, by executing the first process and the second process when the power is cut off, it is possible to avoid inconveniences regarding effects that occur depending on the state of the displacement means at the time of the power cut when the power is restored.

[Appendix O8']
The gaming machine according to appendix O6' or O7', wherein the specific performance is a performance (RTC performance) that is executed when a predetermined time has elapsed (specific time) after the power is restored.

In the gaming machine according to appendix O8', the specific performance is a performance (RTC performance) that is executed when a predetermined period of time has elapsed (specific time) since the power was restored. That is, when the displacement means is in the first state, which is a normal state, execution of the performance (RTC performance) that is performed when a predetermined time has elapsed (specific time) after the power is restored is restricted. As a result, for example, when a plurality of machines of the same type are installed in an island facility of a game hall, inconveniences caused by deviations in execution timing of specific effects (RTC effects) among the plurality of game machines can be prevented.

[Appendix O9']
Advantageous determination probability setting that allows an advantageous determination probability (game setting value) determined to be transferred to the special gaming state in the transition determination by the main control means (41) to be set from among a plurality of mutually different advantageous determination probabilities. comprising means (41);
The predetermined performance is a performance that allows the player to understand that the advantageous determination probability when the power is cut off and the advantageous determination probability when the power is restored are the same. The gaming machine described in any of the above.

In the gaming machine according to appendix O9', the predetermined performance is a performance that allows the player to understand that the advantageous determination probability when the power is cut off is the same as the advantageous determination probability when the power is restored. That is, when the displacement means is in the abnormal state, which is the second state, the effect is such that the player can understand that the probability of an advantageous determination when the power is cut off is the same as the probability of an advantageous determination when the power is restored. Execution is restricted. As a result, players can understand that the advantageous judgment probability is the same when the power is cut off and after the power is restored, that is, the advantageous judgment probability remains unchanged since the previous business day of the gaming hall. Prevented.

[Appendix O10']
The movable member control means (51) performs the first process or the second process depending on the state of the displacement means (91) determined based on information from the determination information output means (91a). The gaming machine according to any one of appendices O1' to O9', characterized in that the position of the movable member (342) is controlled.

In the gaming machine according to appendix O10', the position of the movable member is controlled depending on the state of the displacement means. In this way, by controlling the position of the movable member according to the state of the displacement means, it is possible to easily visually check from the position of the movable member whether the state of the displacement means, that is, the state of the displacement means is normal. become.

[Appendix O11']
The gaming machine according to appendix O9', wherein the movable member control means (51) controls the position of the movable member (342) when the power is cut off.

In the gaming machine according to appendix O11', the movable member control means controls the position of the movable member when the power is cut off. In this way, by controlling the position of the movable member when the power is cut off, the movable member control means can grasp the state of the displacement means when the power is cut off, so that the state of the displacement means when the power is cut off is normal. It becomes possible to visually check from the position of the movable member whether or not it is the case.

[Appendix O12']
The movable member control means (51)
When it is determined that the displacement means (91) is in the first state based on the information from the determination information output means (91a), it is determined that the displacement means (91) is in the normal state (for example, the power is restored by turning on the power switch 91, the power switch 91 is turned on, the movable member (342) is located at the standby position;
When it is determined that the displacement means (91) is in the second state based on the information from the determination information output means (91a), an abnormal state (power return without turning on the power switch 91, power supply The gaming machine according to appendix O10' or O11', characterized in that the movable member (342) is positioned at the operating position when the movable member (342) is positioned at the operating position.

In the gaming machine according to appendix O12', the movable member is positioned at the standby position when the displacement means is in the first state, which is the normal state, and the movable member is positioned at the standby position when the displacement means is in the second state, which is the abnormal state. is placed in the operating position. In this way, the movable member is located in the standby position when the displacement means is in the first state, which is the normal state, and the movable member is located in the operating position, when the displacement means is in the second state, which is the abnormal state. By doing so, it is possible to easily detect an abnormality in the displacement means simply by visually checking whether or not the movable member is in the operating position.

[Appendix O13']
Based on the establishment of the determination condition, a transition determination (jackpot lottery) is made as to whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed, and the transition determination is made. a main control means (41) that controls the progress of a notification game (variable game) that reports the results of;
Performance means (26, 341, 342) for performing performance at least in the notification game;
performance control means (51) for controlling the performance executed in the performance means (26, 341, 342) based on information regarding the notification game transmitted from the main control means (41);
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices O10' to O12', wherein the presentation means (26, 341, 342) includes the movable member (342).

In the gaming machine according to appendix O13', the presentation means includes a movable member. In this way, since the presentation means includes the movable member, there is no need to separately provide a movable member to judge the state of the displacement means, and the state of the displacement means can be determined using the movable member as the presentation means. becomes possible. This makes it possible to reduce manufacturing costs and improve design freedom.

[Appendix O14']
first means (51) for determining the state of the displacement means (91) based on information from the determination information output means (91a) when power is cut off;
second means (41) for determining the state of the displacement means (91) based on information from the determination information output means (91a) when the power is restored;
comparison means (51) for comparing the state of the displacement means (91) determined by the first means (51) and the state of the displacement means (91) determined by the second means (41); and,
The gaming machine according to any one of appendix O1' to appendix O13'.

In the gaming machine according to appendix O14', the state of the displacement means determined when the power is cut off is compared with the state of the displacement means determined when the power is restored. In this way, by comparing the state of the displacement means determined when the power is cut off and the state of the displacement means determined when the power is restored, it is possible to improve the accuracy of determining the state of the displacement means. Become.

[Appendix O15']
The comparison means (51) compares the state of the displacement means (91) determined by the first means (51) and the state of the displacement means (91) determined by the second means (41) when the power is restored. The gaming machine according to appendix O14', characterized in that the state of .

In the gaming machine according to appendix O15', the state of the displacement means determined when the power is cut off and the state of the displacement means determined when the power is restored are compared when the power is restored. In this way, the state of the displacement means determined when the power is cut off and the state of the displacement means determined when the power is restored are compared when the power is restored, so that the state of the displacement means determined when the power is cut off, If there is a mismatch between the state of the displacement means determined when the power is restored, the game can be prevented from starting. This makes it possible to prevent the game from becoming possible to start if there is a mismatch between the state of the displacement means determined when the power is cut off and the state of the displacement means determined when the power is restored. .

[Appendix O16']
The determination result by the comparison means (51) is the state of the displacement means (91) determined by the first means (51) and the state of the displacement means (91) determined by the second means (41). The gaming machine according to appendix O14' or appendix O15', characterized in that the gaming machine is provided with an error processing means (51) that executes error processing when the state does not match.

In the gaming machine according to appendix O16', if the determination result by the comparison means is that the state of the displacement means determined by the first means does not match the state of the displacement means determined by the second means, Error handling is performed. That is, error processing is executed when the state of the displacement means determined when the power is cut off and the state of the displacement means determined when the power is restored do not match. In this way, error processing is executed when the state of the displacement means determined when the power is turned off does not match the state of the displacement means determined when the power is restored, so that the state of the displacement means determined when the power is turned off does not match. It is possible to reliably prevent the game from becoming possible to start when the state and the state of the displacement means determined when the power is restored do not match.

[Appendix O17']
Based on the establishment of the determination condition, a transition determination (jackpot lottery) is made as to whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed, and the transition determination is made. a main control means (41) that controls the progress of a notification game (variable game) that reports the results of;
Performance means (26, 341, 342) for performing performance at least in the notification game;
performance control means (51) for controlling the performance executed in the performance means (26, 341, 342) based on information regarding the notification game transmitted from the main control means (41);
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to appendix O16', wherein the performance control means (51) includes the comparison means (51).

In the gaming machine according to appendix O17', the performance control means for controlling the performance of the notification game includes a comparison means. In this way, by providing the performance control means that controls the performance of the information game with the comparison means, the performance control means can compare the state of the displacement means determined when the power is cut off and the state of the displacement means determined when the power is restored. It can be determined that they do not match.

[Appendix O18']
The gaming machine according to appendix O17', wherein the performance control means (51) includes the error processing means (51).

In the gaming machine according to appendix O18', the effect control means for controlling the effect of the notification game includes a comparison means. In this way, by providing the performance control means that controls the performance of the notification game with the comparison means, it becomes possible to execute error processing in the performance control means.

[Appendix O19']
The gaming machine according to appendix O18', wherein the error processing includes processing for notifying that there is an error.

In the gaming machine according to appendix O19', the error process includes a process of notifying that there is an error. In this way, by including the process of notifying that the error process is an error, the game hall side can prevent the state of the displacement means determined when the power is cut off from being the same as the state of the displacement means determined when the power is restored. I can understand things. This makes it possible for the game hall to deal with the case where the state of the displacement means determined when the power is cut off does not match the state of the displacement means determined when the power is restored.

[Appendix O20']
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices O1' to O19', wherein the displacement means (91) is capable of switching between power cutoff and power restoration.

[Appendix O21']
The first state is a state in which the power can be cut off,
The gaming machine according to appendix O20', wherein the second state is a state in which the power can be restored.

In the gaming machines according to appendices O20' and O21', the displacement means can switch between power cutoff and power restoration. As described above, since the displacement means can switch between power cutoff and power restoration, it becomes possible to judge whether the displacement means is normal or abnormal when the power is cut off, that is, whether the power cutoff is normal or abnormal. .

[Appendix P1']
a displacement means (91) capable of displacing between a first state (off state of the power switch 91) and a second state different from the first state (on state of the power switch 91);
judgment information output means (91a) for outputting information by which the state of the displacement means can be judged;
a movable member (342) movable between a standby position and an active position;
movable member control means (51) for controlling movement of the movable member;
Equipped with
The movable member control means (51) controls the position of the movable member (342) according to the state of the displacement means (91) determined based on information from the determination information output means (91a). A gaming machine characterized by:

In the gaming machine according to appendix P1', the position of the movable member is controlled depending on the state of the displacement means. In this way, by controlling the position of the movable member according to the state of the displacement means, it is possible to easily visually check from the position of the movable member whether the state of the displacement means, that is, the state of the displacement means is normal. become.

[Appendix P2']
The gaming machine according to appendix P1', wherein the movable member control means (51) controls the position of the movable member (342) when the power is cut off.

In the gaming machine according to appendix E2, the movable member control means controls the position of the movable member when the power is cut off. In this way, by controlling the position of the movable member when the power is cut off, the movable member control means can grasp the state of the displacement means when the power is cut off, so that the state of the displacement means when the power is cut off is normal. It becomes possible to visually check from the position of the movable member whether or not it is the case.

[Appendix P3']
The movable member control means (51)
When it is determined that the displacement means (91) is in the first state based on the information from the determination information output means (91a), it is determined that the displacement means (91) is in the normal state (for example, the power is restored by turning on the power switch 91, the power switch 91 is turned on, the movable member (342) is located at the standby position;
When it is determined that the displacement means (91) is in the second state based on the information from the determination information output means (91a), an abnormal state (power return without turning on the power switch 91, power supply The gaming machine according to appendix P1' or P2', characterized in that the movable member (342) is positioned at the operating position when the movable member (342) is positioned at the operating position.

In the gaming machine according to appendix P3', the movable member is positioned at the standby position when the displacement means is in the first state, which is the normal state, and the movable member is positioned at the standby position when the displacement means is in the second state, which is the abnormal state. is placed in the operating position. In this way, the movable member is located in the standby position when the displacement means is in the first state, which is the normal state, and the movable member is located in the operating position, when the displacement means is in the second state, which is the abnormal state. By doing so, it is possible to easily detect an abnormality in the displacement means simply by visually checking whether or not the movable member is in the operating position.

[Appendix P4']
Based on the establishment of the determination condition, a transition determination (jackpot lottery) is made as to whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed, and the transition determination is made. a main control means (41) that controls the progress of a notification game (variable game) that reports the results of;
Performance means (26, 341, 342) for performing performance at least in the notification game;
performance control means (51) for controlling the performance executed in the performance means (26, 341, 342) based on information regarding the notification game transmitted from the main control means (41);
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices P1' to P3', wherein the presentation means (26, 341, 342) includes the movable member (342).

In the gaming machine according to appendix P4', the presentation means includes a movable member. In this way, since the presentation means includes the movable member, there is no need to separately provide a movable member to judge the state of the displacement means, and the state of the displacement means can be determined using the movable member as the presentation means. becomes possible. This makes it possible to reduce manufacturing costs and improve design freedom.

[Appendix P5']
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices P1' to P4', wherein the displacement means (91) is capable of switching between power cutoff and power restoration.

[Appendix P5']
The first state is a state in which the power can be cut off,
The gaming machine according to appendix P5', wherein the second state is a state in which the power can be restored.

In the gaming machines according to appendices P5' and P6', the displacement means can switch between power cutoff and power restoration. As described above, since the displacement means can switch between power cutoff and power restoration, it becomes possible to judge whether the displacement means is normal or abnormal when the power is cut off, that is, whether the power cutoff is normal or abnormal. .

[Appendix Q1']
a displacement means (91) capable of displacing between a first state (off state of the power switch 91) and a second state different from the first state (on state of the power switch 91);
judgment information output means (91a) for outputting information by which the state of the displacement means can be judged;
first means (51) for determining the state of the displacement means (91) based on information from the determination information output means (91a) when power is cut off;
second means (41) for determining the state of the displacement means (91) based on information from the determination information output means (91a) when the power is restored;
comparison means (51) for comparing the state of the displacement means (91) determined by the first means (51) and the state of the displacement means (91) determined by the second means (41); and,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

In the gaming machine according to appendix Q1', the state of the displacement means determined when the power is cut off is compared with the state of the displacement means determined when the power is restored. In this way, by comparing the state of the displacement means determined when the power is cut off and the state of the displacement means determined when the power is restored, it is possible to improve the accuracy of determining the state of the displacement means. Become.

[Appendix Q2']
The comparison means (51) compares the state of the displacement means (91) determined by the first means (51) and the state of the displacement means (91) determined by the second means (41) when the power is restored. The gaming machine according to supplementary note Q1', characterized in that the state of .

In the gaming machine according to appendix Q2', the state of the displacement means determined when the power is cut off and the state of the displacement means determined when the power is restored are compared when the power is restored. In this way, the state of the displacement means determined when the power is cut off and the state of the displacement means determined when the power is restored are compared when the power is restored, so that the state of the displacement means determined when the power is cut off, If there is a mismatch between the state of the displacement means determined when the power is restored, the game can be prevented from starting. This makes it possible to prevent the game from becoming possible to start if there is a mismatch between the state of the displacement means determined when the power is cut off and the state of the displacement means determined when the power is restored. .

[Appendix Q3']
The determination result by the comparison means (51) is the state of the displacement means (91) determined by the first means (51) and the state of the displacement means (91) determined by the second means (41). The gaming machine according to appendix Q1' or Q2', characterized in that the gaming machine is provided with an error processing means (51) that executes error processing when the state does not match.

In the gaming machine according to appendix Q3', if the determination result by the comparison means is that the state of the displacement means determined by the first means does not match the state of the displacement means determined by the second means, Error handling is performed. That is, error processing is executed when the state of the displacement means determined when the power is cut off and the state of the displacement means determined when the power is restored do not match. In this way, error processing is executed when the state of the displacement means determined when the power is turned off does not match the state of the displacement means determined when the power is restored, so that the state of the displacement means determined when the power is turned off does not match. It is possible to reliably prevent the game from becoming possible to start when the state and the state of the displacement means determined when the power is restored do not match.

[Appendix Q4']
Based on the establishment of the determination condition, a transition determination (jackpot lottery) is made as to whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed, and the transition determination is made. a main control means (41) that controls the progress of a notification game (variable game) that reports the results of;
Performance means (26, 341, 342) for performing performance at least in the notification game;
performance control means (51) for controlling the performance executed in the performance means (26, 341, 342) based on information regarding the notification game transmitted from the main control means (41);
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to appendix Q3', wherein the performance control means (51) includes the comparison means (51).

In the gaming machine according to appendix Q4', the performance control means for controlling the performance of the notification game includes a comparison means. In this way, by providing the performance control means that controls the performance of the information game with the comparison means, the performance control means can compare the state of the displacement means determined when the power is cut off and the state of the displacement means determined when the power is restored. It can be determined that they do not match.

[Appendix Q5']
The gaming machine according to appendix Q4', wherein the performance control means (51) includes the error processing means (51).

In the gaming machine according to appendix Q5', the performance control means for controlling the performance of the notification game includes a comparison means. In this way, by providing the performance control means that controls the performance of the notification game with the comparison means, it becomes possible to execute error processing in the performance control means.

[Appendix Q6']
The gaming machine according to appendix Q5', wherein the error processing includes processing to notify that there is an error.

In the gaming machine according to appendix Q6', the error process includes a process of notifying that there is an error. In this way, by including the process of notifying that the error process is an error, the game hall side can prevent the state of the displacement means determined when the power is cut off from being the same as the state of the displacement means determined when the power is restored. I can understand things. This makes it possible for the game hall to deal with the case where the state of the displacement means determined when the power is cut off does not match the state of the displacement means determined when the power is restored.

[Appendix Q7']
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices Q1' to Q6', wherein the displacement means (91) is capable of switching between power cutoff and power restoration.

[Appendix Q8']
The first state is a state in which the power can be cut off,
The gaming machine according to appendix Q7', wherein the second state is a state in which the power can be restored.

In the gaming machines according to appendices Q7' and Q8', the displacement means can switch between power cutoff and power restoration. As described above, since the displacement means can switch between power cutoff and power restoration, it becomes possible to judge whether the displacement means is normal or abnormal when the power is cut off, that is, whether the power cutoff is normal or abnormal. .

[Appendix R1']
Based on the establishment of the determination condition, a transition determination (jackpot lottery) is made as to whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed, and the transition determination is made. a main control means (41) that controls the progress of a notification game (variable game) that reports the results of;
Performance means (26, 341, 342) for executing a notification performance at least in the notification game;
performance control means (51) for controlling the performance executed in the performance means (26, 341, 342) based on information regarding the notification game transmitted from the main control means (41);
a displacement means (91) capable of displacing between a first state (off state of the power switch 91) and a second state different from the first state (on state of the power switch 91);
judgment information output means (91a) for outputting information by which the state of the displacement means can be judged;
Equipped with
The performance control means (51) is
If it is determined that the displacement means (91) is in the first state based on the information from the determination information output means (91a), the displacement means (91) is in the normal state (for example, the power is restored by turning on the power switch 91, the power switch 91 (power cut off due to power off), and executes a first process (for example, a process necessary for restricting the execution of an RTC effect) to limit the execution of a specific effect,
When it is determined that the displacement means (91) is in the second state based on the information from the judgment information output means (91a), an abnormal state (power restoration without turning on the power switch 91, A second process for restricting a predetermined performance different from the specific performance (for example, a process necessary for restricting the execution of a stationary performance) is executed based on the determination that the power supply is cut off without turning off the power switch 91. A gaming machine that does.

In the gaming machine according to appendix R1', execution of the specific performance is restricted when the displacement means is in the first state, and execution of the predetermined performance is restricted when the displacement means is in the second state. In this way, execution of the specific effect is restricted when the displacement means is in the first state, and execution of the predetermined effect is restricted when the displacement means is in the second state. It is possible to restrict the execution of a specific performance (for example, an RTC performance) that would cause inconvenience if executed when the displacement means is in the second state, and a predetermined performance (for example, You can restrict the execution of deferred production.

[Appendix R2']
The gaming machine according to appendix R1', wherein the first process and the second process are executed when the power is shut off.

In the gaming machine according to appendix R2', the first process and the second process are executed when the power is turned off. In this way, by executing the first process and the second process when the power is cut off, it is possible to avoid inconveniences regarding effects that occur depending on the state of the displacement means at the time of the power cut when the power is restored.

[Appendix R3']
The gaming machine according to appendix R1' or R2', wherein the specific performance is a performance (RTC performance) that is executed when a predetermined time has elapsed (specific time) after the power is restored.

In the gaming machine according to appendix R3', the specific performance is a performance (RTC performance) that is executed when a predetermined period of time has elapsed (specific time) since the power was restored. That is, when the displacement means is in the first state, which is a normal state, execution of the performance (RTC performance) that is performed when a predetermined time has elapsed (specific time) after the power is restored is restricted. As a result, for example, when a plurality of machines of the same type are installed in an island facility of a game hall, inconveniences caused by deviations in execution timing of specific effects (RTC effects) among the plurality of game machines can be prevented.

[Appendix R4']
Advantageous determination probability setting that allows an advantageous determination probability (game setting value) determined to be transferred to the special gaming state in the transition determination by the main control means (41) to be set from among a plurality of mutually different advantageous determination probabilities. comprising means (41);
The predetermined performance is a performance that allows the player to understand that the advantageous judgment probability when the power is cut off is the same as the advantageous judgment probability when the power is restored. The gaming machine described in any of the above.

In the gaming machine according to appendix R4', the predetermined performance is a performance that allows the player to understand that the advantageous determination probability when the power is cut off is the same as the advantageous determination probability when the power is restored. That is, when the displacement means is in the abnormal state, which is the second state, the effect is such that the player can understand that the probability of an advantageous determination when the power is cut off is the same as the probability of an advantageous determination when the power is restored. Execution is restricted. As a result, players can understand that the advantageous judgment probability is the same when the power is cut off and after the power is restored, that is, the advantageous judgment probability remains unchanged since the previous business day of the gaming hall. Prevented.

[Appendix R5']
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices R1' to R4', wherein the displacement means (91) is capable of switching between power cutoff and power restoration.

[Appendix R6']
The first state is a state in which the power can be cut off,
The gaming machine according to appendix R5', wherein the second state is a state in which the power can be restored.

In the gaming machines according to appendices R5' and R6', the displacement means can switch between power cutoff and power restoration. As described above, since the displacement means can switch between power cutoff and power restoration, it becomes possible to judge whether the displacement means is normal or abnormal when the power is cut off, that is, whether the power cutoff is normal or abnormal. .

[Appendix A1]
a displacement means (91) capable of displacing between a first state (off state of the power switch 91) and a second state different from the first state (on state of the power switch 91);
detection means (91a) capable of detecting the state of the displacement means;
Equipped with
If it is determined that the displacement means (91) is in the first state based on the detection content by the detection means (91a), the state is normal (for example, power is restored by turning on the power switch 91, turning off the power switch 91). The first process (e.g., power-on process) is executed after determining that the
When it is determined that the displacement means (91) is in the second state (for example, the power switch 91 is on) based on the detection content by the detection means (91a), the displacement means (91) is in an abnormal state (the power switch 91 is on). A game characterized in that a second process different from the first process (for example, a process at the time of power outage recovery) is executed upon determining that the power is restored without turning on the power, or shutting off the power without turning off the power switch 91. Machine.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A1, the first process during normal times or the second process during abnormal times is executed depending on the state of the displacement means determined based on the content detected by the detecting means. In this way, the first process is executed by executing the first process when it is normal or the second process when it is abnormal depending on the state of the displacement means that is determined based on the content detected by the detection means. In this case, it can be determined that the displacement means is normal, while when the second process is executed, it can be determined that the displacement means is abnormal. This makes it possible to execute processing according to the state of the displacement means (for example, the state of the displacement means at the time of power cutoff) at least one of the time of power cutoff and the time of power restoration.

[Appendix A2]
The gaming machine according to appendix A1, wherein the first process and the second process are executed when the power is restored from a power-off state.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A2, the first process and the second process are executed when the power is restored from a power-off state. In this way, by executing the first process and the second process when the power is restored from a power-off state, the state of the displacement means, for example, the state of the displacement means at the time of power-off can be determined after the power is restored. This makes it possible to execute processing in accordance with the state of the displacement means (for example, the state of the displacement means when the power is cut off) when the power is cut off.

[Appendix A3]
When the power is restored from the power-off state, the state of the displacement means (91) at the time of the power-off is determined based on the state of the displacement means (91) stored at the power-off before the power is restored. The gaming machine according to appendix A2.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A3, when the power is restored from a power-off state, the state of the displacement means at the time of the power-off is determined based on the state of the displacement means that was stored at the time of the power-off before the power was restored. . In this way, when the power is restored from a power-off state, the state of the displacement means at the time of power-off is determined based on the state of the displacement means stored at the power-off before the power is restored. By a simple method of storing the state of the displacement means at the time of the previous power cutoff, the state of the displacement means can be determined at the time of power cutoff before the power is restored. Thereby, when the power is restored, it is possible to execute processing according to the state of the displacement means at the time of power cutoff.

[Appendix A4]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A1 to A3, wherein the first process and the second process are executed when the power is shut off.

In the gaming machine according to appendix A4, the first process and the second process are executed when the power is turned off. In this way, by executing the first process and the second process when the power is turned off, the state of the displacement means, for example, the state of the displacement means when the power is turned off, can be determined when the power is turned off. This makes it possible to execute appropriate processing when the power is turned off.

[Appendix A5]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A1 to A4, wherein the displacement means (91) is capable of switching between power cutoff and power restoration.

[Appendix A6]
The first state is a state in which the power can be cut off,
The gaming machine according to appendix A5, wherein the second state is a state in which the power can be restored.

In the gaming machines according to Appendix A5 and Appendix A6, the displacement means can switch between power cutoff and power restoration. As described above, since the displacement means can switch between power cutoff and power restoration, it becomes possible to judge whether the displacement means is normal or abnormal when the power is cut off, that is, whether the power cutoff is normal or abnormal. .

[Appendix B1]
a displacement means (91) capable of displacing between a first state (off state of the power switch 91) and a second state different from the first state (on state of the power switch 91);
detection means (91a) capable of detecting the state of the displacement means;
Equipped with
If it is determined that the displacement means (91) is in the first state based on the detection content by the detection means (91a), the state is normal (for example, power is restored by turning on the power switch 91, turning off the power switch 91). The first process (e.g., power-on process) is executed after determining that the
When it is determined that the displacement means (91) is in the second state (for example, the power switch 91 is on) based on the detection content by the detection means (91a), the displacement means (91) is in an abnormal state (the power switch 91 is on). determining that the power is restored without turning on the power supply, or shutting down the power supply without turning off the power switch 91), and executes a second process different from the first process (for example, a process when the power is restored from a power outage);
A game machine characterized in that a specific performance (for example, an RTC performance, a demo screen performance) is executed when a predetermined period of time has passed after it is determined that the first state is in the first state when the power is restored.

In the gaming machine according to appendix B1, the first process in a normal state or the second process in an abnormal state is executed depending on the state of the displacement means determined based on the detection contents by the detection means. In this way, the first process is executed by executing the first process when it is normal or the second process when it is abnormal depending on the state of the displacement means that is determined based on the content detected by the detection means. In this case, it can be determined that the displacement means is normal, while when the second process is executed, it can be determined that the displacement means is abnormal. This makes it possible to execute processing according to the state of the displacement means (for example, the state of the displacement means at the time of power cutoff) at least one of the time of power cutoff and the time of power restoration.

Further, in the gaming machine according to Appendix B1, a specific performance is executed when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after it is determined that the first state is in the first state when the power is restored. That is, the specific effect is executed when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after it was determined that the power was cut off normally in the first state when the power was restored. In this way, the specific effect is executed when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after it is determined that the power has been cut off normally in the first state, and the first state is changed based on the execution of the specific effect. It can be determined whether the power is turned off normally or not. In other words, it can be determined whether or not the power was cut off appropriately depending on whether or not the specific effect is executed. This prevents a game from being started in a game machine that may be in an abnormal state due to an abnormal power cutoff.

[Appendix B2]
The gaming machine according to appendix B1, wherein the specific performance includes at least a performance executed on the image display means (341).

In the gaming machine according to appendix B2, the specific performance includes at least a performance executed on the image display means. In this way, since the specific performance includes at least the performance executed on the image display means, it is possible to understand that the game on the gaming machine is possible based on the specific performance executed on the image display means. In other words, depending on whether or not the specific effect is executed on the image display means, the gaming hall side and the player can easily visually grasp whether or not the game can be played normally in the gaming machine. This further prevents a game from being started in a game machine that may be in an abnormal state due to an abnormal power cutoff.

[Appendix B3]
The gaming machine according to appendix B1 or B2, wherein the specific performance includes an RTC performance whose execution timing is managed by a real-time clock (RTC).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B3, the specific performance includes an RTC performance whose execution timing is managed by a real-time clock (RTC). Generally, RTC effects are effects that are executed at a plurality of set specific times (for example, at predetermined time intervals). Therefore, by including the RTC performance in the specific performance, it can be determined multiple times during business hours of the game hall whether or not the power of the gaming machine can be restored in a normal state and the game can be normally played on the gaming machine. Thereby, the power of the gaming machine is restored in a normal state, and it can be determined more reliably whether or not the gaming machine can normally play a game.

[Appendix B4]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices B1 to B3, wherein the second process is an error process.

In the gaming machine according to appendix B4, the second process is an error process. As described above, since the second process is an error process, if the state of the displacement means at the time of power cutoff is abnormal, the process for the abnormal state of the displacement means at the time of power cutoff is executed as error processing. becomes possible. This allows the game hall to be notified that the state of the displacement means is abnormal when the power is cut off, and also unconditionally when the power is restored when the state of the displacement means when the power is cut off is abnormal. This prevents the game from being allowed to proceed.

[Appendix B5]
The first process is a process that allows execution of a specific process,
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices B1 to B4, wherein the second process is a process of restricting execution of the specific process.

In the gaming machine according to appendix B5, the first process is a process that allows execution of the specific process, and the second process is a process that restricts the execution of the specific process. In this way, the first process is a process that allows execution of the specific process, and the second process is a process that restricts the execution of the specific process. It becomes possible to allow or restrict the execution of This allows the game hall to be notified that the state of the displacement means is abnormal when the power is cut off, and also unconditionally when the power is restored when the state of the displacement means when the power is cut off is abnormal. This prevents the game from being allowed to proceed.

[Appendix B6]
Based on the establishment of the determination condition, a transition determination (jackpot lottery) is made as to whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed, and the transition determination is made. A main control means (41) for controlling the progress of a notification game (variable game) that reports the result of
The specific processing includes processing related to the progress of the notification game (jackpot lottery processing, variable display and stop display of special symbols and decorative symbols, execution processing of the jackpot game (for example, opening/closing processing of the variable prize opening 316), and stopping the firing of game balls. The gaming machine according to appendix B5, characterized in that:

In the gaming machine according to appendix B6, the specific processing is processing related to the progress of the notification game. In this way, since the specific process is a process related to the progress of the notification game, it is possible to restrict the execution of the notification game or special game when the state of the displacement means at the time of power cut-off is abnormal. become. This prevents the game from being played while the displacement means is in an abnormal state.

[Appendix B7]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices B1 to B6, wherein the displacement means (91) is capable of switching between power cutoff and power restoration.

[Appendix B8]
The first state is a state in which the power can be cut off,
The gaming machine according to appendix B7, wherein the second state is a state in which the power can be restored.

In the gaming machines according to appendices B7 and B8, the displacement means can switch between power cutoff and power restoration. As described above, since the displacement means can switch between power cutoff and power restoration, it becomes possible to judge whether the displacement means is normal or abnormal when the power is cut off, that is, whether the power cutoff is normal or abnormal. .

[Appendix C1]
Based on the establishment of the determination condition, a transition determination (jackpot lottery) is made as to whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed, and the transition determination is made. a main control means (41) that controls the progress of a notification game (variable game) that reports the results of;
a displacement means (91) capable of displacing between a first state (off state of the power switch 91) and a second state different from the first state (on state of the power switch 91);
detection means (91a) capable of detecting the state of the displacement means;
Equipped with
If it is determined that the displacement means (91) is in the first state based on the detection content by the detection means (91a), the state is normal (for example, power is restored by turning on the power switch 91, turning off the power switch 91). The first process (e.g., power-on process) is executed after determining that the
When it is determined that the displacement means (91) is in the second state (for example, the power switch 91 is on) based on the detection content by the detection means (91a), the displacement means (91) is in an abnormal state (the power switch 91 is on). determining that the power is restored without turning on the power supply, or shutting down the power supply without turning off the power switch 91), and executes a second process different from the first process (for example, a process when the power is restored from a power outage);
Executing a process related to the progress of the notification game based on a predetermined condition (for example, when the power outage type matches in a power outage type collation process) being satisfied after it is determined that the first state is in the first state when the power is restored. A gaming machine featuring:

In the gaming machine according to appendix C1, the first process in a normal state or the second process in an abnormal state is executed depending on the state of the displacement means determined based on the content detected by the detection means. In this way, the first process is executed by executing the first process when it is normal or the second process when it is abnormal depending on the state of the displacement means that is determined based on the content detected by the detection means. In this case, it can be determined that the displacement means is normal, while when the second process is executed, it can be determined that the displacement means is abnormal. This makes it possible to execute processing according to the state of the displacement means (for example, the state of the displacement means at the time of power cutoff) at least one of the time of power cutoff and the time of power restoration.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine according to appendix C1, processing related to the progress of the notification game is executed based on the fact that a predetermined condition is satisfied after it is determined that the first state is in the first state when the power is restored. That is, after it is determined that the power is cut off in the first state when the power is restored, processing related to the progress of the notification game is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. In this way, after it is determined that the power is cut off in the first state when the power is restored, the processing related to the progress of the notification game is executed based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition, so that the process related to the progress of the notification game is executed on the condition that the predetermined condition is satisfied. It is possible to start the game. Therefore, for example, if there is a mismatch between the state of the displacement means ascertained when the power is cut off and the state of the displacement means ascertained when the power is restored, a state in which the notification game can be started unnecessarily. This will prevent it from being considered as such.

[Appendix C2]
The gaming machine according to appendix C1, wherein the process related to the progress of the notification game is a process of executing the transition determination.

In the gaming machine according to appendix C2, the processing related to the progress of the notification game is the processing for executing the transition determination. In this way, since the process related to the progress of the notification game is the process of executing the transition determination, for example, there is a difference between the state of the displacement means ascertained when the power is cut off and the state of the displacement means ascertained when the power is restored. A simple and reliable process of not executing a transition determination when an inconsistency occurs prevents the game from being placed in a state in which it is possible to start the game unnecessarily.

[Appendix C3]
The gaming machine according to appendix C1 or C2, wherein the process related to the progress of the notification game is a process of executing the notification game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix C3, the process related to the progress of the notification game is the process of executing the notification game. In this way, the processing related to the progress of the notification game is the process of executing the notification game, so that, for example, the state of the displacement means ascertained when the power is cut off and the state of the displacement means ascertained when the power is restored. By carrying out a simple and reliable process of not executing the notification game when an inconsistency occurs in the game, it is possible to prevent the game from being put into a state in which it is possible to start the game unnecessarily.

[Appendix C4]
comprising a firing means (8) for firing a game ball into a game area provided on a game board (31);
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices C1 to C3, wherein the process related to the progress of the notification game is a process of firing a game ball by the firing means (8).

In the gaming machine according to appendix C4, the process related to the progress of the notification game is the process of firing the game ball by the firing means. In this way, since the process related to the progress of the notification game is the process of firing game balls by the firing means, for example, the state of the displacement means ascertained when the power is cut off, and the state of the displacement means ascertained when the power is restored. By carrying out a simple and reliable process of not firing game balls when an inconsistency occurs between the two games, it is possible to prevent the game from being unnecessarily set in a state where the game can be started.

[Appendix C5]
a movable member (342) movable between a first position (standby position) and a second position (actuation position) different from the first position;
position setting means (51) for setting position determination information based on the position of the movable member (342) when the power is cut off;
error determination means for determining that a mismatch error occurs when the power cutoff state specified at the time of power restoration does not match the power cutoff state specified from the position determination information set in the position setting means (51); (51) and
Equipped with
The predetermined condition is that a predetermined process (for example, an error cancellation process) is executed when the error determining means (51) determines that there is a mismatch error. The game machine described.

In the gaming machine according to appendix C5, when the predetermined condition is a mismatch error in which the power cut-off state specified when the power is restored does not match the power cut-off state specified from the position determination information set in the position setting means. A predetermined process is executed. In this way, the predetermined process is performed when the predetermined condition is a mismatch error in which the power cutoff state specified at the time of power restoration does not match the power cutoff state specified from the position determination information set in the position setting means. By being executed, the process related to the progress of the notification game is executed after the predetermined process is executed. Therefore, processing related to the progress of the notification game is prevented from being executed in the mismatch error state.

[Appendix C6]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices C1 to C5, wherein the displacement means (91) is capable of switching between power cutoff and power restoration.

[Appendix C7]
The first state is a state in which the power can be cut off,
The gaming machine according to appendix C6, wherein the second state is a state in which the power can be restored.

In the gaming machines according to appendices C6 and C7, the displacement means can switch between power cutoff and power restoration. As described above, since the displacement means can switch between power cutoff and power restoration, it becomes possible to judge whether the displacement means is normal or abnormal when the power is cut off, that is, whether the power cutoff is normal or abnormal. .

[Appendix D1]
Based on the establishment of the determination condition, a transition determination (jackpot lottery) is made as to whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed, and the transition determination is made. a main control means (41) that controls the progress of a notification game (variable game) that reports the results of;
a displacement means (91) capable of displacing between a first state (off state of the power switch 91) and a second state different from the first state (on state of the power switch 91);
detection means (91a) capable of detecting the state of the displacement means;
Equipped with
If it is determined that the displacement means (91) is in the first state based on the detection content by the detection means (91a), the state is normal (for example, power is restored by turning on the power switch 91, turning off the power switch 91). The first process (e.g., power-on process) is executed after determining that the
When it is determined that the displacement means (91) is in the second state (for example, the power switch 91 is on) based on the detection content by the detection means (91a), the displacement means (91) is in an abnormal state (the power switch 91 is on). determining that the power is restored without turning on the power supply, or shutting down the power supply without turning off the power switch 91), and executes a second process different from the first process (for example, a process when the power is restored from a power outage);
If a specific condition (for example, error cancellation by operating an error cancellation button, power switch off/on, RAM erase switch, etc.) is satisfied after it is determined that the second state is in the second state when the power is restored, the notification game progresses. A gaming machine characterized by executing processing related to the above.

In the gaming machine according to appendix D1, the first process in a normal state or the second process in an abnormal state is executed depending on the state of the displacement means determined based on the content detected by the detection means. In this way, the first process is executed by executing the first process when it is normal or the second process when it is abnormal depending on the state of the displacement means that is determined based on the content detected by the detection means. In this case, it can be determined that the displacement means is normal, while when the second process is executed, it can be determined that the displacement means is abnormal. This makes it possible to execute processing according to the state of the displacement means (for example, the state of the displacement means at the time of power cutoff) at least one of the time of power cutoff and the time of power restoration.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine according to appendix D1, if a specific condition is satisfied after it is determined that the first state is present when the power is restored, processing related to the progress of the notification game is executed. That is, if the specific condition is satisfied after it is determined at the time of power restoration that the power is cut off in the second state, which is an abnormal state, processing related to the progress of the notification game is executed. In this way, if a specific condition is satisfied after it is determined that the power has been cut off in the second state, which is an abnormal state, when the power is restored, processing related to the progress of the notification game is executed, so that the abnormal state After the power is restored after the power is cut off in the second state, it is prevented that the notification game is unconditionally and unnecessarily allowed to start.

[Appendix D2]
The gaming machine according to appendix D1, wherein the process related to the progress of the notification game is a process of executing the transition determination.

In the gaming machine according to appendix D2, the processing related to the progress of the notification game is the processing for executing the transition determination. In this way, since the process related to the progress of the notification game is the process of executing the transition determination, it is possible to easily and reliably prevent the transition determination from being executed after the power is restored after the power is cut off in the second state, which is an abnormal state. This process prevents the game from becoming unnecessarily ready for play.

[Appendix D3]
The gaming machine according to appendix D1 or D2, wherein the process related to the progress of the notification game is a process of executing the notification game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix D3, the process related to the progress of the notification game is the process of executing the notification game. In this way, the processing related to the progress of the notification game is the process of executing the notification game, so it is a simple and easy method to not execute the notification game after the power is restored after the power is cut off in the second state, which is an abnormal state. Reliable processing prevents the game from being placed in a state where it can be started unnecessarily.

[Appendix D4]
comprising a firing means (8) for firing a game ball into a game area provided on a game board (31);
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices D1 to D3, wherein the process related to the progress of the notification game is a process of firing a game ball by the firing means (8).

In the gaming machine according to appendix D4, the process related to the progress of the notification game is the process of firing a game ball by the firing means. In this way, since the process related to the progress of the notification game is the process of firing the game ball by the firing means, the game ball will not be fired after the power is restored after the power is cut off in the second state, which is an abnormal state. Simple and reliable processing prevents the game from being put into a state where it can be started unnecessarily.

[Appendix D5]
a movable member (342) movable between a first position (standby position) and a second position (actuation position) different from the first position;
position setting means (51) for setting position determination information based on the position of the movable member (342) when the power is cut off;
error determination means for determining that a mismatch error occurs when the power cutoff state specified at the time of power restoration does not match the power cutoff state specified from the position determination information set in the position setting means (51); (51) and
Equipped with
The specific condition is defined in any one of appendices D1 to D4, wherein a predetermined process (for example, error cancellation process) is executed when the error determining means (51) determines that there is a mismatch error. The game machine described.

In the gaming machine according to appendix D5, when the specific condition is a mismatch error in which the power cut-off state specified when the power is restored does not match the power cut-off state specified from the position determination information set in the position setting means. A predetermined process is executed. In this way, when the specific condition is a mismatch error in which the power cutoff state identified when the power is restored does not match the power cutoff state identified from the position determination information set in the position setting means, the predetermined process is performed. By being executed, the process related to the progress of the notification game is executed after the predetermined process is executed. Therefore, processing related to the progress of the notification game is prevented from being executed in the mismatch error state.

[Appendix D6]
The gaming machine according to appendix D5, wherein the predetermined process is a process for canceling a mismatch error.

In the gaming machine according to appendix D6, the predetermined process is a process for canceling the mismatch error. In this way, since the predetermined process is a process for canceling the mismatch error, the process related to the progress of the notification game is executed after the mismatch error is canceled. This prevents processing related to the progress of the notification game from being executed without the mismatch error state being canceled.

[Appendix D7]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices D1 to D6, wherein the displacement means (91) is capable of switching between power cutoff and power restoration.

[Appendix D8]
The first state is a state in which the power can be cut off,
The gaming machine according to appendix D7, wherein the second state is a state in which the power can be restored.

In the gaming machines according to Appendix D7 and Appendix D8, the displacement means can switch between power cutoff and power restoration. As described above, since the displacement means can switch between power cutoff and power restoration, it becomes possible to judge whether the displacement means is normal or abnormal when the power is cut off, that is, whether the power cutoff is normal or abnormal. .

[Appendix E1]
When the power is turned on, the power can be cut off in a first state (for example, the power switch 91 is turned off) or a second state different from the first state (for example, the power switch 91 is turned on),
a power supply monitoring means (95) for monitoring the state of power supply to the power supply unit (94);
Image display means (341) capable of displaying images;
a movable member ( 342) and
Equipped with
When the power is cut off in the first state, the movable member (342) is placed in the first position when the power is restored from the power cut off state;
When the power is cut off in the second state, the movable member (342) is configured to be placed in the second position when the power is restored from the power cut off state;
A state of the displacement means (91) that is movable between a first position (for example, the OFF position of the power switch 91) and a second position different from the first position (for example, the ON position of the power switch 91). a setting means (41) for setting determination information (information regarding the state of the power switch 91) based on;
determining means (41) for determining the determination information set by the setting means (41) when the power is restored from a power-off state;
Equipped with
If the determination result by the determination means (41) is a first result, executing a first process (for example, a power-on process);
If the determination result by the determination means (41) is a second result different from the first result, a second process different from the first process (for example, a process at the time of power recovery) is executed. Game machine.

In the gaming machine according to appendix E1, the position of the movable member is controlled depending on the state of power cutoff. In this way, by controlling the position of the movable member according to the state of power cutoff, it becomes possible to visually and easily determine the state of power cutoff from the position of the movable member. That is, since it is possible to visually confirm whether the power is cut off in the first state or the second state, the game hall side can check the position of the movable member during the power cut, or the position of the movable member after the power is restored. By checking the location, you can identify abnormal power outages. This makes it possible to detect, for example, a power cut-off caused by a fraudulent act.

In addition, in the gaming machine according to appendix E1, when the power is restored from a power-off state, the first process is executed when the determination result determined by the determination means based on the determination information is the first result, and the first process is executed. The second process is executed when the determination result determined based on the information is the second result. In this way, when the power is restored from a power-off state, the first process is executed if the determination result determined based on the determination information is the first result, and the determination result determined based on the determination information By executing the second process when is the second result, it becomes possible to execute a process corresponding to the state of the displacement means at the time of power interruption when the power is restored.

[Appendix E2]
The gaming machine according to appendix E1, wherein one of the first process and the second process is an error process.

In the gaming machine according to appendix E2, one of the first process and the second process is an error process. As described above, since one of the first process and the second process is an error process, if the state of the displacement means at the time of power cut-off is abnormal, the state of the displacement means at the time of power cut-off is processed for the abnormality. becomes possible to execute. Thereby, it is possible to inform the gaming hall that the state of the displacement means at the time of power cut-off is abnormal, and it is also possible to prevent the game from being allowed to proceed in an abnormal state.

[Appendix E3]
One of the first process and the second process is a process that allows execution of a specific process,
The gaming machine according to appendix E1 or E2, wherein the other of the first process and the second process is a process that limits execution of the specific process.

In the gaming machine according to appendix E3, one of the first process and the second process is a process that allows execution of the specific process, and the other of the first process and the second process is a process that restricts the execution of the specific process. In this way, one of the first process and the second process is a process that allows the execution of the specific process, and the other of the first process and the second process is a process that restricts the execution of the specific process. Depending on the state of the displacement means at the time, execution of specific processing can be permitted or restricted. Thereby, it is possible to inform the gaming hall that the state of the displacement means at the time of power cut-off is abnormal, and it is also possible to prevent the game from being allowed to proceed in an abnormal state.

[Appendix E4]
Based on the establishment of the determination condition, a transition determination (jackpot lottery) is made as to whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed, and the transition determination is made. A main control means (41) for controlling the progress of a notification game (variable game) that reports the result of
The gaming machine according to appendix E3, wherein the specific process is a process related to the progress of the notification game (big hit lottery process, variable display and stop display of special symbols and decorative symbols, game ball firing process).

In the gaming machine according to appendix E4, the specific processing is processing related to the progress of the notification game. In this way, since the specific process is a process related to the progress of the notification game, it is possible to restrict the execution of the notification game or special game when the state of the displacement means at the time of power cut-off is abnormal. become. This prevents the game from being played while the displacement means is in an abnormal state.

[Appendix F1]
When the power is turned on, the power can be cut off in a first state (for example, the power switch 91 is turned off) or a second state different from the first state (for example, the power switch 91 is turned on),
a power supply monitoring means (95) for monitoring the state of power supply to the power supply unit (94);
Image display means (341) capable of displaying images;
a movable member ( 342) and
Equipped with
When the power is cut off in the first state, the movable member (342) is placed in the first position when the power is restored from the power cut off state;
When the power is cut off in the second state, the movable member (342) is configured to be placed in the second position when the power is restored from the power cut off state;
A state of the displacement means (91) that is movable between a first position (for example, the OFF position of the power switch 91) and a second position different from the first position (for example, the ON position of the power switch 91). a setting means (41) for setting determination information (information regarding the state of the power switch 91) based on;
determining means (41) for determining the determination information set by the setting means (41) when the power is restored from a power-off state;
Equipped with
If the determination result by the determination means (41) is a first result, executing a first process during normal operation (for example, a process at power-on);
If the determination result by the determination means (41) is a second result different from the first result, performing a second process for an abnormality (for example, a process for recovering from a power outage) that is different from the first process;
A gaming machine characterized in that a specific performance (eg, RTC performance, demo screen performance) is executed when a predetermined period of time has passed after the determination result by the determination means (41) is determined to be the first result.

In the gaming machine according to appendix F1, the position of the movable member is controlled depending on the state of power cutoff. In this way, by controlling the position of the movable member according to the state of power cutoff, it becomes possible to visually and easily determine the state of power cutoff from the position of the movable member. That is, since it is possible to visually confirm whether the power is cut off in the first state or the second state, the game hall side can check the position of the movable member during the power cut, or the position of the movable member after the power is restored. By checking the location, abnormal power outages can be identified. This makes it possible to detect, for example, a power cut-off caused by a fraudulent act.

In addition, in the gaming machine according to Appendix F1, when the power is restored from a power-off state, the first process in normal operation is executed when the determination result determined based on the determination information is the first result, and the When the determination result determined based on the information is the second result, the second abnormality processing is executed. In this way, when the power is restored from a power-off state and the determination result determined based on the determination information is the first result, the first normal processing is executed, and the determination result determined based on the determination information is executed. When the determination result is the second result, the second process for abnormality is executed, so that when the power is restored, the process corresponding to the state of the displacement means at the time of power cutoff, that is, whether the power cutoff is normal or abnormal, is executed. It becomes possible to do so.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine according to appendix F1, the specific performance is executed when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the determination means determines that the first result is the first result when the power is restored based on the determination information set by the setting means. . That is, the specific performance is executed when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after it is determined at the time of power restoration that the power has been cut off in the first state. In this way, by executing a specific effect when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after it is determined that the power is cut off in the first state when the power is restored, the power is cut off in the first state based on the execution of the specific effect. (normal power shutoff). In other words, it can be determined whether or not the power was cut off appropriately depending on whether or not the specific effect is executed. This prevents a game from being started in a game machine that may be in an abnormal state due to an abnormal power cutoff.

[Appendix F2]
The gaming machine according to appendix F1, wherein the specific performance includes at least a performance executed on the image display means (341).

In the gaming machine according to appendix F2, the specific performance includes at least a performance executed on the image display means. In this way, since the specific performance includes at least the performance executed on the image display means, it is possible to understand that the game on the gaming machine is possible based on the specific performance executed on the image display means. In other words, depending on whether or not the specific effect is executed on the image display means, the gaming hall side and the player can easily visually grasp whether or not the game can be played normally in the gaming machine. This further prevents a game from being started in a game machine that may be in an abnormal state due to an abnormal power cutoff.

[Appendix F3]
The gaming machine according to appendix F1 or F2, wherein the specific performance includes an RTC performance whose execution timing is managed by a real-time clock (RTC).

In the gaming machine according to appendix F3, the specific performance includes an RTC performance whose execution timing is managed by a real-time clock (RTC). Generally, RTC effects are effects that are executed at a plurality of set specific times (for example, at predetermined time intervals). Therefore, by including the RTC performance in the specific performance, it can be determined multiple times during business hours of the game hall whether or not the power of the gaming machine can be restored in a normal state and the game can be normally played on the gaming machine. Thereby, the power of the gaming machine is restored in a normal state, and it can be determined more reliably whether or not the gaming machine can normally play a game.

[Appendix F4]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices F1 to F3, wherein the second process is an error process.

In the gaming machine according to appendix F4, the second process is an error process. As described above, since the second process is an error process, if the state of the displacement means at the time of power cutoff is abnormal, the process for the abnormal state of the displacement means at the time of power cutoff is executed as error processing. becomes possible. This allows the game hall to be notified that the state of the displacement means is abnormal when the power is cut off, and also unconditionally when the power is restored when the state of the displacement means when the power is cut off is abnormal. This prevents the game from being allowed to proceed.

[Appendix F5]
The first process is a process that allows execution of a specific process,
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices F1 to F4, wherein the second process is a process of restricting execution of the specific process.

In the gaming machine according to appendix F5, the first process is a process that allows execution of the specific process, and the second process is a process that restricts the execution of the specific process. In this way, the first process is a process that allows execution of the specific process, and the second process is a process that restricts the execution of the specific process. It becomes possible to allow or restrict the execution of This allows the game hall to be notified that the state of the displacement means is abnormal when the power is cut off, and also unconditionally when the power is restored when the state of the displacement means when the power is cut off is abnormal. This prevents the game from being allowed to proceed.

[Appendix F6]
Based on the establishment of the determination condition, a transition determination (jackpot lottery) is made as to whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed, and the transition determination is made. A main control means (41) for controlling the progress of a notification game (variable game) that reports the result of
The specific processing includes processing related to the progress of the notification game (jackpot lottery processing, variable display and stop display of special symbols and decorative symbols, execution processing of the jackpot game (for example, opening/closing processing of the variable prize opening 316), and stopping the firing of game balls. The gaming machine according to appendix F5, characterized in that:

In the gaming machine according to appendix F6, the specific process is a process related to the progress of the notification game. In this way, since the specific process is a process related to the progress of the notification game, it is possible to restrict the execution of the notification game or special game when the state of the displacement means at the time of power cut-off is abnormal. become. This prevents the game from being played while the displacement means is in an abnormal state.

[Appendix F7]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices F1 to F6, wherein the displacement means (91) is capable of switching between power cutoff and power restoration.

[Appendix F8]
The first state is a state in which the power can be cut off,
The gaming machine according to appendix F7, wherein the second state is a state in which the power can be restored.

In the gaming machines according to appendices F7 and F8, the displacement means can switch between power cutoff and power restoration. As described above, since the displacement means can switch between power cutoff and power restoration, it becomes possible to judge whether the displacement means is normal or abnormal when the power is cut off, that is, whether the power cutoff is normal or abnormal. .

[Appendix G1]
When the power is turned on, the power can be cut off in a first state (for example, the power switch 91 is turned off) or a second state different from the first state (for example, the power switch 91 is turned on),
Based on the establishment of the determination condition, a transition determination (jackpot lottery) is made as to whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed, and the transition determination is made. a main control means (41) that controls the progress of a notification game (variable game) that reports the results of;
a power supply monitoring means (95) for monitoring the state of power supply to the power supply unit (94);
Image display means (341) capable of displaying images;
a movable member ( 342) and
Equipped with
When the power is cut off in the first state, the movable member (342) is placed in the first position when the power is restored from the power cut off state;
When the power is cut off in the second state, the movable member (342) is configured to be placed in the second position when the power is restored from the power cut off state;
A state of the displacement means (91) that is movable between a first position (for example, the OFF position of the power switch 91) and a second position different from the first position (for example, the ON position of the power switch 91). a setting means (41) for setting determination information (information regarding the state of the power switch 91) based on;
determining means (41) for determining the determination information set by the setting means (41) when the power is restored from a power-off state;
Equipped with
If the determination result by the determination means (41) is a first result, executing a first process during normal operation (for example, a process at power-on);
If the determination result by the determination means (41) is a second result different from the first result, performing a second process for an abnormality (for example, a process for recovering from a power outage) that is different from the first process;
The notification game is executed based on the fact that a predetermined condition (for example, when the power outage types match in the power outage type matching process) is satisfied after the determination result by the determining means (41) is determined to be the first result. A gaming machine characterized by executing processing related to progress.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix G1, the position of the movable member is controlled depending on the state of power cutoff. In this way, by controlling the position of the movable member according to the state of power cutoff, it becomes possible to visually and easily determine the state of power cutoff from the position of the movable member. That is, since it is possible to visually confirm whether the power is cut off in the first state or the second state, the game hall side can check the position of the movable member during the power cut, or the position of the movable member after the power is restored. By checking the location, abnormal power outages can be identified. This makes it possible to detect, for example, a power cut-off caused by a fraudulent act.

In addition, in the gaming machine according to Appendix G1, when the power is restored from a power-off state and the determination result determined based on the determination information is the first result, the first processing in the normal state is executed; When the determination result determined based on the information is the second result, the second abnormality processing is executed. In this way, when the power is restored from a power-off state and the determination result determined based on the determination information is the first result, the first normal processing is executed, and the determination result determined based on the determination information is executed. When the determination result is the second result, the second process for abnormality is executed, so that when the power is restored, the process corresponding to the state of the displacement means at the time of power cutoff, that is, whether the power cutoff is normal or abnormal, is executed. It becomes possible to do so.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine according to Appendix G1, the notification game progresses based on the fact that a predetermined condition is satisfied after the determination means determines that the first result is the first result when the power is restored based on the determination information set by the setting means. The related processing is executed. That is, after it is determined at the time of power restoration that the power is cut off in the first state which is a normal state, processing related to the progress of the notification game is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. In this way, after it is determined that the power is cut off in the first state when the power is restored, the processing related to the progress of the notification game is executed based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition, so that the process related to the progress of the notification game is executed on the condition that the predetermined condition is satisfied. It is possible to start the game. Therefore, for example, if there is a mismatch between the state of the displacement means ascertained when the power is cut off and the state of the displacement means ascertained when the power is restored, a state in which the notification game can be started unnecessarily. This will prevent it from being considered as such.

[Appendix G2]
The gaming machine according to appendix G1, wherein the process related to the progress of the notification game is a process of executing the transition determination.

In the gaming machine according to appendix G2, the process related to the progress of the notification game is the process of executing the transition determination. In this way, since the process related to the progress of the notification game is the process of executing the transition determination, for example, there is a difference between the state of the displacement means ascertained when the power is cut off and the state of the displacement means ascertained when the power is restored. A simple and reliable process of not executing a transition determination when an inconsistency occurs prevents the game from being placed in a state in which it is possible to start the game unnecessarily.

[Appendix G3]
The gaming machine according to appendix G1 or G2, wherein the process related to the progress of the notification game is a process of executing the notification game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix G3, the process related to the progress of the notification game is the process of executing the notification game. In this way, the processing related to the progress of the notification game is the process of executing the notification game, so that, for example, the state of the displacement means ascertained when the power is cut off and the state of the displacement means ascertained when the power is restored. By carrying out a simple and reliable process of not executing the notification game when an inconsistency occurs between the two games, it is possible to prevent the game from being put into a state where the game can be started unnecessarily.

[Appendix G4]
comprising a firing means (8) for firing a game ball into a game area provided on a game board (31);
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices G1 to G3, wherein the process related to the progress of the notification game is a process of firing a game ball by the firing means (8).

In the game machine according to appendix G4, the process related to the progress of the notification game is the process of firing the game ball by the firing means. In this way, since the process related to the progress of the notification game is the process of firing game balls by the firing means, for example, the state of the displacement means ascertained when the power is cut off, and the state of the displacement means ascertained when the power is restored. By carrying out a simple and reliable process of not firing game balls when an inconsistency occurs between the two games, it is possible to prevent the game from being unnecessarily set in a state where the game can be started.

[Appendix G5]
position setting means (51) for setting position determination information based on the position of the movable member (342) when the power is cut off;
The power cutoff state specified from the determination information set in the setting means (41) matches the power cutoff state specified from the position determination information set in the position setting means (51). determination information comparison means (51) for determining whether or not the
Equipped with
The predetermined conditions include the power cutoff state specified by the determination information comparing means (51) from the determination information set in the setting means (41) and the state of power cutoff specified in the position setting means (51). The gaming machine according to any one of appendices G1 to G4, characterized in that the gaming machine is determined to match the power cutoff state specified from the position determination information.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix G5, the predetermined condition is determined by the determination information comparing means from the power cutoff state specified from the determination information set in the setting means and the position determination information set in the position setting means. It is determined that the state matches the state of power cutoff. In other words, if the power interruption before the power restoration is determined to be normal when the power is restored, the notification is made on the condition that the power interruption is determined to be normal based on the position of the movable member at the time of the power interruption. Processing related to the progress of the game is executed. In this way, if the power interruption before the power restoration is determined to be normal when the power is restored, the power interruption is determined to be normal based on the position of the movable member at the time of the power interruption. By executing the processing related to the progress of the notification game, it is possible to prevent the notification game from becoming executable in a state where the gaming machine may be in an abnormal state.

[Appendix G6]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices G1 to G5, wherein the displacement means (91) is capable of switching between power cutoff and power restoration.

[Appendix G7]
The first state is a state in which the power can be cut off,
The gaming machine according to appendix G6, wherein the second state is a state in which the power can be restored.

In the gaming machines according to Appendixes G6 and G7, the displacement means can switch between power cutoff and power restoration. As described above, since the displacement means can switch between power cutoff and power restoration, it becomes possible to judge whether the displacement means is normal or abnormal when the power is cut off, that is, whether the power cutoff is normal or abnormal. .

[Appendix H1]
Based on the establishment of the determination condition, a transition determination (jackpot lottery) is made as to whether or not to transition to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed, and the transition determination is made. a main control means (41) that controls the progress of a notification game (variable game) that reports the results of;
When the power is turned on, the power can be cut off in a first state (for example, the power switch 91 is turned off) or a second state different from the first state (for example, the power switch 91 is turned on),
a power supply monitoring means (95) for monitoring the state of power supply to the power supply unit (94);
Image display means (341) capable of displaying images;
a movable member ( 342) and
Equipped with
When the power is cut off in the first state, the movable member (342) is placed in the first position when the power is restored from the power cut off state;
When the power is cut off in the second state, the movable member (342) is configured to be placed in the second position when the power is restored from the power cut off state;
A state of the displacement means (91) that is movable between a first position (for example, the OFF position of the power switch 91) and a second position different from the first position (for example, the ON position of the power switch 91). a setting means (41) for setting determination information (information regarding the state of the power switch 91) based on;
determining means (41) for determining the determination information set by the setting means (41) when the power is restored from a power-off state;
Equipped with
If the determination result by the determination means (41) is a first result, executing a first process during normal operation (for example, a process at power-on);
If the determination result by the determination means (41) is a second result different from the first result, performing a second process for an abnormality (for example, a process for recovering from a power outage) that is different from the first process;
When a specific condition (for example, error cancellation by operating an error cancellation button, power switch off/on, RAM erase switch, etc.) is satisfied after the judgment result by the judgment means (41) is determined to be the second result. A gaming machine characterized in that it executes processing related to the progress of the notification game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix H1, the position of the movable member is controlled depending on the state of power cutoff. In this way, by controlling the position of the movable member according to the state of power cutoff, it becomes possible to visually and easily determine the state of power cutoff from the position of the movable member. That is, since it is possible to visually confirm whether the power is cut off in the first state or the second state, the game hall side can check the position of the movable member during the power cut, or the position of the movable member after the power is restored. By checking the location, abnormal power outages can be detected. This makes it possible to detect, for example, a power cut-off caused by a fraudulent act.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine according to appendix H1, when the power is restored from a power-off state, the first process in normal operation is executed if the determination result determined based on the determination information is the first result, and the When the determination result determined based on the information is the second result, the second abnormality processing is executed. In this way, when the power is restored from a power-off state and the determination result determined based on the determination information is the first result, the first normal processing is executed, and the determination result determined based on the determination information is executed. When the determination result is the second result, the second process for abnormality is executed, so that when the power is restored, the process corresponding to the state of the displacement means at the time of power cutoff, that is, whether the power cutoff is normal or abnormal, is executed. It becomes possible to do so.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine according to appendix H1, when the specific condition is satisfied after the determination result by the determination means is determined to be the second result, processing regarding the progress of the notification game is executed. That is, if the specific condition is satisfied after it is determined at the time of power restoration that the power is cut off in the second state, which is an abnormal state, processing related to the progress of the notification game is executed. In this way, if a specific condition is satisfied after it is determined that the power has been cut off in the second state, which is an abnormal state, when the power is restored, processing related to the progress of the notification game is executed, so that the abnormal state After the power is restored after the power is cut off in the second state, it is prevented that the notification game is unconditionally and unnecessarily allowed to start.

[Appendix H2]
The gaming machine according to appendix H1, wherein the process related to the progress of the notification game is a process of executing the transition determination.

In the gaming machine according to appendix H2, the processing related to the progress of the notification game is the processing for executing the transition determination. In this way, since the process related to the progress of the notification game is the process of executing the transition determination, it is possible to easily and reliably prevent the transition determination from being executed after the power is restored after the power is cut off in the second state, which is an abnormal state. This process prevents the game from becoming unnecessarily ready for play.

[Appendix H3]
The gaming machine according to appendix H1 or H2, wherein the processing related to the progress of the notification game is a process of executing the notification game.

In the gaming machine according to appendix H3, the process related to the progress of the notification game is the process of executing the notification game. In this way, the processing related to the progress of the notification game is the process of executing the notification game, so it is a simple process in which the notification game is not executed after the power is restored after the power is cut off in the second state, which is an abnormal state. In addition, reliable processing prevents the game from being placed in a state where it can be started unnecessarily.

[Appendix H4]
comprising a firing means (8) for firing a game ball into a game area provided on a game board (31);
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices H1 to H3, wherein the process related to the progress of the notification game is a process of firing a game ball by the firing means (8).

In the game machine according to appendix H4, the process related to the progress of the notification game is the process of firing the game ball by the firing means. In this way, since the process related to the progress of the notification game is the process of firing the game ball by the firing means, the game ball will not be fired after the power is restored after the power is cut off in the second state, which is an abnormal state. Simple and reliable processing prevents the game from being put into a state where it can be started unnecessarily.

[Appendix H5]
position setting means (51) for setting position determination information based on the position of the movable member (342) when the power is cut off;
If the power cutoff state specified from the determination information set in the setting means (41) does not match the power cutoff state specified from the position determination information set in the position setting means (51); an error determination means (51) for determining that there is a mismatch error;
Equipped with
The specific condition is set in any one of appendices H1 to H4, characterized in that a predetermined process (for example, error cancellation process) is executed when the error determination means (51) determines that there is a mismatch error. The game machine described.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix H5, the specific condition is such that the power cutoff state specified from the determination information set in the setting means matches the power cutoff state specified from the position determination information set in the position setting means. A predetermined process is executed when there is a mismatch error. In this way, the specific condition is a mismatch error in which the power cutoff state specified from the judgment information set in the setting means does not match the power cutoff state specified from the position judgment information set in the position setting means. Since the predetermined process is executed in a certain case, the process related to the progress of the notification game is executed after the predetermined process is executed. Therefore, processing related to the progress of the notification game is prevented from being executed in the mismatch error state.

[Appendix H6]
The gaming machine according to appendix H5, wherein the predetermined process is a process for canceling a mismatch error.

In the gaming machine according to appendix H6, the predetermined process is a process for canceling the mismatch error. In this way, since the predetermined process is a process for canceling the mismatch error, the process related to the progress of the notification game is executed after the mismatch error is canceled. This prevents processing related to the progress of the notification game from being executed without the mismatch error state being canceled.

[Appendix H7]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices H1 to H6, wherein the displacement means (91) is capable of switching between power cutoff and power restoration.

[Appendix H8]
The first state is a state in which the power can be cut off,
The gaming machine according to appendix H7, wherein the second state is a state in which the power can be restored.

In the gaming machines according to appendices H7 and H8, the displacement means can switch between power cutoff and power restoration. As described above, since the displacement means can switch between power cutoff and power restoration, it becomes possible to judge whether the displacement means is normal or abnormal when the power is cut off, that is, whether the power cutoff is normal or abnormal. .

10: Game machine 31: Game board 316: Variable prize opening 341: Symbol display section 342: Movable accessory member 342a: Motor 342b: Return detection section 342c: Motor driver 35: Lamp display section 351: First individual lamp section 352: Second individual lamp section 353: Third individual lamp section 354: Fourth individual lamp section 355: Fifth individual lamp section 356: Sixth individual lamp section 37: Croon device 373: Special out ball opening 38: Game ball retention section 381 : Retention lane 383: Stopper section 384: Special out ball sensor 39: 7 segment display section A to G: Segment 4: Main controller 41: MPU
411:ROM
412:RAM
45: Setting value display section 46: Setting value change operation section 47: ROM
5: Audio lamp control device 51: MPU
511:ROM
512:RAM
6: Display control device 9: Power supply control device 91: Power switch 91a: Power switch state detection section 92: RAM erasing switch 93: Charging means 94: Power supply section 95: Power supply monitoring circuit

Claims (1)

an information acquisition means for acquiring special information upon satisfaction of acquisition conditions;
A transition determination means for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state in which a special game advantageous to the player is executed based on the special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
Equipped with
The transition determination means is configured to perform the transition determination in one of a plurality of transition determination states each having a different transition rate to the special gaming state,
storage means for storing numerical information corresponding to the plurality of transition determination states;
a setting means for setting in which of the transition determination states the transition determination is to be made using each of the numerical information;
a display control means for displaying a display corresponding to one of the transition determination states set by the setting means in the display means;
A gaming machine comprising:
The display control means includes:
Numerical information storage means for storing one predetermined numerical information set from a plurality of types of numerical information;
At least when a game ball enters a specific area and a specific condition is met, during a specified period from a predetermined start timing to a predetermined end timing, at least the predetermined numerical information other than the predetermined numerical information among the plurality of types of numerical information means for displaying a plurality of types of specific information in a predetermined area of the display means, which are displayed using numbers or characters corresponding to the specific numerical information;
This gaming machine is
During the specified period, the specified information indicating the specified numerical information is not displayed in the specified area of the display means,
The display order of the plurality of types of the specific information to be displayed in the predetermined area of the display means during the specified period is set based on the type of the predetermined numerical information stored in the numerical information storage means. A gaming machine characterized by:

Images